Home

R&S NRP2 User Manual

1. lt 1 4 gt SYS T ERR EXT SYST lt 1 4 gt SPEed NORM SYST STAN PWS OFF SYST STAN TRIG SOUR INT User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 i Hy j No extended error message for SYST ERR Depending on sensor Internal triggering TRIG 1 4 ALL ATR ON OFF 203 R amp S NRP2 Remote Control Commands Common Commands to IEEE 488 2 zen emer et POS NEG Depending on sensor IMM HOLD EXT Depending on sensor INT BUS UNIT lt 1 8 gt POW Logarithmic result scaling UNIT lt 1 8 gt POW RAT B8 Logarithmic result scaling Usage Event SAV lt value gt SAVe stores the current device state under the specified number Parameters lt Value gt 1 to 19 Available storage numbers for device setups Usage Event SRE lt value gt Setting command SRE Service Request Enable sets the service request enable register to the specified value Bit 6 MSS mask bit remains 0 This command determines under which conditions a service request is generated Query SRE The query form SRE reads the contents of the service request enable register in dec imal form Bit 6 is always 0 Parameters lt value gt O to 255 STB STatus Byte query reads out the contents of the status byte in decimal form Usage Query only User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 204 R amp S NRP2 Remote Control Commands SSS ___ _ _
2. _ Overview of SCPI Command Systems TRG TRiGger generates a BUS trigger event If the sensor is in the WAIT FOR_TRG state and the source for the trigger is set to BUS TRIG SOUR BUS the sensor enters the MEASURING state TRG invalidates all current measuring results A query of measure ment data following TRG will thus always return the measured value determined in response to TRG Table 6 3 Error messages Trigger ignored No sensor is in the WAIT _FOR_TRG state Trigger ignored A sensor is in the WAIT FOR RG estate but the trigger source is not BUS Usage Event TST lt error code gt Self TeST query triggers the self test of the instrument and outputs an error code in decimal form Parameters lt error code gt 0 1 0 no error 1 an error has occurred Usage Query only WAI WAIt to continue prevents the execution of new commands until one of the following criteria is met e All previous commands have been executed e ADCL command is received e The device is switched off and on again power on reset Usage Event 6 3 Overview of SCPI Command Systems The SCPI commands are grouped in command systems according to their function Only the most important functions are shown in the figures The commands are separated in high level commands and low level commands The high level measurement commands combine several low level setting commands in one User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 205
3. cesececeeeeeeee 274 ISENSecil Alt POwWertTGATe ESCLudetMlIDtSTATel 275 SENSe lt 1 4 gt POWer TGATe lt 1 4 gt EXCLude MID TIME c cecccccseccereeceeseeereereeseees 275 ISENSecil Alt POwWertTGATecfill As OEESetTIME 275 ISENSechl Alt POwWertTGATegblect 276 SENSe lt 1 4 gt POWer TGATe lt 1 4 gt TIME cccceccececceccescercecceceeceecersersarsacsaeeaserereareas 276 ISENSecil Alt POwWertTSLotCOUNE 277 ISENSecil Alt POwWertTSLottESCLudet MID OEESetTIMEIL 277 ISENSecil Alt POwWertTSLottEsCLudet MIDtSTATel 277 ISENSecil Alt POwWertTSLottESCLudetMID TIME 277 ISENSecil As POwWertTSLotIAVGlIWIDT 278 ISENSecil AstRGAMmat M AGhitudel 278 ISENSecHl AslRGAMma bt A e 279 SENSe lt 1 4 gt SAMPling c ceccccecceccescecceccecceceaccsesaceccesceccascassecsaesarsacseeeseaceaseereareateasees 279 ISENSecHilL AslSGAMmatMAGhNtudel 279 SENSe lt 1 4 gt SGAMma PHAS O ccceccesceccecceccecceccesceccccescecceaecarcaseercarceseaeeaeeseeseeaseas 279 IGENZGe DlL ASlGGAMmaCObbechon GTATe 280 ISENSe lt 1 i4 STATISNCS AVERAGE occ EENS ENN dese ege 280 ISENSecHil AslSTATlstcel ESCLudetMID OEESettTIMEL 280 SENSe lt 1 4 gt STATistics EXCLude MID TIME c cececccsssescerceccesececeacseceessereareeseeseees 280 ISENSecHl Asl TATletee PEAk 281 ISENSecHl AslSTATlstece OEESetTIMEL 281 ISENSecil AslSTATlstce SAMblest MiNimum 281 ISENSecHil AslS TATletce SC ALexMpWwidt 281
4. SCPI commands Select sensor function SENSe lt 1 4 gt FUNCtion ON on page 270 User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 121 R amp S NRP2 Instrument Functions CH Displaying traces Define calculation of measurement result CALCulate lt 1 8 gt FEED lt 1 2 gt on page 225 Read result FETCh on page 211 4 5 4 1 Measurement results The measured values for the selected gate and trace waveform are indicated in the info panel below the graph see also Select Trace on page 123 Average Peak Peak Avg Average power peak power and the ratio peak power to average power 4 2 Start and stop time of gate At Duration of gate Remote command Configuring measurement CALCulate lt 1 8 gt FEED lt 1 2 gt on page 225 Retrieving results FETCh on page 211 4 5 4 2 Controls in gates display mode Display Display Selects another view see chapter 4 5 2 Trace window on page 114 ha Config Config Gates Open the subdialog to configure the four available gates see chapter 4 5 4 3 Gate diagram settings on page 123 PosScale Pos Scale Ze Defines if the cursor keys position or scale the waveform Pos The cursor keys shift the waveform in horizontal and vertical direction Scale The cursor keys expand and compress the waveform When the hori zontal scaling is modified the points pixels at the left of the screen remain unchanged When the vertical scaling is modifi
5. Power Measurement interval 1 2 3 i 4 N Excluded from Start Excluded from End Width Delay Trigger event external Fig 4 12 Measurement on timeslot signal with external triggering User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 75 R amp S NRP2 Instrument Functions Data acquisition and parameters Trigger event Power internal Trigger threshold i internal Measurement i interval 1 2 3 4 y N Excluded from Start Excluded from End Width Fig 4 13 Measurement on timeslot signal with internal triggering 4 2 2 Offset correction The Offset dialog box is for activating and entering dB offsets to effect an increase or decrease in the measurement result which is not level dependent This way the input power of any attenuator directional coupler or amplifier that is connected at the sensor input output can be displayed Global is used to set and activate a fixed offset Frequency dependent corrections can be made with Table Both types of correction can be made simultaneously S Parameter Device is for correcting the effects of a two port connected at the sensor input Output in terms of its S parameters The S parameters of the two port must be stored in the sensor For information on how to proceed refer to the operating manual of your R amp S Power Sensor section Program module gt Update S Parameters With the R amp S NRP Z28 98 level control sensors offset corr
6. SENSe Sensor Commands SENSe lt 1 4 gt STATistics SCALE X POINtS cccecceccescecceccecceccecceceecsarcaccaceaecaesarsareareaseas 282 SENSe lt 1 4 gt STATistics SCALE X RANGE ccceccesceccecceccesceasseccecsasserceseereseseesecseeasens 282 ISENSecHlL Asl TtATlstce SCALexvRLEVel 282 ISENSecil AslSTATletee TIME 283 SENSe lt 1 4 gt TIMing EXCLude STARtL ccccescecsesescescesesseescescecceseeccccaceareascrsrsarsareaseas 283 SENSe lt 1 4 gt TIMing EXCLude STOP ccccecceccecsecescesceccerceccaceaceseercessarsaceaecacersereaneas 283 SENSe lt 1 4 gt TRACe AVERage STATE ccccsscseccersesceseeseeeceescereesceseesecacerereareeseeneees 284 SENSe lt 1 4 gt TRACe AVERage COUNt s susnaeaionoiurarannoieiurariisiaiuraranrorarerarnnrorerern 284 ISENSecHlL AslTRACe AvERage COUNEAUTO 284 IGENGe J1L ASTTRACeAVEHRagoeCOUN AUT OMlMe 285 IGENGe J1L ASTTRACeAVEHRagoeCOUN AUT ObREGolutnon 285 IGENGe J1L ASTTRACeAVEHRagoe COUNC AUT OROIN 286 IGENGe J1L ASTTRACeAVEHRaoeCOUN AUT ONSGhRano 286 SENSe lt 1 4 gt TRACe AVERage COUNt AUTO TYPE cccecececececececesececeseaeeeaesneeaes 286 SENSe lt 1 4 gt TRACe AVERage TCONol 287 IGENZGe DlL ASlTRACeMEAGurement Al Gorttbm 287 SENSe lt 1 4 gt TRACe MEASurement AUTO STAT cccccceceseseeseceseecearsteteaeatectaneneas 28 IGENZGe TtL AslTRACeMEAGurenment DE Eine DUbRationRtterence 288 IGENZGe TtL AslTRACeMEAGurenment DE Ei
7. cursor keys User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 26 R amp S NRP2 Getting Started SE EAN Preset and zeroing 3 Confirm the selection with the MENU hardkey or reject with ESC hardkey 2 3 Preset and zeroing Preset If the instrument is switched on it is not the preset state that is active but rather the instrument state that was set when the instrument was switched off To prevent any pre vious settings from causing incorrect results it is recommended that you set the R amp S NRP2 and the R amp S Power Sensors to defined initial states To preset the R amp S NRP2 1 Press the PRE SET hardkey The File menu appears R amp S NAPZ Error List 4 Window Name 4 Fig 2 1 File menu 2 Press the PRE SET hardkey again or press the Preset softkey All parameters and switching states are preset also those of inactive operating modes When the preset is completed the File menu disappears and the meter is in the preset state The preset settings provide a reproducible initial basis for all other settings For a detailed description of the R amp S NRP2 s initial state including a list of the default parameters see chapter 4 1 1 Preset hardkey on page 61 Zeroing Zeroing should be performed whenever necessary As a rule of thumb this is the case for measurements of power values less than a 1000 fold of the zero offset and after the sensor has reached its operat
8. Example The response to query MEM CAT could be 956 99044 REFL STAT 408 NRPZ21 TABL as2 y SPLITTERL TABL LLo Usage Query only MEMory CATalog STATe Only gives a list of stored device states and is otherwise identical with MEMory CATalog ALL Usage Query only MEMory CATalog TABLe Only gives a list of stored correction tables and is otherwise identical with MEMory CATalog ALL Usage Query only MEMory CLEar NAME lt name gt Clears the content of the correction table or the stored device state with the designation lt name gt The table is maintained but does not contain entries Notice Possible data loss User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 250 R amp S NRP2 Remote Control Commands MEMory This command cannot be cancelled Cleared values are irretrievably lost Parameters lt name gt string Usage Event MEMory CLEar TABLe This command may be used as an alternative to MEMory CLEar NAME lt string gt The content of the table currently selected with MEMory TABLe SELect lt string gt Is cleared Caution Possible data loss This command cannot be cancelled Cleared values are irretrievably lost Usage Event MEMory FREE ALL Returns the number of bytes available in memory for storing correction tables and device states as well as the memory already used Usage Query only MEMory FREE STATe Returns the number of bytes available in memory for storing device states
9. READ commands for measurement mode Trace READ lt 1 8 gt STATistics CCDF READ lt 1 8 gt STATistics PDF lt statistics_size gt lt capture_time gt lt source_list gt READ commands for measurement mode Statistics 6 4 9 MEASurement commands This chapter lists all MEASurement commands For a description of the command syntax the calculation functions and the parameter list see chapter 6 4 3 Syntactical Structure of High Level Measurement Commands on page 211 chapter 6 4 5 Calculation func tions High level commands on page 215 and chapter 6 4 4 Parameter list descrip tion on page 212 MEASurement lt 1 8 gt SCALar POWer AVG MEASurement lt 1 8 gt SCALar POWer AVG RELative MEASurement lt 1 8 gt SCALar POWer AVG DIFFerence MEASurement lt 1 8 gt SCALar POWer AVG DIFFerence RELative MEASurement lt 1 8 gt SCALar POWer AVG SUM MEASurement lt 1 8 gt SCALar POWer AVG SUM RELative MEASurement lt 1 8 gt SCALar POWer AVG RATio MEASurement lt 1 8 gt SCALar POWer AVG RATio RELative MEASurement lt 1 8 gt SCALar POWer AVG SWR MEASurement lt 1 8 gt SCALar POWer AVG REFLection MEASurement lt 1 8 gt SCALar POWer AVG RLOSs lt expected_value gt lt resolution gt lt source_list gt MEASurement commands for measurement mode ContAv MEASurement lt 1 8 gt SCALar POWer TSLot MEASurement lt 1 8 gt
10. 04 113 R amp S NRP2 Instrument Functions Displaying traces at RU Trace Display 25 00 dem T slot T gate Burst Ay Ay Au 4 Auto orf Equivalent Sampling 4 6 Only for R amp S NRP Z8x wideband power sensors and if a time resolution beyond the sample period is required Enable automatic activation of Equivalent Time Sampling 7 Close the Mode dialog MENU key The trace window displays the waveform and the measurement results Display 25 00 dem 15 0 EIS Config Grid i i i Miia 50 00 dBm 00 0 pedia Plot A Average Full 1 Internal Offset dB If the trace display is not visible check the trigger settings see chapter 4 2 6 Trigger settings on page 85 4 5 2 Trace window A trace measurement is displayed graphically either in full height or in a half height win dow In half height window the meter shows the waveform s and an info panel indicating selected measurement results or instrument settings Control elements to directly change the settings are not available ks 10 0dEm Ar oe Ty Hines Fig 4 44 Trace window half height display User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 114 R amp S NRP2 Instrument Functions aS oO HJ OE Displaying traces In full height window the R amp S NRP2 provides additional control elements such as trigger marker or scale setting parameters in the control panel on the right of the screen At the bott
11. 04 328 R amp S NRP2 Remote Control Commands TRIGger TRIGger ALL SYNChronize STATe lt state gt Using this command one can assure that measurements with externally triggered sen sors start synchronously As the initiation of measurements in the sensors is serialized in the R amp S NRP2 it is possible that a sensor is triggered before another sensor is initiated if synchronization is off Sensors to be synchronized are required to have the same TRIG SLOP setting otherwise a SCPI error 221 Settings conflict occurs on TRIG ALL SYNC ON Note TRIG ALL SYNC works only in conjunction with INIT ALL Parameters lt state gt ON OFF RST OFF Example synchronized measurement with 2 heads RST TRIGSALLS SLOP POS TRIGIALLESOURE EXT TRIGAL SYNC UN INIT IALL EC e BEVCh2Z 7 TRIGger lt 1 4 gt ATRigger STATe lt state gt TRIGger ALL ATRigger STATe lt state gt When TRIG ATR is set to ON the WAIT_FOR_TRG state is automatically exited when no trigger event occurs within a period that corresponds to the reciprocal of the display update rate Parameters lt state gt ON OFF RST depending on sensor TRIGger lt 1 4 gt COUNt lt value gt TRIGger ALL COUNft lt value gt Sets the number of measurement cycles to be performed when the measurement is started with INIT Parameters lt value gt int_value Range depending on sensor RST depending on sensor Default unit 1 User M
12. 6 1 1 Parameter Types Stands for integers with sign Examples o 1 33 e 32767 Stands for floating point numbers that can also be written in exponential notation Examples o 1 e 1 0 e 21 2345553e 6 lt int_value gt Is an abbreviation for lt NR1 gt MINimum MAXimum DEFault lt float_value gt Is an abbreviation for lt NR gt MINimum MAXimum DEFault Stands for ON OFF 0 1 where ON and 1 are identical in meaning as are OFF and 0 lt string gt Stands for character strings that have to be within single or double quotes Examples o free text e Sirius lt block_data gt Stands for block data chapter 5 7 5 Parameters on page 179 lt non deci Is a non decimal value in one of the following representations mal_numeric gt e binary e g 60111010101001110 or B0111010101001110 e hexadecimal e g h754e or H754E e octal e g 972516 or 075216 6 2 Common Commands to IEEE 488 2 The common commands are taken from the IEEE 488 2 IEC 625 2 standard Some commands have the same effect on different devices The headers of these commands consist of an asterisk followed by three letters Many common commands refer to the User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 194 R amp S NRP2 Remote Control Commands Common Commands to IEEE 488 2 status reporting system which is described in detail in chapter 6 13 STATus on page 294 Commands available in the R amp S NRP2 wn E AP E EE eee
13. MEMory TABLe RESet The command clears all tables for frequency dependent offset Usage Event MEMory TABLe SELect lt name gt Selects a table User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 254 R amp S NRP2 Remote Control Commands 6 10 OUTPut The following commands affect this table e MEMory CLEar NAMe lt string gt e MEMory CLEar TABLe e all MEMor y TABLe commands The selection is not changed in case of an RST ora SYSTem PRESet RST value none Error messages 256 File name not found A table named lt select gt is not known OUTPut The OUTPut system serves for generator configuration The R amp S NRP2 can be equipped with an optional RF test generator which produces a reference power of 1 mW at 50 MHz Moreover the analog outputs at the rear of the power meter can be configured Tr q1 2 gt FEED EE 255 OUT fe D ee eh CRT Oe Ke EE 256 OUTburRECGorderz1l 2 UlMrt LOMWer POWer 256 OUTPut RECorder lt 1 2 gt LIMitLOWer RATlO occooccoccccoccccoccccococcnnnocannocarnnrarnarnrnnnnnnnnnns 256 QUTPURFeE COS 1 2 LIMICUPP ee orcas iii li 257 OUTburRECGorderzD1l 25 UMrt Uber POWer 257 OUTPutRECorder lt 1 2 gt LIMtCUPPer RATIO danita 257 OUTPutREGordercfil 2stSTATel 258 AAN 258 C0UTPUEROSCilatorCALIDrAtONREADO ascii diia 258 QUTPU ROSCItor CALibratlon WRB ia 258 A SAA 259 eS E EE 259 CUP TU FEE ei ia cas 260 Safe O EE 260 AE AN AA 260 A iii leales 260 DN 261 OUTPut RECorder lt
14. Manual Operation Display windows Trigger Free running trigger Trigger event missing Single shot mode trigger expec ted Single shot mode measurement over Trigger source external Trigger on rising slope Trigger on falling slope Measurement in progress Measurement stopped Physical trigger event Trigger threshold Delayed trigger event reference time Pulse Power Parameter r tS 864 Pulse Top Trace Avg Trace Min Pulse Base Trace Peak Pos Overshoot Neg Overshoot 59 Display windows Table 3 3 Symbols for time slot measurement Time slot start of measurement E Time slot end of measurement Time slot length of measurement R amp S NRP2 Instrument Functions Main Settings 4 Instrument Functions Chapter Instrument functions explains the functions of the R amp S NRP2 and its options The associated SCPI command is specified for each parameter where applicable The description starts with general instrument settings accessed by the SETUP hardkeys The power meter functions are then described systematically sorted by their occurrence in the menus The instrument settings include various functions such as e chapter 4 1 Main Settings on page 61 Setting a defined basic setup using the PRE SET key see chapter 4 1 1 Preset hardkey on page 61 e chapter 4 2 Data acquisition and parameters on page 64 e chapter 4 3 Displaying measurement results
15. When the sensors are connected to the R amp S NRP2 they inform the device about the SENSe and TRIGger commands supported and about the value ranges for parameters This applies to both numeric and text parameters For this reason no fixed ranges are specified with these commands the ranges can be obtained from the respective sensor manual A A 327 e ee 327 Mate LA CON TODOS corista 327 Ke EEN iii ica 327 UTE Ce ees BS le cocina 328 nl o AAA e e EE 328 INI Tiate lt 1 4 gt IMMediate ccccecceccescesceccescescescescccecceccaccaesaecaesacsaesaecaesaesaesaesaeeaeeaeeae 328 Ac E OS 328 TRiGger ALL SYNChronize STATe 0ccccsssscccsccscesceceusesceseearsunsesaccaususseseccaususnenacearsunaes 329 TRIGgaer lt 1 4 gt ATRIO ESTATE iii ti 329 Ue A 329 TRlGoercf1l As COUN kokako akakana annak oko kaaa annn iniaa ka raaa nrnnns 329 TRIGO E ee AMA e E o A 329 Tas ADELA caiste 330 ji MB AAA 330 TAI AS DELS CAD Diaria elite iaa 330 User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 326 R amp S NRP2 Remote Control Commands TRIGger TRlGoer ALL DEL av AUTO 330 TRlGoercf1l As D TlMe karann koara a konan eroaan nnana a noraa nan 330 TRAIGO ALEC E 330 as A Ep PPP 331 ii UA o en 331 Mato a KE E 331 TRIOS RE een ase is Sainte cine Sadan cine wbets Shins nde dae eden hen Phsiewiens dental ndeudeaueescebwecSateaees 331 TRiGger lt 1 4 gt IMMediate cc scsssccscussesneccesereneaucarsuenesaueussucauseuseraeeursanseccansraessacausas 33
16. gt Select T Slots in the control panel opened via the Window gt Graph gt Display dialog box Trace amp Statistics sensor mode 15 00 dBm dE 150 dd Oils 60 00 dEm dE 200 0 paidin Slot 1 B Average 4 1 F Average SGC OS Select Peak SEC AA Trace Peak Avg A REALES Eav OFF AA dp d En Slot Fig 4 59 T Slot display mode Slot channel measurement function display type Average average power within the selected timeslot Peak peak power within the selected timeslot Peak Avg peak power average power ratio within the selected timeslot start of measurement gt stopt of measurement ll duration of measurement Time slots are marked by dotted lines The period of the currently selected time slot over which the signal is averaged is marked by a colored frame with a continuous lines If exclude times have been set this period is shorter than the nominal time slot width The defined time slot structure is common for all diplayed waveforms Individual time slot structures for specific channels Sensors can only be configured in numeric T slotAV mode Tips for power measurement in timeslots e Load mobile radio standard chapter 4 6 4 Loading settings for mobile radio stand ards on page 142 or enter the parameters of the timeslot structure in the Config T Slots menu e Set screen so that the envelope of a complete frame is displayed e Open Trigger dialog box and set Delay so
17. sens trac meas tran pos dur sens trac meas tran pos occ sens trac meas tran pos over sens trac meas power min sens trac meas power max sens trac meas power avg sens trac meas power puls top sens trac meas power puls base syst err User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 on activate pulse measurements for sensor A enhanced accuracy for stable periodic signals select an algorithm for the pulse detection analysis perform a trace measurement pulse duration start of rising end of falling edge start end of pulse top read read read read read read read read read read read read read read read duty cycle pulse duration pulse period pulse separation length of falling edge start time of falling edge overshooting of falling edge length of rising edge start time of rising edge overshooting of rising edge minimum power in trace maximum power in trace average power in trace mean power level of pulse top mean power level of pulse bottom check for errors 399 R amp S NRP2 C 7 C 8 Programming Measurements Synchronizing Measurements Synchronizing Measurements Some sensors e g R amp S NRP Z81 85 86 are able to generate signals on the external trigger bus when an internal trigger was detected This allows for synchronized meas urements with multiple sensors One sensor has to be configured as trig
18. 4 gt CORRection FDOFfset INPut MAGNitude Queries the frequency dependent offset The frequency dependent measured value cor rection is set by selecting a table with the SENSe lt 1 4 gt CORRection FDOTable SELect and SENSe lt 1 4 gt CORRection FDOTable STATe ON commands The respective frequency dependent correction factor is determined by means of the active tables if necessary by interpolation and can be queried with SENSe lt 1 4 gt CORRection FDOFfset INPut MAGNitude fre quency dependent offset Unit DB Usage Query only SENSe lt 1 4 gt CORRection FDOTable SELect lt table name gt The name of the current frequency dependent offset table can be set or queried by the SENSe lt 1 4 gt CORRection FDOTable SELect command The R amp S NRP2 can manage up to ten tables MEMory commands The frequency dependent offset tables consist of two columns the first containing the frequencies the second the associated correction values When the R amp S NRP2 is informed about the signal fre quency with command SENSe lt 1 4 gt FREQuency CW FIXed lt float value gt an appropriate correction factor is determined by means of the table If the table was activated with SENSe lt 1 4 gt CORRection FDOTable STATe ON the measurement result obtained by the sensor is multiplied by this factor Error messages File name not found An invalid lt string gt parameter was tra
19. 8 2 5 Query Errors Query errors cause bit 2 in the ESR register to be set Error code Error text returned upon queue query Explanations 400 Query error Generic query error that cannot be defined more precisely 410 Query INTERRUPTED The query was interrupted Example The query is followed by new data before the response was completely sent 420 Query UNTERMINATED An incomplete query was received 430 Query DEADLOCKED The query cannot be processed 440 Query UNTERMINATED after indefinite response A query is received in the same program message after a query requesting an indefinite response 8 2 6 Device Dependent Errors Device dependent error causes bit 5 to be set in the ESR register Error code Error text returned upon queue query Explanations Device dependent error This error message is sent when the device cannot detect a more specific error IEEE1174 mode 488 1 not allowed Setting the IEEE 1174 1 mode is not permissible 2 IEEE 1174 error unknown emulation code An invalid IEEE 1174 emulation mode was selected for the Ethernet link User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 342 R amp S NRP2 Error code a a VW S o a o a a o o o a a o Error Messages and Troubleshooting SCPI Specific Error Messages Error text returned upon queue query Explanations Sensor mode not supported An attempt was made to set the sensor to a measurement mode which is not support
20. ATN HIGH active LOW marks the end of data transmission ATN LOW active LOW triggers a parallel poll e Handshake bus with three lines DAV Data Valid Active LOW signals a valid data byte on the data bus NRFD Not Ready For Data Active LOW signals that one of the connected devices is not ready for data trans fer NDAC Not Data Accepted Active LOW until the connected device has accepted the data on the bus User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 352 R amp S NRP2 Remote control interfaces GPIB Bus Interface A 1 4 GPIB bus interface Instruments which can be controlled via GPIB bus can be equipped with different interface functions The interface function for the R amp S NRP2 are listed in the following table Table 1 1 GPIB bus interface functions Control Interface function character Source handshake Acceptor handshake EOS END and EOS sends END or EOS for MLA and LPAS sends END or EOS Device trigger No controller capabilities A 1 5 Interface messages Interface messages are transmitted to the device on data lines where the ATN is set to active LOW They are used for communication between the controller and the R amp S NRP2 A 1 5 1 Common commands Common commands are in the code range 0x10 to Ox1F They affect all devices on the bus without any addressing being required User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 353 R amp S NRP2 Remote control interfaces A 1 5 2 A 2 Etherne
21. Aperture Defines the aperture time size of the acquisition interval In the manual operating mode the sensor specific default setting combined with active smoothing see below is usually adequate Another value generally larger is helpful if the result exhibits fluctuations due to modulation In particular with very low frequency modulation we recommend that you adjust the aperture time exactly to the modulation period in order to obtain stable read ings N x modulation period 2 Smoothing N x modulation period 2 N 1 2 3 l e the minimum theoretical measurement time can only be obtained with smoothing turned off User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 66 R amp S NRP2 Instrument Functions FAA ss SS Data acquisition and parameters The more modulation periods fit into an acquisition interval the less critical it is whether N is an integer or not With smoothing on about five periods are enough to reduce fluc tuations caused by modulation to an acceptable level if N is not an integer With more than nine periods the fluctuations are imperceptible With smoothing off the situation is much less favorable as instead of just five periods as many as 300 are required the fluctuations only completely disappear with more than 3000 periods It is not useful to select the aperture time longer than required since it increases the noise component of the power sensor chapter 4 2 1 7 Background information on pow
22. BUFFered Response 1 Character data Character data follows the syntax rules for keywords e it also has both a short and a long form They must be separated from the header by a white space same as any parameter A query returns the short form of the character data Example Command SENSe2 AVERage TCONTrol MOVing Query SENSe2 AVERage TCONTrol Response MOV Strings Strings must always be indicated in single or double quotes Example SENSel FUNCtion ON POWer AVG or SENSel FUNCtion 0N POWer AVG Block data The block data format is suitable for the transmission of large data volumes A command with a block data parameter has the following structure Example DISPlay PIXMap Response 49600XXXXXXXX User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 181 R amp S NRP2 Remote Control Fundamentals 5 8 5 8 1 5 8 2 Device Model and Command Processing The ASCII character denotes the beginning of the data block The next numeral speci fies the number of subsequent digits defining the length of the data block In the example above the four digits specify a length of 9600 bytes The data bytes follow next During transmission of these data bytes all terminators and other control data are ignored Coupled commands Setting one command influences the value of another command According to SCPI 1999 this should be avoided but it makes sense when user friendly high level measure ment commands are to be p
23. If no trigger signal is active your can force a measurement with the DEL 1TRIG hardkey at any time Controlling trigger sequence in single mode In Single mode only one measurement is executed after a trigger event After a measurement is completed the trigger system is inactive To start the measurement again 1 Press the DEL 1TRIG hardkey Triggering is enabled and TREI is indicated in the title bar 2 Execute a trigger event either a by signal triggering internal or external b or manually by pressing the DEL 1TRIG hardkey The measurement starts and 4 TRIG is indicated in the title bar The measurement stops after one sweep The trigger system turns inactive Controlling trigger sequence in auto mode The measurements run continuously is indicated in the title bar User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 90 R amp S NRP2 4 3 4 3 1 4 3 2 Instrument Functions Displaying measurement results To stop the measurement gt Press the DEL 1TRIG hardkey STOF is indicated in the title bar To start the measurement again Press the DEL 1TRIG hardkey is indicated in the title bar Displaying measurement results The R amp S NRP2 provides a total of four windows for displaying results Arranging windows Windows are displayed in numerical order from the top to the bottom of the screen The R amp S NRP2 automatically selects the window size according to the number of displayed windows Sensor Window
24. Protective conductor terminal Direct alternating current DC AC Ground Device fully protected by double reinforced insulation Ground terminal o EU labeling for batteries and accumulators For additional information see section Waste disposal Environmental protection item 1 Be careful when handling electrostatic sensitive gt EU labeling for separate collection of electrical devices and electronic devices For additonal information see section Waste disposal Environmental protection item 2 Warning Laser radiation For additional information see section Operation item 7 Signal words and their meaning The following signal words are used in the product documentation in order to warn the reader about risks and dangers Indicates a hazardous situation which if not avoided will result in death or DANGER serious injury Indicates a hazardous situation which if not avoided could result in death or serious injury Indicates a hazardous situation which if not avoided could result in minor or moderate injury Indicates information considered important but not hazard related e g NOTICE messages relating to property damage In the product documentation the word ATTENTION is used synonymously These signal words are in accordance with the standard definition for civil applications in the European Economic Area Definitions that deviate from the standard definition may also exist in other ec
25. Remote command SENSe lt 1 4 gt SGAMma CORRection STATe on page 280 Source Magnitude Magnitude of the source reflection coefficient I Remote command SENSe lt 1 4 gt SGAMma MAGNitude on page 279 Source Phase Phase angle of the source reflection coefficient F in degrees Remote command SENSe lt 1 4 gt SGAMma PHASe on page 279 4 2 6 Trigger settings The trigger system is required for the Trace amp Statistics Timeslot Av Timegate Av and Burst Av measurement modes gt Configure the trigger system in the Trigger dialog box which is opened via the Sensor menu or via the control panel of the respective trace mode Trigger dialog box page The first page covers the parameters for defining a trigger mode trigger source and trigger level User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 85 R amp S NRP2 Instrument Functions Data acquisition and parameters Trigger 30 0 dBm Page 1 3 6 gt i Fig 4 20 Trigger dialog box page1 A B C D Tabs for selecting the sensor Note In remote control commands select the sensor with the suffix in command SENSe lt 1 4 gt Le choose suffix 1 for channel A channel 2 for B and so on Mode Selects the trigger mode Selections Single and Normal are only available in Trace8 Statistics measurement mode Single Trace amp Statistics mode only This setting disables continuous trigger ing so that only o
26. Timegate AVERage Average value PEAK Peak value RANDom Randomly selected value from the measurement interval Trace POWer TRACe Measurement sequence POWer PEAK TRACe Peak value of the samples per test point POWer RANDom TRACe Randomly selected value POWer AVERage ON SWEep 1 4 Average value in time gate 1 2 3 or 4 POWer PTAVerage ON Peak to average value in time gate 1 2 3 or 4 SWEep 1 4 Peak value in time gate 1 2 3 or 4 POWer PEAK ON SWEHep 1 4 Statistic CCDF TRACe PDF TRACe Note Every measured value displayed in the R amp S NRP2 also every point of a trace is aver aged in the sensor via a series of samples If a RANDom feed is selected a random value is taken from these samples and forwarded to the base unit as a measured value PEAK is the maximum of all samples in the measurement interval Suffix lt 1 2 gt Parameters lt feed gt string see table 6 9 lt string gt values RST POWer AVERage User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 226 R amp S NRP2 Remote Control Commands CALCulate Configuration of Calculate Blocks CALCulate lt 1 8 gt LIMit BEEP lt beep gt Switches the acoustic warning for limit violations on or off Parameters lt beep gt ON OFF RST OFF Usage Setting only CALCulate lt 1 8 gt LIMit CLEar IMMediate Resets the limit monitoring state and the internal counter for limit violations Usage Event CALCulate
27. able Processing the results of two sensors The R amp S NRP2 offers measurement commands for processing the results of two sen sors The calculated result can also be partly referenced to a stored reference value User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 380 R amp S NRP2 Programming Measurements C 1 4 Measuring with high level commands The measurement commands are obtained by adding one of the following keywords DIFF difference DIFF REL difference with reference value RAT ratio RAT REL ratio with reference value SWR standing wave ratio RLOS return loss REFL reflection coefficient The list of parameters is modified for these commands since two sensors have to be entered in the lt source_list gt Example MEAS RAT DEF 3 1 4 A CALCulate block is used for processing the measured values Each CALCul ate block has two input channels called the primary and secondary channel In the above example the primary channel is assigned sensor 1 and the secondary channel sensor 4 via the lt source list gt The measurement result is the ratio of the results from sensors 1 and 4 Example MEAS SWR DEF 2 41 2 It is assumed that sensor 1 delivers the forward power of a wave and sensor 2 the reflec ted power of a wave The measurement result represents the SWR of the two power values ED 1 a2 Wal Note that the unit is automatically set to percent refer to chapter C 1 5 Selecti
28. lt string gt Returns information about the system lt string value gt is used to query a specific information item If called without parameters the command returns all available infor mation in the form of a list of strings separated by commas lt string value gt can have the following values No difference is made between upper case and lower case letters User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 320 R amp S NRP2 Remote Control Commands SYSTem A Meaning OO Parameters lt string gt string_value Usage Query only SYSTem ERRor This query returns error numbers and text from the error event queue of the R amp S NRP2 A specific error number with text is entered in the error event queue for each error that occurs in the R amp S NRP2 The queue functions according to the FIFO principle The mes sage entered first in the queue is also output first when a SYST ERR query is sent Querying clears the message Up to 30 errors can be stored in the error event queue If further errors occur the most recent error is overwritten by the message 350 Queue overflow If the error event queue is empty the message 0 No error is returned as a response The queue is cleared by CLS It is not changed by RST For further information on the error event queue see chapter 6 13 STATus on page 294 Usage Query only User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 321 R amp S NRP2 Remote Control Commands SYSTem SYSTem ERRor EXT
29. occccoccnccccoccnccoconcocnoconononononancnonononos 157 Sensor COMMUNICATION error cccooccccccccnnnnconnnnnnnnncnonononos 346 E ti e DE 158 Sensor Range A 84 EE eebe E 84 User def d transition ooccccoccccccncccccnconnnconnnoncncnanos 84 Sensor Sell E 161 Sensor selftest report occcconcccccccccconococnnonnoconnncncnnonons 161 Sensor test with applied RF occcocccccccocccccccccocncncnnnos 162 Sensor Trigger BE EE 88 E A 88 FOON ee 89 A A II ies 89 Int Master dilo 86 A 87 so EE 86 A 87 o A 86 Sena NUMDEL ee EE rotando 158 A A Ee 346 SEVICE TEE 347 Service REQUeSt ceccocinossanadanata nitro 352 Setting measurement FUNCTIONS cooccccccccncccnnonnncnconnnnss 40 Serio e E odos detente 164 SOU EE 141 Slope Sensor TNOST suits 87 DIOL CV SIOE EE 133 Smoothing of modulated signals nnnnnenenneneaeeeeneenneen 67 Socket COMMUNICATION occcocccccccncccccnccncncnnnnnnonononononoss 358 Source Sensor WHOGED riep aisin sT geed davenadeasdinases 86 Source Correction ROOM I E E E 85 Source Magnitude SEN OT eebe 85 Source Phase SEH eege 85 S Parameter Device oocccoccccccncccnccconncnnoncnnonnnonononncnnnanens 78 Special characters S P Em A 194 Special ele ojeada 58 SP EE 352 Start Length of Fence Gate 124 Start Length of Fence elo 134 Start Length of Gate E 123 420 R amp S NRP2 Index Start display A psan ornp RA E ISERE FERAE NE
30. on page 91 e chapter 4 4 Configuring measurements on page 97 e chapter 4 5 Displaying traces on page 113 e chapter 4 6 Management of settings on page 140 e chapter 4 7 System settings on page 144 e chapter 4 8 Messages and alarms on page 164 4 1 Main Settings The main settings for the R S NRP2 are accessed via hardkeys 4 1 1 Preset hardkey PRE SET changes the instrument to its default state Preset to a predefined state for a mobile radio standard or to a user defined Setup state A maximum of 10 states are possible it File system The highlighted background of the text indicates that the function can also be started by ie adil pressing the PRE SET hardkey if the File menu is open Preset pe PE 1 Pressing this key once opens the File menu Refer to chapter 4 6 Management of ecall save a ge e nara settings on page 140 for description of the menu s topics Recall 2 Pressing the key a second time loads the preset settings Error List 4 Window Name Al When the preset state is selected all default parameters are set even those for operating modes that have not been activated The following list gives an overview of the preset values for the most important meter settings Further preset values can be found in the remote command description RST on page 198 Various parameters including the following will be reset e all channels in
31. 1 2 gt FEED lt calculate_block gt Assigns a calculate block to one of the two analog outputs On the basis of the set char acteristic the measured value is converted to a DC voltage that can be tapped at the appropriate output Parameters lt calculate_block gt CALC1 CALC2 CALC3 CALC4 RST output 1 CALC1 output 2 CALC2 User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 255 R amp S NRP2 Remote Control Commands OUTPut OUTPut RECorder lt 1 2 gt LIMit LOWer lt lower_limit gt Voltage O ia A EE 0 0 V Power OUTP REC ILIM LOW OUTP RECs ER ELE Fig 6 8 Characteristic of analog outputs Specifies the lower power limit of the characteristic for one of the two analog outputs The unit corresponds to the output unit of the measured value Value range See table 6 10 Value ranges depending on the unit Units table 6 11 Output unit of measured value of calculate block Note The characteristic is linear in the selected unit of the measured value Parameters lt lower_limit gt float_value RST 20 DBM or 0 DB OUTPut RECorder lt 1 2 gt LIMit LOWer POWer lt lower_limit gt Specifies the lower power limit of the characteristic for one of the two analog outputs if the associated calculate block returns a power unit DBM W or DBUV as measured value see figure 6 8 Characteristic of analog outputs Units DBM W DBUV Parameters lt lower_limit gt float_value Range 120 DBM to 90 DBM
32. 1 45 CORRecilomDOYCIESTATE oi ida 268 SENSe lt 1 4 gt CORRection FDOFfsetf INPut MAGNitUde ccccccsscesceseeseeseeseetserecees 269 SENSe lt 1 4 gt CORRection FDOTable SELect oococconconccconioncononionenconconoononconconennonnos 269 SENSe lt 1 4 gt CORRectionFDO Table CHEN 269 SENSe lt 1 4 gt CORRection SPDevice SEL8Ct oococcccoccononioconiononinoncononcononconencononnoninnos 269 IGENZGe DlL ASlCObbechon Sevice GTATe 270 SENSe lt 1 4 gt FREQuUency OW a ati 270 SENSe lt 1 4 gt FREQuency FIX C c ccccecceccescescescescerceccerceccercercarceccarsacearearersarsareareaseas 270 ISENSecil ASTEUNGContONL 270 SENSe lt 1 4 gt POWer AVG APERUure 0 c0 ceccecsccecceccescescecceccecsaecaesaceccececeaceareareareas 272 ISENSecil Alt POwWert AVGIBUEFerSIzE 272 SENSe lt 1 4 gt POWer AVG BUFFer STATE c ceccececcsscescescescescecceccceeceescareereareaseaceas 272 ISENSecil Alf POwWert AVGTRANGe 273 SENSe lt 1 4 gt POWer AVG RANG AUTO c ccccecceccecceccecceceeceecceseescesseseesseseeseaseasens 273 SENSe lt 1 4 gt POWer AVG RANGe CLEVEl cecceccecceccecceccerceccecceceeseeseescesseseeseasens 273 ISENSecil Alt POwWert AGT SMOotbing ST ATe 273 SENSe lt 1 4 gt POWer BURSt DTOLerance occoccococcononcononconenconenconennononnonconenconennonenos 214 SENSe lt 1 4 gt POWer TGATe lt 1 4 gt EXCLude MID OFFSet TIME
33. 1 To select another function to the left e g Trace amp Statistics press the left side of the softkey Cont T slot T gate Burst AY Av AY Av 4 2 or to select another function to the right e g Burst Av press the right side of the softkey lin this case twice Cont Trace amp T slot T gate AV Statistics Av AY User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 25 R amp S NRP2 Getting Started Brief introduction to the operation Check boxes gt To toggle between the two states of Global press the right side of the softkey Global al Note The left side of the softkey activates the entry of the Global value see below Entry fields Entry fields 1 Activate the entry field using the associated softkey The activated entry field is marked by a yellow frame The position in the value to be changed is inverted CE 000 dE Global E A digit or a letter panel appears on the right side of the display 2 Select the position to be changed using the cursor keys 3 To change the entry at the marked position either a select the digit in the panel using the associated softkey or b increase decrease the value using the cursor keys 1 4 Confirm the selection with the MENU hardkey or reject with ESC hardkey Lists 1 Select the function by selecting an item in a list using the associated softkey The list folds out 2 Select the item using the softkey associated with list or the
34. 4 4 1 Configuring measurements Left Enter the left end of scale value Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt 1 4 gt METer LOWer on page 243 Right Enter the right end of scale value Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt 1 4 gt METer UPPer on page 244 Scrolling between timeslots In the Timeslot Av mode the timeslot to be displayed can be chosen Timeslot Selects one timeslot out of a complete structure to show its mean power in the active window If you want to display further timeslots simultaneously a separate window must be opened and configured for each additional timeslot Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt 1 4 gt TSLot on page 248 Configuring measurements The R amp S NRP2 can perform up to four measurements simultaneously Each measure ment is configured separately in a window Measurement parameters are set in the Measurement menu For every window opened via the Windows menu a measurement in the Measure ment menu can be configured The measurement channels A B C and D the pro cessing of the measured values ratio difference the result unit and additional informa tion measurement uncertainty max min are defined Configuring a measurement does not change the sensor operating modes that have been set in the Mode menu In remote control mode the instrument allows the configuration of a total of 8 measure ments However only measurement 1 to 4 can be assigned a result wind
35. 4 96 Sensor test results message With pad Performs a test measurement for a sensor with an attached attenuator The padded sen sor must be connected to the sensor check source With multipath sensors only one path can be used for the measurement For testing all paths remove the attenuator connect the sensor section alone and start the test by pressing Test at Power Ref Report Opens the dialog box displaying the results of the test measurement The test report shows the type and the serial number of the tested sensor and the detailled test results When the dialog box opens it shows the data of the sensor last tested The measured values are lost when the R amp S NRP2 is switched off Sensor Test Report NRP 281 SN 90001 1 Sensor only Dev from REF 0 022 dB Page 112 4 Fig 4 97 Sensor test report page 1 Page 1 shows the test results for the sensor section Sensor Test Report NRP 222 SN 300002 Sensor Pad Dey from REF 0 071 dB PASSED Page 2 2 4 Fig 4 98 Sensor test report page 2 Page 2 shows the results with attached attenuator if applicable Differences up to 0 02 dB at room temperature are absolutely normal and are due to the uncertainty in the calibration of the sensor and the power reference Greater differences can be caused by high low ambient temperatures but also by a damage to the sensor User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 163 R amp S NRP2 Instrument Func
36. 4 gt AVERage STATE EE 267 SENSe lt 1 4 gt BANDwidth VIDOO oooooonccncccccoooccnnccccnooncnnnnononnccnnnononanccnnnnrnnanrrnnnnrrnnnnrnnnnnrnnnnrrnnnrnnnanernnnnss 267 SENSe lt 1 4 gt BANDwidth VIDCO LIST 7 cceccccccseeeceeceesseeeeceeeeeceeeseeaaeeeeeseeaeeeessseaeeeessaaaseeeessaageeeessaas 267 SENSe lt 1 4 gt BWIDth VIDOO ooooocccccccoonoconococonnnoconcnnnononccnnonononnccnnnnnnnnncrnnnnnnonnnrnnrnnnonnnrrnnnnnonanernnnns 267 IGENGeJl AS IBWIDh Vilieo Il ENNEN ENEE 267 User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 415 R amp S NRP2 List of Commands IGENGe DlL AztCObRbechon DCvCleziAate 268 IGENZGe DL AztCObRbRechon DCvClellNbulfMAchtudel 268 IGENZGe DL AztCObRbRechonFDOktse IN MACOhNtudel 269 IGENGe DlL AztCGObRbechontDOTableziAaie 269 SENSe lt 1 4 gt CORRection FDOTable SELect cccoooccccccccnncnoconccnnccoononononcnnncnnncnnnnnnnnnnononnnnnnnncnnnnnos 269 SENSe lt 1 4 gt CORRection OFFSet cccccccccssececceseccecesecesseeeceenececesceesceeeessanaessauseeseogeeesseseeesaseessaes 268 IGENGe DlL AztCGObRbechonOEtGerGiAle 268 SENSe lt 1 4 gt CORRection SPDevice SELect oooccccoccncconncnccccnncnocnncconcnnnoncncnnnnnononnnonnnnnnnnnnnnononnnncnnnnnnns 269 SENSe lt 1 4 gt CORRection SPDevice STA TB oooccccconcnncccccnnccocnnnoconnnnnononnnnononnnnononnnnnnnnnnnonenennnnnannnconaneninos 270 SENSe lt 1 4 gt FREQUENCY OCW lissicrrnrcaticotinn abonar a ia e
37. CALCulate Configuration of Calculate Blocks SENSn SENSm The calculate block outputs the sum of the measured values of sensor n and sensor m The calculate block outputs the quotient of the values measured by sensor n and m SWR SENSn SENSm 1 4 SENSm SENSn VSENSm SENSn 1 4 SENSm SENSn If sensor n measures the forward power of a wave and sensor m the reflected power the calculate block outputs the standing wave ratio of this wave The output unit is set to percent UNIT RAT PCT REFL SENSn SENSm 4 SENSm SENSn If sensor n measures the forward power of a wave and sensor m the reflected transmitted power the calculate block outputs the reflection coefficient trans mission factor of a DUT The output unit is set to percent UNIT RAT PCT RLOS SENSn SENSm 20 logy VSENSm SENSn If sensor n measures the forward power of a wave and sensor m the reflected transmitted power the calculate block outputs the return loss transmission loss of a DUT This function principally supplies the same result as the SENSn SENSm function The difference is that the output unit is automatically set to dB UNIT RAT DB Parameters lt string gt string The RST values depend on the selected channel CALCI MATH SENSI CALC2 MATH SENS2 CALC3 MATH SENS3 CALC4 MATH SENS4 CALGCOTMATH SENS L CALC8 MATH SENS1 CALCulate lt 1 8 gt MATH EXPRession CATalog Lists
38. Data Base and Device Hardware The term device hardware refers to that part of the device which performs the mea surement function The data base contains all parameters required for setting the device hardware Setting commands cause a modification of the data set Before the data is entered in the data set it is verified for compatibility both with the other data and with the device hardware If the setting is not possible an error message will be sent to the status reporting system and the setting will be ignored After successful completion of the verification the setting will immediately be performed If the setting influences the result calculation the MEASuring bit is set in the status oper ation register until new measured values are available The MEASuring bit is described in more detail in the Status Reporting System section that follows This bit may be used for the synchronization of command processing Queries cause the data set management to send the desired data to the output unit Status Reporting System The status reporting system collects information on the device status and makes it avail able to the output unit on request Structure and function of this system are described in the following section Output Unit The data output unit collects the information requested by the controller from the data set management It processes the information in line with the SCPI rules and makes it avail able in the output bu
39. FREQuency 1 5E9 Some settings allow relative values to be stated in One and percent According to SCPI these units are represented by the strings O or DPCT The unit DPCT designates the deviation of a measurand from 100 A power ratio of 95 thus corresponds to 5A Unit used in the R amp S NRP2 SCPI notation Watt dBm dBuV Special numeric values The parameters MINimum MAXimum and DEFault are interpreted as special numeric values The numeric value is returned in response to a query Example Command SENSe2 POWer APERture MAXimum Query SENSe2 POWer APERture Response 1 000000E02 User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 180 R amp S NRP2 Remote Control Fundamentals Structure and Syntax of device dependent Messages MIN MAX MINimum and MAXimum denote the minimum and maximum value DEFault denotes a preset value This value is identical to the basic setting called by the RST command is not defined NAN is typically returned for dividing by zero subtracting a value from infinity and representing missing data Not A Number NAN stands for 9 91E37 NAN is only sent as a device response This value Boolean parameters Boolean parameters represent two states The ON state logical true is represented by ON or a numeric value other than 0 The OFF state logical false is represented by OFF or the numeric value 0 Queries yield O or 1 Example Command SENSe POWer BUFFered ON Query SENSe POWer
40. Fence function is only available for the wideband power sensors of the R amp S NRP Z8x series For all other sensors a fence can be used in the T slots display in the Trace amp Statistics sensor mode Config Fence Opens the dialog box for setting start and length of the fence Fence Start of Fence Length of Fence 240 000 us Fig 4 8 Fence dialog box User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 70 R amp S NRP2 Instrument Functions 4 2 1 5 Mode 4 Offset iter Range 4 F Correction 1 Trigger 4 Data acquisition and parameters Start Length of Fence Config Fence Within the measurement period a fence i e an exclusion interval can be set The fence is defined by its start time and length The start time refers to the start of a timeslot Remote command SENSe lt 1 4 gt POWer TSLot EXCLude MID OFFSet TIME on page 277 SENSe lt 1 4 gt POWer TSLot EXCLude MID TIME on page 277 Measuring the average power in gates The timegate mode is used to measure the average power in arbitrarily chosen time intervals gates The time resolution is determined by the sampling rate of the sensor Up to four different gates can be defined although measurement can be performed only in one of them at a time The T gate Av mode is set and configured in this dialog box The active gate must be selected in the dialog box Func amp Unit see chapter 4 4 3 Selec
41. In display mode Dig up to three further values with helpful information can be displayed in the results window in addition to the current measurement result Function amp Unit Function Single A el Prim Channel Sec Channel 4 Fig 4 41 Function amp Unit dialog box Auxiliaries Example A Rel T 0 484dB ES L 2458dB 1 460 Loes In the example the auxiliary function is set to Extremes i e the maximum the minimum and the max min value are indicated See also chapter 3 6 2 Special symbols on page 58 for information concerning the displayed symbols and values The R amp S NRP2 continuously saves the data that is required for the display of extreme and statistic values The data memory can be erased any time with Aux Val Reset in the Measurement menu see also chapter 4 4 6 Resetting auxiliary information on page 112 Aux Selects the additional information to be displayed None Displays no additional information User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 109 R amp S NRP2 Instrument Functions Configuring measurements Normal Displays the frequencies of the primary and if used secondary chan nel The following information is additionally displayed to single channel power measurement results in time slots and time gates with R amp S NRP Z78x wideband sensors only Extremes Displays the maximum the minimum and the max min values since the search for extreme values has been s
42. RATlO ooocccccocccccccccocncoconconononononononnnnnonononnononnonnnnonnnnnnnnnennnnnnnons 245 DISPlav WINDOW lt 1 4 gt gt AVWALUS eege 242 DiGblzavf WlNDowtslit As FORMat 242 DiGblzavf WlNDowtslit As ME TercAllTO 243 DISPlay WINDow lt 1 4 gt ME Ter LOWED cccccccccsscceceeecceceeeceseeeeeeaeeceeseseeseaeeeesseeeeeseeeeseaeeeetaeeeessgeeeeees 243 DiGbilavf WlNDowlslit As ME TerOWerbOWWer 244 DISPlay WINDow lt 1 4 gt METer LOWer RATlO oocccccoccccccccnncoccnccoccncconccnnnocononnnnononnncnnnnnnnnnnnnonononennnnnnos 244 User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 409 R amp S NRP2 List of Commands DiGblzavf WlNDowkslil As ME TerUlbber 244 DiGblavf WINDowll1l As ME Ter Uber bOWer 244 DISPIay WINDow lt 1 4 gt ME Ter UPPEr RA TiO EE 245 DiGblavf WINDowll1t ASNAME 245 RIEGERT ei NIE le E e BE 245 DISPlay WINDow lt 1 4 gt TRACe LO Wer ooocccooccnccocccccccccnccoconocononononcnononcnnononnnononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnnnnncnnnnnenos 247 DiGblzavf WlNDowtslil A TRACe Uber 247 DISPlavEWINDow lt 1 4 gt TSLOL iia 248 DiGblavf WiNDowll1t AStSTATel 247 FETCh lt 1 8 gt ARRay POWer AVG cccccccssseeceessseeceanseeccenseeeccenseeeeeaaseeeeeaaeessseuaeeeeseueeessegeeeeseeeesss 220 FETCh lt 1 8 gt ARRay POWer AVG DIFFerence ccccooccncccccccccoconcnnccconconononcnnnononnnnonnnconnnnonnonononnnnnnnnanens 220 FE TOhliL BS AbRbRavl POWerlt AVGlDlFterencehRtlatve 220 FETCH lt
43. RST 20 DBM Default unit DBM OUTPut RECorder lt 1 2 gt LIMit LOWer RATio lt lower_limit gt Specifies the lower power limit of the characteristic for one of the two analog outputs if the associated calculate block returns a power ratio unit DB DPCT or 0 as the measured value see figure 6 8 Characteristic of analog outputs Unit DB DPCT O User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 256 R amp S NRP2 Remote Control Commands OUTPut Parameters lt lower_limit gt float_value Range 200 DB 200 DB RST 0 DB Default unit DB OUTPut RECorder lt 1 2 gt LIMit UPPer lt upper_limit gt Specifies the upper power limit of the characteristic for one of the two analog outputs see figure 6 8 Characteristic of analog outputs The unit corresponds to the output unit of the measured value Value range See table 6 10 Value ranges depending on the unit Unit table 6 11 Output unit of measured value of calculate block Parameters lt upper_limit gt float_value RST 20 DBM or 10 DB OUTPut RECorder lt 1 2 gt LIMit UPPer POWer lt upper_limit gt Specifies the upper power limit of the characteristic for one of the two analog outputs if the associated calculate block returns a power unit DBM W or DBUV as the measured value see figure 6 8 Characteristic of analog outputs Unit DBM W DBUV Parameters lt upper_limit gt float_value Range 120 DBM to 90 DBM RST 20 DBM Default unit DBM OU
44. SENSe lt 1 4 gt AVERage COUNt lt filter_length gt Sets the filter length i e the number of readings to be averaged for one measured value The higher the count the lower the noise and the longer it takes to obtain a measured value Parameters lt filter_length gt int_value Range depending on sensor RST depending on sensor Default unit SENSe lt 1 4 gt AVERage COUNt AUTO lt state gt Can be used to automatically determine a value for the filter legth SENSe lt 1 4 gt AVERage COUNt If the automatic switchover is activated with the ON parameter the sensor always defines a suitable filter length which can also be quer led via SENS lt 1 4 gt AVER COUN User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 264 R amp S NRP2 Remote Control Commands SENSe Sensor Commands Parameters lt state gt ON OFF ONCE ON Activates automatic switchover The sensor always defines a suit able filter length which can also be queried via SENS lt 1 4 gt AVER COUN OFF Deactivates automatic switchover ONCE The filter length is automatically detected during the next mea surement and set to that value Thereafter automatic filter length detection is switched off The setting can then be queried via SENS lt 1 4 gt AVER COUN RST depending on sensor SENSe lt 1 4 gt AVERage COUNt AUTO MTIMe lt mtime gt If the R amp S NRP2 has to determine the filter length automatically the filter length can be
45. Sets an upper limit for the measured power ratios The R amp S NRP2 can respond when this limit is exceeded see other CALCulate lt 1 8 gt LIMit commands Parameters lt ratio gt float_value units DB DPCT O Range 200 DB to 200 DB RST 0 DB Default unit DB CALCulate lt 1 8 gt LIMit UPPer STATe lt state gt Switches the monitoring function for the upper limit on or off Parameters lt state gt ON OFF RST OFF Usage Setting only CALCulate lt 1 8 gt MATH EXPRession lt string gt Selects a measurement function that processes one sensor or two together The result of this calculation is made available as a measured value and can be queried with FETch lt 1 8 gt or CALCulate lt 1 8 gt DATA The lt string gt parameter may assume the values given in the following table n and m may assume 1 2 3 and 4 A sensor must be connected to the respective channel Error messages Invalid string data An invalid lt string gt parameter was transmitted The calculate block outputs the measured value of sensor A The calculate block outputs the measured value of sensor B The calculate block outputs the measured value of sensor C The calculate block outputs the measured value of sensor D SENSn SENSm The calculate block outputs the difference between the measured values of sensor n and sensor m User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 230 R amp S NRP2 Remote Control Commands
46. The name of the set standard appears in the title bar of all open windows and is treated like any other window name chapter 4 6 6 Assigning names to windows on page 144 The name can therefore be changed and deleted as desired but above all it is not automatically deleted when one of the preset parameters is changed and the instrument setting no longer corresponds to the loaded standard A table of sensor parameter values for the different standards can be found in chapter B Standard Configurations on page 367 Recall Standard Bluetooth DHS sei 4 Preserve Window Settings 11 4 External Trigger L 4 Recall 4 Fig 4 69 Recall Standard dialog box Select standard setting Selects a mobile radio standard Remote command SYSTem STANdard CATalog on page 325 SYSTem STANdard PRESet on page 325 Preserve Window Settings If enabled the measurement windows are not reconfigured Remote command SYSTem STANdard PWSettings on page 325 External Trigger If enabled an external trigger is required If disabled the internal trigger is used External triggering should be selected if the test signal yields no clearly defined or only an unstable trigger event User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 142 R amp S NRP2 Instrument Functions 4 6 5 Management of settings Note If external triggering is used in the timeslot mode make sure that the trigger delay setting is such that the start of the first timeslot coinc
47. X POWer ocoococococooo 235 User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 224 R amp S NRP2 Remote Control Commands EE CALCulate Configuration of Calculate Blocks CALCulate lt 1 4 gt STATistics MARKer HORiZontal DATA cccccecsceseueeseceseueeseseeeveueeees 235 CALCulate lt 1 4 gt STATistics MARKer VERTical POSItiION Y cccsceseeseateacsceseecesteaeess 235 CALCulate lt 1 4 gt STATistics MARKer VERTical DATA POWer ccscesceceececeseecesseaeers 235 CALCulate lt 1 4 gt STATistics POWer AVG DATA cccccceceacscececeeteteaessececeseettaeaeateceasentas 236 CALCulate lt 1 8 gt TRACe MARKer XDELta cccscececcececeececeseeceseeceaeeceatectassetarettaneteas 236 CALCulate lt 1 8 gt TRACe MARKer YDELta ccccsceccececeeeeceeeecestectaeectatectatettansttaneneas 236 CALCulate lt 1 8 gt TRACe MARKer lt 1 2 gt XPOSItION cccccececeececeeceaeeteaeeseaeeseateneateas 236 CALCulstecfil Bs TRACeM Ab kercf Ze bPOStton 237 CAL Culate lt 1 8 gt COUNt DATA Queries the number of measured values that are included when the mean value and standard deviation are calculated in the above formulas referred to as N see Mean value of all measured values and Standard deviation oof all measured values Usage Query only CALCulate lt 1 8 gt DATA With this command the current output value of a calculate block can be queried The unit is the current unit of the m
48. estantes o mesas que por sus caracter sticas de peso o de estabilidad no sean aptos para l Siga siempre las instrucciones de instalaci n del fabricante cuando instale y asegure el producto en objetos o estructuras p ej paredes y estantes Si se realiza la instalaci n de modo distinto al indicado en la documentaci n del producto se pueden causar lesiones o en determinadas circunstancias incluso la muerte No ponga el producto sobre aparatos que generen calor p ej radiadores o calefactores La temperatura ambiente no debe superar la temperatura m xima especificada en la documentaci n del producto o en la hoja de datos En caso de sobrecalentamiento del producto pueden producirse choques el ctricos incendios y o lesiones graves con posible consecuencia de muerte Seguridad el ctrica Si no se siguen o se siguen de modo insuficiente las indicaciones del fabricante en cuanto a seguridad el ctrica pueden producirse choques el ctricos incendios y o lesiones graves con posible consecuencia de muerte 1 Antes de la puesta en marcha del producto se deber comprobar siempre que la tensi n preseleccionada en el producto coincida con la de la red de alimentaci n el ctrica Si es necesario modificar el ajuste de tensi n tambi n se deber n cambiar en caso dado los fusibles correspondientes del producto Los productos de la clase de protecci n con alimentaci n m vil y enchufe individual solamente podr n enchufarse
49. for the SENSe commands whereas the indices of the high level commands select the CALCulate blocks indices 1 to 8 Depending on the configuration of the first CALCulate block rETCh same meaning as FETCh1 may not deliver the measured value of sensor 1 in contrast to the above examples After RST the first CALCulate block delivers the measured value of sensor 1 CALC1 MATH SENS1 and the second one the measured value of sensor 2 etc see SYSTem PRESet on page 323 Measuring with low level commands Low level commands allow the user to perform the most important modifications on the measurement configuration In the present context low level commands are all com mands that do not belong to high level commands These are in particular the commands of the SENSe TRIGger and CALCulate systems Since the high level commands com bine different low level commands they allow a simpler configuration of measurements User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 387 R amp S NRP2 Programming Measurements C 4 1 C 4 2 C 4 2 1 Measuring with low level commands Each measurement configuration should begin with the RST command which sets the R amp S NRP2 to a defined output state The accurate settings are described in the docu mentation of remote control command SYSTem PRESet The most important settings are listed below e Continuous measurements are stopped INIT CONT OFF e Offset correction are deactivated SENSe CORRection OFF
50. unit The ratio of two powers is dimensionless this is why only dB A and 1 are available in the unit list The symbol A represents the difference between the power values in W given in 0 means the powers in both channels are equal The symbol 1 represents the quotient of the power values in W e not the log of a ratio Sensor Windows Measurement File System 6 183 dB 1 6180 L og 1 000 GHz KI Fig 2 30 Result windows sensor A and B 2 7 Graphically representing power versus time In the Trace amp Statistics mode power versus time can be represented graphically as with an oscilloscope If you wish to carry out measurements on signals with modulated power envelope in the Burst or Timeslot mode initially displaying the signal in the Trace mode is always recommended Stable triggering by the R amp S NRP2 can more easily be accomplished in this mode Setting the Trace amp Statistics mode 1 Connect a power sensor of the R amp S NRP Z1x R amp S NRP Z2x or R amp S NRP Z8x family to connector A of the R amp S NRP2 Apply an amplitude modulated or pulsed signal having a modulation frequency or pulse frequency of approx 1 kHz The maximum level should be between 10 dBm and 10 dBm A pulse with 250us width a period of 1ms and 4dBm is used in the following example User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 42 Getting Started R amp S NRP2 EEE Graphically representing power ve
51. 1 5 gt ARRav POWern AVGTERA TO iisaciodiana diia trio dd ibi cbr 220 FE TOhliL BS ARbRavl POWerlt AVGIRATohREl atve 220 FETCh lt 1 8 gt ARRay POWer AVG REFLectiOn cooooccccccoccnccocccnnoconcnnnconconononcnnnnnononononnnncnnnnnncnnanenenos 220 FETCh lt 1 8 gt ARRay POWer AVG J RELativVe ccocoocccccoccnococcncnnococonononcnnonononnnnannnnnnoncnnnnnnonononnnnnnnannnnns 220 FETCh lt 1 8 gt ARRaylPOWer l AVGTRLOSS ooonccooccocccocccocoococococononcnonancononcncononcnnnnannnnnonnnncnonancnnanenenns 220 FETCh lt 1 8 gt ARRay POWer AVG SUM ooooncccccccncccccccnoncccoccnnoconcnnnnnoncnnononcnnnononnnnononcnnnnnonnrnononnnnnnnonnnns 220 FE TOhliL BS ARbRavl POWerlt AVGIGUMHREI atve 220 FETCh lt 1 8 gt ARRay POWer AVGLSWR oocoooccccccccnncccccccccoconocononcononnnononcnnnnnnonononnnnnnnnnnnnoncnnnonnnnnnnannnnns 220 FETCRS 11 8 gt STATISUES COD Peones 220 FETORS 1L 05 PATISUOS PD Fast noite 220 FETCHS TL 6 TIME POW GF ccmmvissremeemiicntalcianiaia initial can drarenic ria ebireste 220 PETCH lt 1 6 gt XTIMe POW er RATIO rica ee ea 220 Lech Re El Re EN BURS Eonia iria 219 FE TOhliL SsltSCA att bOWertBURGrDitterence 219 FETCh lt 1 8 gt SCALar POWer BURSt DlFFerence RELativVe ccoooccccoccccccocnccoccnncoconoconcnnnncnncnnnnonononos 219 FETCHh lt M1 5 gt ESCALar POWer BURSERA TiO aeiieoo itanna sirde ciencia 219 FE TOhliL SStSCA att bOWertBURGCHRAToREL atve 219 FE TOhliL SSltS
52. 1 8 gt BI eg dere TEE 228 CAL Culate lt 1 8 gt LIMit LOWer DATA ocococcococcononoccnconocnanononcononcnnononcanonenronenenconennanoness 228 CAL Culate l Gs UMtLOWert DATA POWer 228 CAL Culate l Gs UMtLOWert DATAIRATo 228 CALCulalte lt 11 8S LIMELOWSESTATS cios ias 229 CALCulate 11 8 LIMIESTATE incio A a ee 229 CALCulate lt 1 e LIVI UP Per DATA ios inci ae air 229 CALCulate lt 1 8 gt LIMit UPPer DATA POWE nnnonennennnnnnennrnnennrnennenrrernrnnrnrnrrnrnrnnrnreree 229 CA Culate l Gs UMt Uber DATAIRATio 230 CAL Culate lt 1 8 gt LIMitUPPer STAT ococcocococcononocconononcononenconenencononenconenrnnonenraronennanoness 230 CAL Culate lt 1 8 gt MATH EXPREeSSIiON coccococconocconocconoononennonennonennonennonennonennoncnnoncnennoness 230 CAL COulatec l G MATHEXbbessionl CAT alog 231 GALCuUlate 111 8 MAXIMUMDATA cnica 232 CALCulate lt 1 8 gt MINIMUM DATA cccsccecseceeseseecessecetaeceeaeteecessecetaeseeaeeaecusaecetaesesanees 232 CALCulates T 0 gt I AINA E 232 CAL Culate 11 8 PTPealoDATA Y ono aid ais 232 CA Culate l GRELL attvel MAcNutudel 232 CAL Culate lt 1 8 gt RELative MAGNitude AUTO ococcccococconoconencoconenenconenenconencanonennaroneness 233 CAL Culate Jl GRELL attve bOVWWert MAchNtudel 233 CAL Culate l GRELL attvehRATiolMAChNmtudel 234 CALCulate lt 11 8 RELalve STA TO ira 234 PCat Th A SDE WISIN DATA a cba 234 CALCulate lt 1 4 gt STATistics MARKer HORIzontal POSition
53. 14001 management systems Environmental commitment 1 Energy efficient products 1 Continuous improvement in environmental sustainability 1 150 14001 certified environmental management system Certified Quality System ISO 9001 Certified Environmental System ISO 14001 Cher client Vous avez choisi d acheter un produit Rohde 4 Schwarz Vous disposez donc d un produit fabriqu d apr s les m thodes les plus avanc es Le d velop pement la fabrication et les tests de ce produit ont t effec tu s selon nos syst mes de management de qualit et de management environnemental La soci t Rohde amp Schwarz a t homologu e entre autres conform ment aux syst mes de management ISO 9001 et ISO 14001 Engagement cologique 1 Produits a efficience nerg tique 1 Am lioration continue de la durabilit environnementale Syst me de management environnemental certifi selon ISO 14001 1171 0200 11 V 05 01 1171020011 Customer Support Technical support where and when you need it For quick expert help with any Rohde amp Schwarz equipment contact one of our Customer Support Centers A team of highly qualified engineers provides telephone support and will work with you to find a solution to your query on any aspect of the operation programming or applications of Rohde amp Schwarz equipment Up to date information and upgrades To keep your instrument up to date and to be info
54. 195 A PPP oo a o e O ease ee 195 o A o Po A A T 196 TE 196 A E EE a 196 ee 196 pS a E APP A PA o O E 197 5 AP o ee ee 197 o nn o oo eT re rere errr er err TT 197 e q o E N 198 ii EE 198 KE 204 nn eee rere ere pe are eee ee eer 204 gh e IA eT ee ee ee ER 204 AA Pm eee 205 E Dc OCC PEPPER A noo eee ee eer reer 205 e a ae eee ere eee ee er ee ee ey ee eee 205 CLS CLear Status resets the e status byte STB e standard event register ESR e EVENt part of the QUEStionable and the OPERation register e Error event queue The command does not alter the ENABle and TRANsition parts of the registers Usage Event ESE lt value gt Setting command ESE Event Status Enable sets the event status enable register to the specified value Query ESE The query form ESE returns the contents of the event status enable register in decimal form Parameters lt Value gt O to 255 User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 195 R amp S NRP2 Remote Control Commands Common Commands to IEEE 488 2 ESR lt value gt Event Status Read returns the contents of the event status register in decimal form 0 to 255 and subsequently sets the register to zero Parameters lt Value gt O to 255 Usage Query only IDN IDeNtification queries the instrument identification Note The return string can be customized using SYSTem IDN and SYSTem IDN AUTO commands Example Return values Rohde amp Schwarz NRP2 10001 07
55. 4 5 6 2 Pulse diagram settings on page 128 For a complete list of pulse symbols see table 3 2Symbols for pulse parameters page 59 User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 126 R amp S NRP2 Instrument Functions Displaying traces Power Rise Time Fall Time Duty Cycle WA GC Max Peak Power sb m o de ee kb ETS Pulse Top Power A a A j Pos Overshoot 100 x Max Power Pulse Top Power i i i i Pulse Amplitude High Ref Power ae e ns A cocaina Ke Neg Overshoot 100 x Pulse Base Power Min Power Base Power Min Power i i Pulse Amplitude Pulse Amplitude o age teen Ge eer a lt Pulse Width Ak Pulse Off Time ye AN E WE Pulse Period H Low Ref Power onl 1 1 ee es es ss ss ms s geg a OES AO i Pulse Base Power a A L f ee j Min Power us CRA EE E OR y KENE NR E l Time Start Time Stop Time 4 5 6 1 Display F Config Pulse PosScale ene Gate 1734 pad Fig 4 55 Definition of the pulse analysis parameters Controls in Pulse display mode Display Selects another view see chapter 4 5 2 Trace window on page 114 Config Pulse Opens the subdialog to configure the pulse analysis and to select the power time param eters for the info panel display s
56. ARRay POWer AVG RATio CONFigure lt 1 8 gt ARRay POWer AVG RATio RELative CONFigure lt 1 8 gt ARRay POWer AVG SWR CONFigure lt 1 8 gt ARRay POWer AVG REFLection CONFigure lt 1 8 gt ARRay POWer AVG RLOSs lt buffered_size gt lt expected_value gt lt resolution gt lt source_list gt CONFigure commands for measurement mode ContAv with buffering CONFigure lt 1 8 gt XTIMe POWer CONFigure lt 1 8 gt XTIMe POWer RATio lt scope_size gt lt capture_time gt lt source_list gt CONFigure commands for measurement mode Trace CONFigure lt 5 8 gt XTIMe POWer NONE Measurement mode Trace only Deactivates trace 2 In contrast to trace 1 which is always active trace 2 can be deacti vated Trace 2 is associated with CALCulate5 8 and therefore also with CONFigureb 8 see also chapter 6 5 CALCulate Configuration of Calculate Blocks on page 223 Usage Event CONFigure lt 1 8 gt STATistics CCDF CONFigure lt 1 8 gt STATistics PDF lt statistics size gt lt capture_time gt lt source_list gt CONFigure commands for measurement mode Statistics 6 4 7 Fetch commands This chapter lists all FETCh commands For a description of the command syntax the calculation functions and the parameter list see chapter 6 4 3 Syntactical Structure of High Level Measurement Commands on page 211 chapter 6 4 5 Calculation func User Manual 1173 9140 02 04
57. CORRection OFFSet on page 268 Global state Activates deactivates the global offset correction Remote command SENSe lt 1 4 gt CORRection OFFSet STATe on page 268 Table name Opens an item list containing correction tables The instrument provides 10 tables with up to 80 frequency offset pairs each The default labels are Table 1 to Table 10 however the names can be changed using the table editor Remote command SENSe lt 1 4 gt CORRection FDOTable SELect on page 269 User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 77 R amp S NRP2 Instrument Functions 4 2 2 2 Data acquisition and parameters Table state Activates deactivates the frequency dependent offset correction specified in the selected table Remote command SENSe lt 1 4 gt CORRection FDOTable STATe on page 269 Edit Table Opens a dialog box for editing the selected offset correction table see chapter 4 2 2 2 Table editor for offset tables on page 78 Remote command MEMor y TABLe FREQuency on page 253 MEMory TABLe GAIN MAGNitude on page 253 S Parameter Device Activates the S parameter data set stored in the sensor for a two port that is connected to the sensor input output Remote command SENSe lt 1 4 gt CORRection SPDevice STATe on page 270 Table editor for offset tables The R amp S NRP2 provides a list editor for defining the frequency offset value pairs Two table editor modes are available
58. COUN In Trace mode SENS 1 4 TRAC AVER TYPE NSR SENS 1 4 AVER COUN In Trace mode SENS 1 4 TRAC AVER 187 R amp S NRP2 Remote Control Fundamentals i A gt _ ____ _ _ _ _ _ _ ___ __ 2 _ _ _ _ _ _ gt _ ____ _____ _ l Correspondence between Remote Control and Manual Control Menu item in manual control SCPI command in short form Sensor gt Filter gt Auto Config gt Fixed SENS TI Noise gt Noise Content SENS 1 Sensor gt Filter gt Auto Config Fixed SENS 1 Noise gt Max Gei Time SENS 1 Sensor gt Range gt Auto iS l 4 4 4 AVER COUN AUTO NSR In Trace mode 4 TRAC AVER COUN AUTO NSR AVER COUN AUTO MTIM In Trace mode 4 TRAC AVER COUN AUTO MTIM RANG AUTO Sensor gt Range gt User def d Transition Sensor gt Range gt Level Sensor gt RF Source gt Source F considered SENS Sensor gt RF Source gt SPhase of Source SENS 4 gt RANG CLEV SGAM CORR STAT SGAM PHAS Sensor gt Trigger gt Mode EST E ES E ES ES pe es fe No individual remote control command is available the trig ger system has to be configured in such a way that the func tion can be implemented e g INIT CONT ON TRIG SOUR BUS and triggering with Windows Resolution Windows gt Timeslot Windows T slot Windows gt Analog Meter gt Auto Once Windows gt Anal
59. DISP MET UPP e DISP MET LOW e OUTP REC LIM LOW e OUTP REC LIM UPP Error messages If the compute function of the associated calculate block is SWR RLOSs or REFLection then the unit cannot be changed and error message 26 State not supported is output Parameters lt output_unit gt DB DPCT O RST DB User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 334 R amp S NRP2 7 7 1 7 2 7 3 7 4 Maintenance Sensor test Maintenance Under normal operating conditions the R amp S NRP2 does not require any regular mainte nance except for occasional cleaning of the front panel Make sure that the air vents are not obstructed Instrument damage caused by cleaning agents Cleaning agents contain substances that may damage the instrument for example clean ing agents that contain a solvent may damage the front panel labeling plastic parts or the display Never use cleaning agents such as solvents thinners acetone etc acids bases or other substances The outside of the instrument can be cleaned sufficiently using a soft lint free dust cloth Sensor test The sensor selftest is described in chapter 4 7 6 1 Internal sensor selftest on page 161 Instrument selftest The R amp S NRP2 carries out a selftest during booting This selftest is described in chap ter 1 8 2 Startup on page 18 Cleaning the exterior To clean the exterior use a soft lintfree cloth and an alcohol free solvent e g
60. E S MEMory Parameters lt type gt ASCii REAL RST ASCII FORMat SREGister lt format gt Specifies wich format s used for the return value of STB Parameters lt format gt ASCii BINary HEXadecimal OCTal RST ASCII 6 9 MEMory The MEMory system is used for storing device states STATe and correction tables TABLe To allow a rapid and convenient changeover between device setups for different appli cations up to 20 setups can be stored in the device The setup with the number 0 is the default setup made in the factory This setup can neither be changed nor cleared Tables can be stored for a frequency dependent correction of measured values Up to 10 tables with two columns and up to 80 entries lines can be created Thus not only the sensors but also the frequency response of various test assemblies can be com pensated for during the measurement The tables are selected with SENSe lt 1 4 gt CORRection FDOTable SELect on page 269 and then activated and deactivated with SENSe lt 1 4 gt CORRection FDOTable STATe on page 269 Names can be assigned to the tables Some commands which do not specify a table name affect the table currently selected with MEMor y TABLe SELect on page 254 O Stored data is not affected by an RST command LEAR A 250 ZS e lee e E EE 250 MEMon CATalog TABLES conti tt 250 MEMon CLEartNAMEI kokako aa nnna nakonako rana nno raran nnn 250 NENON C
61. For a description of the used symbols see chapter 3 6 2 Special symbols on page 58 A T slot 1 System 7 A MN ER 4 Auto A 0 000 dB d Tu An A 29 21 dBm The hybrid digital amp analog display mode shows the measured value 50 000 MHz D amp A on an analog scale and numerically E Ce A slot 1 System sa r 2 4 Auto A 0 000 dB dE Tu 29 21 d m 30 dBm 70 dBm R amp S NRP2 Instrument Functions 4 3 3 4 Displaying measurement results Graph In the graphical display mode the power meter displays the envelope power as a function of time or in its distribution and distribution density function CCDF CDF PDF Additional information on the active set tings is below the graph in the info panel See chapter 4 5 Displaying traces on page 113 AY RON tree Display 25 00 dBm dE 20 0 dB div w dia Config H Grid 4 ny W I cy dl Ah BR ZU me div A Average 20 kHz 2 J Internal 10 000 sl Auto 75 00 dBm dB Plot VEL Avg Trigger Offset dB In halfsize representation selected measurement values are indicated on the left side of the graph 10 0dEm E 30 0 dE 250 0 ps1 et y KI M t Vu IN 2 70 Ops Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt 4 gt FORMat on page 242 ET Configuring the result display Each of the display modes is c
62. Functions Management of settings Save Setup niii Setup Name in D BEN Fig 4 67 Save Setup dialog box Select setting Selects a memory space Setup Name Names or renames the selected memory space A letter panel opens after pressing the associated softkey Remote command MEMory STATe MAP on page 252 Save Saves the current settings under the selected name After the settings are stored suc cessfully the dialog box closes automatically Former settings saved in this memory space are overwritten Another way to save the settings and close the dialog box is to press the MENU key Remote command SAV on page 204 Loading user defined settings The Recall Setup dialog box in the File menu is used to load stored settings Recall Setup Recall d Fig 4 68 Recall Setup dialog box Select setting Selects a setting User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 141 R amp S NRP2 Instrument Functions ____ MNA Management of settings Recall Loads the selected setting After the settings are loaded successfully the dialog box closes automatically The same effect can be achieved by pressing the MENU key Remote command RCL on page 198 4 6 4 Loading settings for mobile radio standards Predefined settings for the most common mobile radio standards can be loaded in the Recall Standard dialog box of the File menu for quick configuration of the different measurement modes
63. If the LLO character is displayed in the upper status line the User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 169 R amp S NRP2 Remote Control Fundamentals 9 2 9 2 1 Connecting a Controller to the Base Unit keyboard including ESC LOCAL has been disabled via the LLO command In this case returning to local mode is only possible with the remote control command GTL or by a power on reset Measurement Modes To simplify operation in the manual mode preset values are used in some cases for the trigger system TRIGger command and the timing of the measurement SENSe 1 4 TIMing EXCLude STARt and STOP when a measurement mode such as ContAv Burst Timeslot or Trace is selected see table 5 3 Automatic settings for manual selection of a measurement mode This is not the case in the remote control mode Here the trigger system and the timing can be configured by the user as required Calculate Blocks The R amp S NRP2 manages 8 internal calculate blocks Each calculate block has two input channels primary and secondary channel to which one of up to 4 power sensors can be assigned The channels can be processed together by means of a selectable function The result is available at the output of the calculate block In the manual mode the mea surement results of the first four calculate blocks chapter 6 5 CAL Culate Configuration of Calculate Blocks on page 223 are shown in windows 1 to 4 while 8 calculate blocks are availa
64. If the measurement results are to be output not as absolute values but relative to a reference value the keyword RELative can be added to the measurement command The result is then divided by a value that was previously set by means of CALC REL POW or CALC REL AUTO ONCE MEAS CALC REL AUTO ONCE MEAS REL The first MEAS command determines the reference value which is acquired and stored with CALC REL AUTO ONCE The second measurement command MEAS REL and all other MEAS REL commands will divide the absolute measured value by the stored ref erence value CALC REL POW lt float_value gt is used to define such a reference value CALC REL POW 0 DBM MEAS REL All measured values are then divided by 0 dBm 1 mW prior to being transferred to the user The following section describes an extension of the MEAS command in which the result no longer carries a power unit but represents a power ratio The reference value also must have a power unit and be set with CALC REL RAT The R amp S NRP2 stores the reference values for power values and power ratios independently of each other and automatically uses the correct reference value depending on the unit of the measurement result The CALC REL command is available for entering the reference value It assumes a numeric parameter whose unit is determined from the current device settings This com mand is provided only for reasons of compatibility and should not be used unless avoid
65. R amp S NRP2 Two sensor boxes indicate that channels A and B are connected fitted at the front panel requires option R amp S NRP2 B2 the second measurement input Accordingly one or two sensor boxes shown on top indicate that channels A and B are fitted at the rear panel with option R amp S NRP2 B6 sensor connectors A B Four sensor boxes indicate that the meter supports channels A to D option R amp S NRP2 B5 3rd and 4th measurement input e Addressability check on the USB interface e Addressability check of the Ethernet interface The instrument performs a test on the Ethernet interface and displays the transmis sion rate e g EIER When finished the instrument displays the result under the net work icon i e OK indicates that the interface can be addressed If the R amp S NRP2 is not connected to a network hub or if a connection cannot be established during booting the message iim Not Connected is displayed instead of OK It is however possible to establish a network connection later on at any time Results display of the function test The R amp S NRP2 shows the progress of the tests in a colored orange progress bar The tests are completed when the bar has reached the end of the screen and all symbols are shown The instrument indicates the result of each test underneath the respective symbol R amp S NRP Power Meter Fig 1 10 R amp S NRP2 welcome screen with function test results and progress
66. R amp S NRP2 via a command set complying with SCPI SYST SENS lt 1 48 gt RES prompts the base unit to send an RST to the sensor in question Measurements in progress are interrupted Usage Event SYSTem SENSor lt 1 4 gt TEST Performs a sensor test and returns a list of strings separated by commas The contents of this test protocol is sensor specific For its meaning please refer to the sensor docu mentation Usage Query only SYSTem SPEed lt state gt The data processing speed of the R amp S NRP2 can be increased when FAST is selected The display is switched off and the measured values are no longer displayed since the continuous update of the screen content requires computation time User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 324 R amp S NRP2 Remote Control Commands SYSTem Parameters lt state gt NORMal FAST RST NORMal SYSTem STANdard CATalog Returns a list of stored standards containing a series of strings separated by commas The strings can be used as parameters for theSYSTem STANdard PRESet lt string gt command Usage Query only SYSTem STANdard PRESet lt string gt The R amp S NRP2 can be easily configured for measuring standardized signals e g mobile radio standards For this purpose the standards listed in the annex chapter B Standard Configurations on page 367 are stored in the R amp S NRP2 The SYST STAN PRES command sets the listed parameters and if desired also configur
67. RST command Usage Query only User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 267 R amp S NRP2 Remote Control Commands SENSe Sensor Commands SENSe lt 1 4 gt CORRection OFFSet lt offset_value gt A fixed offset value can be defined for multiplying logarithmically adding the measured value of a sensor If the parameters are specified without a unit the unit set by UNIT POW RAT will be used Unit DB PCT Parameters lt offset_value gt float_value Range depending on sensor RST depending on sensor Default unit DB SENSe lt 1 4 gt CORRection OFFSet STATe lt state gt Switches the offset correction on or off Parameters lt state gt ON OFF RST depending on sensor SENSe lt 1 4 gt CORRection DCYCle INPut MAGNitude lt magnitude gt Informs the R amp S NRP2 about the duty cycle of the power to be measured The duty cycle correction is only applied in the ContAv mode where measurements are performed con tinuously without taking the timing of the signal into account Parameters lt magnitude gt float_value Range depending on sensor RST depending on sensor Default unit PCT SENSe lt 1 4 gt CORRection DCYCle STATe lt state gt Switches duty cycle correction for the measured value on or off Parameters lt state gt ON OFF RST depending on sensor User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 268 R amp S NRP2 Remote Control Commands SENSe Sensor Commands SENSe lt 1
68. S NRP2 Remote Control Commands High Level Measurement Commands CONFigure MEASure READ and FETCh lt start exclude gt Value range depending on sensor Default value depending on sensor Unit S Amount of time at the beginning of a timeslot or integration period that should not be taken into account Corresponds to command SENSe lt 1 4 gt TIMing EXCLude STARt on page 283 lt statistics size gt _ Value range depending on sensor Default value depending on sensor Unit The number of test points on the time axis Corresponds to command SENSe lt 1 4 gt STATistics SCALe X POINts on page 282 lt tslot width gt Unit S Value range depending on sensor RST value depending on sensor Width of a timeslot in the Timeslot mode Corresponds to command SENSe lt 1 4 gt POWer TSLot AVG WIDTh on page 278 6 4 5 Calculation functions High level commands For high level commands the calculation function is selected by the keyword in the com mand header For high level commands the calculation function is selected by the keyword in the com mand header The following calculation functions are available for calculating the primary channel PC and the secondary channel SC The primary and secondary channel are set by the parameter lt source_list gt in the parameter list The reference value for the calculation of relative values has to be set beforehand using one of the following
69. SENSe lt 1 4 gt TRACe MEASurement TRANSition POSitive 0C Currence cccccceeeees 291 SENSe lt 1 4 gt TRACe MEASurement TRANSition POSitive OVERShoot c ccececeseees 291 SENSe lt 1 4 gt TRACe MEASurement TRANZGmton GbPERiod 291 IGENZGe DlL AslTRACeMEAGurement GTATel 291 ISENSecHlL AslTRACeOEESetTIME 291 ISENSecil AslTR AtCe POlNte 291 SENSe lt 1 4 gt TRACe REALtime cccceccesceccesceccesceccacsacsacsascaesaeeaeeccercceeceaseasesereereareas 292 ISENSechl AslTRACeTIME 292 ISENSechil AVE nn 292 SENSe lt 1 4 gt AUXiliary lt mode gt Activates the measurement of additional measured values that are determined together with the main measured value R amp S NRP2 Remote Control Commands Parameters lt mode gt SENSe Sensor Commands NONE No additional values are measured MINMax By averaging the measured values in the sensors extreme values are lost Using SENSe lt 1 4 gt AUXiliary MINMax a sensor can be assigned to transmit to the R amp S NRP2 the minima and maxima that occurred in the Trace mode together with the measured value If CALCulate FEED POWer PEAK ON SWEep lt 1 4 gt is set peak instead of average values are used for calculating RNDMax In contrast to MINMax instead of the Min value the value of a ran domly selected sample is returned All evaluations occur using these values instead of the average values RST depending on sensor
70. Sets the holdoff time The holdoff time starts with the trigger event During holdoff time other trigger events are suppressed Modifications of the holdoff time are effective immediately see chapter 3 5 Dialog boxes and their controls on page 53 Page lt Trigger dialog box 3 Switches to the next page of the dialog box 4 2 7 Trigger sequence control In Trace amp Statistics measurement mode three trigger modes are available e Single e Normal e Auto The trigger mode is selected in the Sense Trigger dialog box see Mode on page 86 User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 89 R amp S NRP2 Instrument Functions 4 2 7 1 4 2 7 2 4 2 7 3 Data acquisition and parameters Internal and external trigger signals are used for triggering In addition the trigger sequence can be manually controlled using the DEL 1TRIG key Controlling trigger sequence in normal mode In normal continuous trigger mode measurements run continuously with regular trigger events The trigger events may be caused by internal or external trigger signals see Source on page 86 in the Sense Trigger dialog box After the first trigger event is indicated in the title bar The DEL 1TRIG hardkey can be used to stop and restart the measurement any time To stop the measurement Press the DEL 1TRIG hardkey STOF is indicated in the title bar To start the measurement again Press the DEL 1TRIG hardkey is indicated in the title bar
71. The Marker tab covers two markers one for each axis lt enables you to numerically position the markers X Marker Stat s Config Marker Defines the position of the power marker in dBm or in dB dB is used in the case of a normalized X axis Y Marker Stat s Config Marker Defines the position of the result marker in CDF CCDF or dimensionless PDF 4 5 8 3 Statistic function settings Stat s Set the function of the statistics measurement in the Stat s Function dialog box ACCOF A gt Select Stat s Func in the control panel opened via the Window gt Graph Dis play gt Stat s control panel Trace amp Statistics sensor mode User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 138 R amp S NRP2 Instrument Functions Displaying traces Stat s Function x scaing Hl S Trace 1 Trace 2 Channel 4 Aperture Samples gt 1e46 4 BH Fig 4 66 States Function dialog box Statistics evaluation function Note A linear lin or logarithmic log scale is available for CCDF and CDF The PDF can only be displayed linearly CCDF Complementary Cumulative Distribution Function Displays the proba bility of the envelope power being higher than the corresponding X axis power value CDF Cumulative Distribution Function Displays the probability of the envelope power being lower than the corresponding X axis power value PDF Probability Density Function Displays a normalized distribut
72. Trace amp T slot T gate Burst A Statistics Av Av Av 4 20 000 ms Sampling Rate 1 2 4 1 000 2 Duty Cycle D Smoothing of Modulated Signals Fig 4 4 Mode dialog box In addition to the Cont Av mode continuous average power measurements available for all sensors further measurement modes can be used for most of the sensor types A B C D Tabs for selecting the sensor Note In remote control commands select the sensor with the suffix in command SENSe lt 1 4 gt Le choose suffix 1 for channel A channel 2 for B and so on ContAv Trace amp Measurement modes Cont Av Trace amp Statis tics T slot Av T gate Av User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 In the Continuous Average mode the average signal power is contin uously measured without the acquisition interval and signal being in sync see chapter 4 2 1 2 Continuous average power measure ments on page 66 In the Trace amp Statistics mode the R amp S NRP2 analyzes the power envelope of the test signal and displays the power envelope either as a function of time or in its probability distribution and probability density distribution function see chapter 4 2 1 6 Trace amp statistics measure ments on page 72 In the Timeslot Average mode the average power can be measured over defined time intervals of a signal with periodic envelope The timeslot mode should be used preferably for signals with an equally spaced t
73. UU MSI ACG ssassn E EEE EENT 151 Overload sosasensosoneneosonenereorernrrrrenrrrrrrrrrrrrrnrrrrrerre 160 165 OES ees 165 WESC o ege eege EE 129 P Parameter types cccooccconccnococnonononconononcnnnonnnnnoncnnnnanconnns 179 PP e E ii O EA 153 Path 123 Sensor Range A 84 PO onae eE O ER ceeeeebeae anne ese meas 139 Peak Avg Gate ccoconccconcncconcncconcocononononnncnnonanononcnonnnos 122 Peak Avg time Slot ooococonnccconcncoconocnnonaconononcnnnnnos 132 419 R amp S NRP2 Index Peak Gate occcccoonccccoccococcnnnconcocnnnnncnnnnnroncnnnaronnonanens 122 Peak time Slot cccccoonnccccconoccocononononconononancnnonnnaross 132 Peak power Gate ooocccccccoonnconoconcnoconccnnnnnonnancnnnnnnnnnnnos 103 Positive overshoot oooccccnccncnccncnncnnnnno ceeeeeeseeeueeeeeeeeeneneeees 129 Pos Gcale ennrrernrnrrrnrnn 116 122 125 127 132 Power div 117 Power div Statistics display ccoocccconcncnonconnonno 137 Power Ref 157 Power ref Calibration oococcoccocinccoccnccncnncnncnnnncnano nos 349 Predefined settings ooocccccconcccccconnoconocnnncnnononanononnonons 142 Preserve Window SettingS 142 Preset canarias 27 Preset values cccccececececeececececeeecceeeeeeeeseeeeevaeeeeeeenenenes 198 Primary channel carucececicsaddenicinnntnceractaseteentmsennctonmnnecieanss 120 Protocol functions Val 357 Pulse el weer E 128 fall time ooo coco ccncc ocn ncn
74. Value short form Table 2 8 WCDMA 3GPP TDD DL Sensor parameter Remote control command in Value short form 1 F N SC S Timegate Offset SENS TGAT OFFS TIME 1 25 us 2 5 358 ms Timegate Length SENS TGAT TIME 1 601 667 us 2 602 us TRIG OFF 61 OFF Os INT POS Ss dB User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 372 R amp S NRP2 Standard Configurations Table 2 9 WCDMA 3GPP TDD UL Sensor parameter Remote control command in Value short form as S Timegate Offset SENS TGAT OFFS TIME 1 15 ps 2 5 348 ms Timegate Length SENS TGAT TIME 1 611 667 us 2 612 us INT POS i S dB TRI Table 2 10 TD SCDMA Sensor parameter Remote control command in Value short form Sensor Mode SENS FUNC POW XTIM User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 373 R amp S NRP2 Standard Configurations Sensor parameter Remote control command in Value short form ON Duty Cycle Correction SENS DCYC STAT pO Smoothing SENS SMO OFF Timegate Offset SENS TGAT OFFS TIME 5 970 ms Timegate Length SENS TGAT TIME Timegate Fence SENS TGAT MID OFF ll Trace Offset Time 200 us Trace Capture Time 10 250 ms Trace Realtime OFF Trigger Level 30 dBm RI TRI Trigger Source INT Trigger Slope POS Trigger Holdoff 19 9 ms Trigger Dropout Time Os Trigger Hysteresis 3 dB Table 2 11 Bluetooth DH1 Sensor parameter R
75. a com mercially available dishwashing liquid Storage Please see data sheet for storage temperature range of the R amp S NRP2 User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 335 Storage R amp S NRP2 Error Messages and Troubleshooting Status and Error Messages in Manual Control 8 Error Messages and Troubleshooting 8 1 Status and Error Messages in Manual Control Special characters and symbols indicated on the display inform about the status of the power meter see chapter 3 6 2 Special symbols on page 58 Symbols especially used for indicating error are e Limit Fail The signal level is outside the set limit A trigger event is required but missing To adjust the trigger settings see chap ter 4 2 6 Trigger settings on page 85 Invalid settings for trace display are indicated by an error message in the info panel Example trace function Ratio is selected but only one channel is active 15 00 dBm dB 15 0 dBidiv Config Grid hi L Ku d d h li h Mh Ii o Bey 60 00 d m dB 1 0 medi Plot Asay Bay VEL Avg Trigger Offset dB Trace Function Trace 1 Trace 2 Function Singe C vli Prim Channel cl Sec Channel A 4 Eval Average e Sensor C not connected Invalid Settings User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 337 R amp S NRP2 Error Messages and Troubleshooting SCPI Specific Error Messages 8 2 SCPI Specific Error Messages The list below contains error message
76. a defined point in time For this purpose different sources can be defined for the trigger event which triggers the measurement In manual operation a trigger event is not expected in the ContAv mode Since the measurement is to be performed continuously the trigger source TRIGger SOURce is set to IMMediate User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 388 R amp S NRP2 Programming Measurements C 4 2 2 Measuring with low level commands If triggering needs to occur in response to a rising signal edge the trigger system has to be configured with TRIG SOUR INT and TRIG SLOP POS Example ROL TRIG SOUR INT triggering in response to a Signal edge TRIG SLOP POS triggering in response to a rising signal edge INIT FETCh The settings of commands TRIG SOUR and TRIG SLOP are ignored in the BurstAv mode In this mode the beginning and the end of the power pulse are automatically rec ognized For this reason the instrument always triggers INTernal even if TRIG SOUR has a different setting If a trigger signal is to be routed to the instrument rear panel via the external trigger connector the trigger source has to be configured with TRIG SOUR EXT Example RST TRIG SOUR EXT triggering in response to the edge of an external signal TRIG SLOP POS triggering in response to a rising signal edge INIT FETCh TRIG SOUR BUS can be set if measurements are to be started with TRG or GET This procedure is provided by sta
77. all supported calculation functions All functions are sent in the form of strings which are allowed as parameters for the CALCulate lt 1 8 gt MATH EXPRession com mand Usage Query only User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 231 R amp S NRP2 Remote Control Commands CALCulate Configuration of Calculate Blocks CALCulate lt 1 8 gt MAXimum DATA CALCulate lt 1 8 gt MINimum DATA Queries the maximum minimum of all measured values that previously occurred in this calculate block The limit value is set to the current measured value when e the device is switched on e areset is performed RST e the value is explicitly set to the current measured value using the command CALCulate 1 8 EXTRemes RESet The unit is the current unit of the measured result Possible Units W DBM DBUV DPCT DB O Usage Query only CALCulate lt 1 8 gt MEAN DATA Queries the mean value of all measured values of the calculate block The mean value is reset when the auxiliary values are reset The following formula applies Lei LN i Fig 6 5 Mean value of all measured values The unit is the current unit of the measured result Possible Units W DBM DBUV DPCT DB O Usage Query only CALCulate lt 1 8 gt PTPeak DATA Queries the peak to peak distance maximum to minimum of the measured values of the calculate block The unit is the current unit of the measured result Possible Units W DBM DBUV D
78. and UNIT RATio DB DPCT O The default settings are DBM for power values and DB for power ratios Physical SCPI unit notation dBm DBM Power in dB referenced to 1 mW x W 10 log x 1 mW dBm dBuV Power in dB referred to 1uV 50 x dBm x 107 dBuV Deviation from 100 in x Ax 100 When the SWR RLOS and REFL functions are used the output unit however is implicitly set by the MEAS command User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 383 R amp S NRP2 Programming Measurements Measuring with high level commands Measurement function SWR RLOS REFL The UNIT commands affect the parameters of the following commands CALC LIMit UPPer CALC LIMit LOWer CALC RELative DISP METer UPPer and DISP METer LOWer C 1 6 Division of MEAS MEAS can be divided into other high level measurement commands CONF lt parameters list gt READ lt parameters list gt The CONF command configures the measurement whereas READ starts the measure ment and calculates and provides the result This division offers two advantages e The measurement has to be configured only once and several measurements with several READ Commands can be performed in succession This means better per formance as compared to measurements performed with MEAS since the time for configuring the measurement is only used once e After CONF settings can be adapted to user s requirements by means of l
79. are ignored Power Trigger level Time Drop Out Drop Out Time Time Fig 6 20 Significance of the drop out time parameter User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 330 R amp S NRP2 Remote Control Commands TRIGger A similar response is achieved with the SENSe BURSt DTOLerance command in the Burst mode However the Burst mode makes certain that a burst measurement is not discontinued too early whereas TRIGger DTIMe Suppresses a new measurement that is performed too early Parameters lt dtime gt float_value RST depending on sensor TRIGger lt 1 4 gt HOLDoff lt holdoff gt TRIGger ALL HOLDoff lt holdoff gt Defines a period after a trigger event within which all further trigger events are ignored Parameters lt holdoff gt float_value Range depending on sensor RST depending on sensor Default unit S TRIGger lt 1 4 gt HYSTeresis lt value gt TRIGger ALL HYSTeresis lt value gt This command is used to specify how far the signal level has to drop below the trigger level before a new signal edge can be detected as a trigger event Thus this command can be used to eliminate the effects of noise in the signal on the edge detector of the trigger system Unit DB PCT Parameters lt value gt float_value Range depending on sensor RST depending on sensor Default unit DB TRIGger lt 1 4 gt IMMediate TRIGger ALL IMMediate Performs triggering and makes sure that the sens
80. autofilter setting i e the averaging number is derived for measurements in the T slot Av mode This parameter is not available in the other measurement modes Remote command SENSe lt 1 4 gt AVERage COUNt AUTO SLOT on page 266 Noise Content Auto Config Defines the proportion of intrinsic noise in the measured result in dB Specifically this value gives the permitted relative deviation from the mean which may not be exceeded for 95 of the observation time Remote command SENSe lt 1 4 gt AVERage COUNt AUTO NSRatio on page 266 Max Settling Time Auto Config Specifies an upper limit for the settling time in the Fixed Noise mode Remote command SENSe lt 1 4 gt AVERage COUNt AUTO MTIMe on page 265 4 2 4 Measurement ranges The power sensors of the R amp S NRP series avoid range switching Some of them like the thermal ones of the R amp S NRP Z5x series and the wideband power sensors of the R amp S NRP Z8x series have only one measurement range All other sensors feature two or three measurement ranges These ranges are called measurement paths because they are operated in parallel simultaneously With automatic range selection measurement paths which are neither overdriven nor underdriven are selected for evaluation No range switching occurs at all Adjacent paths overlap by about 6 dB the so called transition region Therefore the final result may be composed by the measurement resul
81. autozero function Zeroing removes offset voltages from the analog cir cuitry of the sensors so that there are only low powers displayed when there is no power applied A Turn off all test signals before zeroing 4 1 3 1 Zero dialog box Zero Fig 4 2 Zero dialog box The colored background of the text indicates that the function can also be started by pressing the ZERO hardkey again Zero All Zeroes all connected sensors Remote command CALibration ALL ZERO AUTO on page 237 ZeroA B C D Zeroes the selected channel Remote command CALibration lt 1 4 gt ZERO AUTO on page 237 4 1 3 2 Zeroing failure If the power measured during zeroing is too large the R amp S NRP2 reports an error Zeroing B D successful Zeroing A C failed OK 4 MENU Fig 4 3 Zeroing error message User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 63 R amp S NRP2 4 2 Mode 4 Offset Eiter Range 4 F Correction 1 Trigger 4 4 2 1 4 2 1 1 Instrument Functions Data acquisition and parameters This error is often caused by zeroing without switching off the test signal If this is not the cause the sensor might have a hardware defect Data acquisition and parameters Depending on the options that have been installed up to four sensors can be connected to the R amp S NRP2 The sensors perform the complete power measurement from the acquisition of the RF signal to every aspect of re
82. bar Mem function test on the RAM PCI function test on the keyboard controller Keys addressability check on the keypad de addressability check on the test generator instrument icon addressability check on the interfaces for the sensor channels USB addressability check on the USB interface Net addressability check of the ethernet interface Successful tests are confirmed with BM OK orange colored and recognized mal functions with HN Failed red colored Some tests respond with further information messages or actions e lf any interface error occurred the boot process stops after completion of all tests It may be continued by pressing the ESC hardkey User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 20 R amp S NRP2 Putting into Operation Starting the R amp S NRP2 e During the test of the network connection additional information is provided as described above e fan error is detected when the non volatile memory containing instrument settings is checked an error message is displayed when booting is completed Nonvolatile RAM is empty or failure of EEPROM occured Close H MENU The non volatile memory is then re initialized completely and the R amp S NRP2 goes into the preset state All instrument settings that have been saved are lost as a result of this procedure 1 8 3 Shutting down the meter Whenever the meter is switched off its settings are saved The next time it is switched on thes
83. cannot be omitted Long and short form The keywords have a long and a short form The keyword may be entered in short or in long form other abbreviations are not allowed The short form uses the first four char acters of the long form If the fourth character is a vowel and the long form consists of more than four characters only the first three characters are used for the short form The short form is shown by upper case characters and the long form is the entire keyword Upper case and lower case notation only serves to distinguish the two forms in the man ual the instrument itself is case insensitive Example STATus QUEStionable ENABle 1 and STAT QUES ENAB 1 Parameters The parameter must be separated from the header by a white space If a command con tains several parameters they have to be separated by a comma Some of the com mands allow the specification of the parameters MINimum MAXimum and DEFault For a description of the parameter types chapter 5 7 5 Parameters on page 179 Example TIMing EXCLude STARt MINimum Response 0 This query asks for the minimum setting value Numeric suffix If a device has several identical functions or features e g inputs the desired function can be selected by a suffix to the command Commands without a suffix are interpreted as having a suffix of 1 User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 177 R amp S NRP2 Remote Control Fundamentals EE SS Structure and Syntax of dev
84. case Open a dialog box Mode If a menu item is followed by three dots it can be used to open a dialog box to set a variety of parameters Set parameters Relative Off On Reset Parameter setting options are provided in the menu The currently selected option is highlighted in orange Select the option by pressing the left or right side of the associated rocker switch Use of softkeys with dual assignments Close Expand Some softkeys are assigned two menu items One is selected by pressing the left hand side of the rocker switch the other the right hand side The two menu items are separated by a vertical line Dialog boxes and their controls Dialog boxes contain check boxes option fields editing fields and drop down lists as control elements They are activated using the appropriate rocker switch to their right If two control elements are positioned side by side the element on the left is operated with the left hand side of the rocker switch and the element on the right with the right hand side of the rocker switch User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 53 R amp S NRP2 Manual Operation 3 9 1 3 9 2 3 5 3 3 5 4 3 5 5 Dialog boxes and their controls Title bar Sensor Info Dialog boxes have a title bar which displays the name of the dialog box and the symbol which is a reminder that the dialog box can be closed with the MENU hardkey Settings made in dialog boxes are immediately set
85. connector rear panel The magnitude of the two possible output voltages can range from 0 V to 3 3 V OUTP TTL HVOL and OUTP TTL LVOL Refer to OUTPut TTL STATe on page 260 and figure 6 9 Voltage at TTL output to determine which voltage is available at the output Table 6 14 Voltage at TTL output OUTP TTL ACT LOW OUTP TTL ACT HIGH OUTP TTL FAIL HIGH OUTP TTL FAIL LOW Measured value violates limit OUTP TTL LVOL OUTP TTL HVOL Measured value is within limit OUTP TTL HVOL OUTP TTL LVOL User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 260 R amp S NRP2 Remote Control Commands 6 11 SENSe Sensor Commands Voltage OUTP TTL ACT HIGH OUTP TTL ACT LOW OUTP TTL FAIL LOW OUTP TTL FAIL HIGH OUTP TTL HVOLT OUTP TTL LVOLT Power DISP LIM LOW DISP LIM UPP DISP LIM LOW DISP LIM UPP Fig 6 9 Voltage at TTL output Parameters lt state gt ON OFF RST OFF OUTPut TRIGger STATe Switches the trigger output ON or OFF The source of signals on the trigger bus can either be the external trigger input or a sensor in trigger master mode The output needs to be switched to OFF before it can be switched ON again Therefore it is not possible to switch directly from OUTP REC ON to OUTP TRIG ON SENSe Sensor Commands The commands of the SENSe group configure the power sensors with the exception of the trigger system This includes the measurement modes ContAv Burst Timeslot or Trace the offset corrections and
86. dByV is selected as the unit the number of places after the decimal point is set directly In the linear mode W A 1 the number of digits after the decimal point depends on the selected resolution and the magnitude of the result A digit is added or removed for each resolution stage that is added or removed The selected resolution also influences the automatic selection of the averaging number in the Normal mode see chapter 4 2 3 Filter averaging on page 79 The higher the selected resolution the higher the averaging number to correspond to the number of digits Resolution dB Sets the resolution for the measurement result display The resolution of the displayed result corresponds to the selected setting Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt 1 4 gt RESolution on page 245 Setting the Analog Meter Analog 7 The analog scale in the hybrid digital 8 analog display mode D amp A is set in the Meter Meter LI 1 Scaling dialog box The dialog box opens after pressing the Analog Meter softkey Meter Scaling Auto Once Left 90 000 dBm 4 Right 30 000 d m 4 Fig 4 27 Meter Scaling dialog box Auto Once Automatically selects the appropriate scaling so that the currently measured value is in the middle of the scale Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt 1 4 gt METer AUTO on page 243 User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 96 R amp S NRP2 Instrument Functions Timesiot 1 4 4
87. deben someterse a calor ni fuego Debe evitarse el almacenamiento a la luz directa del sol Las celdas y bater as deben mantenerse limpias y secas Limpiar las conexiones sucias con un pa o seco y limpio Las celdas o bater as no deben cortocircuitarse Es peligroso almacenar las celdas o bater as en estuches o cajones en cuyo interior puedan cortocircuitarse por contacto rec proco o por contacto con otros materiales conductores No deben extraerse las celdas o bater as de sus embalajes originales hasta el momento en que vayan a utilizarse Las celdas o bater as no deben someterse a impactos mec nicos fuertes indebidos En caso de falta de estanqueidad de una celda el l quido vertido no debe entrar en contacto con la piel ni los ojos Si se produce contacto lavar con agua abundante la zona afectada y avisar a un m dico En caso de cambio o recarga inadecuados las celdas o bater as que contienen electrolitos alcalinos p ej las celdas de litio pueden explotar Para garantizar la seguridad del producto las celdas o bater as solo deben ser sustituidas por el tipo Rohde amp Schwarz correspondiente ver lista de recambios Las bater as y celdas deben reciclarse y no deben tirarse a la basura dom stica Las bater as o acumuladores que contienen plomo mercurio o cadmio deben tratarse como residuos especiales Respete en esta relaci n las normas nacionales de eliminaci n y reciclaje Transporte 1 El producto puede tene
88. display Text to be displayed in result win dow LA Measurement accuracy and dis play accuracy Selection of first result window 199 R amp S NRP2 Remote Control Commands Common Commands to IEEE 488 2 DISP SIZE NORM Automatic window sizes DISP lt 1 4 gt ON A window will automatically be opened for each sensor DISP lt 1 4 gt TRAC LOW 120 DBM Lower limit of power axis in Trace mode DISP lt 1 4 gt TRAC UPP 30 DBM Upper limit of power axis in Trace mode ASC Measured data in ASCII format FORM BORD NORM Big Endian byte sequence of measured data if FORMat REAL is selected INIT 1 4 ALL CONT ON PRES and SYSTem PRESet xj j O Hy j RST INIT 1 4 ALL DIS The settings in the MEMory com mand system will not be affected OUTP REC1 FEED CALCI Analog outputs are fed by the first calculate block OUTP REC2 FEED CALC2 Analog outputs are fed by the sec ond calculate block ERT W Hy j OUTP REC 1 2 LIM LOW 20 DBM or O V equivalent at analog output O DB OUTP REC 1 2 LIM UPP 20 DM or 3 V equivalent at analog output 10 DB EC OU TeeTrieacr LOW OUTPut TTL LVOLtage Is applied to the TTL output if a limit is violated OUTP TTL FAIL HIGH OUTPut TTL HVOLtage Is applied to the TTL output if a limit is violated CALC1 LIM OUTP TTL FEED The TTL output is fed by the limit monitoring function of calcula
89. display about the same value as before User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 32 R amp S NRP2 Getting Started Measuring average power Cont Av mode sensor Windows Measurement File System A A 14 06 can A 1 000 GHz Fig 2 10 Result window Offset In the note line of the result window the A symbol indicates that global offset cor rection is active Performing relative power measurements The R amp S NRP2 calculates and displays also the relative difference between a measured value and a reference value The reference value can be a measured value that has been saved or an arbitrary value that is entered Select the Measurement menu Sensor Windows Measurement File System 2 Open the Measurement menu with MENU Fig 2 11 Measurement menu To activate the relative mode press the right side of the softkey next to Relative Relative Off On Reset As the default setup was loaded in step 1 the value relative to 0 dBm is displayed Ss as A Rel 4 04 Fig 2 12 Result window Relative Press the right side of the softkey next to Relative again Relative Off On Reset User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 33 R amp S NRP2 Getting Started Measuring average power Cont Av mode Reset will set the current power result as new reference value After the reset rel ative measurement is automatically active again Relative Off On Reset If the power has not changed in t
90. e Selection mode In this mode using the cursor keys 7 JL amp gt you can select the number field you want to Edit Insert or Delete Note A long list can not be displayed in full length in the dialog box The entries are therefore viewed in a window which automatically scrolls up or down if the cursor moves outside the visible section The position of the currently active field is shown by the scroll bar e Edit mode When you press the Edit rocker switch the value in the selected field can be edited In this mode the cursor keys cannot be used for selection but can be used normally to edit values in the entry field gt To open the table editor select Sensor gt Mode gt Offset and then Edit Table in the Offset dialog box User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 78 R amp S NRP2 4 2 3 Instrument Functions Data acquisition and parameters Table 3 Frequency Offset i Edit __5 00GHz 10 00 dB 3 00GHz 17 00 dB Insert 4 10 00 dB 5 70 KHz Delete 4 393GH2 11 00 dB Sort Name 4 Fig 4 15 Table dialog box The table editor displays the name of the table in its title bar a two column list with fre quency and offset value pairs and provides softkeys for data management Edit Activates the edit mode in the selected field The entry can be confirmed with the MENU or aborted with the ESC LOCAL key After wards the table editor is ag
91. effect as CALC REL on the reference value for measured values that share the unit of a power Parameters lt value gt float_value units DBM W Range 1e 18 1e18 W 150 210 DBM RST 0 DBM Default unit DBM User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 233 R amp S NRP2 Remote Control Commands CALCulate Configuration of Calculate Blocks CALCulate lt 1 8 gt RELative RATio MAGNitude lt value gt Has the same direct effect as CALC REL on the reference value for measured values that share the unit of a power ratio Parameters lt value gt float_value units DB PCT Range 200 200 DB 1e 18 1e22 PCT RST 0 DB Default unit DB CALCulate lt 1 8 gt RELative STATe lt state gt Determines whether a reference value is used If this command is called with on all results of the calculate block are divided by the reference value set with CALCulate 1 8 RELative MAGNitude Parameters lt state gt ON OFF ON all results of the calculate block are divided by the reference value set with CALCulate lt 1 8 gt RELative MAGNitude OFF a reference value is not used RST OFF CALCulate lt 1 8 gt SDEViation DATA Queries the standard deviation oof all measured values of the calculate block The stand ard deviation is calculated together with the mean value and reset The following formula applies ai ll de Y Fig 6 6 Standard deviation cof all measured values The unit is the current un
92. from injury or damage Use suitable overvoltage protection to ensure that no overvoltage such as that caused by a bolt of lightning can reach the product Otherwise the person operating the product will be exposed to the danger of an electric shock Any object that is not designed to be placed in the openings of the housing must not be used for this purpose Doing so can cause short circuits inside the product and or electric shocks fire or injuries Unless specified otherwise products are not liquid proof see also section Operating states and operating positions item 1 Therefore the equipment must be protected against penetration by liquids If the necessary precautions are not taken the user may suffer electric shock or the product itself may be damaged which can also lead to personal injury Never use the product under conditions in which condensation has formed or can form in or on the product e g if the product has been moved from a cold to a warm environment Penetration by water increases the risk of electric shock Prior to cleaning the product disconnect it completely from the power supply e g AC supply network or battery Use a soft non linting cloth to clean the product Never use chemical cleaning agents such as alcohol acetone or diluents for cellulose lacquers Operation 1 Operating the products requires special training and intense concentration Make sure that persons who use the products are physica
93. function of the key is selected automatically according to context ESC LOCAL e this key is used as an ESC key to escape from the entry mode in text boxes and drop down lists It is also used to close dialog boxes and menus without losing any entries that have been made see chapier 3 2 Screen layout on page 49 e as the LOCAL key it is used to switch the R amp S NRP2 from remote control mode all controls disabled to manual mode The key is automatically assigned its function according to context in other words there is no manual assignment by the operator MODE MODE opens the Mode dialog box to select and configure the measurement mode See also chapter 4 2 1 1 Mode dialog box on page 64 PRE SET The PRE SET hardkey sets the R amp S NRP2 to its default setting Default settings are sensor specific The function can also be started with the Preset softkey in the file menu see chap ter 4 6 1 Default setting on page 140 FREQ FREQ sets the carrier frequency of the applied signal to obtain the specific measurement uncertainty Find more information on the frequency dialog box in the operating manual chapter 4 1 2 Frequency hardkey on page 62 ZERO This function starts the autozero function see also chapter 4 1 3 Zero hardkey on page 63 Cursor keys ab User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 13 R amp S NRP2 Putting into Operation 1 5 3 Ge TC POWER REF Front panel
94. gt Switches the monitoring function for theupper and lower limit on or off Parameters lt state gt ON OFF RST OFF Usage Setting only CALCulate lt 1 8 gt LIMit STATe lt state gt Switches the monitoring function for the upper limit on or off Parameters lt state gt ON OFF RST OFF Usage Setting only CALCulate lt 1 8 gt LIMit UPPer DATA lt upper_limit gt Sets an upper limit for the measured values The R amp S NRP2 can respond when this limit is exceeded see other CALCulate lt 1 8 gt LIMit commands Parameters lt upper_limit gt float_value The value range depends on the current output unit of the calcu late block s measured value as shown in table 6 10 Value ranges depending on the unit The parameter unit is determined according to table 6 11 Output unit of measured value of calculate block RST 0 DBM or 0 DB Default unit see table referred to above CALCulate lt 1 8 gt LIMit UPPer DATA POWer lt power gt Sets a upper limit for the measured power The R amp S NRP2 can respond when this limit is exceeded see other CALCulate 1 8 gt LIMit commands User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 229 R amp S NRP2 Remote Control Commands CALCulate Configuration of Calculate Blocks Parameters lt power gt float_value units DBM W DBUV Range 120 DBM to 90 DBM RST 0 DBM Default unit DBM CALCulate lt 1 8 gt LIMit UPPer DATA RATio lt ratio gt
95. if nRet 0 closesocket soLink2 closesocket soLinkl print Send IDN failed n return 1 else printf Send IDN was successfully n nRet recv soLinkl ResponseMessage MAX RECV 0 if nRet 0 closesocket soLink2 closesocket soLink1 printf Receive IDN response message failed n else ResponseMessage nRet 0 printf Response from NRP2 s ResponseMessage closesocket soLink2 closesocket soLink1 Ethernet interface 0 R amp S NRP2 Remote control interfaces EEE ee ee AAA USB interface Winsock Cleanup WSACleanup return 0 y Ende main A 4 USB interface If the R amp S NRP2 is connected to a controller via a USB 1 1 interface it logs on as a USB test and measurement class USBTMC device provided that USB is selected as a remote interface in the System Remote USB menu The USBTMC standard describes how IEEE 488 2 compatible communications can be implemented via USB As with remote control via VXI11 the use of VISA distribution with a USBTMC driver is recommended for remote control via USB The VISA resource identifier used to identify a USBTMC device has the following format USB lt Vendor ID gt lt Product ID gt lt serial number gt lt INSTR gt OxOaad 0x001b The serial number is a string that can be taken from the System System Info menu for example In addition the VISA res
96. is advisable to freeze the screen of the R amp S NRP2 to avoid interruptions caused by writing to the display memory chapier 4 7 5 Miscellaneous on page 159 Sensor Check Source The Sensor Check Source option R amp S NRP B1 supplies an accurate 1 mW test signal at 50 MHz It can arbitrarily be switched on and off or be used in course of automatic test measurements see chapter 4 7 6 Test measurements on page 160 gt The signal is activated in the System menu Remote FO Power Ref Off On Sensor System Info Info Misc Test 4 Power Ref Switches on off the sensor check source Remote command OUTPut ROSCillator STATe on page 258 System information This section describes how you retrieve information on the instrument like part number serial number firmware version etc and installed options as well as on connected power sensors Information on sensors Select Sensor Info in the System menu User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 157 R amp S NRP2 Instrument Functions system settings Sensor Info Remote Manufacturer Rohde amp Schwarz Type NRP 281 Stock Number 1137 9009 02 Serial 100011 I O Power Ref Off On Sensor System Info Info HWWersion 000000000 HWWariant 000000000 SW Build 01 31 FPGA Build T15 23 50 19 5T 19 Misc Test 4 Fig 4 89 Sensor info dialog A B C D Tabs for selecting the sensor Note I
97. ister indicates whether a calibration was started or completed since the last readout of this register The Operation Calibration Status Register can be read by the following commands STATUS OPERation CALIbrating SUMMary CONDIE LON STATUS OPERAbion CALI bracing lt SUMMary EVENE Table 6 23 Meaning of bits used in the Operation Calibrating Status Register eane frems C C Ce song tte sn ng tos O so gto ne Bit 15 will never be used Operation Measuring Status Register The CONDition register contains information as to whether a measurement is being per formed by a sensor and depending on the configuration of the transition register the User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 307 R amp S NRP2 Remote Control Commands STATus EVEN register indicates whether a measurement was started or completed since the last readout of this register The Operation Measuring Status Register can be read by the following commands STATus OPERation MEASuring SUMMary CONDition STATUS OPERation MEASuring SUMMary EVENTt Table 6 24 Meaning of bits used in the Operation Measuring Status Register Sensor A measuring Sensor A is performing a measurement Sensor B measuring Sensor B is performing a measurement Sensor C measuring Sensor C is performing a measurement Sensor D measuring Sensor D is performing a measurement Bit 15 will never be used 6 13 13 Operation Trigger Status Regist
98. lt 1 8 gt LIMit CLEar AUTO lt auto gt Automatically resets the limit monitoring state and the internal counter for limit violations if any of the following events occurs e INITiate IMMediate Is executed e INITiate CONTinuous ON is executed e MEASure orMEASure query is executed e READ Or READ query is executed Parameters lt auto gt ON OFF ONCE ON automatic reset enabled OFF automatic reset disabled ONCE automatic reset is enabled only once for the next occurrence of the above events RST OFF Usage Event CAL Culate lt 1 8 gt LIMit FAIL Queries whether upper or lower limits have been exceeded The status is reset 0 no limit violation if one of the following events occurs e The device is switched on e Areset is performed RST e The CALCulate lt 1 8 gt LIMit CLEar command is sent Usage Query only User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 227 R amp S NRP2 Remote Control Commands CALCulate Configuration of Calculate Blocks CALCulate lt 1 8 gt LIMit FCOunt Queries the number of limit violations that occurred The counter is zeroed if one of the following events occurs e The device is switched on e Areset is performed RST e The CALCulat lt 1 8 gt LIMit CLEar command is sent Usage Query only CALCulate lt 1 8 gt LIMit LOWer DATA lt lower_limit gt Sets a lower limit for the measured values The R amp S NRP2 can respond when the values drop below
99. marked by square brackets in the description The instrument must recognize the long command to comply with the SCPI standard Some commands are considerably shortened by these optional mnemonics Therefore not only is there a short and a long form for the commands distinguished here by lowercase and uppercase letters but also a short form which is created by omitting optional keywords Example Command SENSe lt 1 4 gt CORRection GAIN2 INPut MAGNitude 1 can be written as SENSel CORRection GAIN2 INPut MAGNitude 1 SENSel CORRection GAIN2 INPut 1 SENSel CORRection GAIN2 1 SENSe CORRection GAIN2 1 CORRection GAIN2 1 Parameters Parameters must be separated from the header by a white space If several parameters are specified in a command they are separated by a comma For a description of the parameter types refer to chapter 5 7 5 Parameters on page 179 User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 193 R amp S NRP2 Remote Control Commands Common Commands to IEEE 488 2 Example Definition OUTPut AUDiobits lt audiobits gt Command OUTP AUD 24 Special characters and A vertical bar in parameter definitions indicates alternative possibilities in the sense of or The effect of the command differs depending on which parameter is used Example Definition INITiate CONTinuous ON OFF Command INITiate CONTinuous ON starts the measurements Command INITiate CONTinuous OFF stops the measurements
100. memory location of the device states MEMory STATe RESet The command resets the names of the stored device states to factory default Setup 1 etc Usage Query only MEMory TABLe DATA lt f_n gt lt o_n gt The command returns the content of the currently selected offset table The answer con sists of an alternating comma separated list of frequencies f_n Hz and offsets o_n dB Return values lt f_n gt lt o_n gt The answer consists of an alternating comma separated list of frequencies f_n and offsets o_n RST Tables are not changed in case of a RST Example MEM TABL FREQ 50MHz 100MHz MEM TABL GAIN 1 1 1 MEM TABL DATA returned values CA 000000E 07 71 000000 1 000000Et08 1 100000 Usage Query only User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 252 R amp S NRP2 Remote Control Commands MEMory MEMory TABLe DATA POINts The command returns the number of stored entries in the currently selected offset table Usage Query only MEMory TABLe FREQuency lt NRf gt lt NRf gt This command enters frequencies in the first column of the table selected with MEM TABL SEL Existing data for frequencies will be overwritten The number of fre quencies should match the number of offset values If the number of frequencies differs from the number of offset values the shorter column length will be used SENS lt 1 4 gt FREQ can be used to determine a frequency for which a correction fac tor
101. mode e 1 the IEC IEEE 488 1 mode abbr 1174 1 mode e 2 the IEC IEEE 488 2 mode abbr 1174 2 mode The IEC IEEE 1174 0 mode The IEC IEEE 1174 0 mode raw socket communication does not provide an emulation of the IEC IEEE bus functionality e Special control commands like those used by the higher IEC IEEE 1174 1 and 1174 2 modes are not provided e The amp character is not doubled e The state change local gt remote is achieved by receiving data e The state change remote gt local is achieved by clearing down the connection peer sockets The IEC IEEE 1174 1 mode To allow emulation of the IEC IEEE 488 1 standard special control characters that begin with an amp character 0x26 are defined table 1 6 The link link 1 or link 2 via which the control sequences are to be transmitted and that controller or measuring instrument is allowed to transmit the control sequences are predefined User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 358 R amp S NRP2 Remote control interfaces Ethernet interface This means the following for communications via RS 232 C and Ethernet in mode 1174 1 The special control sequences are permitted throughout the data stream They are recognized and filtered out by the driver In particular the control sequences are also permitted within the block data and SCPI commands To distinguish between the amp character of the control sequences and the normal amp character the IEC IEEE 1174 1
102. no delay on triggering only uses the first CAlCulate block Optimization of measurement speed R amp S NRP2 Compatibility Information D Compatibility Information This section contains information regarding the compatibility of the R amp S NRP2 remote control commands with those of the E4418B and E4419B power meters from Agilent The R amp S NRP2 is largely downward compatible to the above mentioned instruments but offers additional capabilities E4418B E4419B command Compatibility information CONFigure Returns the current configuration The R amp S NRP2 returns the last set ting made with CONFigure as specified by the SCPI standard CALCulate GAIN SENS CORR OFFS STAT CALCulate PHOLd Is implemented in the R amp S NRP2 and has the same effect as CALC EXTR RES CALI Dration Is not implemented in the R amp S NRP2 ECONtrol RCALibration RFACtor DISPlay ENABle Is implemented in theR amp S NRP2 and has the same effect as DISPlay ILLUmination DISPlay SCREen FORMat Is not implemented in the R amp S NRP2 NUMeric 1 2 INITiate The SEQUence node is not implemented in the R amp S NRP2 CONTinuous SEQUence 1 2 MMediate SEQUence 1 2 MEMor y TABLe GAIN Agilent specifies the values without a unit the unit PCT percent is implicitly assumed The units DB dB DPCT A and O unit 1 can be specified in the R amp S NRP2 The default unit is DB Is not implemented in the R
103. of the timeslots are ignored The mea surement is carried out with sensor 1 default The instrument is triggered by an external signal which must be routed to the R amp S NRP2 rear panel via the trigger input The mea surement result is a list of 8 measured values separated by a comma for the timeslots Example MEAS BURSt 5 us 10 us O us DEF 3 2 Sensor 2 measures in the BurstAv mode Triggering in response to a rising edge is internal At the beginning of the power pulse 10 us are ignored to avoid overshoots in the signal which could distort the measurement result If the power falls below the trigger level but does not exceed 5 us dropout time the measurement will not be stopped The measurement result is noise free within the first 3 places and it is measured with sensor 2 2 Example MEAS XTIMe 256 577 us Within the next 577 us 256 measured values are recorded and displayed with respect to time in te Same manner as with an oscilloscope in order to display the power charac teristics There is no triggering TRIG SOUR IMM the measurements are started after the command is received from the R amp S NRP2 After a partial measurement has been completed the next one is started If the trigger source setting is to be changed MEAS XTIMe must be replaced by the CONF XTIMe and READ XTIMe commands between which user defined settings can be performed Dividing MEAS into the CONF and READ commands is describe
104. or R amp S NRP Z8x sensor is required for this mea surement To perform a burst average power measurement you need a pulsed RF signal If you use an R amp S NRP Z1x or R amp S NRP Z2x x sensor the pulse repetition frequency of the signal should not exceed 10 kHz Setting the burst mode 1 Connect the power sensor to connector A on the R amp S NRP2 and apply a pulsed signal with a level between 10 dBm and 10 dBm Press the PRE SET hardkey twice A measurement window is now available Change to the Sensor menu and select Mode The Mode dialog box opens Select Trace amp Statistics In the trace mode check that the sensor detects a signal and reliably triggers For information concerning reliable triggering see chapter 2 7 Graphically repre senting power versus time on page 42 Change back to the Sensor menu and select Burst Av in the Mode dialog box Cont Trace amp T slot T gate Av Statistics Av AY Dropout 100 000 ps Excluded from Start from End 0 000 us 0 000 pus 4 Fig 2 38 Mode dialog box Burst Av The burst mode parameters are displayed at the bottom of the dialog box To exclude the pulse build up and decay phases from the measurement you can set the Excluded from Start and from End parameters accordingly User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 46 Measuring average burst power Burst Av mode The parameter Dropout helps to reliably detect the end of modulated sig
105. or measurement of the power ratio of two measurement channels using the Ratio function is performed On Relative power measurement or relative power ratio measurement Reset Assigns the current measurement result as reference value Remote command CALCulate lt 1 8 gt RELative STATe on page 234 CALCulate lt 1 8 gt RELative MAGNitude AUTO on page 233 4 4 4 2 Setting the reference value manually The reference value can be directly entered or edited using the Reference Value dialog box Open the dialog box with the RefVal softkey Reference Value Ref 0 130dBm 4 Reset Result Ref 4 Fig 4 42 Reference value dialog box Ref Enter a reference value or modify a previously set value Remote command CALCulate lt 1 8 gt RELative MAGNitude on page 232 Reset The current measurement result is transferred to the reference value memory of the active window and is displayed This function can also be started from the Measurement menu by using the Reset softkey Remote command CALCulate lt 1 8 gt RELative MAGNitude AUTO on page 233 4 4 5 Limit Monitoring An upper and a lower limit for each window with digital Dig or digital analog D amp A result display can be set in the Limits dialog box If either limit is violated a warning is issued User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 111 R amp S NRP2 Instrument Functions See Configuring measurements The warning may be one of
106. page 133 See also chapter 4 2 1 4 Measuring the average power of TDMA signals on page 69 which describes the measurement of the average power of a TDMA signal cat Pos Scale Defines if the cursor keys position or scale the waveform Pos The cursor keys shift the waveform in horizontal and vertical direction Scale The cursor keys expand and compress the waveform When the hori zontal scaling is modified the points pixels at the left of the screen remain unchanged When the vertical scaling is modified the neutral zone depends on the unit selected the points in the center of the screen remain unchanged when dBm dB and dBuV are used The points at the bottom of the screen remain unchanged in all other displays User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 132 R amp S NRP2 Trigger Config Tslots Instrument Functions Displaying traces Trigger Opens the Trigger dialog box For description refer to chapter 4 2 6 Trigger settings on page 85 Slot Selects a timeslot for which the power values in the info panel are displayed Trace Func Opens the Trace Function subdialog see chapter 4 5 3 4 Trace function settings on page 119 T Slot diagram settings gt Configure timeslot measurement in the Timeslot Config dialog box which is opened via the Window gt Graph gt Display gt T slot control panel Trace amp Statistics sensor mode Timeslot Config Ho of Timeslots Nominal Width 577 000
107. page covers the parameters for defining a trigger delay and a dropout time to prevent accidental triggering User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 87 R amp S NRP2 Instrument Functions Data acquisition and parameters Page 2 3 Fig 4 21 Trigger dialog box page 2 A B C D lt Trigger dialog box 2 Tabs for selecting the sensor Note In remote control commands select the sensor with the suffix in command SENSe lt 1 4 gt le choose suffix 1 for channel A channel 2 for B and so on Delay Trigger dialog box 2 Sets the trigger delay Setting a positive value delays the effect of the trigger event until the set time has elapsed Entering negative values allows pretriggering limited to a few milliseconds depending on the sensor Modifications of the trigger delay are immediately effective see chapter 3 5 Dialog boxes and their controls on page 53 Tip Entering a correct value for the trigger delay is absolutely essential for accurate measurements in the T Slot Av mode For this reason the setting should always be checked in the Trace amp Statistics mode timeslot display mode Remote command TRIGger ALL DELay on page 330 Dropout Trigger dialog box 2 Sets the dropout time The dropout time prevents the trigger system from being activated by signal excursions prior to the trigger event targeted The parameter is set to a value that is slightly higher than the maximum dura
108. power in dBm SENS STAT SCAL X RANG 30 measurement range on the power axis in dB SENS STAT SAMP 1E9 number of samples to be included in the statistics READ CALC STAT MARK HOR POS X 15 position marker on the power axis at 15 dBm CALC STAT MARK HOR DATA query the DF value at 15 dBm CALC STAT MARK VERT POS X 0 5 vertical marker at 50 CALC STAT MARK VERT DATA guery the 50 power in dBm User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 398 R amp S NRP2 C 6 Programming Measurements Pulse Analysis Measurements Pulse Analysis Measurements Pulse analysis measurements are always coupled to trace measurements Thus a trace measurement has to be set up and the pulse analysis algorithms have to be activated before the measurement is started The sensors send the trace data together with the pulse measurement results The following example is intended for analysing a GSM EDGE signal with the first slot used xrst cols sens trac meas on sens trac meas auto on sense trace meas tran esam auto state sens trac meas alg HIST meas xtime 100 6 ms 1 Check the reference levels for def dur ref def tran lref def tran href sens trac meas sens trac meas sens trac meas sens trac meas puls dcyc sens trac meas puls dur sens trac meas puls per sens trac meas puls sep sens trac meas tran neg dur sens trac meas tran neg occ sens trac meas tran neg over
109. provocadas por algunos materiales empleados los llamados al rgenos p ej el n quel Si durante el manejo de productos Rohde amp Schwarz se producen reacciones al rgicas como p ej irritaciones cut neas estornudos continuos enrojecimiento de la conjuntiva o dificultades respiratorias debe avisarse inmediatamente a un m dico para investigar las causas y evitar cualquier molestia o da o a la salud Antes de la manipulaci n mec nica y o t rmica o el desmontaje del producto debe tenerse en cuenta imprescindiblemente el cap tulo Eliminaci n protecci n del medio ambiente punto 1 Ciertos productos como p ej las instalaciones de radiocomunicaci n RF pueden a causa de su funci n natural emitir una radiaci n electromagn tica aumentada Deben tomarse todas las medidas necesarias para la protecci n de las mujeres embarazadas Tambi n las personas con marcapasos pueden correr peligro a causa de la radiaci n electromagn tica El empresario operador tiene la obligaci n de evaluar y se alizar las reas de trabajo en las que exista un riesgo elevado de exposici n a radiaciones Tenga en cuenta que en caso de incendio pueden desprenderse del producto sustancias t xicas gases l quidos etc que pueden generar da os a la salud Por eso en caso de incendio deben usarse medidas adecuadas como p ej m scaras antig s e indumentaria de protecci n Los productos con l ser est n provistos de indicaciones de advert
110. register of the SCPI registers Each bit of the STB is assigned a bit in the SRE Bit 6 of the SRE is ignored If a bit is set in the SRE and the associated bit in the STB changes from 0 to 1 a service request SRQ will be generated on the IEC IEEE bus which triggers an interrupt in the controller configured for this purpose and can be further processed by the controller The SRE can be set by the command SRE and read by the query SRE Table 6 18 Meaning of bits used in the status byte Device Status Register summary bit Depending on the configuration of the device status register this bit is set when a sensor is connected or disconnected when an error has occurred in a sensor or when a key has been pressed Error Queue not empty The bit is set if the error queue has an entry If this bit is enabled by the SRE each entry of the error queue will generate a service request An error can thus be recognized and specified in detail by querying the error queue The query yields a conclusive error message This pro cedure is recommended since it considerably reduces the problems of IEC IEEE bus control Questionable Status Register summary bit This bit is set if an EVENt bit is set in the QUEStionable Status Register and the associated ENABLe bit is set to 1 A set bit denotes a questionable device status which can be specified in greater detail by querying the QUEStionable Status Register MAV Bit Message available This bit is s
111. responsable de consecuencias a causa del mal uso del producto 1171 0000 42 07 Page Instrucciones de seguridad elementales Se parte del uso correcto del producto para los fines definidos si el producto es utilizado conforme a las indicaciones de la correspondiente documentaci n del producto y dentro del margen de rendimiento definido ver hoja de datos documentaci n informaciones de seguridad que siguen El uso del producto hace necesarios conocimientos t cnicos y ciertos conocimientos del idioma ingl s Por eso se debe tener en cuenta que el producto solo pueda ser operado por personal especializado o personas instruidas en profundidad con las capacidades correspondientes Si fuera necesaria indumentaria de seguridad para el uso de productos de Rohde amp Schwarz encontrar a la informaci n debida en la documentaci n del producto en el cap tulo correspondiente Guarde bien las informaciones de seguridad elementales as como la documentaci n del producto y entr guelas a usuarios posteriores Tener en cuenta las informaciones de seguridad sirve para evitar en lo posible lesiones o da os por peligros de toda clase Por eso es imprescindible leer detalladamente y comprender por completo las siguientes informaciones de seguridad antes de usar el producto y respetarlas durante el uso del producto Deber n tenerse en cuenta todas las dem s informaciones de seguridad como p ej las referentes a la protecci n de personas que encon
112. returns in response to READ or FETCh an array of density values which are spread over the power axis The value range of the power axis is also set using the SENS STAT SCAL X commands CDF The CDF does not represent a separate mode in the sensor It is calculated in the R amp S NRP2 by way of the relation CDF 1 CCDF XPOWer PDF User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 271 R amp S NRP2 Remote Control Commands SENSe Sensor Commands Like XPOWer CCDE except that a PDF is calculated instead of a CCDF XTIMe POWer A sequence of measurements is performed The individual mea sured values are determined as in the ContAv mode The length of an individual measurement is determined from the ratio of the total time SENS TRAC TIME and the number of individual test points SENS TRAC POIN RST depending on sensor SENSe lt 1 4 gt POWer AVG APERture lt integration_time gt Determines the integration time for a single measurement in the ContAv mode To increase the measurement accuracy this integration is followed by a second averaging procedure in a window with a selectable number of values The filter window is configured with the SENSe lt 1 4 gt AVERage commands Parameters lt integration_time gt float_value Range depending on sensor RST depending on sensor Default unit S SENSe lt 1 4 gt POWer AVG BUFFer SIZE lt number gt Sets the number of desired values for the buffe
113. sampled by the sensors The sampling values then undergo two stage filtering before they are made available as measured values The first filter stage is a time integration The integration time is either set explicitly Con tAv mode SENS APER Timeslot mode SENS TSL WIDT and Trace mode SENS SWE POIN and TIME or determined automatically BurstAv mode Filtering averaging is the second filter stage which is configured via the command path SENS AVERage These settings are used to obtain a stable noise free result up to a required accuracy This is done by means of a digital filter which has a variable length the longer the filter the more stable the result Manual filter setting The filter length automatic mode is deactivated and the filter length is set in power of two numbers RST SENS AVER STAT ON activates filtering SENS AVER COUN AUTO OFF switches off filter length automatic mode SENS AVER COUN 4 permanently sets filter length to 4 INIT FETCh Automatic filter setting SENS AVER COUN AUTO TYPE NSR RES is used to select whether the noise com ponent should remain below a specific threshold NSR or the measurement result should be stable up to a specific accuracy RES To avoid long measurement times SENS AVER COUNT AUTO MTIM can be used to specify a maximum measurement time The maximum filter length is set such that the measurements do not exceed this time even if the desired stabilit
114. second In the 1174 0 mode only the first link is used Program example for the Ethernet interface This example is a simple Windows program that displays the programming with sockets amp KK KK KK KK KK KK KK KK KK KK KK KK KK KK KK eK KK KK KK KK KK KK KK KK KK KK KK KK KK KEKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KKK KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 361 MODULE PROJECT E COMPILER LANGUAGE DATE AUTHOR ABSTRACT DESCRIPTION kk ETHERNET C NRP2 ANSI C 28 02 2001 Ethernet interface Demonstration of controlling the NRP2 over Ethernet with the WinSocket interface Initialize the WinSock interface Connecting Link1 Connecting Link2 Sending the SCPI Sending the SCPI Close Link2 Close Link1 TCP IP TCP IP common command sre 0 common command idn kk kk Ek kk kk kk kk Ek kk Ek kk Ek kk kk Ek kk Ek kk Ek kk kk kk kk kk IK KK KK kk kk kk kk kk KK KK KK KK KK KK KK kk kk kk kk kk kk KK INCLUDE FILES KK KK KK KKK KK KK ANA include lt stdio h gt include lt winsock2 h gt LOCAL DEFINES KK KK KK KK RRA KK KK KK KK KK OK KK KK KK KK KK KK AS aefine IP ADDR 192 168 1 2 IP address of NRP2Z define PORT NO 3000 Port number of NRP2 define MAX RECV 200 Max response len MAIN FUNCTION KK KK KK KKK KK I KK KK OK KK KK KK KK KK OK KK KK KK KK KK KK kK int main int argc int WSADATA SOCKET SOC
115. selected enter the IP address assigned by the network administrator to the R amp S NRP2 In large networks specification of additional addresses may be required for link setup e g gateway and subnet mask which are known to the network administrator Ethernet configuration 1 2 Select Ethernet as the active interface Choose Manual or DHCP IP address configuration If DHCP is chosen IP address subnet mask and gateway address are retrieved from a DHCP server The DCHP server must be available in the network No further steps are required If Manual is selected enter the IP address assigned by the network administrator to the R amp S NRP2 In large networks specification of additional addresses may be required for link setup for example gateway and subnet mask which are known to the network adminis trator Enter the port address PortNo Incoming connections from a controller have to use this port number in order to establish a connection to the R amp S NRP2 Define the IEEE protocol mode For example select IEEE 488 0 mode in order to use raw socket communication See also chapter A 3 Ethernet interface on page 357 5 2 2 Hardware Requirements Risk of network failure Before connecting the instrument to the network or configuring the network consult your network administrator Errors may affect the entire network User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 171 R amp S NRP2 Remote Control Fu
116. sensor is already in the IDLE state A measure ment in progress is completed RST OFF Pressing the PRESET key or sending the SYSTem PRESet com mand sets the INITiate ALL CONTinuous command to ON INITiate lt 1 4 gt DISable lt state gt INITiate ALL DISable lt state gt This command prevents the execution of the INIT IMM command for one or more sen sors It can thus suppress the start of a measurement for specific sensors if the INIT ALL IMM command is used Parameters lt state gt ON OFF RST OFF INITiate lt 1 4 gt IMMediate INITiate ALL IMMediate This command starts a single shot measurement The respective sensor goes to the INITIATED state The command is completely executed when the sensor returns to the IDLE state The command is ignored when the sensor is not in the IDLE state or when continuous measurements are selected INIT CONT ON The command is only fully executed when the measurement is completed and the trigger system has again reached the IDLE state Besides CAL ZERO AUTO INIT is the only remote control command that permits overlapping execution Other commands can be received and processed while the command is being executed Note INIT IMM invalidates all previous measuring results A FETCh Command following INIT will thus always return a new measurement result Usage Event Error messages Sensor not idle The sensor is not in the IDLE state User Manual 1173 9140 02
117. setting With increasing resolution i e an increasing number of digits in the measurement results the averaging number also increases e Fixed Noise In the Fixed Noise mode the averaging number is selected so that the sensors intrinsic noise 2 standard deviations does not exceed the specified Noise Con tent To avoid very long settling times when the power is low the averaging number can be limited with the Max Settling Time parameter If the display noise then exceeds the set noise content the symbol S N is displayed 4 2 3 1 Filter dialog box Filter fale e o 4 Auto DR Avg No i Reset 4 Auto Epa Once Config Fig 4 16 Filter dialog box User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 80 R amp S NRP2 Instrument Functions EE Data acquisition and parameters A B C D Tabs for selecting the sensor Note In remote control commands select the sensor with the suffix in command SENSe lt 1 4 gt Le choose suffix 1 for channel A channel 2 for B and so on Auto Toggles between automatic and manual filter setting Remote command SENSe lt 1 4 gt AVERage COUNt AUTO on page 264 Avg No Sets the averaging number manually This entry field always shows the current averaging number With automatic averaging the displayed value is grayed out and cannot be changed manually If manual filtering is selected the desired averaging number can be set Changes are immediate
118. short form ZERO CAL CAL ZERO AUTO Sensor gt Mode gt Trace Statistics Windows gt Graph Trace gt Config Display Sensor gt Mode gt Trace Statistics Windows gt Graph Stats Config gt Scale x Max el SCAL SCAL Sensor gt Mode gt Trace Statistics Windows gt Graph Stats gt Config gt Scale x Min Sensor gt Mode gt Trace Statistics Windows gt Graph Stats gt Config gt Aperture Cont Sensor gt Mode gt Trace Statistics Windows gt Graph Stats gt Config gt Samples Sensor gt Mode gt Trace Statistics Windows gt Graph Stats gt Config gt Mark r x oe 4 MARK HOR POS X Sensor gt Mode gt Trace Statistics Windows gt Graph Stats gt Contfig gt Mark r y 4 MARK VERT POS Y Sensor gt Mode gt Trace Statistics Windows gt Graph Display gt Pulse SENS TRAC MEAS ON SENS TRAC MEAS AUTO ON User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 191 R amp S NRP2 Remote Control Fundamentals EE Correspondence between Remote Control and Manual Control Menu item in manual control SCPI command in short form Sensor gt Mode gt Trace Statistics Windows gt Graph Display gt Pulse Pulse Width PULS DUR Pulse Period d PULS PER Duty Cycle PULS DCYC Pulse Off Time TRAN POS DUR Rise Time a TRAN NEG DUR Fall Time H TRAN POS OCC Start Time E TRAN NEG OCC Stop Time E POW PULS TOP Pulse Top POW PULS BAS Pulse Base POW AVG Trace Avg POW MAX Trace
119. text returned upon queue query Explanations 113 Undefined header The header is not defined for the device 114 Header suffix out of range The header contains an illegal numeric suffix 120 Numeric data error The command contains a faulty numeric parameter 121 Invalid character in number A numeric contains an invalid character 123 Exponent too large The magnitude of the exponent is larger than 32000 124 Too many digits The numeric contains too many digits Invalid numeric data 128 Numeric data not allowed The command contains a numeric data element in a position where it is not accepted 131 Invalid suffix The suffix is invalid for this device The suffix is the index that indexes the sensor with the SENSe commands 1 4 the CALCulate block with the high level measurement commands 1 4 and the window with the DISP1ay commands 1 4 134 Suffix too long The suffix contains more than 12 characters 138 Suffix not allowed A suffix is not allowed for this command or at this position in the command 141 Invalid character data Either the character data element contains an invalid character or the particular element received is not valid for this command 144 Character data too long The character data element contains too many characters 148 Character data not allowed The character data element used is not allowed for this command or at this position of the command 151 Invalid string data The co
120. that the timeslot structure coincides with the measured envelope e To increase the measurement accuracy expand the window horizontally to such an extent that the selected timeslot is displayed in adequate size perform measurement in the numeric Timeslot Av mode This mode operates with precisely the time resolution available from the sensor sample period In the graphic mode the time resolution is determined by the width of a point pixel SCPI commands User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 131 R amp S NRP2 Instrument Functions ee Displaying traces Select sensor function SENSe lt 1 4 gt FUNCtion ON on page 270 Define calculation of measurement result CALCulate lt 1 8 gt FEED lt 1 2 gt on page 225 Read result FETCh on page 211 4 5 7 1 Measurement results The measured values for the selected time slot and trace waveform are indicated in the info panel below the graph Average Peak Peak Avg Average power peak power and the ratio peak power to average power Remote command Configuring measurement CALCulate lt 1 8 gt FEED lt 1 2 gt on page 225 Retrieving results FETCh on page 211 4 5 7 2 Controls in T Slot display mode Display Selects another view see chapter 4 5 2 Trace window on page 114 Display Config Config T slots e Opens the subdialog Timeslot Config to configure the timeslot structure see chap ter 4 5 7 3 T Slot diagram settings on
121. the R amp S NRP2 1 8 1 Switching on 1 To turn the power on press the main power switch at the rear to position On Fig 1 6 Power switch After power up the instrument is in standby or ready state depending on the state of the ON STANDBY key at the front panel of the instrument when the instrument was switched off for the last time 2 Press the ON STANDBY key to switch the instrument from the standby to ready state gt O J Fig 1 7 ON Standby key green and yellow ready for operation yellow standby AC supply is connected and power supply is operating correctly off off and disconnected from the AC supply 1 8 2 Startup Press the ON STANDBY key to switch to ready state The R amp S NRP2 initiates its startup procedure i e it boots the operating system automatically performs a selftest and starts the instrument firmware If the previous session was terminated regularly the instrument uses the last setup with the relevant instrument settings Use the PRE SET key to return the instrument to its definite reset preset state if the current setup is no longer relevant To customize the start settings use the File dialog box see chapter 4 6 Management of settings on page 140 User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 18 R amp S NRP2 Putting into Operation 1 8 2 1 1 8 2 2 Starting the R amp S NRP2 Start screen Immediately after turning on the start screen appears and the R amp
122. the filter length SENS TRAC AVER COUN mpw the time width of a sample and dt the length of the window in which the measurement is performed SENS STAT TIME Parameters lt minimum gt int_value RST 1e6 SENSe lt 1 4 gt STATistics SCALe X MPWidth Returns the minimum width of a sample on the power axis Parameters lt mpwidth gt float_value User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 281 R amp S NRP2 Remote Control Commands SENSe Sensor Commands Usage Query only SENSe lt 1 4 gt STATistics SCALe X POINts lt number gt Determines the number of samples on the power axis for the Statistics modes or returns the current setting Due to the limited storage capacity of the R amp S NRP2 the number is limited to 1024 Parameters lt number gt int_value Range 1 1024 SENSe lt 1 4 gt STATistics SCALe X RANGe lt range gt Defines together with the SENS STAT SCAL X RLEV command the range on the power axis over which the statistics function CCDF PDF is calculated see figure 6 14 Setting the power axis for statistics measurements Parameters lt range gt float_value Range depending on sensor RST depending on sensor Default unit DB SENSe lt 1 4 gt STATistics SCALe X RLEVel lt rlevel gt Defines together with the SENS STAT SCAL X RANG command the range on the power axis over which the statistics function CCDF PDF is calculated see figure below Density Dist
123. the following e The LIMIT FAIL message is displayed on the screen always e Awarning tone is output optional only when Warning Beep is activated see below e A signalis issued on analog output OUT1 optional chapter 4 7 2 Setting the analog outputs and the trigger input on page 150 Limits 10 000 dBm Upper 4 7 000 dBm Lower 4 Warning Beep 4 Fig 4 43 Limits dialog box xx xxxx dBm Upper Sets the upper limit value and turns monitoring on off Remote command CALCulate lt 1 8 gt LIMit UPPer DATA on page 229 CALCulate lt 1 8 gt LIMit UPPer STATe on page 230 xx xxxx dBm Lower Sets the lower limit value and turns monitoring on off Remote command CALCulate lt 1 8 gt LIMit LOWer DATA on page 228 CALCulate lt 1 8 gt LIMit LOWer STATe on page 229 Warning Beep Activates an acoustic alarm which is output if a limit has been exceeded Remote command CALCulate lt 1 8 gt LIMit BEEP on page 227 4 4 6 Resetting auxiliary information ee d For each window the R amp S NRP2 continuously saves data that is required for displaying the extreme values and statistical values These values can be reset any time To reset the auxiliary values press the lowest softkey in the Measurement menu Aux Val Reset Restarts the search for extreme values and statistical evaluation if activated in the Auxiliaries dialog box Remote command CALCulate lt 1 8 gt EXTRemes RESet on page 22
124. the measured values BUFFET Stores the measured values temporarily to optimize the speed of data transmission to the remote controller User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 207 R amp S NRP2 Remote Control Commands High Level Measurement Commands CONFigure MEASure READ and FETCh 6 3 2 CALCulate System SENSe1 Se MATH EXPRession DRS Doll co n SENSn SENSm i SENSe1 SWR SENSn SENSm SENSe2 REFL SENSn SENSm SENSe3 3 gt RLOS SENSn SENSm SENSe4 Fig 6 3 CALCulate System Eight CALCulate blocks are available to process the data supplied by the sensors These blocks process the results of up to 2 sensors primary and secondary channel together A calculation function can be selected for this purpose with the aid of MATH EXPRession The result can then be correlated to a reference value RELative before it is made available to the user by the UNIT block Measured val ues can be monitored with the LIMit commands 6 4 High Level Measurement Commands CONFigure MEASure READ and FETCh 6 4 1 High level measurement commands The high level measurement commands CONFigure MEASUre READ FETCH combine several low level setting commands and thus simplify programming of the R amp S NRP2 The most convenient command is MEASure This command configures sen sors and calculate blocks initiates a measurement and provides measurement results The other commands perform only portions of these functions and th
125. tico 270 DENSe TA PREQUCNCy FIX CO E 270 fe e LE E FUNCION eran ooo aid 270 DENSe Tk IRCAMMA PHAS E tactica tds 279 SENSe lt 1 4 gt RGAMma MAGNItUOE8 ccooooccccccccccncccccccnoconccnnnnoncnnnonncnnnonnnnnnnnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnononnnnnnnncnnnnnns 278 Ese E e DEE 279 SENSe lt 1 4 gt SGAMma CORRection STA TO occcooccncccoccncccoconcncnnnnnnoncnnononcnnononnnnonannnnnnnnnnononcnnnnonnnnnnennninns 280 SENSe lt 1 4 gt SGAMma PHASG 0 ccseccccessceccccsseeccceseececceseececeseecsccaseeseceseecscceeessoeseeesseeseessoeseeessoes 279 IGENGe DL AzGGAMmalMAcChtudel 279 IGENGe DlL AztGTATistnceAVEHaoed 280 SENSe lt 1 4 gt STATistics OFFSet TIME ooccccoccnnnccccccnnccccccncononcnnnononnnnonnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonancnnnonancnnnnos 281 SENSe lt 1 4 STA TISUES PEAR Prior 281 IGENGe DL AztGTATisnceGAMbilesl MiNmum 281 IGENGe DL AzIGTATisnceGCAlexvMbWdih 281 SENSe lt 11 4 STATISUCS SCALE X POINTS E 282 SENSe lt 1 4 gt STATistics SCALE X RANGG ccccccccceseccccceececcccseecccceseecsccescecccseessccssessceseessscessessoes 282 SENSe lt 1 4 gt 1 STATISUES SCALE X RLE Vel ac io oia 282 IGENGe DlL AzISGTATsnce TIME 283 IGENGe DL AztGSTATsneelEsCudeMiDOEFGel TIMEI 280 SENSe lt 11 4 gt STATISUOS EXC Luce MID a 280 IGENGe DlL At TlMmgEsCLudeGfAht 283 SENSe lt 1 4 1IMing EXCLude S TOP suscita 283 SENSe lt 1 4 gt TRACe AVERage COUN LC oooccccccccccncccnconcn
126. transition causes the update rate of measured values to be reduced since the filter must be completely filled for each new measured value C 4 3 3 Measured value corrections The R amp S NRP2 offers different options for correcting measured values in the instrument These options all require an existing knowledge of the test setup or the time structure of the signal Offsets in the result can be corrected globally and depending on the frequency and it is possible to consider the duty cycle of a signal and the influence of the complex reflection coefficient T of the power source Global offset correction All measured values are multiplied by a correction factor logarithmically added Rol SENS CORRIDEFSISTAT ON global offset correction ON SENS CORR OFFS 20 DE corrects result by 20 dB INIT FETCH Frequency dependent offset correction Two column tables can be entered in which frequencies and correction values can be stored A frequency dependent correction value is determined by linear interpolation in the units Hz and dB using the signal frequency defined with SENS FREQ The interpo lated correction value can be queried with SENS FDOF for checking purposes Example Rol MEM TABL MOVE Table 1 Splitter renames first table MEM TABL SEL Splitter selects table MEM TABL CLEar deletes selected table MEM TABL FREQ 0 1e4 5e4 1e5 1e9 interpolation points on the frequency axis User Manual 117
127. trol The manual control of the R amp S NRP2 is designed for ergonomic operation This means among other things that certain parameters are assigned default values that cannot be changed and that specific changes of device settings influence other settings In the remote control mode all settings can be changed and the user has to make sure that the device is correctly set for the measurement to be performed We therefore recommend performing a reset RST on page 198 or SYSTem PRESet on page 323 prior to a remote control measurement so that the device is placed in a defined state 5 1 1 Display In the remote mode the display of measured values can be disabled set SYS Tem SPEed to FAST the display is cleared except for a status line at the top of the screen Blanking of menu elements that need not be continually updated increases the data processing speed The display can be reactivated by setting the SCPI command SYSTem SPEed to NORM The backlighting can also be completely switched off by setting command DiSPlay LLumination to OFF but this does not affect the speed In the remote mode the menu line at the upper screen edge is blanked and replaced by the indication Remote Mode The R amp S NRP2 is able to emulate different power meters with alternative command sets The currently used command set is indicated in the middle of the status line The SCPI error queue can be displayed using the topmost softkey labeled Error List
128. us 4 Excluded from Start from End 50 000 Us 50 000 us 4 Fence 4 Start of Fence Length of Fence 200 000 ps 40 000 pus 4 Fig 4 60 Timeslot Config dialog box No of Timeslots Defines the number of subsequent timeslots within a frame e a period of the signal Remote command SENSe lt 1 4 gt POWer TSLot COUNt on page 2 7 Nominal Width Defines the length of a timeslot User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 133 R amp S NRP2 Instrument Functions Displaying traces Example lf measurements are performed on TDMA signals GSM EDGE PDC NADC PHS etc the nominal timeslot length must be entered here i e the frame length divided by the number of timeslots Table 4 10 GSM signal e mees e Remote command SENSe lt 1 4 gt POWer TSLot AVG WIDTh on page 278 Excluded from Start End Defines the intervals at the start or end of the timeslot which are excluded from the mea surement Measurement can thus be restricted to the relevant part of a timeslot Remote command SENSe lt 1 4 gt TIMing EXCLude STARt on page 283 SENSe lt 1 4 gt TIMing EXCLude STOP on page 283 Fence Activates the Fence function Within the measurement period a fence i e an exclusion interval can be set The fence is defined by its start time and its length In contrast to the numeric T slotAv mode the definition of fences in the T slot mode is not restricted to the wideband power sensors of the R a
129. usuario o de da os en el producto que tambi n pueden redundar en peligro para las personas No utilice el producto en condiciones en las que pueda producirse o ya se hayan producido condensaciones sobre el producto o en el interior de ste como p ej al desplazarlo de un lugar fr o a otro caliente La entrada de agua aumenta el riesgo de choque el ctrico Antes de la limpieza desconecte por completo el producto de la alimentaci n de tensi n p ej red de alimentaci n o bater a Realice la limpieza de los aparatos con un pa o suave que no se deshilache No utilice bajo ning n concepto productos de limpieza qu micos como alcohol acetona o diluyentes para lacas nitrocelul sicas 1171 0000 42 07 Page 11 Instrucciones de seguridad elementales Funcionamiento 1 El uso del producto requiere instrucciones especiales y una alta concentraci n durante el manejo Debe asegurarse que las personas que manejen el producto est n a la altura de los requerimientos necesarios en cuanto a aptitudes f sicas ps quicas y emocionales ya que de otra manera no se pueden excluir lesiones o da os de objetos El empresario u operador es responsable de seleccionar el personal usuario apto para el manejo del producto Antes de desplazar o transportar el producto lea y tenga en cuenta el cap tulo Transporte Como con todo producto de fabricaci n industrial no puede quedar excluida en general la posibilidad de que se produzcan alergias
130. with the corresponding bits of the PPE bit 6 is also used in contrast to the SRE The IST flag is obtained by ORing all results together The PPE can be set by the PRE command and read by the PRE query 6 13 7 Device Status Register This register contains information on current device states CONDition register or states that occurred since the last query EVENt register The register can be read by the queries STATus DEVice CONDition or STATus DEVice EVENt Table 6 19 Meaning of bits used in the Device Status Register Sensor A connected Sensor B connected Sensor A error Sensor A is erroneous Sensor B error Sensor B is erroneous Sensor A Front Rear Indicates whether sensor A is connected at the front bit is not set or rear bit is set of the device device Sensor C connected Sensor D connected Sensor C error Sensor C is erroneous Sensor D error Sensor D is erroneous Sensor C Front Rear Indicates whether sensor C is connected at the front bit is not set or rear bit is set of the device Sensor B Front Rear Indicates whether sensor B is connected at the front bit is not set or rear bit is set of the User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 304 R amp S NRP2 6 13 8 6 13 9 Remote Control Commands STATus Sensor D Front Rear Indicates whether sensor D is connected at the front bit is not set or rear bit is set of the device A gt Key pressed This bit i
131. 0 02 04 236 R amp S NRP2 Remote Control Commands 6 6 CALibration Unit s RST 0s CAL Culate lt 1 8 gt TRACe MARKer lt 1 2 gt YPOSition Is available with trace measurements It returns the position of a curve marker on the power axis if the value is valid The unit depends on the trace function Units W for trace function SINGLE DB for trace function RATIO Usage Query only CALibration Suffix 1 4 denotes the four sensors Calibration can be performed for only one of the sensors using header CALibration lt 1 4 gt orfor all Sensors using header CALL Diet On EE EE CALIBRA LADA TA ME 237 CALDAS A ZERAUTO EE 237 Be eErlei KB d CC e vT E Mt e E 231 CALIBRA 1 A ECONO STA EE 238 CAlibratton 11 4 gt RCALIDrSttO STATE ci din 238 A A no o 238 CAUlbratoncfil As TEST nkore karar knkakannrokananoraanann 238 CALIDO 1d LECH E MISION ida 238 CALibration lt s 1 4 gt TES IR VETENO Pai deinen n i idiari siaaa ai 238 CALibration lt 1 4 gt ZERO FAST AUTO 0 cccccccscsccscrscsrscccucecceccecuscecussecuarransrrasssrassursssas 239 CALIDIATIORIAL LIZ ERO FAS TAIT rice ccvscicsnocccavatsandnaninedetawdmendisensenbinndasen Aaaa aaa 239 CALibration lt 1 4 gt DATA lt data gt Read and write binary calibration data sets for the selected sensor Parameters lt data gt block_data CALibration lt 1 4 gt ZERO AUTO lt auto gt CALibration ALL ZERO AUTO lt state gt Performs zeroin
132. 03 The strings have the following meanuing Rohde amp Schwarz manufacturer NRP2 instrument type 10001 serial number 07 03 firmware version Usage Query only IST lt status_bit gt Individual STatus query returns the current value of the IST flag in decimal form The IST flag is the status bit which is sent during a parallel poll chapter 6 13 6 IST Flag and Parallel Poll Enable Register PPE on page 304 Parameters lt StatusBit gt OI Usage Query only OPC Setting Command OPC OPeration Complete sets bit O in the event status register after all preceding commands have been executed This bit can be used to initiate a service request OPC must be sent at the end of a program message Query OPC OPperation Complete query returns a 1 when all previous commands have been pro cessed It is important that the timeout set on the IEC IEEE bus is sufficiently long User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 196 R amp S NRP2 Remote Control Commands SSS Common Commands to IEEE 488 2 Since OPC waits until all previous commands are executed 1 is returned in all cases OPC basically functions like the wAI command but WAT does not return a response OPC is preferred to WAI because with OPC the execution of commands can be queried from a controller program before new commands are sent This avoids an over flow of the input queue when too many commands are sent that cannot be executed Unlike swat O
133. 07 Page 12 Instrucciones de seguridad elementales Reparaci n y mantenimiento 1 El producto solamente debe ser abierto por personal especializado con autorizaci n para ello Antes de manipular el producto o abrirlo es obligatorio desconectarlo de la tensi n de alimentaci n para evitar toda posibilidad de choque el ctrico El ajuste el cambio de partes el mantenimiento y la reparaci n deber n ser efectuadas solamente por electricistas autorizados por Rohde amp Schwarz Si se reponen partes con importancia para los aspectos de seguridad p ej el enchufe los transformadores o los fusibles solamente podr n ser sustituidos por partes originales Despu s de cada cambio de partes relevantes para la seguridad deber realizarse un control de seguridad control a primera vista control del conductor de protecci n medici n de resistencia de aislamiento medici n de la corriente de fuga control de funcionamiento Con esto queda garantizada la seguridad del producto Bater as y acumuladores o celdas Si no se siguen o se siguen de modo insuficiente las indicaciones en cuanto a las bater as y acumuladores o celdas pueden producirse explosiones incendios y o lesiones graves con posible consecuencia de muerte El manejo de bater as y acumuladores con electrolitos alcalinos p ej celdas de litio debe seguir el est ndar EN 62133 1 2 No deben desmontarse abrirse ni triturarse las celdas Las celdas o bater as no
134. 1 4 gt MID POW AVG POW BURS AVG POW TSL AVG XTIM POW d Depending on sensor Depending on sensor SENS lt 1 4 gt TGAT lt 1 4 gt MID Depending on sensor SENS lt TIME SENS lt OFFS SENS lt 1 SENS ENS 1 1 TIME ET 4 gt TGAT lt 1 4 gt MID 4 gt TGAT lt 1 4 gt 4 gt TIME 4 gt RANG AUT 4 gt RANG CLEV SENS 4 gt SGAM CORR STAT SENS 4 gt SGAM PHAS SEN 4 gt SMO S SENS E E T SCAL X POIN T SCAL X RANG SCAL X RLEV User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 a P DEES Depending on sensor Depending on sensor SS 202 R amp S NRP2 S lt 1 4 gt TIM EXCL STARt TIM EXCL STOP Remote Control Commands Common Commands to IEEE 488 2 ET Tt lt NRf gt SENS lt 1 AUTO MTIMe SENS lt 1 2 4 gt SNE AUTO RES SENS lt 1 4 gt lt NR1 gt AUTO POIN SENS lt 1 4 gt lt NRE gt AUTO NSR OFF Depending on sensor Depending on sensor Depending on sensor Depending on sensor Depending on sensor SENS lt T 1 gt RES NSR Depending on sensor AUTO TYPE MOV PRES and SYSTem PRESet REP RST OFFS TIME lt NR gt Depending on sensor lt NR1 gt Depending on sensor lt NR gt Depending on sensor SENS lt 1 ON OFF
135. 1 4 gt RESolution on page 245 which tries to set the sensors involved in the measurement result accordingly For further details see chapter 4 Instrument Functions on page 61 However SENS lt 1 4 gt AVER COUN AUTO RES does not affect the DISPlay com mand The parameters of the two commands are different but have the same meaning SENS lt 1 4 gt AVER COUN AUTO RES DISP lt 1 4 gt RES User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 285 R amp S NRP2 Remote Control Commands EE SENSe Sensor Commands Parameters lt resolution gt 1 2 3 4 Range depending on sensor RST depending on sensor SENSe lt 1 4 gt TRACe AVERage COUNt AUTO POINt lt value gt Specifies the measured value in the Trace mode used for the automatic determination of the filter length Parameters lt value gt int_value Range depending on sensor RST depending on sensor SENSe lt 1 4 gt TRACe AVERage COUNt AUTO NSRatio lt maximum_noise gt Indicates the maximum noise ratio in the measurement result for the Trace mode The setting is taken into account only if SENS lt 1 4 gt TRAC AVER COUN AUTO ON and SENS lt 1 4 gt TRAC AVER COUN AUTO TYPE NSR are set Unit DB PCT Parameters lt maximum_noise gt float_value Range depending on sensor RST depending on sensor Default unit DB SENSe lt 1 4 gt TRACe AVERage COUNt AUTO TYPE lt trace_mode gt Selects the operating method for the automatic filter
136. 1 8 gt LIMIE BEEP cata 227 CAL CulatecJl Gs UMtCLEarcAUlTO 227 CAL Culate lt 1 8 gt LIMit CLEar IMMediate ooooccocoocccoccoccccoococonocnonccnononcannonnonanonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonnncnnnos 227 CALCulate lt M 8 gt LINIEPATE occiso ica 227 CAL Culate lt H 6 gt CINE ee EE 228 CALCulate lt 1 8 gt LUMIELOWer STA KE 229 CALCu late lt 1 8 gt LIMItLOWer DA TA EEN 228 CALCulate lt 1 8 gt LIMitLOWer DATAJPO Wer oo oonccnccccncncccccnncccccnococononononncnnnnoncnnnnonnnnononnnnononnnnonnnnnncnnnos 228 CAL Culate lt 1 5 gt LIMIE LOWerT DATAJ RATIO caci n iii a ai 228 Te EE OSCH E E 229 CALCulate lt 1 8 gt LIMitUPPer STA TO ooocooonccccccccnncccocnncccocnncnconnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnos 230 CALCulate lt 1 8 gt LIMit UPPer DATA ccccccccssseeccssecceeeeeceseecsaseseeuaeesseeessagseceeueeesuseessaneesseuseessages 229 CAL CulatecJl GM Uber DATAlIbOWWer 229 CAL CulatecJl GM Uber DATAIRATo 230 CAL CulatecJl Gs MATHIEXbbessonl 230 CAL CulatecJl Gs MATHIEXbbessontCATalog 231 CAL CulatecJl Gs MAvmum DATA 232 User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 407 R amp S NRP2 List of Commands CALCulate lt 7 20 gt MEAN DATA seiac cxeaiecteatenietientnc inate binedeniiiediiediediunndleieele ie 232 CALC ulate RN gt MINIMUM DA TA usadas 232 e EN Ps del a c 12 A ido 232 CAL CulatecJl GRELL ative bOWer MAChNtudel 233 CAL CulatecJl GRELL ativehbRATolMAch
137. 1 Tee SAS a ica 331 LE AAA 332 io US A 332 TRlGoerzJ1l AzcMAGTertGTATel 332 Miss A tee 332 E ee coat ri ee ee 332 TRIGOer UA io ira 332 tee Re TEE 332 TRIGger lt 4 1 4 gt SYNChronize STATE cn 333 ABORt lt 1 4 gt ABORt ALL Immediately sets the respective sensors to the IDLE state Measurements in progress are interrupted If INIT CONT ON is set a new measurement is immediately started since the trigger system is not influenced Usage Setting only INITiate lt 1 4 gt CONTinuous lt state gt INITiate ALL CONTinuous lt state gt Selects either single shot or continuous free running measurement cycles In the course of a measurement cycle a sensor passes through the IDLE INITIATED WAIT _FOR_TRG and MEASURING states before it is again set to the IDLE INIT CONT OFF or the INITIATED INIT CONT ON state The settings are not changed when control is switched from manual to remote INIT CONT ON is set when remote control is switched back to manual control User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 327 R amp S NRP2 Remote Control Commands TRIGger Parameters lt state gt ON OFF ON Continuous measurements are performed If a measurement is completed the respective sensors do not return to the IDLE state but are immediately set to INITIATED and then to WAIT FOR_TRG OFF A measurement cycle is only performed once After completion the sensors remain in the IDLE state INIT CONT OFF has no effect when the
138. 2 Putting into Operation Front panel tour T 4 6 Fig 1 1 Front panel view 1 POWER REF connector 2 Display 3 Softkeys 4 Hardkeys 5 Cursor keys 6 On Standby key and standby LEDs 7 Sensor connectors 1 5 1 Display The R amp S NRP2 displays results in windows Depending on the measurement mode values are displayed digitally in a combined digital and analog mode or graphically The display mode can be selected individually for each measurement e you can per form both graphical and numerical representations simultaneously User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 10 R amp S NRP2 Putting into Operation Front panel tour Graphical display 300 0 Uu idiw pa AA heh 100 0 psi di A Average 384 713 ps pa 1 093 mUJ 15 658 ps 16 567 ps Fig 1 2 Trace in Pulse display in Trace Statistic mode The meter shows the results in a measurement curve e as a function of time This presentation is obtained in Trace amp Statistics mode see chapter 4 5 Displaying traces on page 113 The window is tiled in several sections e the status bar on top of the screen indicates information concerning the measure ment and instrument state e the display area shows the measurement curve including markers result and time axes information and further auxiliary values e the control panel on the right offers functions for direct setting of the screen or the access of further subdial
139. 2 off and on again Power On Reset CH The remote control command LLO also allows the ESC LOCAL key to be disabled In this 5 5 Automatic Settings when Switching between Local and Remote The table below lists the settings automatically performed when switching between the remote and local modes User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 172 R amp S NRP2 Remote Control Fundamentals A Communication on Data Lines Table 5 1 Automatic Settings when switching between Local and Remote Local to Remote Remote to Local SENS AVER TCON REP SENS AVER TCON MOV ABORT ALL INIT ALL CONT ON DISP MESS OFF DISP MESS OFF In each CALCulate block where is set as an output unit UNIT POWer RATio DPCT UNIT POWER RATio Ois set The automatic storage of the instru The automatic storage of the instrument settings is reactivated in ment settings is deactivated in the non the nonvolatile memory volatile memory SPEED NORMal IS BUFF STAT OFF IS AVER STAT ON IS TRACe AVER STAT ON IS AVER COUNt AUTO OFF ContAv Burst timegate timeslot and trace TRIG DEL 0 TRIG HOLD 0 TRIG DEL AUTO OFF TRIG SOUR IMM PREGeCOUNG 2 TRIG DEL AUTO OFF otk UEN TRIG COUNt 1 TRIG ATR OFF 5 6 Communication on Data Lines The GPIB bus is the most common remote interface for measuring instruments It has also been implemented in the R amp S NRP2 The remote controller and the R amp S NRP2 communicate by mean
140. 218 R amp S NRP2 Remote Control Commands High Level Measurement Commands CONFigure MEASure READ and FETCh tions High level commands on page 215 and chapter 6 4 4 Parameter list descrip tion on page 212 FETCh lt 1 8 gt SCALar POWer AVG FETCh lt 1 8 gt SCALar POWer AVG RELative FETCh lt 1 8 gt SCALar POWer AVG DiFFerence FETCh lt 1 8 gt SCALar POWer AVG DIFFerence RELative FETCh lt 1 8 gt SCALar POWer AVG SUM FETCh lt 1 8 gt SCALar POWer AVG SUM RELative FETCh lt 1 8 gt SCALar POWer AVG RATio FETCh lt 1 8 gt SCALar POWer AVG RATio RELative FETCh lt 1 8 gt SCALar POWer AVG SWR FETCh lt 1 8 gt SCALar POWer AVG REFLection FETCh lt 1 8 gt SCALar POWer AVG RLOSs lt expected_value gt lt resolution gt lt source_list gt FETCh commands for measurement mode ContAv FETCh lt 1 8 gt SCALar POWer TSLot FETCh lt 1 8 gt SCALar POWer TSLot RELative FETCh lt 1 8 gt SCALar POWer TSLot DiFFerence FETCh lt 1 8 gt SCALar POWer TSLot DIFFerence RELative FETCh lt 1 8 gt SCALar POWer TSLot SUM FETCh lt 1 8 gt SCALar POWer TSLot SUM RELative FETCh lt 1 8 gt SCALar POWer TSLot RATio FETCh lt 1 8 gt SCALar POWer TSLot RATio RELative FETCh lt 1 8 gt SCALar POWer TSLot SWR FETCh lt 1 8 gt SCALar POWer TSLot REFLection FETCh lt 1 8 gt SCALar P
141. 3 9140 02 04 395 R amp S NRP2 Programming Measurements C 4 4 C 4 4 1 Measuring with low level commands MEM TABL GAIN 3 1 3 1 3 0 2 9 2 9 associated offset values SENS FREQ 900 MHZ signal frequency SENS CORR FDOT STAT ON activates frequency dependent offset correction SENG CORR FDOT Splitter selects an offset table SENS CORR FDOF queries correction value used INIT FETCh This example assumes that a table called Table 1 is available Duty cycle If the duty cycle of a pulsed signal SENS DCYC is reported to the R amp S NRP2 the R amp S NRP2 delivers the average power in the pulse Example RSI SENS CORR DCYC STAT ON duty cycle correction SENS CORRS DCYC 30 PCT duty cycle of 30 INIT FETCh Reflection coefficient of the source source gamma Reflections at the power source may distort the result If the reflection coefficient of the source is known it can be specified for the measured value correction via command path SENS SGAM Example RST SENS SGAM CORR STAT ON considers the reflection coefficient of the source SENS SGAM MAGN 0 01 magnitude of the reflection coefficient SENS SGAM PHAS 179 phase angle of the reflection coefficient INIT FETCh Configuration of CALCulate blocks The function of the CALCulate blocks has already been explained Its most important task is the calculation and provision of measurement results Calculation function and relati
142. 4 CDMA2000 Sensor parameter Remote control command in Value short form Aperture Time SENS APER Duty Cycle Correction SENS DCYC STAT OFF User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 377 R amp S NRP2 C 1 C 1 1 Programming Measurements Measuring with high level commands Programming Measurements Measuring with high level commands The R amp S NRP2 is based on the instrument model defined in the SCPI 1999 0 standard This model provides a number of logic blocks that can be configured via remote control commands The R amp S NRP2 is provided with high level measurement commands that automatically perform the most important settings and simplify measurements thus mak ing it unnecessary to completely configure these blocks for each measurement Only the high level commands are described starting with the simplest command which is expan ded in the following sections Note the following for the syntax of commands There is a short and a long form for the commands The short form is normally used However commands are sometimes indi cated in their long form so that their meaning is easier to understand The R amp S NRP2 makes no distinction between upper case and lower case letters they are only used to distinguish between the short and long form The simplest measurement The simplest way to obtain a measured value is to use the high level measurement com mand MEAS which configures sensor 1 in the ContAv mode
143. 40 DiS Pray MES sde TEA ATA cocinar ri ii acne 241 MET MESS Ace TT PE soria iia 241 RAL ak 2 eta cae vicnane E E T E is liada decena 241 A EE e 241 DiSblavfWlNDowlslfil As AVAlLue 242 DiSblavfWlNDowlsfil As EORMst 242 DISPlay WINDow lt 1 4 gt METer AUTO cccceccescecssecscescecceccercaceaceececeercaesaceaceacercereareaneae 243 DISPlay WINDow lt 1 4 gt ANALOG AUTO cccceccecceccesceecceccercacceccarcascaeeacearseseeseeseeaeeaeeas 243 DiSblavfWlNDowlsfil As METerLiWer 243 DiSblavfWlNDowlsfil As ANALog LiVer 243 DISPlay WINDow s lt 1 4 gt METer LOWer POWED cccecsccecsesesscecceccescescescersersersarsanesearees 244 DiSblavfWlNDowlsfil As ANALog L ivWer POer 244 DiSblavfWlNDowlsfil As METerLOWerR flo 244 DISPlay WINDow lt 1 4 gt ANALOg LOWer RATi0 c cescescescesceccecceceececeeccesseseeaeeaeeaeeaeeas 244 DiSblavfWlNDowlsfil As METerUbper 244 DISPlay WINDow lt 1 4 gt ANALOG UPPEV cecceccessecsececceseeceescescercaccatsacsaeeseeaerereareareas 244 DiSblavfWlNDowlsfil As METer Uber POWer 244 DISPlay WINDow lt 1 4 gt ANALog UPPer POWeEr asnanonaioionaranioneriisrararinreriraninrnrnnrern 244 DiSblavfWlNDowlsfil As METerUbperR Tlo 245 DISPlay WINDow lt 1 4 gt ANALOg UPPer RATI0 c cecsecessssceseesceceeseescescersereercareareateareas 245 User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 239 R amp S NRP2 Remote Control Commands DISPlay DISPlay WINDow lt 1 4 gt NA
144. 5 User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 112 R amp S NRP2 Instrument Functions Displaying traces 4 5 Displaying traces Many sensors allow you to graphically display the envelope power versus time and some also allow you to display the amplitude distribution as CCDF CDF or PDF Two waveforms or two amplitude distribution functions can be shown in the same dia gram A waveform may either be a representation of absolute envelope power for one channel over time or the ratio of the envelope powers of two channels over time 4 5 1 Basic settings for trace display The trace display can be quickly selected after a preset 1 Connect a sensor to the R amp S NRP2 any channel The sensor must support trace measurements true for all sensors except for the R amp S NRP Z9x R amp S NRP Z5x and R amp S NRP Z27 Z37 sensors 2 Apply a pulsed signal to the sensor The amplitude of the signal has to be sufficient for reliable triggering 3 Perform a preset PRESET hardkey 4 Select Mode in the Sensor menu Sensor Windows Measurement File System B Cont Av e A 2 4 Auto A net A Offset Filter iL jz EE ir Range 4 B EE T Correction A 60 00 cain rico The Mode dialog box opens Sensor Windows Measurement File System T slot T gate Burst Ay Ay Au 4 Auto orf Equivalent Sampling 4 5 Select Trace Statistics The trace window opens User Manual 1173 9140 02
145. 5ky 3KR S5kybR Bootmenu yuboard Test When all keys pressed MEHMNU DEL uP LEFT RIGHT DOHA ESC L P RES ET Fig 8 10 Service menu Keyboard test Press each key once in any order Each time a key is pressed the R amp S NRP2 responds acoustically and marks the identified key If you press a key more than once the instrument displays a warning message This dialog box closes if you either have pressed all keys or if you have not pressed any key within 15 seconds Buzzer Test Tests the beeper acoustic alarm Power Ref Calibration Presets the reference signal provided option R amp S NRP2 B1 sensor check source is installed Power Level 1mH RIIT Cancel Fig 8 11 Service menu Power Ref Calibration Sets the power level and activates the reference signal Bootmenu R amp S NRP2 Remote control interfaces GPIB Bus Interface A Remote control interfaces This section covers hardware related topics on the remote control interfaces like pin assignment of the GPIB bus interface For information on how to set up a remote control connection via the different interfaces see chapter 5 2 Connecting a Controller to the Base Unit on page 170 For information on how to configure the interfaces see chapter 4 7 1 Configuring the remote control interfaces on page 144 All other hardware interfaces are described in chapter 1 6 Rear Panel Tour on page 15 For specifications re
146. 88 2 Limit violation Number of limit violations is reset Upper limit value for measure ments O Wor D DB OFF No monitoring function for upper limit value 0 Wor 0 DB Lower limit value for measure ments No monitoring function for lower limit value The calculate block returns the measured value of the sensor For command description see page 230 CALC lt 1 8 gt REL CALC lt 1 8 gt REL POW 8 gt REL RAT CALC lt 1 1 8 gt RELISTAT DISP ILL DISP MESS DISP MESS TEXT D ISP MESS TYPE DISP SEL DISP SIZ D E ISP lt 1 4 gt DISP lt 1 4 gt AVAL DISP lt 1 4 gt FORM DISP lt 1 4 gt MET LOW DISP lt 1 4 gt MET UPP DISP lt 1 4 gt NAME DISP lt 1 4 gt RES DISP SEL User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 assigned to the primary channel O DBM or O DB O DBM O DB OFF Measurements are not converted into a reference value Display lighting remains unchanged Do not display messages Messages cannot be confirmed manually First window selected Automatic window sizes A window is opened automatically for each connected sensor OFF MESS NORM ON O Hy j NONE No additional information on mea sured values displayed DIG Digital result display 90 DBM Lower limit value for analog result 120 DB display 70 DBM Upper limit value for analog result 60 DB
147. 90 DBM Default unit DBM DISPlay WINDow lt 1 4 gt METer LOWer RATio lt lower_ratio gt DISPlay WINDow lt 1 4 gt ANALog LOWer RATio lt lower_ratio gt Sets the lower limit value of the analog scale This value is used if the unit of the mea surement result is dB percent or the number 1 i e the measurement result is a power ratio Value range See table 6 12 Value range Unit DB DPCT O Parameters lt lower_ratio gt float_value RST 120 DB Default unit DB DISPlay WINDow lt 1 4 gt METer UPPer lt upper_limit gt DISPlay WINDow lt 1 4 gt ANALog UPPer lt upper_limit gt Sets the upper limit value of the analog scale The value range depends on the current output unit of the measured value of the window Unit See table 6 10 Value ranges depending on the unit Parameters lt upper_limit gt float_value RST 30 DBM or 60 DB DISPlay WINDow lt 1 4 gt METer UPPer POWer lt upper_limit gt DISPlay WINDow lt 1 4 gt ANALog UPPer POWer lt upper_limit gt Sets the upper limit value of the analog scale This value is used if the unit of the mea surement result is Watt dBm or dBuV Le the measurement result is a power Value range See table 6 10 Value ranges depending on the unit Unit DBM W DBUV User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 244 R amp S NRP2 Remote Control Commands DISPlay Parameters lt upper_limit gt float_value RST 30 DBM Default unit DBM DISPla
148. AD lt 1 8 gt SCALar POWer AVG RATio RELative READ lt 1 8 gt SCALar POWer AVG SWR READ lt 1 8 gt SCALar POWer AVG REFLection READ lt 1 8 gt SCALar POWer AVG RLOSs lt expected_value gt lt resolution gt lt source_list gt READ commands for measurement mode ContAv User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 220 R amp S NRP2 Remote Control Commands High Level Measurement Commands CONFigure MEASure READ and FETCh READ lt 1 8 gt SCALar POWer TSLot READ lt 1 8 gt SCALar POWer TSLot RELative READ lt 1 8 gt SCALar POWer TSLot DIFFerence READ lt 1 8 gt SCALar POWer TSLot DIFFerence RELative READ lt 1 8 gt SCALar POWer TSLot SUM READ lt 1 8 gt SCALar POWer TSLot SUM RELative READ lt 1 8 gt SCALar POWer TSLot RATio READ lt 1 8 gt SCALar POWer TSLot RATio RELative READ lt 1 8 gt SCALar POWer TSLot SWR READ lt 1 8 gt SCALar POWer TSLot REFLection READ lt 1 8 gt SCALar POWer TSLot RLOSs lt tslot_width gt lt no_slots gt lt start_exclude gt lt end_exclude gt lt expected_value gt lt resolution gt lt source_list gt READ commands for measurement mode T Slot READ lt 1 8 gt SCALar POWer BURSt READ lt 1 8 gt SCALar POWer BURSt RELative READ lt 1 8 gt SCALar POWer BURSt DIFFerence READ lt 1 8 gt SCALar POWer BURSt DIFFerence RELative READ lt 1 8 gt SCALar POWe
149. ATe on page 258 Window 1 23 4 lt Analog Mode Selects the window the output refers to Only windows that are operated in Dig or D amp A window mode are available for selec tion See chapter 4 3 3 3 Selecting the result display mode on page 93 for the setting the display mode Remote command OUTPut RECorder lt 1 2 gt FEED on page 255 OUTPut TTL FEED on page 260 0 V Equivalent Analog Analog Mode Entry of the measurement value that corresponds to the output voltage of O V Remote command OUTPut RECorder lt 1 2 gt LIMit LOWer on page 256 OUTPut RECorder lt 1 2 gt LIMit LOWer POWer on page 256 OUTPut RECorder lt 1 2 gt LIMit LOWer RATio on page 256 3 V Equivalent Analog Analog Mode Entry of the measurement value that corresponds to the output voltage of 3 V Remote command OUTPut RECorder lt 1 2 gt LIMit UPPer on page 257 OUTPut RECorder lt 1 2 gt LIMit UPPer POWer on page 257 OUTPut RECorder lt 1 2 gt LIMit UPPer RATio on page 257 Pass Fail Mode The output provides a logic signal in the selected window to indicate that a limit value has been exceeded User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 152 R amp S NRP2 Instrument Functions system settings Fig 4 83 Out1 mode Pass Fail Remote command OUTPut TTL STATe on page 260 Window 1 23 4 lt Pass Fail Mode Selects the window the output refers to Only windows that are operated in
150. AVG RANGe on page 273 User def d transition Activates a shift of the transition region s Remote command SENSe lt 1 4 gt POWer AVG RANGe CLEVel on page 273 Offset Negative dB value as a measure for the shift of the transition region s Modifications are immediately effective after each keystroke see chapter 3 5 Dialog boxes and their controls on page 53 Remote command SENSe lt 1 4 gt POWer AVG RANGe CLEVel on page 273 4 2 5 Effect of the RF source Information related to the reflection coefficient of the signal source is provided in the T Correction dialog box gamma correction l Correction is used to increase measure ment accuracy by correcting the effect of source mismatch on the measured value 4 2 5 1 Sensor T correction dialog box gt Open the correction dialog box in the Sensor menu If Tu correction is activated the measurement accuracy can be increased by specifying magnitude and phase of source T User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 84 R amp S NRP2 Instrument Functions EE Data acquisition and parameters F Correction Fig 4 19 Correction dialog box A B C D Tabs for selecting the sensor Note In remote control commands select the sensor with the suffix in command SENSe lt 1 4 gt Le choose suffix 1 for channel A channel 2 for B and so on Source Correction Activates gamma correction in order to achieve higher measurement accuracy
151. B PCT User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 253 R amp S NRP2 Remote Control Commands MEMory Parameters lt NRf gt lt NRf gt Enters offset values in the second column of the table selected with MEM TABL SEL RST Tables are not changed in case of a RST Default unit DB MEMory TABLe GAIN POINts Returns the number of entries lines in the table selected with MEM TABL SEL lt SLEING Usage Query only MEMory TABLe MAP lt string gt 1 9 The numbers 0 to 9 are permanently assigned to the memory locations for device states Names lt string gt can be assigned to the numbers with MEM TABL MAP The MEM CLE NAME MEM TABL MOVE and MEM TABL SEL commands expect these names as parameters not the numbers of the memory locations By default the tables are assigned the names Table 1 to Table 10 The name can contain the characters A to Z a to Zz 0 to 9 and _ The query form of this command returns the number of the memory location with the name lt map gt Parameters lt string gt 1 9 maps the string on the selected memory locations for device states MEMory TABLe MOVE lt string gt lt string gt This command allows tables to be renamed The first parameter specifies the old name the second the new name No data is copied Le only the name of the table changes Example MEM TABL MOVE Table 1 Test setup Renames the table Table 1 into Test setup Usage Setting only
152. CA att bOWerlBURGChRE El echon 219 FE TOhliL SSltSCA att bOWerlBURGChRElL atve 219 FETCh lt 1 8 gt SCALar POWer BURSERLOSS oocccccocccccccccccccconocccnncnocononononononnnnnoncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnncnnnnnnos 219 FE TOhlIL BsltSCA art POWert BURG GUM AE 219 FE TOhliL SSltSCA att bOWertBURGCGUMREL atve 219 FE TOhliL SStSCAL att POWer BURG GW 219 FETCh lt 1 8 gt SCALar POWer TSLO ooccccocccccccnconccccnccccnonoconcnncononnnnnnnnononnnonononnnnnnnnonannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnns 219 FE TOhliL SstSCA att bOWert TGotDlkterence iii iataniinirn noire iaieiiea iiaia 219 FE TOhliL SStSCA att bOWerl TGotDlkterencehRtlatve 219 FETCH lt 1 5 gt ESCALar sPOWer TSLOURA WO EE 219 FE TOhliL SStSCA att bOWert TGSLorhRATobREl atve 219 FETCh lt 1 8 gt SCALar POWer TSLot REFLection o ococoooococcooconoccccoconncncononcnononononooncnnonnncnnonanenos 219 FE TOhliL SsltSCA att bOWert TGLorhREl atve 219 PETChs lt 1 6 gt SCALar POW er RR EE ee Ce 219 FE TOhliL SsltSCA arttbOWert TGLotrGUM 219 FE TOhliL SStSCA att bOWert TGSLorGUM REI atve 219 FETCh lt 1 8 gt SCALar POWer TSLoOt SWR ooonccccccccnccccnonccconoconoconcnoncnnnonanonnnnnnnonnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnonaninnns 219 FE TOhliL SsltSCA att bOWerlf ANGEL 219 FE TOhliL SSltSCA att bOWerlAVGlilkterence 219 User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 410 R amp S NRP2 List of Commands FETCh lt 1 8 gt SCALar POWer AVG DIFFerence RELatiVe ooocc
153. Control Commands ss SENSe Sensor Commands Parameters lt state gt ON OFF ONCE ON The automatic switchover is activated the sensor always defines a suitable filter length which can also be queried via SENS lt 1 4 gt AVER COUN OFF The automatic switchover is deactivated ONCE The automatic switchover is deactivated and the suitable filter length is then defined and set automatically The setting can then be queried via SENS lt 1 4 gt AVER COUN RST depending on sensor SENSe lt 1 4 gt TRACe AVERage COUNt AUTO MTIMe lt mtime gt If the R amp S NRP2 has to determine the filter length automatically in the Trace mode the filter length can become large and thus also the time to fill the filter An upper time limit maximum time can be set via SENS lt 1 4 gt AVER COUN AUTO MTIME It should never be exceeded Undesired long measurement times can thus be prevented in the SENS AVER COUN AUTO TYPE NSR mode if the automatic filter length switchover is on Parameters lt mtime gt float_value Range depending on sensor RST depending on sensor Default unit S SENSe lt 1 4 gt TRACe AVERage COUNt AUTO RESolution lt resolution gt Defines the number of significant places for the Trace mode for linear units and the num ber of decimal places for logarithmic units which should be free of noise in the measure ment result This setting is also performed by the command DISPlay WINDow lt
154. D I1lL Ss ARavl POWerll AVGISUM 221 HREAID I1lL Ss ARavl POWerll AVGIGSUMREL atve 221 HREAID I1lL Ss ARavl POWerll AVGIGWR 221 READS 18 gt STATSUES COD Poo ata te cria 222 READ ie il eo S TA E PDE si 222 Pe IM FOW Cd E 222 READ lt 1 8 gt XTIMe POWer J RATlO occcoooccccccccnccccccnnccoconoconnnonnncnnnnncononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnononnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnninns 222 IR KN Re el UR 221 HREAUD I1L SSTSGCAL art bOWert BUlRGCDlFterence 221 READ lt 1 8 gt SCALar POWer BURSt DlFFerence RELatiVe ooccccooccnccccccnnccononoconncnnnnonccnononcnnononcnnos 221 HREAUD I1L SSTSGCAL arlfbOWert BURGCHATIo 221 HREAUD I1lL SSTSGCAL art bOWert BURGCHAToREl atve 221 HREAID I1lL SSTSGCAL arlfbOWert BUIRGCHEFL echon 221 HREAID I1lL SSTSGCAL art bOWert BUIRGCHREL atve 221 HREAID I1lL SSTSGCAL arlfbOWert BURGCHL OGs 221 HREAID I1L SSTSGCAL arlfbOWert BURGGCGSUM 221 HREAUD I1lL SSTSGCAL art bOWert BURGCGSUM REI atve 221 READ lt 1 8 gt ESCALA POWer BURSUESWR sust 221 READ lt 1 0 gt ESCALA POW EN T SLO ne a i p AEE EEN ANE A NESES ENE EISi 221 HREAUD IlL SSTSGCAL arlfbOWert TG orDitterence 221 HREAUD IlL SSTSGCAL arlfbOWert TG ot DitterenceHEl atve 221 READ lt 1 8 gt SCALar POWer TSLot RATio oooocccoocccccoocococoncccnccnooconcnncnncnonnnnnnonnnncnonnnncnnnncncnnaninenos 221 HREAUD IlL SSTSGCAL arltfbOWert TG orhRATohREl atve 221 HREAID I1lL SSTSGCAL arlfbOWert TGlorhRttlechon 221 HREAUD I1lL SSTSGCAL arlfbOWer
155. Default unit PCT SENSe lt 1 4 gt TRACe MEASurement DEFine TRANsition HREFerence lt href_level gt Sets the high reference level in terms of percentage of the pulse power amplitude The High Ref Power defines the end of the rising edge and the start of the falling edge of the pulse These values are needed for measurement of the rise fall time Unit PCT O Parameters lt ref_level gt float_value Range depending on the sensor RST depending on the sensor Default unit PCT SENSe lt 1 4 gt TRACe MEASurement DEFine TRANsition LREFerence lt lref_level gt Sets the low reference level in terms of percentage of the pulse power amplitude The Low Ref Power defines the start of the rising edge and the end of the falling edge of the pulse These values are needed for measurement of the rise fall time Unit PCT O Parameters lt ref_level gt float_value Range depending on the sensor RST depending on the sensor Default unit PCT SENSe lt 1 4 gt TRACe MEASurement OFFSet TIME lt time gt Parameters lt time gt float_value Range depending on the sensor RST depending on the sensor Default unit S User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 288 R amp S NRP2 Remote Control Commands SENSe Sensor Commands SENSe lt 1 4 gt TRACe MEASurement POWer AVG Returns the measured average power in the current trace Usage Query only SENSe lt 1 4 gt TRACe MEASurement POWer MAX R
156. Dig or D amp A window mode are available for selec tion See chapter 4 3 3 3 Selecting the result display mode on page 93 for the setting the display mode Remote command OUTPut RECorder lt 1 2 gt FEED on page 255 OUTPut TTL FEED on page 260 Pass Pass Fail Mode Sets the logic output level for measurement results within the set limits The value range is O V to 3 3 V Remote command The setting is achieved by a combination of the following commands The example is for OUTPut TTL FAIL setto HIGH OUTPut TTL FAIL on page 259 OUTPut TTL HVOLtage on page 260 OUTPut TTL ACTive on page 259 Fail Pass Fail Mode Sets the logic output level for limit violation of measurement results The value range is OV to 3 3 V Remote command The setting is achieved by a combination of the following commands The example is for OUTPut TTL FAIL set to HIGH OUTPut TTL FAIL on page 259 OUTPut TTL LVOLtage on page 260 OUTPut TTL ACTive on page 259 TrigOut Mode The output provides a logic signal which represents the state of the internal trigger bus User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 153 R amp S NRP2 Instrument Functions system settings Pass Fail OFF Fig 4 84 Out1 mode TrigOut The trigger signal is either supplied by one of the connected sensors i e the trigger master or via the TRIG IN OUT2 socket see chapter 4 2 6 Trigger settings on page 85 Use the signal for ex
157. ERVice Parameters int_value Range depending on sensor RST depending on sensor SENSe lt 1 4 gt TRACe REALtime lt state gt In the default state OFF each measurement from the sensor is averaged With SENSe lt 1 4 gt TRACe REALtime ON this behaviour can be switched off which may increase the measurement speed With a higher measurement speed the measured values of an individual measurement are immediately delivered Parameters lt state gt ON OFF RST depending on sensor SENSe lt 1 4 gt TRACe TIME lt time gt Sets the time to be covered by the Trace sequence Parameters lt time gt float_value Range depending on sensor RST depending on sensor Default unit S SENSe lt 1 4 gt V2P Usage Query only SERVice The commands of the SERVice system are used for maintenance or test purposes They were implemented primarily to support device development The numeric suffix refers to the sensors Before commands of the SERVice system can be sent to a sensor they must be enabled via the SERVice UNLock 1234 command SERVicecil As C AUlbrationTEST 293 SERVieecil As C AUbratton TEMP 293 SERVice lt 1 4 gt CALibration TEMP DATA ccceccecceccescescesecsesscceceeccaccarcersereeseeaeeaeeseeesens 293 SEbRVice DlSblav OVERlosd aanko arar nnn rarrora arora rarrorer an 293 SERVieecil As RCOun 204 User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 292 R amp S NRP2 Remote Control Comman
158. Esto pone a descubierto los cables y componentes el ctricos y puede causar lesiones fuego o da os en el producto Si un producto se instala en un lugar fijo se deber primero conectar el conductor de protecci n fijo con el conductor de protecci n del producto antes de hacer cualquier otra conexi n La instalaci n y la conexi n deber n ser efectuadas por un electricista especializado En el caso de dispositivos fijos que no est n provistos de fusibles interruptor autom tico ni otros mecanismos de seguridad similares el circuito de alimentaci n debe estar protegido de modo que todas las personas que puedan acceder al producto as como el producto mismo est n a salvo de posibles da os Todo producto debe estar protegido contra sobretensi n debida p ej a una ca da del rayo mediante los correspondientes sistemas de protecci n Si no el personal que lo utilice quedar expuesto al peligro de choque el ctrico No debe introducirse en los orificios de la caja del aparato ning n objeto que no est destinado a ello Esto puede producir cortocircuitos en el producto y o puede causar choques el ctricos fuego o lesiones Salvo indicaci n contraria los productos no est n impermeabilizados ver tambi n el cap tulo Estados operativos y posiciones de funcionamiento punto 1 Por eso es necesario tomar las medidas necesarias para evitar la entrada de l quidos En caso contrario existe peligro de choque el ctrico para el
159. Eth 4 IP Address Manual 0 0 0 0 IP Config 4 Command Set R amp S NRP2Z e Fig 4 76 Remote Interfaces VXI11 IP Address Manual DHCP Shows the IP address and indicates whether it is assigned manually or automatically Set the address in the IP Config dialog box IP Config Assigns the IP address either manually or automatically Manual IP Config Sets address mask and gateway IP Config Gateway er of al al 4 Fig 4 77 IP Config dialog box Manual For the manual configuration mode the static IP address subnet mask and default gateway are used to configure the LAN Obtain the IP address and subnet mask for the R amp S NRP2 and the IP address for the local default gateway from your network adminis trator If the network consists only of the R amp S NRP2 and the control computer the two units can be connected with each other directly using a special network crossover cable The IP addresses can be selected according to the following table User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 148 R amp S NRP2 Instrument Functions 4 7 1 5 system settings Table 4 12 Example of a network configuration for a direct R amp S NRP2 PC connection using a cross over cable IP Address 192 168 0 2 192 168 0 1 DHCP lt IP Config IP Config IP Address 0 Fig 4 78 IP Config dialog box DHCP Note For automatic assignment a DHCP server must be available in the network If the R amp
160. Figure MEASure READ and FETCh Example Valid command sequence FETCH TSLOESSUM 577848787050 FETCh TSLOt SUM RELbLative 5 us 3 0 0 invalid command sequence FETCh BURSt SUM 0 0 0 FETCH TOLO SUM 57 7us 6 0 0 READ returns the measurement result The parameter list is compared to the current settings before the measurement is started If the list does not agree an SCPI error 221 Setting conflict is returned and the command is aborted Apart from this check READ corre sponds to the program message INIT IMM FETCh 1 8 MEASure The MEASure Command combines CONFigure and READ Refer to annex chapter C Programming Measurements on page 379 for application examples to the high level measurement commands Basic Commands FETCh and READ FETCh The command FETCh without further keywords and parameter list has a special mean ing While omitting parameters of the parameter list normally means that default values are used and checked the current measured value under FETCh Is supplied when it is valid If a measured value is not yet available processing is suspended until a valid result is available Usage Query only READ The READ command without further keywords and parameter list can be compared with FETCh READ starts a measurement and returns a measured value without checking the current settings Usage Query only Syntactical Structure of High Level Measurement Commands
161. IGger 1 4 SOURce EXTernal User selectable INTernal TIMing EXCLude Depends on sensor User selectable TRIGger 1 4 SLOPe POSitive User selectable NEGative edi 1 TIMing EXCLude o Unchanged is irrelevant Unchanged is irrelevant Cannot be modified in manual mode 4 e TRIGger 1 4 SOURce EXTernal User selectable INTernal TRIGger 1 4 SLOPe POSitive User selectable NEGative 41 oe a TIMing EXCLude ee Unchanged is irrelevant Unchanged is irrelevant SENSe 1 4 TIMing EXCLude STOP INITiate 1 4 CONTinuous Cannot be modified in manual mode Mode Trace amp Statistics User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 185 R amp S NRP2 Remote Control Fundamentals Correspondence between Remote Control and Manual Control SCPI command TRIGger 1 4 SOURce EXTernal INTernal POSitive User selectable NEGative Cannot be modified in manual mode SENSe 1 4 TIMing EXCLude STOP Cannot be modified in manual mode INITiate 1 4 CONTinuous on Cannot be modified in manual mode TIMing EXCLude 5 10 Correspondence between Remote Control and Manual Control The following table compares the control elements of the graphical user interface for manual control with the SCPI commands for remote control in order to simplify the transfer of manual control procedures to a remote control program Sensor gt Mode gt ContAv g
162. Il atve 217 COhNFoure Dl SSTSGCAL arlfbOWert BURGChHREFL echon 218 COhNFoure Dl SSTSGCAL arlfbOWert BUIRGCHEL atve 217 COhNFoure Dl SSTSGCAL arltbOWert BURGCHL OGe 218 User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 408 R amp S NRP2 List of Commands COhNFoure Dl SSTSGCAL arlfbOWertBURGGCGUM 217 COhNFoure Dl SSTSGCAL arlfbOWert BURG GUMREI atve 217 COhNFoure Dl SSTSGCAL arlfbOWertBURGGCGWR 217 COhNFoure Dl SSTSGCALarltbOWert TGlot 217 COhNFoure Dl SSTSGCALarltbO Wert Got Ditterence 217 COhNFoure Dl SSTSGCALarltfbO Wert Got DitterenceHEl atve 217 COhNFoure Dl SSTSGCALarltbOWert TGlorhAafwo 217 COhNFoure Dl SSTSGCALarltbOWert TGlorhRATohRElatve 217 CONFigure lt 1 8 gt SCALar POWer TSLot REFLectiOnN oocccccoccnccccccnncconnnnononnnonononcnnonnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnoncnnnns 217 COhNFoure Dl SSTSGCALarltbOWert TGlorhRtlatve 217 CONFigure lt 1 8 gt SCALar POWer TSLOERLOSS oococooccnccoccncccccnnccooncnnnoncononononnnnnnnncnnannnnnonnnnononinnnnnns 217 CONFigure lt 1 8 gt SCALar POWer TSLot SUM EEN 217 COhNFoure Dl SSTSGCALarltbOWWert TGlorGUMREL atve 217 CONFigure lt 1 8 gt SCALar POWer TSLOESWR ooocccconcnnccccnncconcnoccoccncnoconcconnnononnnnnnononcnonnnnonnnnnnnoncnnnnnos 217 CONFigure lt 1 8 gt SCALar POWenTAVO coincidido 217 COhNFoure Dl SSTSGCAL arlfbOWerlf AvVGlDitterence 217 COhNFoure Dl SSTSGCAL art bOWerlf AvVGlDitterenceHREl atve 217 COhNFoure Dl SSTSGCAL arlfbOWerlf AVGIRATo 217 COhNFoure D
163. KET SOCKADDR_IN char WORD nRet wsaData soLinkl soLink2 saDevice char argv ResponseMessage MAX RECV wVersionRequired MAKEWORD 2 2 nRet WSAStartup wVersionRequired amp wsaData if nRet Ethernet interface printf WinSocket initialization failed In return 1 soLinkl socket AF INET SOCK STREAM IPPROTO TCP soLink2 socket AF INET SOCK STREAM IPPROTO TCP if soLinkl INVALID SOCKET soLink2 INVALID SOCKET printf Creation of Sockets failed n return 1 IP Address and Port of NRP2 SaDevice sin addr s addr inet addr IP ADDR SaDevice sin port htons u Short PORT NO saDevice sin family AF INET Connecting Link 1 nRet connect soLinkl LPSOCKADDR amp saDevice sizeof SOCKADDR if nRet printf Connecting of Link 1 failed n return 1 nRet connect soLink2 LPSOCKADDR amp saDevice sizeof SOCKADDR if nRet printf Connecting of Link 2 failed 1n closesocket soLinkl return 1 nRet send soLinkl sre O r n strlen sre O r n 0 if nRet 0 closesocket soLink2 closesocket soLinkl printf Send SRE failed n return 1 else printf Send SRE was successfully n nRet send solinkl idn r n stelen idn r n
164. LE TABLE E 251 MEMonEREET ALL 251 Aa E E 251 MENON A AAA 251 A e o II 251 MENO STATE CATAOG ess scene awe dicte nicotina 251 MEMory STA Te DEFME ices ccc eas Sadak ta 252 MEMON S TA T amp EMAP nn 252 MENOS DAE SEP scada in nt o er cid 252 Ier EEN TA E 252 User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 249 R amp S NRP2 Remote Control Commands MEMory MENOory TAB Le DATA PONES coccion A add acia 253 MEMO TABLE SSN EE 253 MEWior TABLe FREQuentrPOINIS ocn sr aia 253 MEMOry TABLE GAINE MAGNUS occ cdecscnuesascvssiccntudastuabedexueunnvadinnceuaseiuWssdeentiancustedenuaneiwad 253 MEMO TABLe GAINIPOINES cc ia 254 ise gig E rollitos 254 A AS e Ua ae ih reseed harnste sin Sele Pm 254 MENO TABLE RE aiii dedica 254 MENO TABLE SES sii ei 254 MEMory CATalog ALL Lists the names of all stored device states and correction tables The length of the response depends on how many device states and tables are stored Return values lt NR1 gt lt NR1 gt The first two values denote the length in bytes of the occupied lt string gt RAM and of the RAM still available for storing states and tables These values are followed by a string for each stored state and then for each stored table this string again consists of two strings and a numeric value lt string gt lt type gt lt NR1 gt lt string gt gives the name of the stored data item lt t ype gt the type TABL or STAT and lt NR1 gt the length of the data item in bytes
165. ME c cccceccececceceeccecceccerceccecseccersecsacsacssesaceaceaeescrseneareareas 245 DiSblavfWlNDowlsfil As RBESolugon 245 DiSblavfWlNDowl Sblect 246 DiSblavfWINDowlSIzE 246 DiSblavfWlNDowlsfil Ast fATel 247 DISPlay WINDow lt 1 4 gt TRACe LOWEN c cecceccecceceecececceseercercecceseeaecaccaesareareareesenseeas 247 DISPlay WINDow lt 1 4 gt TRAC UPPEV c ceccescescecceccecceccerceccescescescesseaeesecaesaecaeeaeeaeees 247 DiSblavfWlNDowisfil Asc T lot 248 DISPlay ERRorlist lt state gt Displays ON or removes OFF a windows which contains the contents of the SCPI error queue The queue may be deleted by pressing the DEL key Parameters lt state gt ON OFF RST OFF DISPlay ILLumination lt state gt This command switches the backlighting ON or OFF Backlighting is switched on again in case of a reset Note DISP ILL Is identical to DISP ENAB see annex chapter D Compatibility Infor mation on page 403 Parameters lt state gt ON OFF RST ON DISPlay MESSage STATe lt state gt Displays a window containing a user defined message The message text is defined via DISP MESS TEXT In addition DISP MESS TYPE can select between two types of message windows Calling the command with the OFF parameter is ignored if DISP MESS TYPE QUERy Is set because in this case a window must be closed by pressing the MENU key Parameters lt state gt ON OFF RST OFF DISPlay MESS
166. MLD OFFS TIME j oe AA SENS TSLOT WIDTH SENS TSLOT MID TIME Fig 6 13 Timeslot parameters Parameters lt time gt float_value Range depending on sensor RST depending on sensor Default unit S SENSe lt 1 4 gt RGAMma MAGNitude lt magnitude gt The SENSe RGAMma command group compensates for the reflection of the load at the signal output Such a compensation is necessary if the VSWR exceeds a value of 1 05 Otherwise data sheet specifications for absolute accuracy cannot be met reliably To compensate for reflection the magnitude of the reflection coefficient of the load with the SENSe RGAMma MAGNi tude setting and the phase angle with the SENSe RGAMma PHASe setting must be transferred To deactivate reflection compen sation SENSe RGAMma MAGNitude 0 must be set Unlike with mismatch correction there is no special activation deactivation command Reflection compensation should remain deactivated if the values measured for the load reflection coefficient are disput able Parameters lt magnitude gt float_value Range depending on sensor RST depending on sensor User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 278 R amp S NRP2 Remote Control Commands SENSe Sensor Commands SENSe lt 1 4 gt RGAMma PHASe lt phase_angle gt SENSe RGAMma PHASe defines the phase angle in degrees of the complex reflection factor of the load at the signal output Parameters lt phase_angle gt floa
167. NRP2 at any point which commands they support or do not support This mainly concerns commands of the Sense and Trigger systems Sensor failure no command receipt A sensor did not acknowledge any command Error in receiving battery data An error occurred in receiving battery data command SYySTem BATTery STATus Error in sending battery data An error occurred in sending battery data command SYSTem BATTery MODE block data User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 343 R amp S NRP2 Error code Error Messages and Troubleshooting Bootmenu Error text returned upon queue query Explanations Fatal sensor error A sensor signalled a serious error If the problem persists please contact the R amp S servicing center Overload A sensor signalled that the signal applied has exceeded the permissible maximum power CAUTION Sensor overload can destroy the electronic measurement system Overrange This error is signalled if a sensor detects that one of its measurement channels is overranged The result is then probably incorrect This error can occur if the automatic range function is deactivated SENSe RANGe AUTO OFF and the manually selected measurement channel is not suitable or the cross over level SENSe RANGe AUTO CLEVe1 was incorrectly selected Truncated measurement In the BurstAv mode the samples for the power are stored in an internal buffer until the end of the power pulse is detecte
168. OFFS 300 US measurement starts 300 us after trigger time SENS STAT TIME 500 US measurement duration 500 us SENS STAT SCAL X POIN 1024 number of measurement points on the power axis SENS STAT SCAL X RLEV 40 lowest considered power in dBm SENS STAT SCAL X RANG 50 measurement range on the power axis in dB SENS STAT SAMP 1E9 number of desired samples to be included tin the Statistics INIT start measurement FETCh Query array with the statistics data SENS STAT AVER average power values that were included in the statistics Selective measurement of individual statistics values As in manual operation marker measurements can also be performed by remote control For this purpose a remote control command is used to set a value on the density distri bution axis or the power axis Using another command you can then read off the sought matching value Example The measurement is performed over a GSM frame 4 615 ms First the CCDF of aGSM signal at 15 dBm is to be calculated Subsequently the power value at which the CCDF is still 50 is of interest RST TRIG SOUR INT trigger to a signal edge TRIG SLOP POS trigger to rising signal edge SENS FUNC XPOW CCDF set CCDF statistics function SENS STAT OFFS 0 measurement starts at trigger time SENS STAT TIME 4 615 MS measurement duration 4 615 ms SENS STAT SCAL X POIN 1024 number of measurement points on the power axis SENS STAT SCAL X RLEV 30 lowest considered
169. OWer TSLot RLOSs lt tslot_width gt lt no_slots gt lt start_exclude gt lt end_exclude gt lt expected_value gt lt resolution gt lt source_list gt FETCh commands for measurement mode T Slot FETCh lt 1 8 gt SCALar POWer BURSt FETCh lt 1 8 gt SCALar POWer BURSt RELative FETCh lt 1 8 gt SCALar POWer BURSt DIFFerence FETCh lt 1 8 gt SCALar POWer BURSt DIFFerence RELative FETCh lt 1 8 gt SCALar POWer BURSt SUM FETCh lt 1 8 gt SCALar POWer BURSt SUM RELative FETCh lt 1 8 gt SCALar POWer BURSt RATio FETCh lt 1 8 gt SCALar POWer BURSt RATio RELative FETCh lt 1 8 gt SCALar POWer BURSt SWR FETCh lt 1 8 gt SCALar POWer BURSt REFLection FETCh lt 1 8 gt SCALar POWer BURSt RLOSs lt dtolerance gt lt start_exclude gt lt end_exclude gt lt expected_value gt lt resolution gt lt source_list gt FETCh commands for measurement mode Burst User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 219 R amp S NRP2 Remote Control Commands High Level Measurement Commands CONFigure MEASure READ and FETCh FETCh lt 1 8 gt ARRay POWer AVG FETCh lt 1 8 gt ARRay POWer AVG RELative FETCh lt 1 8 gt ARRay POWer AVG DiFFerence FETCh lt 1 8 gt ARRay POWer AVG DIFFerence RELative FETCh lt 1 8 gt ARRay POWer AVG SUM FETCh lt 1 8 gt ARRay POWer AVG SUM RELative FETCh lt 1 8 gt ARRay POWer AVG RATio FETCh
170. P NRP2 HP436A HP437B HP438A E4418B E4419B N1911A N1912A Usage Setting only SYSTem OPT lt string gt Determines the user defined return value for the OPT query The maximum string length is 128 characters SYSTem OPT AUTO lt state gt Activates deactivates return of the user defined string for the OPT query SYSTem PRESet Resets the R amp S NRP2 to default RST values No difference is made between reset and preset values exceptions INIT CONT SENS AVER TCON and SENS TRAC AVER TCON For preset values see table 6 2 User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 323 R amp S NRP2 Remote Control Commands E SYSTem Usage Event SYSTem REBoot Reboots the R amp S NRP2 Usage Event SYSTem SENSor lt 1 4 gt INFO Returns information on a sensor lt string gt is used to query a specific information item If called without parameters the command returns all available information in the form of a list of strings separated by commas The permissible values for lt string gt depend on the sensor For details refer to the documentation of the corresponding sensor Parameters lt string gt Range depending on sensor Usage Query only SYSTem SENSor lt 1 4 gt REBoot Performs a power down reset of the selected sensor Usage Event SYSTem SENSor lt 1 4 gt RESet From the point of view of the R amp S NRP2 base unit the sensors are stand alone meas uring devices They communicate with the
171. PC must be sent at the end of a program message OPT OPTion identification query returns a list of the options installed The options are sepa rated from each other by means of commas R amp S NRP B1 NRP B1 Test generator installed R amp S NRP B2 NRP B2 Second channel interface installed R amp S NRP B5 NRP B5 Four channel interface installed R amp S NRP B6 NRP B6 Sensor A B rear socket Example OPT Device response NRP B1 Test Generator installed NRP B2 Second Channel Interface installed NRP BD5 Four Channel Interface installed Usage Query only PRE lt value gt Setting command PRE Parallel poll Register Enable sets the parallel poll enable register to the specified value Query PRE The query form PRE returns the contents of the parallel poll enable register in decimal form Parameters lt Value gt O to 255 PSC lt function gt Setting command PSC Power on Status Clear determines whether the contents of the ENABle registers are preserved or reset during power up Query PSC User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 197 R amp S NRP2 Remote Control Commands Common Commands to IEEE 488 2 The query form PSC reads out the contents of the power on status clear flag The response can be 0 or 1 Parameters lt Function gt 011 0 Causes the contents of the status registers to be preserved Thus a service request can be generated when switching on the instru ment if
172. PCT DB O Usage Query only CALCulate lt 1 8 gt RELative MAGNitude lt value gt Determines a value that is used as a divisor logarithmic subtraction for all measured values of the calculate block in the CALC REL STAT ON state The unit of this value is equal to the unit of the output value of the calculate block and is defined according to the following table User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 232 R amp S NRP2 Remote Control Commands EE CALCulate Configuration of Calculate Blocks Table 6 11 Output unit of measured value of calculate block SENSn SENSm DB DPCT O DB DPCT O SWR SENSn SENSm REFL SENSn SENSm RLOS SENSN SENSm The value range depends on the current output unit of the calculate block s measured value as shown in table 6 10 Value ranges depending on the unit Parameters lt value gt float_value RST 0 DBM or 0 DB Default unit See table referred to above CALCulate lt 1 8 gt RELative MAGNitude AUTO lt auto gt Sets the current measured value as the reference value When used as a setting com mand this command can only be called by the parameter ONCE OFF will be ignored OFF is always returned in response to a query Error messages Data corrupt or stale The current measured value is invalid Parameters lt auto gt OFF ONCE RST OFF CALCulate lt 1 8 gt RELative POWer MAGNitude lt value gt Has the same direct
173. Peak POW MIN Trace Min TRAN POS Pos Overshoot TRAN NEG Neg Overshoot Sensor gt Mode gt Trace Statistics Windows gt Graph Config Pulse gt Configure Algorithm ALG Ref Power E DEF DUR ERF High Ref Power DEF TRAN HREF Low Ref Power DEF TRAN LREF Sensor gt Mode gt Trace Statistics Measurements are always related to power Windows gt Graph Config Pulse gt Config Related to User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 192 R amp S NRP2 Remote Control Commands Notation 6 Remote Control Commands 6 1 Notation In the following sections all commands implemented in the device are listed according to the command system and then described in detail For the most part the notation used complies with SCPI specifications The commands are separated in high level and low level commands where the high level commands combine several low level commands in one command Numeric suffixes lt n gt If a command can be applied to multiple instances of an object e g specific sensors the required instances can be specified by a suffix added to the command Numeric suffixes are indicated by angular brackets lt 1 4 gt lt n gt lt i gt and are replaced by a single value in the command Entries without a suffix are interpreted as having the suffix 1 Optional keywords Some command systems permit certain keywords to be inserted into the header or omit ted These keywords are
174. R INPUT C A D B Optional sensor connectors C and D option R amp S NRP B5 can be installed at the rear panel Alternatively sensor connectors A and B can be retrofitted from front to rear panel option R amp S NRP B6 Connecting the instrument to the AC supply The AC supply and power switch are at the rear of the unit When the R amp S NRP2 is connected to the AC supply it automatically sets itself to the correct range for the applied voltage range see type label There is no need to set the voltage manually The power switch can be set to two positions eo 0 The instrument is disconnected from the mains o The instrument is power supplied It is either ready for operation STANDBY or in operating mode which is indicated by the color of the Status LED on the front panel Fig 1 5 AC supply connector at the rear of the meter gt Connect the instrument to the AC power source using the AC power cable delivered with the instrument Note The instrument is in compliance with safety class EN61010 1 Connect the instrument only to a socket with earthing contact AC supply voltage The R amp S NRP2 can be operated from AC lines with a voltage range of 100 V to 240 V and a frequency range of 50 Hz to 60 Hz Note that a restricted voltage range 100 V to 120 V applies to 400 Hz networks User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 17 R amp S NRP2 Putting into Operation Starting the R amp S NRP2 1 8 Starting
175. R NEEAR 18 function Test 18 welcome SCreen coocccocccncconcnnncnnnonononcnonanonanonanenaninanons 18 Starting the meter occcccooccnccccnconcononnoconcnonccnnononcnnnnnanononos 18 Start of Fence coccocccnccccccncncnncncncncnnnnncnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnononnnnnnnnnns 71 Start of AA 71 Start Time EEN 117 Stat s Config Marker oococoncccccnccnccconcoconononcnononcnnnnnnnnnos 138 Stat s Config Gcaletab 137 Statistics evaluation function oonccccconnccnncccocnncncncnnos 139 Statistics Marker ooccnconccccoccnccnnconcconnncnonncnnnnncnonononanos 136 Stock number ooccccccccccccnnccnccccnnncnnnnonnnononononannnnnnnnnnononens 158 Sn EETA 58 SIOP ME secarei AE RAER beeee 128 subnet MASK cooccccccccnccccoccconcnnonononcnnnnnonancnnnnnnanonanenanons 148 A A 193 Switching ON OFF oooooccnccoccconccnncnnconancnconnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnennnnnos 18 ON BEEN 21 Switchover to Remote Control 172 Symbols ON display ococoooncnnccnonccnccnnoconncononnonconnnnnnarononnos 58 System Info oonnnnnnnonannnennnnennnnerinnnnrnnnnrennrnrerrnnenne 158 346 System information oooccccccccccccnncccnnconcnnnnnconcnnnononononoss 157 T Ka 71 Table correction seminnscinricacac carcasas 17 Test at Power He 162 RE UE 164 Test measurements ccocccnccncccococononcnnnononanonnnnanonancanonanos 160 Test Report scientists 161 Test report with applied RF ocoooccccccncccocccccccncncnnnnannnos 163 NEE 117 TIMES ere sce tis ee ne
176. R amp S NRP2 Remote Control Commands Overview of SCPI Command Systems command see chapter 6 4 High Level Measurement Commands CONFigure MEA Sure READ and FETCh on page 208 The individual commands are described in alphabetical order in the following chapters The high level measurement commands are put first Measured Manual control values TRIGger j Rem te control IEC Bus Ethernet Sensor referenced command systems Information flow Fig 6 1 Overview of SCPI command systems and their mutual interaction The figure above gives an overview of the SCPI command systems of the R amp S NRP2 The measured values are forwarded to the SENSe block where they are processed and handed to the CALCulate blocks The values from the SENSe block are not immediately made available to the user but only after they have been processed in the CALCulate blocks In the CALCulate blocks the values of several sensors can be processed together before they are output High level commands may be used to configure SENSe and CALCulate blocks with a single command This may considerably simplify operation of the R amp S NRP2 The frequency dependent correction tables for the mea sured values are managed by the MEMory command system Table 6 4 Overview of command systems and their function FETCh Retrieves measurement results from the running measurement high level com mands mn OUTPut Switches the test gene
177. R amp SENRP2 Power Meter User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 Test amp Measurement User Manual This document describes the R amp S NRP2 and its options e R amp S NRP B1 Sensor Check Source e R amp S NRP B2 Second Sensor Input B e R amp S NRP BS5 3rd and 4th Sensor Input C and D e R amp S NRP B6 Rear Panel Sensor Input A and B The firmware of the instrument makes use of several valuable open source software packages For information see the Open Source Acknowledgement on the user documentation CD ROM included in delivery Rohde amp Schwarz would like to thank the open source community for their valuable contribution to embedded computing 2013 Rohde amp Schwarz GmbH amp Co KG Muhldorfstr 15 81671 Munchen Germany Phone 49 89 41 29 0 Fax 49 89 41 29 12 164 E mail info rohde schwarz com Internet www rohde schwarz com Printed in Germany Subject to change Data without tolerance limits is not binding R amp S is a registered trademark of Rohde amp Schwarz GmbH amp Co KG Trade names are trademarks of the owners The following abbreviations are used throughout this manual R amp S NRP2 is abbreviated as R amp S NRP2 and the R amp S 2NRP Zxx Power Sensors are abbreviated as R amp S NRP Zxx Basic Safety Instructions Always read through and comply with the following safety instructions All plants and locations of the Rohde amp Schwarz group of companies make every effort to kee
178. RELative RATio RATio RELative RLOSs SWR REFLection The terminates the measurement commands which are always queries Measure mands lt param lists A list with parameters is sent with the high level command The meaning of the param eters is determined by the lt meas mode gt see chapter 6 4 4 Parameter list descrip tion on page 212 6 4 4 Parameter list description Six different parameter lists are used in the high end measurement commands Which list is used depends on the selected measurement mode The elements of these lists can be omitted starting at the end and working backward They will then be replaced by their default values Parameter lists for the different measurement modes e measurement mode ContAV expected value gt y recoluLion gt source List e measurement mode T slot User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 212 R amp S NRP2 Remote Control Commands EE High Level Measurement Commands CONFigure MEASure READ and FETCh lt Eslot width lt no Slots start exclude gt end exclude gt expected value gt y resoluti0n gt sources list gt e measurement mode Burst lt otoletance gt start exclude gt end exclude I lt exzpec led value gt y resolution gt y scource list gt e measurement mode ContAv with data buffering lt butiered size gt lt expected value gt lt resolution gt y SSOuwece Ist e measurement m
179. RST DIGital DISPlay WINDow lt 1 4 gt METer AUTO lt auto gt DISPlay WINDow lt 1 4 gt ANALog AUTO lt auto gt DISP AUTO ONCE automatically determines scaling for the analog display The upper and the lower limit value of the display is set as a function of the current measurement data Only the ONCE parameter is permissible a query always supplies the value OFF Parameters lt auto gt ONCE OFF RST OFF DISPlay WINDow lt 1 4 gt METer LOWer lt lower_limit gt DISPlay WINDow lt 1 4 gt ANALog LOWer lt lower_limit gt Sets the lower limit value of the analog scale The value range depends on the current output unit of the measured value of the window Table 6 12 Value range Value range for lt float_value gt 1e 18 1e18 150 210 1e 18 1e22 200 200 Unit See table 6 10 Value ranges depending on the unit Parameters lt lower_limit gt float_value RST 90 DBM or 120 DB User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 243 R amp S NRP2 Remote Control Commands EE DISPlay DISPlay WINDow lt 1 4 gt METer LOWer POWer lt lower_power gt DISPlay WINDow lt 1 4 gt ANALog LOWer POWer lt lower_power gt Sets the lower limit value of the analog scale This value is used if the unit of the mea surement result is Watt dBm or dBuV Le the measurement result is a power Value range See table 6 12 Value range Unit DBM W DBUV Parameters lt lower_power gt float_value RST
180. S SENSe lt 1 4 gt TRACe MEASurement TRANSition ESAMpling AUTO STATe Usage Query only SENSe lt 1 4 gt TRACe MEASurement TRANSition NEGative DURation Returns the fall time of the first detected pulse The fall time is the time the signal requires to change from high to low level High and low levels can be adjusted using the commands SENS TRAC MEAS DEF TRAN HREF and SENS TRAC MEAS DEF TRAN LREF Usage Query only SENSe lt 1 4 gt TRACe MEASurement TRANSition NEGative OCCurrence Returns the stop point of the current pulse i e the time when the signal passes through the medial reference level with falling edge The medial level can be adjusted using the command SENS TRAC MEAS DEF DUR REF Usage Query only SENSe lt 1 4 gt TRACe MEASurement TRANSition NEGative OVERshoot Returns the amount of relative undershooting of the signal at the end of a pulse Usage Query only SENSe lt 1 4 gt TRACe MEASurement TRANSition POSitive DURation Returns the rise time of the first detected pulse The rise time is the time the signal requires to change from low to high level High and low levels can be adjusted using the commands SENS TRAC MEAS DEF TRAN HREF and SENS TRAC MEAS DEF TRAN LREF Usage Query only User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 290 R amp S NRP2 Remote Control Commands EE SENSe Sensor Commands SENSe lt 1 4 gt TRACe MEASurement TRANSition POSit
181. S NRP2 is to be integrated into a larger network contact your network admin istrator regarding the data to be set The instrument assigns address and gateway automatically The automatic configuration mode uses DHCP server to obtain the instrument IP address Command Set Selects the instrument type for emulation see Command Set on page 146 Raw Ethernet socket communication settings An alternative way for remote control of the software is to establish a simple network communication using sockets The socket communication also referred as Raw Ether net communication does not require a VISA installation on the remote controller side The simplest way to establish socket communication is to use the build in telnet program The telnet program is part of every operating system and supports a communication with the software on a command by command basis For better utilization and to enable auto mation by means of programs user defined sockets can be programmed Socket connections are established on a specially defined port The socket address is a combination of the IP address or the host name of the instrument and the number of the port configured for remote control The R amp S NRP2 uses port number 4002 for this pur pose The port is configured for communication on a command to command basis and for remote control from a program For a description on how to set up the connection for remote control see chapter 5 2 Connecti
182. S NRP2 provides short term access to the boot menu and the firmware update menu The bootmenu provides service and system functions e g resetting the internal memory see chapter 8 3 Bootmenu on page 344 For further information on the firmware update see firmware release notes on the R amp S website available for download http www rohde schwarz com product NRP2 html R amp S NRP Power Meter Firmware Update 4 a Fig 1 8 Start screen with access to Firmware Update and Bootmenu Function check After switch on the R amp S NRP2 performs a function test The contents of all non volatile memories the RAM and the addressability of the interfaces are checked Messages indicate the options the instrument is equipped with The R amp S NRP2 checks the following functions e Function test on the RAM e Function test on the keyboard controller e Addressability check on the keypad e Addressability check on the test generator This test is performed if the instrument is equipped with option R amp S NRP2 B1 sensor check source e Addressability check of the sensor channels Depending on the number of installed sensors the displayed icon varies Fig 1 9 Connected sensors symbols One of the sensor boxes shown on the left bottom of the icon represents a sensor connected at channel A i e the instrument is single channel User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 19 R amp S NRP2 Putting into Operation Starting the
183. SCALar POWer TSLot RELative MEASurement lt 1 8 gt SCALar POWer TSLot DIFFerence MEASurement lt 1 8 gt SCALar POWer TSLot DIFFerence RELative MEASurement lt 1 8 gt SCALar POWer TSLot SUM MEASurement lt 1 8 gt SCALar POWer TSLot SUM RELative MEASurement lt 1 8 gt SCALar POWer TSLot RATio MEASurement lt 1 8 gt SCALar POWer TSLot RATio RELative MEASurement lt 1 8 gt SCALar POWer TSLot SWR MEASurement lt 1 8 gt SCALar POWer TSLot REFLection MEASurement lt 1 8 gt SCALar POWer TSLot RLOSs lt tslot_width gt lt no_slots gt lt start_exclude gt lt end_exclude gt lt expected_value gt lt resolution gt lt source_list gt MEASurement commands for measurement mode T Slot User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 222 R amp S NRP2 Remote Control Commands CALCulate Configuration of Calculate Blocks MEASurement lt 1 8 gt SCALar POWer BURSt MEASurement lt 1 8 gt SCALar POWer BURSt RELative MEASurement lt 1 8 gt SCALar POWer BURSt DIFFerence MEASurement lt 1 8 gt SCALar POWer BURSt DIFFerence RELative MEASurement lt 1 8 gt SCALar POWer BURSt SUM MEASurement lt 1 8 gt SCALar POWer BURSt SUM RELative MEASurement lt 1 8 gt SCALar POWer BURSt RATio MEASurement lt 1 8 gt SCALar POWer BURSt RATio RELative MEASurement lt 1 8 gt SCALar POWer BURSt SWR MEASurement lt 1 8 gt SCALar POWer BURSt REFLe
184. SP PIXM returns OT CL LORRI E with x in binary format comprising an 8 bit BMP bitmap of the dis play content Usage Query only DISPlay UPDate lt update_frequency gt Adjusts the update frequency of the measured values in the display In case of disconti nuities in the voltage progress at the analog outputs display updates may be suspended with DISP UPD FREeze The display won t consume CPU time in this state User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 241 R amp S NRP2 Remote Control Commands Parameters DISPlay lt update_frequency gt NORMal SLOW FREeze RST NORMal DISPlay WINDow lt 1 4 gt AVALue lt avalue gt Determines which additional information about the measured values is shown in the dis play right hand side next to the main measured values Parameters lt avalue gt NONE NORMal EXTRemes STATistics NONE No additional information about the measured values is displayed NORMal The display is a function of the SENS FUNCtion of the measure ment mode of the primary channel and the CALC FEED setting Primary channel in the trace mode The top line displays the frequency of the primary channel The two lower lines and the main measured value window display Average Peak and PeakToAverage CALC FEED determines which of the three quantities is displayed in the main measured value window The other two quantities are displayed on the right hand side below the frequency Primary ch
185. Set STATe OFF SENSe CORRection DCYCle STATe OFF SENSe CORRection FDOFfset STATe OFF e All other settings of the SENSe system depend on the sensor used and are specified in the corresponding manual e The first 4 CALCulate blocks are set to sensors 1 to 4 CALCulate lt n gt MATH W SENSn e The values are measured as absolute values CALulate RELative STATe OFF e Logarithmic units are used UNIT POWer dBm and UNIT RATio dB The simplest measurement The fastest way to obtain a result is to use the following sequence of commands RST INIT FETCh Normally RST will set the ContAv mode The concept of smart sensor technology provides that each sensor determines the reset values of the assigned SENSe and TRIGger block Thus another mode than ContAv may come after RST with future sen sors Information is provided in the operating manual of the sensor used INIT initiates the measurement After RST the trigger system is set to straight through TRIG SOUR IMM so that the trigger system state changes to MEASURING via INITIATED and WAIT FOR TRG After the measurement has been completed FETCh delivers the result to the output queue from which it can be fetched Configuration of the trigger system Trigger source After a measurement is started with INIT the state WAIT FOR TRG is entered This is a preliminary stage to the measurement which has been initiated so that the measure ment may start with high accuracy at
186. T Slot Av mode evaluation is fixed to Avg average power in the timeslot Selects the measurand Avg Average power in the timeslot Pk Peak power in the timeslot Pk Avg Ratio of peak power to average power in the timeslot Remote command Selection of display DISPlay WINDow lt 1 4 gt AVALue on page 242 Reading out values CALCulate lt 1 8 gt DATA on page 225 4 4 3 4 Setting the unit Combining channels which are operated in different measurement modes It is possible to define measurement functions based upon channels that are operated in different measurement modes This way the average power within a specific timeslot of a signal can be related to the average burst power of another signal Many other combi nations are possible The Function amp Unit dialog box reflects this situation by offering only those selection boxes that are needed to clearly define the measurands of the com bined channels Function amp Unit dialog box Units The unit for indicating the results can be selected either directly in the Measurement menu or in the Function amp Unit dialog box User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 106 R amp S NRP2 Instrument Functions Configuring measurements Function amp Unit Function Single B 4 Prim Channel B_y Sec Channel 4 Unit dBm Aux Normal gt Fig 4 40 Setting the Unit Aux Val Reset Only the units which are compatible with the sel
187. T either 220 Parameter error The command contains a faulty or invalid parameter 221 Settings conflict There is a setting conflict between two or more parameters 222 Data out of range A program data element is outside the legal range as defined by the device 223 Too much data A valid parameter is received but it contains more data than the device can handle 214 Trigger deadlock A measurement could not be started or a result query could not be processed since the device would otherwise enter a deadlock state This occurs under the following conditions 1 TRIG SOUR BUS INIT FETCh TRG or TRIG IMM would be required for triggering but these commands cannot be executed since FETCh blocks the entry But FETCh waits until the measured values are available User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 340 R amp S NRP2 Error Messages and Troubleshooting SCPI Specific Error Messages Error text returned upon queue query Explanations Illegal parameter value The parameter value is invalid Out of memory The device has insufficient memory to perform the required operation Lists not same length A list of offset values and frequencies has not the same length as an associated list of frequency and offset values Data corrupt or stale The data are incomplete or invalid Hardware error The command cannot be executed because of a hardware problem in the device Hardware missing The c
188. T1 8 gt 3TATISTOS e RTE 223 ME AGurement il zGTAlfstncebt 223 MEASurement lt 1 8 gt XTIMe POWerl oooccncconinncoccnnccccccnccconcnnococonnonononononnnnnnnonnnnonnnnnononcnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnonanenenos 223 ME AGurement il GzxTlMelbOwWerlHAaTo 223 ME AGurement 1 GTSGCALarlfbOWert BURG 223 ME AGurement 1 GTSGCALarltbOWert BUlRGrDlFterence 223 ME AGurement 1 GTSGCALarltbOWert BUlRGrDlFterenceREl atve 223 ME AGurement 1 GTSGCAL arlfbOWert BURGCHATo 223 ME AGurement 1 GTSGCAL arltbOWert BURGCHAToREl atve 223 ME AGurement 1 GTSGCAL arltbOWert BURGCHREEL echon 223 ME AGurement 1 GTSGCAL arlfbOWert BURGCHREL atve 223 MEASurement lt 1 8 gt SCALar POWer BURStRLOSS occccocccccccccnccccncccccnononcnncononononcnnnononononnnononencnnnnnnos 223 ME AGurement 1 GTSGCAL arlfbOWert BURGGCSUIM 223 ME AGurement 1 GTSGCAL arltbOWert BURGCSUM REI atve 223 ME AGurement 1 GTSGCALarltbOWert BURGGCSWR 223 ME AGurement 1 GTSGCALartbOWert TGlot 222 ME AGurement 1 GTSGCALarltbOWert TGlotDiltterence 222 ME AGurement 1 GTSGCALarltbOWert TGotDiltterencehREl atve 222 User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 411 R amp S NRP2 List of Commands ME AGurement 1 GTSGCALarltbOWert TGlorhRAalo 222 ME AGurement 1 GTSGCALarltbOWert TGLotrbRAioREl atve 222 ME AGurement 1 GTSGCALarltbOWert TGLotRttlechon 222 ME AGurement 1 GTGCAL arltfbOWert TGlorRtElatve 222 MEASurement lt 1 8 gt SCALar POWer TSLOERLOSS oocccconnccccccn
189. TPut RECorder lt 1 2 gt LIMit UPPer RATio lt upper_limit gt Specifies the upper power limit of the characteristic for one of the two analog outputs if the associated calculate block returns a power ratio unit DB DPCT or 0 as the measured value see figure 6 8 Characteristic of analog outputs Unit DB DPCT O Parameters lt upper_limit gt float_value Range 200 DB 200 DB RST 10 DB Default unit DB User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 257 R amp S NRP2 Remote Control Commands OUTPut OUTPut RECorder lt 1 2 gt STATe lt state gt Switches the analog outputs OUT1 and OUT2 TRIG on rear panel ON or OFF The magnitude of the output voltage 0 V to 3 3 V depends on the measured power of the assigned calculate block OUTP REC FEED and the configuration of the characteristic OUTP REC LIM As in manual operation this setting is coupled to other operating modes of the outputs Only one mode can be active at any one time Connector Analog output TTL output Ext Trigger In OUTP REC OUTP TTL Parameters lt state gt ON OFF RST output 1 ON output 2 OFF OUTPut ROSCillator STATe lt state gt The command switches the optional RF generator ON or OFF Parameters lt state gt ON OFF RST OFF OUTPut ROSCillator CALibration READ lt NR1 gt Reads the setting of one of the internal electronic potentiometers of the test generator The number of the potentiometer 1 to 4
190. TRACe MEASurement TRANSition POSitive DURatiON ooocccconncccccncocccnconnnconcnncnnnnnos 290 SENSe lt 1 4 gt TRACe MEASurement TRANSition POSitive OCCuUrrence ocoooncccoccnccncncconnccoconconnnconnnnonos 291 SENSe lt 1 4 gt TRACe MEASurement TRANSition POSitive OVERSh00t o oonccccccccccconcccccoconccoconoconononos 291 SENSe lt 1 4 gt TRACe MEASurement TRANSition SPERIiOd7 coooocccccccncccncnncoccncconcnonocononannnnnocncnnnnnnnos 291 SENSe lt 1 4 gt TRACe MEASurement GIATel 291 IGENGe DlL AzrTRACeOktGecCTIME 291 IGENGe DlL A rTRACebOlhNits 291 SENSe lt 1 4 gt TRACe REALIMO E 292 SENSe lt 1 4 gt TRACe TIME ccccccscccccssececeessceccaesseeceaseecsaneeecsuaaeecseuaaeecsaaeessenaaeeseaageecseaaaeesseseesseaes 292 Edil Pe eo ee eee 292 SENSe lt 1 4 gt POWer BURSt DTOLerance cccooccccccccnccnococonnncnoncnnnnnnncnnononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnononnnnnonancnnnnos 274 SENSe lt 1 4 POWer TGATe SELB Ol acicate leas 276 SENSe lt 1 4 gt POWer TGATe lt 1 4 gt OFFSet TIME oooccccoccccccccncccnccnnococonononcnononcnnnnonononannnnnnnconononnnnns 275 SENSe lt 1 4 gt JEPOWer TGATe lt 1 4 gt TIME cocine siria tota 276 SENSe lt 1 4 gt POWer TGATe lt 1 4 gt EXCLude MID OFFSet TIME ocoooocnccoccccnoccncccccnccnccnccninnnos 274 SENSe lt 1 4 gt POWer TGATe lt 1 4 gt EXCLude MID TIME ooccccoocccnnccccnnccoccnnccocc
191. Test menu and select the sec ond page Sensor Test Test at Power Ref i with Pad i Report Config Page 2 2 i Fig 4 94 Sensortest dialog box page 2 This page of the Sensortest dialog box provides testing the sensors with the reference signal supplied by the R amp S NRP2 B1 test generator option In the case of sensors with a lead in attenuator pad R amp S NRP Z22 R amp S NRP Z23 and R amp S NRP Z24 the test measurement can be made with or without an attenuator Since the power sensors of the R amp S NRP Z series are absolutely calibrated a regular calibra tion measurement after switching on the instrument is not necessary and also not plan ned The outcome of the tests is not considered during subsequent measurements Test at Power Ref Starts a test measurement for a sensor The sensor must be connected to the sensor check source If an attenuator is present it must first be removed This way you can test all measurement paths of R amp S NRP Zxx multi path sensors Additionally you can test an attenuator in the with pad setting During test procedure the instrument indicates that the test is currently running Sensor Test in progress Fig 4 95 Sensor test running After completion the instrument shows a results message User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 162 R amp S NRP2 Instrument Functions system settings Sensor Test A successful OK 4 MENU Fig
192. The high level measurement commands can be generally represented as follows User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 211 R amp S NRP2 Remote Control Commands High Level Measurement Commands CONFigure MEASure READ and FETCh lt head gt lt meas_mode gt lt calc function gt lt parameter list gt Table 6 5 Syntactical Structure of High Level Measurement Commands lt head gt lt head gt These keywords select the high level command subsystem Command keywords CONFigure lt 1 8 gt FETCh lt 1 8 gt MEASure lt 1 8 gt READ lt 1 8 gt lt meds mode gt lt meas_mode gt These keywords select the measurement mode ContAv ContAv with data buffering Burst Timeslot Trace or Statistics see also low lwvwl command SENSe lt 1 4 gt FUNCtion ON on page 270 Command keywords e SCALar POWer AVG ContAv mode SCALar POWer TSLot T slot mode SCALar POWer BURSt Burst mode ARRay POWer AVG ContAv with data buffering mode XTIMe POWer Trace mode STATistics CCDF Statistics mode STATistics PDF Statistics mode lt calc function gt lt calc_function gt These keywords select the calculation function see also the low level commandcALCulate lt 1 8 gt MATH EXPRession on page 230 If lt calc_function gt is not specified the measured value of the primary channel is output Command keywords RELative DIFFerence DIFFerence RELative SUM SUM
193. VG DIFFerence oocccccoocccncccccnnccoccnnccconnnnnononnnononnnnnonnnnnnnnnnononnnninennnos 218 COhNFoure Dl Ss Aal POWerll AvGlDiltterencehREl atve 218 COhNFoure cDl Ss ARavl PDOWerll AVGIhRATo 218 COhNFoure Dl Ss Aal POWerll AVGIRAToREL atve 218 CONFigure lt 1 8 gt ARRay POWer AVG REFLectiOnN oocccoooccnccoccnccccocnncnoconoconcnnonononnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnoncnnnnons 218 CONFigure lt 1 8 gt ARRay POWer AVG RELative ooooccccconccccccncccccccncoconononnncnnnnncnnonnnnnononcnononcnnnnons 218 CONFigure lt 1 8 gt ARRay POWer l AVG RLOSS occccoccccccccncccoccncccoccnccoconoconononnnnnnnnononononnnnnnannnnnonnnnonons 218 CONFoure Dl Ss Aal PDOWerll AVGISUM 218 COhNFoure Dl Ss ARavl PDOWerll AVGIGSUMREL atve 218 CONFigure lt 1 8 gt ARRay POWer AVG SWR nannnnaannnannnnnnnnannnnnnnnnnnnnsnnnsnrrnerrrnnrrnsnrnnnnrrennrrenrreenrrnene 218 CONPiqure lt 1 8 gt S TA TISUOS E 218 CONPiqure lt 1 98 RRE e FDP ecc 218 CONPiqure lt 1 5 gt XTIMeE PO WT EE 218 CONFigure lt 1 8 gt XTIMe POWer RATlO ocooocccnccoccncccccnncconcnonooconononcononononononnnonnnnononnnnnnononnnnnnnnnnnnnnincnnnos 218 CONFPigure lt 1 8 gt SCALar POWer BUR Sl cicin a a a Enab EERE NEE Aniden ainia 217 COhNFoure Dl SSTSGCAL arltbOWert BURGrCDlFterence 217 COhNFoure Dl SSTSGCAL arltfbOWert BUlRGrCDlFterenceRtlatve 217 COhNFoure Dl SSTSGCAL arlfbOWert BURGCHRATo 217 COhNFoure Dl SSTSGCAL arlfbOWert BUIRGCHAToRE
194. _ l Correspondence between Remote Control and Manual Control Menu item in manual control SCPI command in short form System gt l 0 Out 1 1234 OUTP REC1 FEED or OUTP TTL FEED U System gt 1 0 gt Out 1 gt Analog QUTP RECLESTAT ON OU System gt 1 0 gt Out 1 Off TP REC1 STAT ON OUTP TTL STAT ON U System gt 1 0 gt Out 1 0 V Equivalent if Ana OUTP REC1 LIM LOW log is selected System gt 1 0 gt Out 1 gt 3 V Equivalent if Ana OUTP REC1 LIM UPP log is selected System gt 1 0 gt Out 1 gt Fail if Pass Fail is CUTP TTL FAIL HIGH selected and OUTP ANM ES HVOLT System gt 1 0 gt Out 1 gt Pass if Pass Fail is OUTP TTL FAIL HIGH selected cid O TP TTL LVOLT U System gt 1 0 gt 1 0 2 gt A0 V Equivalent if Ana OUTP REC2 LIM LOW log Out is selected System gt 1 0 gt 1 0 2 gt A3 V Equivalent if Ana OUTP REC2 LIM UPP log Out is selected System Errorlist DISP ERR STAT oYST ERR EXT STAT SYST ERR System gt Test gt Sensor ABCD Init Test SYST SENS Ls 4 ATEST TST If the Single check box was enabled in the Trace mode pressing DEL 1TRIG sends a TRG to the sensor PRE SET Opens the File menu User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 190 R amp S NRP2 Remote Control Fundamentals EE Correspondence between Remote Control and Manual Control Menu item in manual control SCPI command in
195. a tomas de corriente con contacto de seguridad y con conductor de protecci n conectado Queda prohibida la interrupci n intencionada del conductor de protecci n tanto en la toma de corriente como en el mismo producto La interrupci n puede tener como consecuencia el riesgo de que el producto sea fuente de choques el ctricos Si se utilizan cables alargadores o regletas de enchufe deber garantizarse la realizaci n de un examen regular de los mismos en cuanto a su estado t cnico de seguridad Si el producto no est equipado con un interruptor para desconectarlo de la red o bien si el interruptor existente no resulta apropiado para la desconexi n de la red el enchufe del cable de conexi n se deber considerar como un dispositivo de desconexi n El dispositivo de desconexi n se debe poder alcanzar f cilmente y debe estar siempre bien accesible Si p ej el enchufe de conexi n a la red es el dispositivo de desconexi n la longitud del cable de conexi n no debe superar 3 m Los interruptores selectores o electr nicos no son aptos para el corte de la red el ctrica Si se integran productos sin interruptor en bastidores o instalaciones se deber colocar el interruptor en el nivel de la instalaci n No utilice nunca el producto si est da ado el cable de conexi n a red Compruebe regularmente el correcto estado de los cables de conexi n a red Aseg rese mediante las medidas de protecci n y de instalaci n adecuadas de q
196. abs for selecting the sensor Note In remote control commands select the sensor with the suffix in command SENSe lt 1 4 gt le choose suffix 1 for channel A channel 2 for B and so on Selftest internal with no signal Starts a selftest of the sensor A signal must not be applied The instrument indicates the corresponding states to internal self test directly in the menu e not tested prior to testing e running in progress e successful outcome e failed outcome Test Report Opens the Sensor Selftest Report window displaying the results of the internal selftest The status bar of the report window shows type and serial number of the tested sensor and the overall test result The results of the individual tests are indicated below Sensor Selftest Report HNRP 231 SN 56789013 successful Operating Voltages PASS 1 78 Y 5 DIN 5 01 Y Detector Temperature PASS 301 9 K Offset Voltages PASS Range 0 0 07 mY 0 07 mV Banas de A Aa mll d mal Fig 4 93 Sensor Selftest Report dialog box 161 R amp S NRP2 Instrument Functions system settings 4 7 6 2 Sensor test with applied RF Remote I O Power Ref Off On Sensor System Info Info Misc Test 4 Testing the sensor with the RF reference signal requires option R amp S NRP2 B1 Sensor Check Source gt Open the Sensortest dialog box in the System
197. absolute posi tion of the marker on the power axis Unit DBM User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 235 R amp S NRP2 Remote Control Commands CALCulate Configuration of Calculate Blocks Density Distribution CALC STAT MARK VERT POS Y CALC STAT MARK HOR DATA Lo Power g CALC STAT MARK VERT DATA POW CALC STAT MARK HOR POS X POW Fig 6 7 Meaning of the marker commands for the Statistics mode Usage Query only CALCulate lt 1 4 gt STATistics POWer AVG DATA Returns the average value of the power in the time window of a statistics measurement The time window is defined with the sensor commands SENS STAT TIME SENS STAT OFFS SENS STAT MID TIME and SENS STAT MID OFFS TIME Units DBM W DBUV Usage Query only CALCulate lt 1 8 gt TRACe MARKer XDELta Is available with trace measurements It returns the time difference of the two curve markers if the value is valid Usage Query only CALCulate lt 1 8 gt TRACe MARKer YDELta Is available with trace measurements It returns the power difference of the two curve markers if the value is valid The unit depends on the trace function Usage Query only Units W for trace function SINGLE DB for trace function RATIO CALCulate lt 1 8 gt TRACe MARKer lt 1 2 gt XPOSition Is available with trace measurements It sets or sets or returns the position of a curve marker on the time axis User Manual 1173 914
198. age TEXT CLEar Deletes the stored text for user defined messages Usage Event User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 240 R amp S NRP2 Remote Control Commands EE DISPlay DISPlay MESSage TEXT DATA lt string gt Defines the text that can be displayed in a message window The text can contain ASCII characters from code 32 to code 126 The string n is interpreted as a line break Up to 4 lines DISP MESS TYPE MESS or up to 2 lines DISP MESS TYPE QUERy can be shown The length of a line depends on the characters used because a proportional font is used Lines that are too long are cut off which is indicated by at the end of the line Usage Event DISPlay MESSage TYPE lt message_type gt Sets the mode for the expected response to user defined message windows Parameters lt message_type gt QUERy MESSage QUERy The message window must be closed by pressing the MENU key Until then the execution of remote control commands is blocked MESSage Remote control command processing is immediately continued The message window must be closed with command DISP MESS OFF ff it is no longer needed RST MESSage DISPlay PIXMap Supplies the display content as binary block data The block data consists of a block data header 577110 and the display content in Microsoft Windows R BMP format version 3 A color depth of 8 bit per pixel is used Parameters lt pixmap gt block_data Example DI
199. ain in the selection mode Insert Inserts a new row containing the values of the selected row The maximum table size provides 80 rows Delete Deletes the marked row Sort Sorts the rows in the table so that the frequencies in the rows are in ascending order Name Renames the selected table to identify it more easily Use of the character editor is described in chapter 3 5 9 Digit and letter panels on page 56 Remote command MEMory TABLe MAP on page 254 Filter averaging The averaging filter is used to reduce fluctuations in the measurement result to the extent wanted Such fluctuations can be caused by inherent noise of the measuring instrument modulation of the measurement signal or beats from the superposition of adjacent car riers A more stable display has to be traded off against longer measurement times In manual mode longer measurement does not mean that it takes longer to display a new result but rather that it takes longer for the result to settle when the power changes User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 79 R amp S NRP2 Instrument Functions Data acquisition and parameters The filter settings of the Trace amp Statistics mode and the other modes which exclusively provide average power values differ significantly The filter dialog box thus displays dif ferent parameters depending on the selected display mode Filtering in the Trace amp Sta tistics mode is described in chapter 4 5 3 3 Fil
200. alog box Function amp Unit Function Single A 4 Prim Channel Sec Channel 4 Unit Aux None v i Fig 2 24 Function Unit dialog box 3 Open the Auxiliaries drop down list User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 39 R amp S NRP2 Getting Started setting measurement functions Function amp Unit Function Prim Channel 8 Sec Channel B Fig 2 25 Function Unit dialog box auxiliaries Select Extremes Close the dialog box Select the Measurement menu and restart the search for the extreme values with Aux Val Reset The updated maximum minimum and max min are now displayed to the right of the measured value A T 4 033dBm 4 03 L 4 029 dBin UWdBM 000 Fig 2 26 Result window auxiliaries half height Maximum and minimum should be close to the measurement result the max min value therefore slightly more than O dB If you reduce the signal power the maximum should remain the same whereas the minimum value tracks the measurement result The max min values rise correspond ingly However if the signal power is increased the maximum value tracks the mea surement result as soon as the stored maximum is exceeded 2 6 Setting measurement functions An R amp S NRP2 with two sensors connected is required for this section If only one sensor is available you can only select the measurement function Single Performing ratio measurements 1 Connect the two
201. amount of 10 dB with respect to the default setting This way the amount of inherent sensor noise will become more evident or the settling time will increase if one counteracts with a higher averaging num ber That is why there is little point in entering offsets less than 10 dB As a rule of thumb linearity errors introduced by signals with high peak to average ratios are reduced according to the offset value e g by a factor of four when entering 6 dB Manual path selection can be chosen by deactivating the Auto checkbox and selecting the preferred path in the Path selection box Testing the drive range of an individual path or avoiding the noise contribution of the adjacent path may be a good reason for selecting manual operation Range Range transition LI 4 Offset Oo 4 opgeet 4 Fig 4 18 Range dialog box A B C D Tabs for selecting the sensor Note In remote control commands select the sensor with the suffix in command SENSe lt 1 4 gt Le choose suffix 1 for channel A channel 2 for B and so on User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 83 R amp S NRP2 Instrument Functions ES Data acquisition and parameters Auto Turns the Auto range function on off Remote command SENSe lt 1 4 gt POWer AVG RANGe AUTO on page 273 Path 1 2 3 Selects a measurement path when the Auto range function is off Remote command SENSe lt 1 4 gt POWer
202. amp S NRP2 SENSe Is not implemented in the R amp S NRP2 AVERage COUNt AUTO SDETect DETector FUNCtion MRATe SPEed V2P SENSe 1 2 CORRection The R amp S NRP2 does not recognize any tables with frequency depend CSET 1 CSET2 SELect ent calibration values since the sensors have to be calibrated only once in production For this reason there is no compliance with CSET1 Tables with frequency dependent offset correction values can be SENSe 1 2 CORRection defined and addressed via CSET2 Agilent and R amp S NRP2 CSET 1 CSET2 STATe or FDOTable R amp S NRP2 only and SENSe 1 2 CORRection Has the same effect as SENSe 1 2 CORRection CFACtor GAIN 1 User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 403 R amp S NRP2 Compatibility Information E4418B E4419B command Compatibility information 112 2CORRection Has the same effect as SENSe 1 2 CORRection OFFSet With GAIN2 no unit may be specified Unit 1 is valid 1 12 CORRection Corresponds to the reciprocal of SENSe 1 2 CORRection OFFSet With LOSS2 no unit may be specified Unit 1 is valid SENSe 1 2 CORRection Has the same effect as SENSe 1 2 CORRection DCYCle GAIN3 With GAIN3 no unit may be specified Unit 1 is valid SENSe 1 2 CORRection Has the same effect as GAIN4 SENSe 1 2 CORRection FDOFfset INPut MAGNitude SENSe SWEep OFFSet TIME Is implemented in the R amp S NRP2 and has the sa
203. ample to synchronize externally connected instruments Remote command OUTPut TRIGger STATe on page 261 Off Mode Deactivates port OUT1 TRIG OUT Pass Fail Trig Out Fig 4 85 Out1 mode Off Remote command Both states have to be set OFF OUTPut RECorder lt 1 2 gt STATe on page 258 OUTPut TTL STATe on page 260 4 7 2 2 I O 2 interface This section describes the functions and settings of the analog trigger input analog output at the TRIG IN OUT2 connector User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 154 R amp S NRP2 Instrument Functions system settings Trigger In Mode Window O Y Equivalent 20 000 dBm 3 Y Equivalent 20 000 dBm Fig 4 86 I O VO 2 tab Mode Selects the function of the TRIG IN OUT2 connector Analog Out and Trigger In are available Note For remote control only suffix 2 is allowed in the command header for the setting theTRIG IN OUT2 connector functions Analog Out Mode The output provides an analog voltage which is proportional to the value displayed in the selected window e g Window 1 Trigger In Node Window O Y Equivalent 20 000 dBm 3 Y Equivalent 20 000 dBm Fig 4 87 I O 2 mode Analog Out Remote command The state must be set to ON OUTPut RECorder lt 1 2 gt STATe on page 258 Window 1234 lt Analog Out Mode Selects the window the output refers to Only windows that are operated i
204. and STOP User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 283 R amp S NRP2 Remote Control Commands EE SENSe Sensor Commands Parameters lt exclude_stop gt float_value Range depending on sensor RST depending on sensor SENSe lt 1 4 gt TRACe AVERage STATe lt state gt Switches the filter function of a sensor on or off for the Trace mode When the filter is switched on the number of measured values set with SENSe lt 1 4 gt AVERage COUNt Is averaged This reduces the effect of noise so that more reliable results are obtained Parameters lt state gt ON OFF RST depending on sensor SENSe lt 1 4 gt TRACe AVERage COUNt lt filter_length gt Sets the length of the filter for the Trace mode The wider the filter the lower the noise and the longer it takes to obtain a measured value Note The SENS TRAC AVER COUN command switches the automatic filter length switchover off SENS TRAC AVER COUN AUTO OFF Parameters lt filter_length gt The filter length can only be 1 2 4 8 16 2 If the entered filter length is not a power of two the value is rounded to the next 2 value without an error message Range depending on sensor RST depending on sensor SENSe lt 1 4 gt TRACe AVERage COUNt AUTO lt state gt Can be used to automatically determine a value for SENSe lt 1 4 gt AVERage COUNt for the trace mode User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 284 R amp S NRP2 Remote
205. ange and Trigger dialog boxes Nominal Width Oa Entry active The Filter Range and Trigger dialog boxes are designed such that the result windows are still visible If you edit a value in a Filter Range and Trigger dialog box using the cursor keys U the new value is accepted immediately This feature allows you to quickly assess the effect of value change and thus to perform interactive adjustment of settings User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 55 Dialog boxes and their controls If you enter a new value with the digit letter panel see below the new value has to be confirmed before it is accepted The symbol appears above the editing field to indicate that the new value is not accepted until you confirm it with the MENU hardkey 3 5 8 Drop down lists Drop down lists are used to select an item from a list of predetermined values When the drop down list is activated the list folds out upwards or downwards The up down cursor keys or one of the rocker switches next to the list are used to select items from folded out pop up menus Confirm the selection with the MENU hardkey or reject with the ESC hardkey 3 9 9 Digit and letter panels iil i a a 1 ql iil Panels which are displayed when an editing field is activated see above are used to enter digits letters and units e e 0 A Entering letters with the letter panel is like entering letters on a phone keypad Caps is used to select up
206. annel not in the trace mode Only the frequency of the primary channel and if applicable the frequency of the secondary channel are displayed EXTReme Minimum maximum and peak to peak maximum to minimum of all measured values displayed since the last CALC EXTR RES PowerOn or AuxVal Reset are shown manual operation With logarithmic units the peak to peak value equals the quotient of the measured values converted into linear units STATistic The mean value the standard deviation and the number of all measured values displayed since the last CALC EXTR RES Pow erOn or AuxVal Reset are shown manual operation see also RST NONE DISPlay WINDow lt 1 4 gt FORMat lt display_mode gt Selects the display mode for measured data User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 242 R amp S NRP2 Remote Control Commands DISPlay Parameters lt display_mode gt DIGital ANALog GRAPhical DIGital Measured values are displayed in numeric format If the primary channel is operated in Trace mode the scalar measured values of the currently selected timegate are displayed here ANALog Measured values are indicated by a marker on a scale The values at the upper and lower scale end as well as the type of scaling linear or logarithmic are set with the following METer com mands GRAPhical Measured values are plotted over time This kind of presentation is possible only if the primary channel is operated in Trace mode
207. annnnnas 194 6 3 Overview of SCPI Command Systems ccccsccceeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeneseeeeesseneeseneeseeneneas 205 6 4 High Level Measurement Commands CONFigure MEASure READ and FETCh e O o A T 208 6 5 CALCulate Configuration of Calculate BlocCkS coccconncccnnciccnciccncoccnronnarennnnnas 223 BO es No AON OPC A y 237 st Eege 239 09 FORMA E 248 09 MEMO ce EE 249 PIER geed 255 6 11 SENSe Sensor COMMANdOS occocnncccnnccocncoccnnconcnnoncnconnnncnnnnnnnnnronnnnrrnanrrnnarennnnermanennnns 261 ENEE EEN 292 A EP E 294 A A Co reer eee ere 316 6 15 TRIGO roer irnos esca eso ice ciipa iaa cito er nt errr eer less es 326 ZE TR EE 333 User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 4 R amp S NRP2 Contents 7 MalMenanCO sarria ap 335 TL SOS TES E 335 7 2 Instrument SOMOS E 335 7 3 Cleaning the externo Rania 335 LA Ee CC 335 8 Error Messages and Troublesbootng see NENNEN NENNEN REENEN EEN 337 8 1 Status and Error Messages in Manual Controll ccccsccesseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeneseeeeeees 337 8 2 SCPl Specific Error MessSageS occcocccccccncccononoconononnnaronnnnrnnnnnronnnnrrnnnrrrnannrrnnreranarenas 338 A e e PR o o 344 A Remote control interfaces cooccccnconccocococonocnnocanonnnonaronnnonnnennnnnnnnano 351 A 1 GPIB Bus AP 351 A2 AO 354 A 3 Ethernet AP nenna nnn nenne 357 e Moo E ENRERE 365 B Standard ConfiguratiONS cooccocccocnconnconconnnecnnonnnonononnnonncnanennnenannnanos 367 C Programming Measur
208. anual 1173 9140 02 04 329 R amp S NRP2 Remote Control Commands TRIGger TRIGger lt 1 4 gt DELay lt delay gt TRIGger ALL DELay lt delay gt Defines the delay between the trigger event and the beginning of the actual measurement integration Parameters lt delay gt float_value Range depending on sensor RST depending on sensor Default unit S TRIGger lt 1 4 gt DELay AUTO lt state gt TRIGger ALL DELay AUTO lt state gt TRIG DEL AUTO ON makes certain that a measurement is not started until the sensor has settled To this end the delay value is automatically determined This is especially important when thermal sensors are used The automatically determined delay is ignored if a longer period is set with TRIG lt 1 4 gt DEL Parameters lt state gt ON OFF RST depending on sensor TRIGger lt 1 4 gt DTIMe lt dtime gt TRIGger ALL DTIMe lt dtime gt If the trigger level has been underrun with internal triggering it is sometimes useful to wait some time drop out time before retriggering The measurement of unwanted signal components can thus be suppressed This setting parameter is used with pulsed GSM signals for example if only specific timeslots are to be measured The figure below shows the importance of the drop out time If the timeslots BF and DH are not to be measured the drop out time is set to a higher value than the period EB GD In this case the trigger events B and D
209. are set by means of a parameter list which is sent with the MEASure and CONFigure commands The parameter list is spe cific for each measurement mode Thus a configuration that requires several low level commands is achieved by one high level command Example MEASure XTIMe RAT 312 5 1 02 replaces the low level commands TRIGger s50URce EXT TRIGger COUNt 1 TRIGger DElLay AUTO ON SENSe AVERage ON SENSe FUNCtion XTIMe POWer SENSe TRACe TIME 5 SENSe TRACe POINts 312 CALculate MATH SENS1 SENS2 INITiate CONTinuous OFF INITiate FETCH With the FETCh and READ commands the parameter list is used to crosscheck the set tings of the instrument with the settings given in the list If the settings do not agree command execution is aborted FETCh and READ can also be used as low level com mands In this case they only retrieve current the measurement result FETCh or start a measurement and retrieve the measurement result READ User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 209 R amp S NRP2 Remote Control Commands High Level Measurement Commands CONFigure MEASure READ and FETCh CONFigure The Configure commands define the calculation function and configure the associated sensors by means of the parameter list see chapter 6 4 4 Parameter list description on page 212 for an overview of the parameters A measurement is not started A ques tion mark at the end of the command provides information on the param
210. arker2 Pos 4 Defines the positions of marker 1 and 2 The positions are referenced to the delayed trigger event 4 5 6 Pulse display mode The R amp S NRP2 performs automatic analysis of pulsed signals with wideband power sensor R amp S NRP Z Z8x only The measurement is either performed over the visible portion of the trace entire screen width or within the active gate of the selected trace waveform The measurement results are shown in the info panel at the bottom of the screen The settings for Trig gering Filt ering Function and Unit are taken from the Trace display mode and cannot be changed gt Select Pulse in the control panel opened via the Window gt Graph gt Display dialog box Trace amp Statistics sensor mode A RUN Pulse splay 15 00 dEm dEl 15 0 dEtdiv Trace Config Gates Pulse Marker lte Vu d al 50 00 am dE 1 0 msidiv Trace B Average 80 MSa s5 E EL A 0 320 Hs 12 505 4 es 7 711 dem oe 0 030 ps Fig 4 54 Pulse display mode Table 4 9 Legend of info panel Gate Trace analysis window channel display type effective sampling rate Ale pulse width H duty cycle TL pulse top power Femme o d An active gate is indicated by colored lines as shown in the graph The info panel in the pulse trace diagram indicates up to 6 parameters The values to be indicated can be selected in the Pulse Measurements dialog box see chapter
211. articular in the test phase of a controller program the error queue should be queried at regular intervals since it also registers faulty commands from the controller to the device User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 315 R amp S NRP2 Remote Control Commands 6 13 21 6 14 User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 SYSTem Initialization of the SCPI Status Registers The commands RST DCL and SYSTem PRESet as well as powering on the device also affect the status reporting system Initialization of device status table 6 32 contains the various commands and events causing a reset of the status reporting system None of the commands with the exception of RST and SYSTem PRESet affects the func tional device settings In particular DCL does not clear the device settings STATus PRESet Table 6 32 Initialization of device status Device Clear Selected Device RST or SYSTem Power On PRESet Status Clear PSC Clear STB Status Byte and ESR Standard Event Status Register Clear SRE Service Request Enable and ESE Standard Event Status Enable Clear EVENt register Clear ENABle register of all OPERation and QUEStionable registers Fill PTRansition register with 1 delete NTRansition register 1 Any command sent to a non empty output queue causes the error Stop command processing parser and clear input queue Query interrupted SYSTem With the aid of the SYSTem comma
212. as well as the memory already used for device states Usage Query only MEMory FREE TABLe Returns the number of bytes available in memory for storing device states as well as the memory already used for device states Usage Query only MEMory NSTates Returns the number of bytes available in memory for storing device states as well as the memory already used for device states Usage Query only MEMory STATe CATalog Returns a list of names of stored device states User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 251 R amp S NRP2 Remote Control Commands MEMory Return values lt names gt Usage Query only MEMory STATe DEFine lt string gt 1 19 MEMory STATe MAP lt string gt The value 0 to 19 are assigned to the memory locations of the device states where the memory location with the number 0 is the factory set state and cannot be changed Names lt string gt can be assigned to these numbers with MEMor y STATe DEFine or MEMory STATe MAP except for the factory set state The command MEMor y CLEar NAME expects parameters that are actually strings rather than the numbers of the memory locations The default names of these memory locations are Setup 0 to Setup 19 The name may contain the characters A to Z a to z O to 9 and The query of this command returns the number of the memory location with the name of lt string gt Parameters lt string gt 1 19 maps the string on the selected
213. ase is determined from the points representing the pulse base Note This algorithm is recommended for analyzing most of the pulse signals INTegration Computes the pulse as a reference top power by fitting a rectangle pulse of same energy into the pulse signal Note Use this algorithm for pulse signals with modulation or when the pulse energy must be taken into account e g when comparing the measurement result with a dual thermal power sensor PEAK Assigns the pulse peak power to the pulse top level RST depending on the sensor SENSe lt 1 4 gt TRACe MEASurement AUTO STATe lt state gt Switches on off automatic transfer of the measured pulse parameters after each trace This enables a synchronous display of the trace and the pulse data during a continuous measurement with INIT CONT ON For pulse measurements this settings has to be switched ON See also SENS TRAC MEAS STAT Parameters lt state gt ON OFF RST depending on the sensor User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 287 R amp S NRP2 Remote Control Commands SENSe Sensor Commands SENSe lt 1 4 gt TRACe MEASurement DEFine DURation REFerence lt ref_level gt Sets the medial reference level in terms of percentage of the pulse power amplitude This level is used to define the pulse width pulse start time and pulse stop time Unit PCT O Parameters lt ref_level gt float_value Range depending on the sensor RST depending on the sensor
214. assword gt Before other SERVice system commands are accepted they must be enabled with SERV UNL 1234 Parameters lt password gt 1234 6 13 STATus The status registers of the R amp S NRP2 can be read and configured with commands of the STATus system User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 294 R amp S NRP2 Remote Control Commands STATus The R amp S NRP2 uses the following status registers e Standard Event Status Register specified in IEEE 488 2 Reading and configuring with ESR and ESE This register is not handled by the STATus system e Device Status Register e Questionable Status Register e Questionable Power Status Register e Questionable Window Status Register e Questionable Calibration Status Register e Operation Status Register e Operation Calibrating Status Register e Operation Measuring Status Register e Operation Trigger Status Register e Operation Sense Status Register e Operation Lower Limit Fail Status Register e Operation Upper Limit Fail Status Register Except for the Standard Event Status Register each of these registers comprises five subregisters with which the function of the register can be configured These subregisters are called e EVEN e CONDition e NTRansition e PTRansition e ENABle The registers are 16 bits wide but only the lower 15 bits are used This prevents problems with programs that cannot handle integers without sign The STATus system uses the following types o
215. at are directly connected to a low voltage supply network that supplies residential buildings Repair and service 1 The product may be opened only by authorized specially trained personnel Before any work is performed on the product or before the product is opened it must be disconnected from the AC supply network Otherwise personnel will be exposed to the risk of an electric shock 1171 0000 42 07 Page 5 Basic Safety Instructions Adjustments replacement of parts maintenance and repair may be performed only by electrical experts authorized by Rohde amp Schwarz Only original parts may be used for replacing parts relevant to safety e g power switches power transformers fuses A safety test must always be performed after parts relevant to safety have been replaced visual inspection protective conductor test insulation resistance measurement leakage current measurement functional test This helps ensure the continued safety of the product Batteries and rechargeable batteries cells If the information regarding batteries and rechargeable batteries cells is not observed either at all or to the extent necessary product users may be exposed to the risk of explosions fire and or serious personal injury and in some cases death Batteries and rechargeable batteries with alkaline electrolytes e g lithium cells must be handled in accordance with the EN 62133 standard 1 2 Cells must not be taken apart or crushed C
216. ate Blocks The calculate blocks calculating the measurement results from the sensor data are con figured with the CALCulate command Eight blocks are available each with two input User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 223 R amp S NRP2 Remote Control Commands CALCulate Configuration of Calculate Blocks channels primary and secondary channel The available sensors 1 to 4 depending on device configuration and connected sensors can be assigned to the channels With the aid of a selectable function CALC MATH the channels can be processed together Suffix lt 1 8 gt behind the CALCulate key word denotes the CALCulate block Each CALCulate block is assigned a measurement window The R amp S R amp S NRP2 can display up to four windows with measurement results In the digital Dig and digital analog D amp A mode CALCulate blocks 1 to 4 are associ ated with the windows 1 to 4 In the graphical Graph mode the CALCulate blocks 1 to 8 are associated with the measurement windows and the traces as follows Suffix lt 1 2 gt behind the FEED key word word assigns a sensor to the primary or secondary channel CALC late eT ug cirio id 225 CALCULA RDATA Ri taa 225 CAL Culate c lG ExibemesbRtzet 225 CALCULO FEEDS IAS inanan aaa Ticos 225 CALCulate TTL ISLMEBEER e oie 227 CAL Culate l Gs UlMtCLEartlMMedatel 227 CALCulate lt 1 8 gt LIMIECLEar AUTO cuidada 227 CALCulate lt 11 SLIMIE FAIL T corria a aa aati 227 CALCu late lt
217. ates Cont Select the unsynchronized time interval Note The length of the time interval can be set in the Aperture dialog box of the Stat s function dialog Auto ee Scales the result and the power axis in such a way that the trace is optimally displayed Gate Bina Statistic Functions accora Opens the Statistics Functions subdialog for selection of a distribution function and one or two traces for display A statistical evaluation of combined results from different chan nels e g power ratios is not supported 4 5 8 2 Statistics diagram settings Activate indication of additional values or open menu for configuration of the statistics display in the Stat s Config dialog box including markers User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 136 R amp S NRP2 Instrument Functions Displaying traces Activating tabular indication of statitical values for CDF and CCDF gt Select Stat s Config in the control panel opened via the Window gt Graph gt Dis play gt Stat s gt E control panel Trace amp Statistics sensor mode A Tam stats Display Peak Average 20 000 dEm 63 183 4 A 25 455 dBm 4 132 dBm 23 355 dBm 22 301 dEm 2 375 dBm 21 813 dBm 2 1 391 dEm 28 002 dBm 0 000 Ea 29 158 dBm ALJGH 24 379 dem 21 207 dm 19 445 dEm 18 198 dEm 17 227 dEm 16 437 dBm ALIGH 0 182 31 688 dm Fig 4 63 Statistics display with additional table The table a
218. ates timeslots and markers can be added for further analysis Automatic pulse measurements can be carried out and a statistic analysis of the power envelope can be performed Settings for reliable triggering 1 Press the Trigger softkey in the trace display The Trigger dialog box opens Trigger ki Single Mode Auto 4 Source Internal AN Level Page 1 34 Fig 2 34 Trigger dialog box page 1 A dotted line indicates the trigger threshold in the diagram 5 00 dEm 15 0 dE di A oe a i lada itm 8 4 trigger threshold Sak tee i HHR 50 00 dBm 500 0 paidin Plot A Average UBEL Dag Full Trigger IntMaster Offset dB Fig 2 35 Trace display trigger threshold Select the Normal trigger mode Select internal triggering Source Internal Set the positive F trigger slope a pe amp by Set the trigger threshold in the Level entry field Tip A RF in the info panel shows that the sensor doesn t trigger In this case use the DEL 1TRIG hardkey in order to manually trigger the sensor once and set the trigger settings accordingly User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 44 R amp S NRP2 Getting Started Graphically representing power versus time 6 Open the second page of the Trigger dialog box 9 Page 2 3 Fig 2 36 Trigger dialog box page 2 Set the trigger delay time If
219. ay send a service request SRQ to the controller This service request usually causes an interrupt at the controller to which the controller program can respond by suitable actions As shown in figure 6 17 Overview on structure of Status Reporting System an SRQ will always be triggered if one or several of the bits 2 3 4 5 or 7 have been set in the Status Byte Register and enabled in the SRE Each of these bits combines the information from another register from the error queue or the output buffer If the ENABle registers of the status registers are set accordingly any bit in any status register will be able to trigger an SRQ To utilize the possibilities of the service request all bits in the enable registers SRE and ESE should be set to 1 Examples See also figure 6 17 Overview on structure of Status Reporting System Use the OPC command to generate an SRQ 1 Set bit O operation complete in the ESE 2 Set bit 5 ESB in the SRE The device generates an SRQ upon completion of its settings Informing the controller by an SRQ that a measurement has been completed 1 Set bit 7 summary bit of Status Operation Register in the SRE 2 Set bit 4 measuring in the ENABle register of the Status Operation Register 3 Set bit 4 in the NTRansition register of the Status Operation Register to make certain that the transition of measuring bit 4 from 1 to O end of measurement is also recorded in the EVENt register The device gene
220. be performed in overwrite mode indicated by the marked character being in inverse video Modifications can be made either with the cursor keys or numeric digit softkeys which are provided in a digit or letter panel when the editor is activated The lt cursor keys are used to select the digit to be edited Editing fields cont Nominal Wiel mei In the editing fields for quantities with units the gt cursor keys can be used to select the unit too the 2 cursor keys are used to edit it Usually the digit panel also contains a unit softkey which you can use to change the unit whenever you want If you want to make a completely new entry the whole field can be cleared with the DEL 1TRIG hardkey In the insert mode you can enter digits and or letters Nominal Wiel Any changes you make to a field can be confirmed with the MENU hardkey When this hardkey is pressed the new value is subjected to a validity check If the check discovers an error a warning message is output You can quit the editor by pressing the ESC hardkey this leaves the old values unchanged Any warning messages are cleared To set the maximum or minimum value permitted for a parameter first move the insertion mark to the left edge of the entry field by using the lt key Then press the key to set the maximum permissible value or the key to set the minimum permissible value Editing fields of the Filter R
221. ble in the remote control mode Connecting a Controller to the Base Unit Settings in Base Unit Before a link can be established between the controller and the R amp S NRP2 the R amp S NRP2 must be assigned a corresponding address In the manual control mode the address is set in the System gt Remote dialog box see chapter 4 7 1 Configuring the remote control interfaces on page 144 In remote control mode the SYSTem COMMunication commands serve this pur pose GPIB configuration IEC IEEE bus 1 Select GPIB as the active interface 2 Enter the GPIB address Any value between 0 and 30 is permissible USB configuration gt Select USB as the active interface User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 170 R amp S NRP2 Remote Control Fundamentals Connecting a Controller to the Base Unit The VISA address string suitable for the instrument is displayed in the dialog box The R amp S NRP2 has a fixed unchangeable address comprising the manufacturer number an instrument number and the serial number of the instrument USB lt vendor ID gt lt product ID gt lt serial number gt INSTR VXI11 configuration 1 2 Select VXI11 as the active interface Choose Manual or DHCP IP address configuration If DHCP is chosen IP address subnet mask and gateway address are retrieved from a DHCP server The DCHP server must be available in the network No further steps are required If Manual is
222. burst power without external triggering some of the sections later on in this chapter assume familiarity with the basic operating techniques which are introduced in the first sections It is therefore advisable to go through these sections first before considering other topics An in depth description of the operation of the instrument is described in chapter 3 Manual Operation on page 49 2 1 Requirements Read the notes on putting the meter into operation in chapter 1 1 Notes on putting into operation on page 7 A single channel R amp S NRP2 is sufficient for most of the examples used in the sequel However if you want to work through all the steps in chapter 2 6 Setting measure ment functions on page 40 you will need a dual channel instrument Any sensor of the R amp S NRP Zx series is suitable A signal source is required for the following measurements It is best to use a signal generator whose level can be adjusted If a generator of this type is not available the R amp S NRP2 s integral power reference option R amp S NRP B1 can be used instead User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 23 R amp S NRP2 o 2 2 Getting Started Brief introduction to the operation Recommended first steps Before you set up a new measurement we recommend that you preset the R amp S NRP2 Thus the instrument is in a defined initial state This prevents any previous settings from causing incorrect results In addition a z
223. by Incident and Reflected in this case Any of the four channels A B C and D can be assigned primary or secondary channel Function amp Unit Function Single A si Prim Channel A y Sec Channel 4 Timesiot 4 4 Unit Aux Extremes Fig 4 29 Function amp Unit dialog box The parameters provided in the middle of the dialog box vary according to the selected measurement mode Functions and their use In the Function amp Unit dialog box of the Measurement menu select the measurement function the associated sensor channels the unit and additional readings for the display User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 99 R amp S NRP2 Instrument Functions Configuring measurements Function amp Unit Function Prim Channel Unit Aux Normal v Fig 4 30 List of functions Impedance measurements SWR RCoeff and RLoss If you work with the functions for the impedance measurement i e SWR RCoeff and Hoss note that the incident power must be measured in the primary channel and the reflected power in the secondary channel Continuous Average and Burst Average power measurements lf Continuous Average and Burst Average power measurements have been selected for the channels that are used as arguments for the measurement function of the Function amp Unit dialog box no additional settings are required to define the measurand Setting the unit and defining auxiliaries does
224. cccececeeceecececeeceeee ceeeeeeueeenesevaeeeeeeeenenenes 198 Resolution digital display mode cccecceeeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeneeeaeeeeaes 96 Rise tme 23 5accehcnsceidoasentandbedunnsideinckenitheaciveeneiesarbicianiieoeee 128 Rohde A Schwarz control sequences ees 360 A a 58 S A AA 58 User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 Sample Error eisocconiorasiracracionnarcan can seseeansnaenecanctessacauneesss 166 Sample error MESSAGE cooccccconcnccnncnncnnconenononcnnonarononanenos 347 Samples statistics display ccoooocoooncnnnonnonannonns 140 Sampling rate coooccccccncncococcnnonacocononnncnnononcnnonacononnnnonons 67 A 141 Scale tab Statistics display oooccocccocoononnncooconos 137 Secondary channel 120 Select setting ooocccoocncocococoocococonacononcnnonacononcnnonaross 141 Select standard Setting cooonccccconccocnconononoconcnnonnnonnos 142 Select Trace Gate oooocccconnccccocncoconcnnacnnnonncnnnonanonos 123 Select Trace pulse cooooncccconiccconcncnconncnononnnnononcnnnnnonos 128 Selftest remote control oooccccconccccoococnconacnnoncnnnnnnooos 205 Selftest Sensor oocccoccccocccoccccocnconnononncncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonons 161 Sensor Source Correction ooccccccncocnnocononccocnccncnconnnnnnnnnos 85 Source Magnitude ccoooccccccccnccccccoconoccnconononcnnnnnos 85 Source T Phase accconinsccncinnanida ninia cetreria 85 Sensor Check Source
225. cccoccnnccoccnnccononnconncnnnnoncnnnnoncnnononcnnos 219 PETChs 1 6 gt SCALar POWer AV GI2RA WO DE 219 FE TOhliL SSltSCA att bOWerlf AVGIRATobREl atve 219 FE TOhliL SStSCA att bOWerl AVGIHREFL echon 219 FE TOhliL SSltSCA att bBOWerlf AVGIREI atve 219 FETCh lt 1 8 gt SCALar POWer AVGTRLOSS ooonccccoccncccocccnccoconoccnononocnnnnncnnnnnnccnnancnnnonnnnnnonnnnnnonaninnos 219 FE TOhliL SStSCA att bOWerlf AVGIGUM 219 FE TOhliL SSltSCA att bOWerlf AVGIGUM REI atve 219 FE TOhliL SsltSCA att bOWerlf AVGIGWR 219 LN KE 211 FORNET EE 249 FORMAL AR le ERT EE 248 POR Wath READINOSI DATA E 248 INMaterALLESCONTINUOUS E 327 A EE 328 INITA ALEL INTIS AUS lucirse ici too 328 INI Tiate lt 1 4 gt CON RR TC 327 INMate 111 4 DISaDlO cosida aint 328 INiITate 1lL A TlMMecdhatel 328 ME AGurement 1 Gs ARavl POWerl AVC 223 ME AGurement 1 Gs ARavl POWerl AvCGlDitterence 223 ME AGurement 1 Gs ARavl POWerl AvGlDitterencehREl atve 223 ME AGurement 1 Gs ARavl POWerl AVGIRATwo 223 ME AGurement il Gs ARavl POWerl AVGIRAToREL atve 223 ME AGurement 1 Gs ARavl POWerll AVGIRE El echon 223 ME AGurement 1 Gs ARavl POWerll AVGIREL atve 223 MEASurement lt 1 8 gt ARRay POWer AVG RLOSS ooocccccccccncccccnccccccnccooconocononcnonononnnnnnnnnononnnnnnnncnnnnnnnos 223 ME AGurement il Gs ARavl POWerl AVGISUM 223 ME AGurement il Gs ARavl POWerll AVGISUMREL atve 223 ME AGurement 1 SG ARav POWerll AVGIGWWR 223 MEASurement lt
226. cccoonioncnonoo 136 24 Sensor mode not supported oocccocccccccccnccccnncnncns 270 CONTA esa acia 66 26 State not supported 0 0 cece eee ceceeeeeeeseeeeeeaeeeees 334 Cont Av mode sisas 29 28 Sensor not de 270 291 328 Control CERN 352 151 Invalid string data oooccoccccncoccccoccoconoconnnnononos 270 Control sequences of the IEC IEEE 1174 draft 360 211 Trigger ignored cccccccecccceeeceeeceeeeeeeaeesaeees 331 Cursor function cece eee eeeeeee ee ees 116 122 125 127 132 230 Data corrupt or Stale oocooccocccociccnconconiconnno 311 231 Data questionable 0ceeeseeeeeeeeeeeee 311 312 D 256 File name not found 254 269 A ee 163 D amp A digital and analog display mode eee 93 Dale OS E 352 A OAN e soil 352 DAY ege 352 o ee ee eee 58 Delay Absolute X Scaling statistics display 139 Sensor Trigger rca 88 PIOS sate T E E e OU E 164 DECE eebe 149 Algorithmi GUISE usarios 129 Dig digital display mode oocooocccoccncnccocccccconcnconcnnnanonnos 93 PAD SUNS ltda 66 DISDIAY al 116 122 125 127 132 135 Aperture statistics display cooooonconccnncconnconnnonanos 139 Display mode Arranging ue EE 93 ei 126 AUN doin 352 Display SV IMDONS nse a E 58 A AO an a E E 352 Leet 348 Auto Display update Tale coin 160 Sensor Range usara 84 DOPO EE 68 AMO PUSE aaa ies 127 Sensor Trigger sustrato a
227. ccnconnconoconcnnonoconnnnononnnnnnnncononnnnnnonenonos 222 ME AGurement 1 GTSGCALarltfbOWert TG otrGUM 222 ME AGurement 1 GTSGCALarltbOWert TGLotGUMREL atve 222 ME AGurement 1 GTGCALarltfbOWert TGlot2wWh 222 ME AGurement 1 GTGCAL art bOWerlf AVC 222 ME AGurement 1 GTSGCAL art bOWerlf AvGlDiltterence 222 ME AGurement 1 GTSGCAL art bOWerlf AvGlDitterencehREl atve 222 ME AGurement 1 GTSGCAL art bOWerlf AVGIRATo 222 ME AGurement 1 GTSGCAL art bOWerll AVGIRAToREL atve 222 ME AGurement 1 GTSGCAL art bOWerll AVGIREFLechon 222 ME AGurement 1 GTSGCAL art bOWerll AVGIREL atve 222 MEASurement lt 1 8 gt SCALar POWer l AVG RLOSS oooccccoccccccccccnccccoconoconcnncnnconnnnononnnnnncnconononnnnoncnnnos 222 ME AGurement 1 GTGCAL art bPOWerlf AVGISUM 222 ME AGurement 1 GTSGCAL art bOWerll AVGIGSUMREL atve 222 ME AGurement 1 GTGCAL art bPOWerll AVGIGWWR 222 MEMO Ee S TATE Sn 250 MEMO CAT AlOG E EE 250 MEMO Ee E E 250 MAA e ro ol ARE RAS EER RE TAERAA ARAROA R AE 251 ME MOn CCEA NAME EE 250 MENO FREE STATE unio E 251 ME MOV FREE TABLES E 251 MEMo ry E E EE 251 MEMO LEE 251 MEMO STATE CATA ss aos 251 MEMON STATE DEFINE erica datada 252 MEMON STATS MAP corneta a 252 MEMO STAT CRE SOU insaciable 252 MEMO TABLe DATA POINES Partner 253 KS e Be eae unen paca 252 MEMory TABLE e 253 ME Mon TAPL ettOuencv DONS 253 ME Mory TABLE GAIN El Le 254 MEMory TABLe GAINFMAGNitude cort 253 MEMO LABES MAP astenia
228. ce DIFFerence RELative RATio RATio RELative SENSe POWer AC RANGe AUTO The R amp S NRP2 also recognizes these commands but AVG should be used instead of AC since R amp S NRP Zxx Power Sensors sensors eventually also measure DC components and the designation in the R amp S NRP2 is not used in the sense of SCPI R amp S NRP2 List of Commands List of Commands NS EE ei PE UE eee se E E ES EE E SO RO 195 RE 195 o A EU ee ee eee eee 196 KA 196 PA 196 EE 196 KEE 197 Ee 197 me EE 197 EE 198 H KE 198 o E 204 SRE e e No A A ee 8 UE nee ee ee ee eee ee ene 204 E AAA e Eo teense nee eee ee ee cae 204 PR PEPA O e PE Po PO o O eee 205 WE E E o o OE Eo ee eee ee 205 A e y e e Eo Oo A 205 AE EE 327 A ae test A tate aenescan enced E A neem otenccms deena E E A EEA 327 CALCulate lt 1 4 gt STATistics MARKer HORIzontal POSition X POWer oocccooocncccccocccccccccccncccoccnnnos 235 CALCulate lt 1 4 gt STATistics MARKer HORizontal DATA ooocccoconcccccccccococoncnncononcnnnonncnnnnnannnnnnnnnnnnonancnnnnos 235 CALCulate lt 1 4 gt STATistics MARKer VERTical DATA PO Wer ooocccconncccccccnccccnnccocccnccocnnonancnnnnnonononononos 235 CAL CulatecJl AGTAltspceMAhker VER Tea bOSmonf vl 235 CAL Culate lt M 4 gt STATISUCS PO Wer AVGIDATA ici tancia nati s 236 CAL CulatesM 6 gt COUNEDATA ccorisiira sit cia 225 E Ee EK RT 225 CAL CulatecJlGExibRemeshRtrzet nenene 225 O A AA 225 CAL Cu late lt
229. ces ete tee eee eee eet 106 Analog Meter Scaling cooccccooncnoccconccnnnoncnnnonnnnnos 97 Top A ae cee cee 129 Trace average eh iatebintac E E oar eet ee E 129 MIMMU asco seco arinei niea aa tee ees 129 A a 129 Trace E 119 120 Trace 1 2 statistics display ooccccconnocccconcnncnncnnnnos 139 TACE e NG EE 119 Trace display mode ENEE 115 Trace Func T slot E 133 Trace function ooccccccccnccocnnconnnoncncnnnncnononononnnonanononononons 120 Trace function settngs 119 o NEE 116 Trigger MISSING ME 337 Trunc Meas esioniciotioien escenario Ee 166 U unit measured power cocooccccncccccccncnonncnnncnnonnnnonancnncnnnnacinnns 333 measured power ratio occconcccccocccccconiconnconnnonnns 334 la eee een eee nen ere ere ee ene eae 118 Unpacking the meter kA 8 USB configuration oococcccconcnnccconnnnncnnnnnnnnonnnonancnnnnonanons 170 USB interface cccoocccoccnccccnccocnnonnncnncnnnnononononnnoncononaninons 365 USB settings sssiinandiiata a itinere 147 USBTMC standard oocccoccccccnconcncccnnnoconnncnnnnnncnconcncnnninons 147 User def d transition Sensor RANGE sccescnicdessaieastnadvatatdnd niceadantandnicavanenencaasdes 84 User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 V Versions Options remote control ccoooococcncccocncc 196 Video BYV APA oo A 119 VISA resource identifier o ccconccconcnccccocccnoconnnronnnnnnos 365 VISA Resource Identifier ccoooo
230. ck source provides a high precision unmodulated sine signal with a power of 1 mW and a frequency of 50 MHz for checking the sensors Chapter Sensor Check Source describes how the generator is turned on and off User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 14 R amp S NRP2 Putting into Operation Rear Panel Tour Sensor connectors The front panel accommodates a maximum of two sensor connectors for sen sors A and B The power sensors are connected by inserting the male connector Note You can not disconnect the sensor simply by pulling at the cable or the rear part of the connector To disconnect pull the connector at its sleeve which is marked with a red dot 1 6 Rear Panel Tour This section gives an overview of the control elements and the connectors on the rear panel of the R amp S NRP2 Each element and connector is briefly described and a reference is given to the chapters containing detailed information 1 2 3 4 J Se Gau O ED mag SENSOR INPUT CIA DU EEN Y Fig 1 4 Rear panel view 1 TRIG IN OUT2 and OUT1 TRIG OUT connectors 2 ETHERNET interface 3 USB interface 4 IEC 625 IEEE 488 interface 5 AC supply and power switch 6 Sensor connectors option R amp S NRP B5 User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 15 R amp S NRP2 Putting into Operation Rear Panel Tour TRIG IN OUT2 and OUT1 TRIG OUT gt TRIG IN OUT 1 Oi 2 Gout 1 TRIG OUT The BNC connector OUT1 TRIG OUT output
231. cocccccccccccononocccnccncnnncnnnonons 171 High reference power pulse cccoocccccccocccoocncnoncnnnnno 129 Holdoff Sensor Trigger occcoococnconococonocnnononoconcnnacoconacononarononors 89 a UR e WE 166 Hysteresis Sensor Trigger occcoooccncocococonoconononaconnonacononacononacononars 89 WD NS ACS crearse toas 154 IECHIEEE V1 74 0 MOS EE 358 E 352 Initializing WINDOWS ccooocccconcncnnccnonncocononcnnonncnnnncnncnncnnnnos 93 Installed Options remote control ccccoccccooccnccnnnn 197 Int Master Sensor rigger esa 86 Interface functions GPIB DUS coconionoconiaisicaaidc ici 353 en ere 352 Interface messages GPIB oocccccnccccccccccconicocncononononos 353 valid SEUNG EE 337 o AA 148 IP Address Manual DHCP ees 148 150 K key PRESET eee rer er emer eet ne steer mt 198 Key CICK E eeah Eo OR A 160 II genge 348 Keywords ojo eege 193 L Bue ie Reg E EE 71 E A 71 Level Sensor Trigger srta ii ici 87 User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 ET A 337 LIMIT EE 58 Limit warning A 160 Low reference power pulse oooccoonccococconcccncconcnnnos 129 M Manual operation ooccoccccccncccccnconccnnconanonnnonnncononanonanonons 49 Marker Statistics display cooooonnoccccccoonncnnncnnanoos 138 Marker Config sico risas 125 Marker GE 126 Marker statistics display cooccconcocococncncnnoncnonaconnss 136 MaX y o o sirce EP a iets 120 Max Power S
232. coconcocononnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnannnnnnaneninos 284 IGENGe DL AzITRACeAvVERaoeCOUN AUTO 284 IGENGe DL AzITRACeAvVERagoeCOUNAUTOMIlMe 285 IGENGe DL AzITRACeAvVERaoeCOUNAUTONGbano 286 SENSe lt 1 4 gt TRACe AVERage COUNtAUTO PO Nt ooooccccoccnnccccnnccccccncnnoccnonoconcnnnnnnonnncnnnnonnnnnonnnncnnnnnnnos 286 IGENGe DL AzITRACeAvVERageCOUNAUTOREGSolutnon 285 SENSe lt 1 4 gt TRACe AVERage COUNtAUTO TY PE ooccccccnnccccnnococcnococonononnnonononononnnonnnononnnnnonanenenonannns 286 SENSe lt 1 4 gt 5 TRACe AVERage TCONWO coccion dd 287 SENSe lt 1 4 gt TRACe AVERage STAT8 ocoooncncccoccncccccncconccononocononononnonnnnononnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnancnnnonnnnonennnnnns 284 SENSe lt 1 4 gt TRACe MEASurement ALGorlithM ccccococnccccconcncccconnnnoconcnnnononnnnnnoncnnnnnonnnnononcnnnnnnncnnnnos 287 SENSe lt 1 4 gt TRACe MEASurement AUTO STA Te oooccoconncncconcconoconononononcnnnononcnnnnnnnononnonnnnononcnnnnnnanononos 287 SENSe lt 1 4 gt TRACe MEASurement DEFine DURation REFerence c cocccccccccncccccncccnncnnnoncnnnononcnnnncnnnos 288 SENSe lt 1 4 gt TRACe MEASurement DEFine TRANsition HREFerence coccccccccccccccccnnccccnnccnonononnnccnnnos 288 SENSe lt 1 4 gt TRACe MEASurement DEFine TRANsition LREFerence cocooccccccncccccnconccnnocnncnncnccnonnnos 288 SENSe lt 1 4 gt TRACe MEASurement OFF Set TIME ccccccccccceeseececeeeseeeee
233. come large and thus also the measurement time An upper time limit can be set via SENS lt 1 4 gt AVER COUN AUTO MTIME maxi mum time It should never be exceeded Undesired long measurement times can thus be prevented in the SENS AVER COUN AUTO TYPE NSR mode if the automatic filter length switchover is on Parameters lt mtime gt float_value measurement time Range depending on sensor RST depending on sensor Default unit S SENSe lt 1 4 gt AVERage COUNt AUTO RESolution lt resolution gt Defines the number of significant places for linear units and the number of decimal places for logarithmic units which should be free of noise in the measurement result This setting is also performed by the command DISPlay WINDow lt 1 4 gt RESolution on page 245 that tries to set the sensors involved in the measurement results accordingly For further details see chapter 4 Instrument Functions on page 61 The setting is only taken into account if SENS AVER COUN AUTO TYPE Is set to RES and SENS AVER COUN AUTO Is ON However SENS lt 1 4 gt AVER COUN AUTO RES does not affect the DISPlay com mand The parameters of the two commands are different but have the same meaning SENS lt 1 4 gt AVER COUN AUTO RES DISP lt 1 4 gt RES User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 265 R amp S NRP2 Remote Control Commands SENSe Sensor Commands Parameters lt lt resolution gt gt 112 314 Range depe
234. commands CALCulate 1 8 RELative MAGNitude CALCulate 1 8 RELative AUTO Table 6 7 One channel functions lt source_list gt n n 1 2 3 4 PC Yields the measured average power of the sensor assigned to the PC RELative PC reference value The value measured in the PC is divided by the reference value For high level commands the calculation function is selected by the keyword in the com mand header The following calculation functions are available for calculating the primary channel PC and the secondary channel SC The promary and secondary channel are set by the parameter lt source_list gt in the parameter list User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 215 R amp S NRP2 Remote Control Commands High Level Measurement Commands CONFigure MEASure READ and FETCh Table 6 8 Two channel functions lt source_list gt n m n 1 2 3 4 m 1 2 3 4 DiFFerence PC SC Yields the difference between the PC and SC This means that two sensors must be specified in lt source_list gt This also applies to the following functions DIFFerence RELative PC SC reference value The difference between the PC and SC is divided by the reference value PC SC Yields the sum of the PC and SC The lt source_list gt must therefore contain two sensors This also applies to the following functions ee PC SC RELative SS reference value The sum of the PC and SC is divided by the ref
235. conocccncccconnnconnnnnnos 147 Voltage at the analog outputs occccccccccnccocnncccnnnnncnnnnns 156 VXI11CONfIguratiON ooooccconccncccncnnccnncoconononcnnnnnnnnonnncnnnnos 171 VAIT e edel e EE 355 VXI11 protocol functions ccoococoiocioinicianicnidnccanenotana 357 VAII SONNOS ae ae aii 148 W o E T A E 165 Window Dig resolution RE 96 Window handling EE 35 Window name EEN 144 Window size and type ooocccccocccconcccccnonccnnonanononanonconannnnns 57 X X Marker Statistics display ccooooooocccconcnncnncnnnnos 138 Y Y Division Statistics display ooocccooconicocnnoncnnnnnnnos 138 Y Marker Statistics display cooooooocccconcnnononnnnnos 138 Y Start Statistics display coooonccconccconconnncnancnnnonos 138 Z o E 27 ZETOUIG ASA srta 63 gt E e e Oe 58 421
236. ction MEASurement lt 1 8 gt SCALar POWer BURSt RLOSs lt dtolerance gt lt start_exclude gt lt end_exclude gt lt expected_value gt lt resolution gt lt source_list gt MEASurement commands for measurement mode Burst MEASurement lt 1 8 gt ARRay POWer AVG MEASurement lt 1 8 gt ARRay POWer AVG RELative MEASurement lt 1 8 gt ARRay POWer AVG DIFFerence MEASurement lt 1 8 gt ARRay POWer AVG DIFFerence RELative MEASurement lt 1 8 gt ARRay POWer AVG SUM MEASurement lt 1 8 gt ARRay POWer AVG SUM RELative MEASurement lt 1 8 gt ARRay POWer AVG RATio MEASurement lt 1 8 gt ARRay POWer AVG RATio RELative MEASurement lt 1 8 gt ARRay POWer AVG SWR MEASurement lt 1 8 gt ARRay POWer AVG REFLection MEASurement lt 1 8 gt ARRay POWer AVG RLOSs lt buffered_size gt lt expected_value gt lt resolution gt lt source_list gt MEASurement commands for measurement mode ContAv with buffering MEASurement lt 1 8 gt XTIMe POWer MEASurement lt 1 8 gt XTIMe POWer RATio lt scope_size gt lt capture_time gt lt source_list gt MEASurement commands for measurement mode Trace MEASurement lt 1 8 gt STATistics CCDF MEASurement lt 1 8 gt STATistics PDF lt statistics size gt lt capture_time gt lt source_list gt MEASurement commands for measurement mode Statistics 6 5 CALCulate Configuration of Calcul
237. d If the buffer overflows the measurement is terminated and error 53 Truncated measurement is generated Sample error Samples were lost while sampling the signal applied The measured value can thus be incor rect Sensor hardware error A sensor signalled an error in the sensor hardware If the problem persists please contact the R amp S servicing center Filter truncated With the automatic filter function activated a sensor tries to set the filter length such that the required accuracy is obtained If the measurement time required for this exceeds the value set with SENSe AVERage COUNt AUTO MTIMe max time the filter length is shortened such that a measurement does not last more than the max time and error message 56 Filter trun cated is generated Standard settings incomplete The R amp S NRP2 can be configured for measuring standardized signals with SYSTem STANdard PRESet lt string gt This command sets a number of predefined param eters If asensor does not support a specific parameter e g a measurement mode execution error message 57 Standard settings incomplete is generated 8 3 Bootmenu The boot menu of the R amp S NRP2 offers service and troubleshooting functions It is pass word protected The start display indicates the Bootmenu button for a few seconds after power on The bootmenu requires a password User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 344 Bootmenu R amp S NRP Power Met
238. d further down The measurement result is a list of 256 measured values separated by a comma User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 382 R amp S NRP2 Programming Measurements C 1 5 Measuring with high level commands Example MEAS ARRay 1000 1000 measured values are recorded in the ContAv mode After termination of the last measurement the results are stored in the output queue There is no triggering as in the ContAv mode The measurement result is a list of 1000 measured values separated by a comma The keywords for processing two sensors can be added to the MEAS TSL MEAS BURS and MEAS ARRa y commands but the SWR RLOS and REFL functions are not avail able Example MEAS TOL RAT 577 Us 8 18 ts 16 us DEF 2 Gl US The above timeslot example is extended to two sensors The measurement result is a list of 8 measured values separated by a comma for the 8 timeslots these values were obtained by division from the measured values of sensors 1 and 3 Selecting the output unit for measured values So far no information has been given on the unit of the measured values It is possible to modify the output unit of the measured values A distinction is made as to whether the result represents a power or a power ratio Relative measurements always deliver power ratios This also applies to the RATio SWR RLOS and REFL functions The units are set by means of the following commands UNIT POWer DBM W DBUV
239. d low ref erence levels which are used to determine the pulse timing All values are specified in percent of the pulse amplitude either expressed in terms of power Watt or voltage Volt Low Ref The Low Ref level defines the start of the rising edge and the end of the falling edge of the pulse needed for measurement of the rise fall time High Ref The High Ref level defines the end of the rising edge and the start of the falling edge of the pulse needed for measurement of the rise fall time User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 129 R amp S NRP2 Instrument Functions Reference Ref s related to Algorithm Set to defaults Displaying traces This reference level is used to define the pulse width pulse start time and pulse stop time Selects how the threshold parameters are to be interpreted either volt age related or power related Changing from a power based definition to a voltage based definition and vice versa affects the analysis because different points of the waveform are analyzed The following table gives the settings related to power and the dB figures if the same results are to be obtained as with a typical 10 50 90 definition in terms of voltage The log values are shown for comparison only Voltage related Power related V kou The voltage related definition represents the normal case for analyzing the pulse parameters Selects the analysis algorithm for detecting the pu
240. ds SERVice SEbRVicecil AscRESu rankan nka an korakora anann nra annn 294 SERIES LASER a aia a a acia 294 SEbRVicecil As UNL och 294 SERVice lt 1 4 gt CALibration TEST lt NR1 gt Tests the consistency of the calibration data set according to three criteria If the following bit is set in the following action is executed lt nr1 gt o The serial number of the calibration data set is tested The checksum of the calibration data set is tested The header of the calibration data set is tested If an inconsistency of the data set is detected the query returns a 1 otherwise a 0 Parameters lt NR1 gt int_value Range O to 255 Usage Query only SERVice lt 1 4 gt CALibration TEMP lt state gt Initiates a temperature measurement of the sensor in question The temperature can be queried with SERV CAL TEMP DATA Parameters lt state gt ONCE Usage Event SERVice lt 1 4 gt CALibration TEMP DATA Returns the temperature of the sensor in Kelvin if a temperature measurement was pre viously initiated by means of SERV CAL TEMP ONCE Usage Query only SERVice DISPlay OVERload lt state gt Switches the sensor overload warning on off Attention If the sensor is overloaded it could be damaged The warning should not be suppressed if you are not certain that the sensor is out of danger Parameters lt state gt ON OFF RST ON User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 293 R amp S NRP2 Re
241. dual gates for specific channels Sensors can only be configured in numeric T gateAV mode Gate Selects the gate to be configured Note In remote control the gate to be configured is selected by the TGATe suffix Start Length of Gate Entry of start time and length of the gate Remote command SENSe lt 1 4 gt POWer TGATe lt 1 4 gt TIME on page 2 6 SENSe lt 1 4 gt POWer TGATe lt 1 4 gt OFFSet TIME on page 275 Fence Activates the Fence function User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 123 R amp S NRP2 Instrument Functions A Displaying traces Within the measurement period a fence Le an exclusion interval can be set The fence is defined by its start time and its length The start time refers to the start of the gate In contrast to the numeric T gateAv mode the definition of fences in the Gate mode is not restricted to the wideband power sensors of the R amp S NRP Z8x series Instead all power sensors are supported that can be operated in Trace mode Start Length of Fence Sets the start time and the length of the fence Remote command SENSe lt 1 4 gt POWer TGATe lt 1 4 gt EXCLude MID TIME on page 275 SENSe lt 1 4 gt POWer TGATe lt 1 4 gt EXCLude MID OFFSet TIME on page 274 4 5 5 Marker display mode In the Marker mode you can display two markers in addition to the trace s The power power ratio at the marker positions is d
242. dulation this parameter should always be activated if the aperture time cannot be exactly adjusted to the modulation period If the aperture time is only 5 to 9 times larger than a modulation period the display fluctuations are sufficiently reduced With smoothing off 300 to 3000 periods would be required to obtain the same effect Aperture on page 66 Remote command SENSe lt 1 4 gt POWer AVG SMOothing STATe on page 273 User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 67 R amp S NRP2 Instrument Functions KA A A Data acquisition and parameters 4 2 1 3 Measuring the average power of burst signals The Burst Av mode is the simplest way of measuring the average burst power It is available with the multipath power sensors R amp S NRP 2Z1 1 21 22 23 24 28 31 32 and the R amp S NRP Z8x wideband power sensors When this mode is selected the sensor itself detects the start and end of the burst no external trigger signal is required The parameter Dropout for detecting the falling edge and the parameters of the trigger menu see chapier 4 2 6 Trigger settings on page 85 are different ways of providing a stable measurement By using the param eters Excluded from Start and Excluded from End the start and end of bursts can be excluded from the measurement This means that signal overshoots can be omitted from measurements for example Find some background information in sections Dropout tolerance on page 74 and Timing d
243. e 177 A eege 153 EE KEE 139 el Bue EE 128 ca EE 139 PON CS A AAA 70 Channel statistics display cooooonoccnccoononnnnononno 139 S ae eer ee E er errr Th rr etree 116 Closing lee 93 Filter Command description ccccconncnnccccononcnnnnnonconononanennnos 193 lo o ME 79 Coning Ao A 70 elt Ee E 158 COMO DAS asaltada ente tai 122 o EE 9 User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 418 R amp S NRP2 Index FUEGO eege ege 120 Function AA 18 G Gamma correction ccccooncnnccnoncnnccnnncnncnnnnonnnnnnnoncnnnnnnanonoss 84 EE 71 123 Gate EE 127 Gate statistics display cccccooooconccnnnononcononononnnnnos 136 Gale Avg NO E 119 Gate number ooccccncnncnnccncococonococonnnconnnnnonnononononononnnonnnnons 123 Gates Config dialog DOX cccocccccoccccccoonncnnconcnononcnnnnnonos 123 JAE WAN ee 148 Getting started WEE 23 Ee EE 77 GPIB bus interface oocccccnccccnccccncconococoncnnnanononnnoncnonanos 351 GPIB bus interface functions coocccocccccncnnncncncnnnnnnnnnos 353 GPIB configuration reirse n 170 GPIB settings scrasiacasiia ceden 147 Graph graphical display mode ooccocccccccccccccocncnnnnno 93 Graphically representing power versus time 42 Ce BC Sareea eae nee cintia 142 H Handshake Bus bus ninnnnnnnnennnnerenenenrrerrrnrrrerrerrrerrenne 352 Hardware Info remote control ooocococccccocnnnnnnnoo 197 Hardware Requirement oooco
244. e register STB Fig 6 19 Questionable Status Register 6 13 4 Description of Status Registers In the following sections the SCPI status registers shown in figure 6 17 figure 6 18 figure 6 19 are described in detail Status Byte STB Service Request Enable Register SRE Device Status Register Questionable Status Register Standard Event Status Register ESR with ENABle register ESE Operation Status Register Operation Calibrating Status Register Operation Measuring Status Register Operation Trigger Status Register Operation Sense Status Register Operation Lower Limit Fail Status Register Operation Upper Limit Fail Status Register Questionable Power Status Register Questionable Window Status Register Questionable Calibration Status Register User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 302 R amp S NRP2 Remote Control Commands E STATus 6 13 5 Status Byte STB and Service Request Enable Register SRE The STB is already defined in IEEE 488 2 It gives a rough overview of the device status collecting information from the lower level registers It is comparable with the CONDition register of a SCPI defined register and is at the highest level of the SCPI hierarchy Its special feature is that bit 6 acts as the summary bit of all other bits of the Status Byte Register The status byte is read by the query STB or a serial poll The SRE is associated with the STB The function of the SRE corresponds to that of the ENABle
245. e 113 The R amp S NRP2 can display the measurement result of one channel sensor or combine measured values from two channels sensors using a mathematical function and display the result in the selected window The necessary settings are made in the Function dialog box User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 98 R amp S NRP2 Instrument Functions 4 4 3 1 Configuring measurements The first step is to select the measurement function i e the mode of combination for multi channel measurements Possible functions are the power ratio the sum or the difference of two channels an impedance matching measurement function derived from the power ratio or the power in a single measurement channel All or any of the connected sensors can be selected A primary channel and possibly a secondary channel must be selected for each measurement window The simplest case is a measurement with just one sensor To configure this measure ment first select this sensor in the Prim Channel list Then select Single x as func tion To make two channel measurement a Sec Channel must be defined prior to selecting the measurement function For impedance matching measurement functions SWR x y RCoeff x y and RLoss x y the first letter x is always referenced to the channel detecting the Inci dent power and the second letter y to the channel detecting the Reflected power Prim Channel and Sec Channel are replaced
246. e 326 Al e E ERES PO UU OE E a ak NA aA 326 SYSTem BEEPer IMMediate Generates an audible signal via the built in loudspeaker The duration of the signal is set with SYST BEEP TIME Frequency and volume cannot be changed The signal is only output if it is not switched off with SYS BEEP STAT OFF Usage Event User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 317 R amp S NRP2 Remote Control Commands SYSTem SYSTem BEEPer NOTify OVERIoad lt state gt Determines if the R amp S NRP2 shall emit an acoustic signal when the power at a sensor exceeds the power limit Parameters lt state gt ON OFF RST OFF Usage Event SYSTem BEEPer NOTify KEY lt state gt Enables ON or disables OFF acoustic key clicks respectively Parameters lt state gt ON OFF RST OFF SYSTem BEEPer STOP Stops the output of an audible signal Usage Event SYSTem BEEPer TIME lt nrf gt Sets the length in milliseconds of the audible signal output with SYS BEEP Parameters lt nrf gt int_value Range 1 60 RST This setting is not changed by RST Default unit S SYSTem COMMunicate GPIB SELF ADDRess lt nr1 gt Sets the address with which the R amp S NRP2 can be addressed via the IEC IEEE bus The address is factory set to 20 and is not changed by a reset Parameters lt nr1 gt int_value Range 0 30 RST This setting is not changed by RST Usage Event User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 318 R amp S NRP2 Remote C
247. e 355 A LAN connector is located at the rear panel of the instrument The interface is based on TCP IP and supports Ethernet socket communication see chapter 4 7 1 5 Raw Ethernet socket communication settings on page 149 for setting the IP address For description of the interface refer to chapter A 2 2 Connec tion setup on page 356 VISA is a standardized software interface library providing input and output functions to communicate with instruments A VISA installation on the controller is a prerequisite for remote control over USB or LAN when using VXI 11 protocol However no VISA installation is necessary to remote control while using Ethernet socket communication see also chapter A 2 2 Connection setup on page 356 4 7 1 1 Selecting the remote control interface This section describes the configuration of the remote control interfaces For information on how to set up a remote control connection via the different interfaces see chapter 5 2 Connecting a Controller to the Base Unit on page 170 For background information on the interfaces see chapter A Remote control interfa ces on page 351 User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 145 R amp S NRP2 Instrument Functions system settings Remote Interfaces Remote Interfaces on GPIB USB Vi Eth 4 Command Set R amp SNRP2 e Fig 4 72 Remote Interfaces dialog box Select one of the available remote control interfaces or turn them
248. e collected separately Rohde amp Schwarz GmbH 8 Co KG has developed a disposal concept and takes full responsibility for take back obligations and disposal obligations for manufacturers within the EU Contact your Rohde amp Schwarz customer service center for environmentally responsible disposal of the product 3 If products or their components are mechanically and or thermally processed in a manner that goes beyond their intended use hazardous substances heavy metal dust such as lead beryllium nickel may be released For this reason the product may only be disassembled by specially trained personnel Improper disassembly may be hazardous to your health National waste disposal regulations must be observed 4 lf handling the product releases hazardous substances or fuels that must be disposed of in a special way e g coolants or engine oils that must be replenished regularly the safety instructions of the manufacturer of the hazardous substances or fuels and the applicable regional waste disposal regulations must be observed Also observe the relevant safety instructions in the product documentation The improper disposal of hazardous substances or fuels can cause health problems and lead to environmental damage For additional information about environmental protection visit the Rohde amp Schwarz website Instrucciones de seguridad elementales jEs imprescindible leer y cumplir las siguientes instrucciones e informaciones de segur
249. e general safety instructions also contain information on operating conditions that will prevent damage to the instrument The instrument s data sheet may contain additional operating conditions Risk of instrument damage Before putting the R amp S NRP2 into operation make sure that e the sensor inputs are not overloaded e the meter s outputs are not overloaded or wrongly connected e the ventilation holes are not obstructed The meter may be damaged if these precautions are not observed User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 7 R amp S NRP2 Putting into Operation EMC 1 2 EMC EMI impact on measurement results To prevent EMI the meter must always be installed to meet the relevant EMC standards Never operate the instrument with its enclosure removed Only use shielded signal and control cables that meet the relevant EMC standards 1 3 Unpacking the meter When you have removed the meter from its packing check that nothing is missing using the delivery note and the accessory lists If there is any damage contact the carrier Keep all the packing to support any claims for compensation Retain the original packing material If the instrument needs to be transported or shipped at a later date you can use the material to prevent control elements and connectors from being damaged 1 4 Setting up the meter The R amp S NRP2 is designed for use under laboratory conditions either on a bench top or in a rack 1 4 1 Carrying
250. e settings are automatically restored gt Press the ON STANDBY key to save the current setup shut down the operating system and set the instrument to standby state Ga CC N Fig 1 11 ON Standby key Switching off the AC power E You can leave the AC power on permanently to preserve your last instrument settings Switching off is required only if the instrument must be completely disconnected from all power supplies User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 21 Starting the R amp S NRP2 R amp S NRP2 Getting Started Requirements 2 Getting Started This chapter introduces the main functions and settings of the R amp S NRP2 by means of some basic power measurement examples Included topics Brief introduction to the operation on page 24 provides a quick introduction on how to operate the instrument Preset and zeroing on page 27 explains how to set the R amp S NRP2 and the R amp S Power Sensors to defined initial states Measuring average power Cont Av mode on page 29 introduces standard power measurement with the R amp S NRP2 Window handling on page 35 and Setting measurement functions on page 40 explains the basic techniques for configuring result windows Graphically representing power versus time on page 42 represents graphically the time characteristics in Trace amp Statistics mode Measuring average burst power Burst Av mode on page 46 enables you to per form a measurement of
251. e to improve the sequence of measurement using the commands from the TRIGger command sys tem User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 386 R amp S NRP2 C 3 C 4 Programming Measurements Logic relationship of command systems SENSe CALCulate and UNIT Logic relationship of command systems SENSe CAL Culate and UNIT The following section provides an overview of the measurement procedure of the R amp S NRP2 The commands are mentioned as examples These commands are descri bed in detail in chapter 6 Remote Control Commands on page 193 To perform measurements with the R amp S NRP2 the user should have a good under standing of the trigger system and be familiar with the result processing The measured values delivered by the sensors cannot be directly queried As shown in figure below the raw data is first determined in the sensors taking into account the SENSe settings It is then transferred to the CALCulate blocks where the measured values of up to two sen sors are processed and made available to the user in the unit defined by UNIT Data output output queue in REMOTE mode or display Measured values in LOCAL mode raw data CALC 1 8 MATH EXPR SENSn SENSn SENSm SENSn SENSm REFL SWR RLOS Fig 3 2 Processing of measured values in the R amp S NRP2 The high level commands and the SENSe block allow indices to be specified These indi ces refer to the connected sensors indices 1 to 4
252. easured result Possible Units W DBM DBUV DPCT DB O Usage Query only CALCulate lt 1 8 gt EXTRemes RESet The R amp S NRP2 stores the maximum and minimum values for each calculate block The current measured value is stored with CALC 1 8 EXTR RES as the new minimum and maximum value The extreme values can be queried with CALC 1 8 MIN DATA and CALC 1 8 MAX DATA Usage Event CALCulate lt 1 8 gt FEED lt 1 2 gt lt feed gt The sensors connected with the calculate block via the primary and secondary channel can yield differently processed data peak value average value peak to average value or even a measurement sequence as is the case in the Trace mode The CALC FEED determines which of this data is to be processed by the calculate block Depending on the measurement mode the following settings are possible User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 225 R amp S NRP2 Remote Control Commands CALCulate Configuration of Calculate Blocks Table 6 9 lt string gt values Primary lt string gt channel measure ment mode ContAv POWer AVERage Average value POWer PEAK Peak value POWer RANDom Randomly selected value from the measurement interval Burst AVERage Average value PEAK Peak value RANDom Randomly selected value from the measurement interval Timeslot POWer AVERage Average value POWer PEAK Peak value POWer RANDom Randomly selected value from the measurement interval
253. ected measurement function are provided for selection l e absolute power values are displayed in W dBm or dBuV and relative values in 1 dB or A respectively The following tables show how the R amp S NRP2 calculates the measurement results for the different units either in absolute notation or relative to a reference value see chap ter 4 4 4 Relative measurement on page 110 for legend see table 4 7 Table 4 3 Formulas for absolute single channel power measurement Ratio A B P 10 di B TI RLoss A B P 10 di Pp User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 107 R amp S NRP2 Instrument Functions Configuring measurements Table 4 5 Formulas for sum and difference of power Table 4 7 Legend for formula tables Variable Meaning P Power Pa Power in channel A incident power Pa Power in channel B reflected power Pr Reference power Px Py p Reference power ratio 7 Characteristic impedance i e 500 Unit The Unit drop down list is used to set the result unit Units that are provided for the selected measurement function W Single Diff Sum dBm dBuv Single Diff Sum A dB 1 Ratio User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 108 R amp S NRP2 Instrument Functions TE _ Configuring measurements a be SWR RCoeff dB RLoss Remote command UNIT lt 1 8 gt POWer on page 333 UNIT lt 1 8 gt POWer RATio on page 334 4 4 3 5 Displaying additional information
254. ection applies to the sensor s output Therefore dB offsets with a positive sign lead to a reduction of the measurement result 4 2 2 1 Offset dialog box gt Select Offset in the Sensor menu User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 76 R amp S NRP2 T Correction 3 Trigger 4 Instrument Functions Data acquisition and parameters Sensor Windows Measurement File System 4 Offset H Global Y 2 Table 1 Table B Table Offset 1 Line in this table 3 0000 dE a Edit Table Sensor Offset 4 000 dE S Parameter Device Fig 4 14 Offset dialog box The Offset menu shows the calculated offset values Table Offset is the offset calculated from the selected table and the current frequency lts value does not depend on whether table offsets are active or not Sensor Offset shows the effective offset value This value takes into account the settings for Global and Table offset However it neglects any additional offsets that arise from the S Parameter setting as this information is stored in the sensor A B C D Tabs for selecting the sensor Note In remote control commands select the sensor with the suffix in command SENSe lt 1 4 gt Le choose suffix 1 for channel A channel 2 for B and so on Global value Enters the global dB offset dB offset Positive values correspond to external losses negative values to external gains Remote command SENSe lt 1 4 gt
255. ed Not supported A command is not supported by the sensor State not supported Attempt was made to set an invalid value The permissible values for sensor dependent com mands can be declared as impermissible by a sensor depending on the context Sensor not present A command could not be executed because the required sensor is not connected Sensor not idle A command could not be executed because the respective sensor was not in the IDLE state at that time Measurement aborted while waiting for data A measurement was aborted while the device was waiting for measurement results No extremes available in this mode Extreme values minimum maximum und peak to peak values are not calculated in the set measurement mode Sensor removed while waiting for result A sensor was disconnected while the device was waiting for measurement results Failed to initialize sensor A sensor could not be initialized Error in receiving calibration data from sensor An error occurred in receiving calibration data from the sensor command CALibration 1 4 DATA Error in sending calibration data to sensor An error occurred in sending calibration data to the sensor command CALibration 1 4 DATA lt block data gt Command not supported by sensor Attempt was made to send a command to a sensor that does not support this command This may depend on the current sensor status The sensors can inform the R amp S
256. ed the neutral zone depends on the unit selected the points in the center ofthe screen remain unchanged when dBm dB and dBuV are used The points at the bottom of the screen remain unchanged in all other displays oa 4 2 3 4 Switches the the function of the cursor keys to altering the borders of a gate 1 2 Shifts the start and stop time User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 122 R amp S NRP2 Instrument Functions Displaying traces 3 4 Sets the fence provided Fence has been activated in the Config Gates dialog box see chapter 4 5 4 3 Gate diagram settings on page 123 This setting applies to R amp S NRP Z8x wideband power sensors only Gate Gate 1 Selects a gate The gate is displayed graphically and the measurement results for the gate are shown in the info panel Select Select Trace Trace fav Bau Switches between the traces to be evaluated for gate measurement 4 5 4 3 Gate diagram settings Config gt Select Gates Config in the dialog box opened via the Window gt Graph gt Dis play gt Gates control panel Trace amp Statistics sensor mode Configure the four available gates in the Gates Config dialog box Gates Config Gate DN 4 Start of Gate Length of Gate 0 000 us 100 000 us 4 Fence 4 Start of Fence Length of Fence 0 0008 00004s i Fig 4 51 Gates Config dialog box The four available gates are common for all diplayed waveforms Indivi
257. ed out see figure 6 13 Timeslot parameters Parameters lt time_interval gt float_value Range depending on sensor RST depending on sensor Default unit S SENSe lt 1 4 gt POWer TSLot EXCLude MID STATe lt state gt Activates or deactivates the blanking out of time intervals in the timeslots There is no direct command equivalent in the command groups of the power sensors Instead the length of the interval is set to zero Parameters lt state gt ON OFF Range depending on sensor RST depending on sensor If the RST value of SENS TSL MID TIME is zero the RST value of SENS TSL MID STAT is OFF otherwise it is ON SENSe lt 1 4 gt POWer TSLot EXCLude MID TIME lt time_interval gt Together with SENS TSL MID OFFS TIME allows a time interval in the timeslots to be blanked out SENS TSL MID TIME determines the length of the interval to be blanked out see figure 6 13 Timeslot parameters Parameters lt time_interval gt float_value Range depending on sensor RST depending on sensor Default unit S User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 277 R amp S NRP2 Remote Control Commands SENSe Sensor Commands SENSe lt 1 4 gt POWer TSLot AVG WIDTh lt time gt Sets the length of the timeslot in the Timeslot mode see figure below SENS TSLOTSCOUNT 3 T Slot 1 T Slot 2 T Slot 3 Power Trigger event Tigger level cabeatsisccssasieatenasenets i Time SDENS T SLOT
258. ee chapter 4 5 6 2 Pulse diagram settings on page 128 Pos Scale Defines if the cursor keys position or scale the waveform Pos The cursor keys shift the waveform in horizontal and vertical direction Scale The cursor keys expand and compress the waveform When the hori zontal scaling is modified the points pixels at the left of the screen remain unchanged When the vertical scaling is modified the neutral zone depends on the unit selected the points in the center of the screen remain unchanged when dBm dB and dBuV are used The points at the bottom of the screen remain unchanged in all other displays Auto Selects a vertical scaling that is suitable for the signal Gate Selects if the pulse analysis is performed for the visible trace or within the selected gate 1 2 3 4 Pulse analysis is performed within the selected gate Trace Pulse analysis is performed for the visible trace entire screen width User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 127 R amp S NRP2 Select Trace Hau Dau 4 5 6 2 Config Pulse O Instrument Functions Displaying traces Select Trace Switches between the traces available for pulse analysis available only for waveforms representing absolute power of a wideband power sensor R amp S NRP Z8x series Pulse diagram settings gt Set the parameters of pulse analysis in the Config Pulse dialog box opened via the Window gt Graph gt Display gt Pulse control pan
259. eeds the upper limit value The measured value returned by the fifth Calculate block exceeds the upper limit value Window 6 Upper Limit Fail The measured value supplied by the sixth Calculate block exceeds the upper limit value Window 7 Upper Limit Fail The measured value supplied by the seventh Calculate block exceeds the upper limit value Window 8 Upper Limit Fail The measured value supplied by the eighth Calculate block exceeds the upper limit value Bit 15 will never be used Questionable Power Status Register aa Window 5 Upper Limit Fail The CONDition register contains information as to whether the measured power values are questionable The Questionable Power Status Register can be read by the following commands STATus QUEStionable POWer SUMMary CONDition STATus QUEStionable POWer SUMMary EVENt User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 311 R amp S NRP2 Remote Control Commands STATus Table 6 29 Meaning of bits used in the Questionable Power Status Register Sensor A Power The measurement data of sensor A is corrupt Sensor B Power The measurement data of sensor B is corrupt Sensor C Power The measurement data of sensor C is corrupt Sensor D Power The measurement data of sensor D is corrupt Sensor A please zero The zero correction for sensor A is no longer correct and should be repeated Sensor B please zero The zero correction for sensor B is no longer correct a
260. eeeeeeeeeceseeeeeeeeeaeeeessaeeeeseaes 288 IGENGe DL AzITRACeMtEAGurementbOWer AVC 289 IGENGe DL AzITRACeMtEAGurementbOWer MAX 289 User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 416 R amp S NRP2 List of Commands SENSe lt 1 4 gt TRACe MEASurement POWer MIN ccccccceccceeeececeeceeeeeeceeseeceseeecesseeeeeseeeeseaeeeeseeeeses 289 SENSe lt 1 4 gt TRACe MEASurement POWer PULSe BASE PP oocccccccccnnccoconocononononcnnnconnnnnoncnnononononnanininos 289 SENSe lt 1 4 gt TRACe MEASurement POWer PULS TOP 289 SENSe lt 1 4 gt TRACe MEASurement PULSe DCY Cle oocooocccnccccnccocococcccnncconcnonononononnnonnnononnnnonannncnnnnnnns 289 SENSe lt 1 4 gt TRACe MEASurement PULSe DURATION oonncccccocncncccoccnnccoconcccononcnnnnnnonanonnnnnncnnnnnncnnnnos 289 IGENGe DL AzITRACeMtEAGurementbUl ZGebtEbody 289 SENSe lt 1 4 gt TRACe MEASurement PULSe SEParati0N ococooccccccccncccnnnnccncnncnonononononononcnnnnnnnnonanoninos 290 IGENGe DlL AzrTRACeMtEAGurement TIME 290 SENSe lt 1 4 gt TRACe MEASurement TRANSition ESAMpling AUTO STA Te ooooncccccccnccccccicccconccncnnnos 290 SENSe lt 1 4 gt TRACe MEASurement TRANSition NEGative DURati0N ccccooccnccconcccccoccnccccnnccononinos 290 SENSe lt 1 4 gt TRACe MEASurement TRANSition NEGative OCCUFrence occoocccncccocccocononcconnconcnoncnnnns 290 IGENZGeJlL AztTRACeMtEAGurement TRANGmton NE Gatve OVEReboot 290 SENSe lt 1 4 gt
261. el Traceg8g Statistics sensor mode The R amp S NRP2 indicates the total number of the activated parameters in the header of the dialog box You can activate up to 6 items out of 15 for display As a prerequisite of pulse analysis the parameters selected for display must be included in the analysis window If for example the duty cycle of a pulsed signal is to be determined at least one cycle of the waveform must be within the borders of the selected gate or must be part of the visible portion of the trace if pulse analysis extends over the whole trace If the analysis window contains several cycles evaluation always applies to the first cycle Pulse Measurements Time Pulse Measurements 5 Time Power Config 4 Pulse Width PulsePeriod Jk Duty Cycle JV Pulse Off Time Jk RiseTime FallTime K AA Start Time _ Stop Time Fig 4 56 Pulse Measurements Time tab dialog box The pulse time parameters to be displayed in the info panel are selected on the Time tab Pulse Width Indication of pulse duration Pulse Period Indication of the time the pulse signal needs to complete one cycle Duty Cycle Indication of the duty cycle of the measured power Pulse Off Indication of the gap between two pulses Time Rise Fall Indication of the times the signal requires to change from the power off Time to power on state Start Stop Indication of the start stop poin
262. electing the indication of auxiliary values Setting up the measurement To set up the measurement 1 Put the R amp S NRP2 into operation as described in chapter 1 Putting into Opera tion on page 7 and connect a sensor to connector A Preset the R amp S NRP2 and execute Zero A After preset one result window indicates the result in dBm obtained with sensor A sensor Windows Measurement File System 1 000 GHz d Dien Fig 2 3 Result window dBm Setting the frequency The R amp S NRP2 must be set to the carrier frequency of the applied signal if the specified measurement accuracy is to be reached To set the frequency 1 Connect an unmodulated signal with a level between 10 dBm and 10 dBm to the sensor 2 Press the FREQ hardkey User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 29 R amp S NRP2 Getting Started Measuring average power Cont Av mode The dialog box for entering the frequency appears Frequency Fig 2 4 Frequency dialog box 3 Press the associated softkey to activate the entry of the frequency value A digit panel is displayed to insert the frequency The panel also includes unit letters 4 Clear the field with the DEL 1TRIG hardkey 5 Enter the signal frequency by pressing the associated softkeys 6 Select the unit by using the UNIT softkey Tip Alternatively you can use the cursor keys to set a value To get familiar with the editor try the following steps In this
263. ells or batteries must not be exposed to heat or fire Storage in direct sunlight must be avoided Keep cells and batteries clean and dry Clean soiled connectors using a dry clean cloth Cells or batteries must not be short circuited Cells or batteries must not be stored in a box or in a drawer where they can short circuit each other or where they can be short circuited by other conductive materials Cells and batteries must not be removed from their original packaging until they are ready to be used Cells and batteries must not be exposed to any mechanical shocks that are stronger than permitted If a cell develops a leak the fluid must not be allowed to come into contact with the skin or eyes If contact occurs wash the affected area with plenty of water and seek medical aid Improperly replacing or charging cells or batteries that contain alkaline electrolytes e g lithium cells can cause explosions Replace cells or batteries only with the matching Rohde amp Schwarz type see parts list in order to ensure the safety of the product Cells and batteries must be recycled and kept separate from residual waste Rechargeable batteries and normal batteries that contain lead mercury or cadmium are hazardous waste Observe the national regulations regarding waste disposal and recycling Transport 1 The product may be very heavy Therefore the product must be handled with care In some cases the user may require a suitable means of
264. els In the abbreviated program message the second command starts at the level below SENSe TIMing The colon after the semicolon has to be omitted The short form of the program message is SENSe2 TIMing STARt 10 STOP 10 A new program message always starts with the full path however Example SENSe2 TIMing STARt 10 SENSe2 TIMing STOP 10 User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 178 R amp S NRP2 CL 9 7 4 5 7 5 Remote Control Fundamentals Structure and Syntax of device dependent Messages Processing of a program message is aborted if an error occurs If only sensor 2 is con nected to a multichannel device for example the program message SENS1 FREQ 50 GHZ SENS2 FREQ 50 GHZ will be aborted after the first command and a second frequency setting will not be per formed Responses to Queries Unless otherwise expressly specified a query is defined for each command The query is created by appending a question mark to the associated command Some of the SCPI rules for query responses are stricter than those of the IEEE 488 2 standard e The required value is sent without header Example SENSe AVERage TCONTrol1 Response MOV e Maximum and minimum values as well as all other quantities queried by a special text parameter are returned as numeric values Example SENSe POWer TSLot COUNt MAXimum Response 26 e Numeric values are output without a unit Physical quantities refer to the basic units or to t
265. ements ccccccsseceseeeeeceeeseeneceneeeeseeseneeees 379 C 1 Measuring with high level COMMANQOS ooccconccconncccnncconcnnoncnnonanconnnronannonnnronancrnannnnas 379 C2 Trigger state SY SiO Ministries 385 GA Logic relationship of command systems SENSe CAL Culate and UNIT 387 GA Measuring with low level COMMANdS oocccooncncccnnccncncocnnaconnnnronnnronananonnanrrnanrennnarenas 387 C 5 Statistics Oase ege ege ae eeEEEeE EES 397 C 6 Pulse Analysis MeasureMentS ccconnccconncccoconcnonocononaronnnnncnnnnnrnnnnnrrnnnnrrnnnnroranarenananenas 399 C 7 Synchronizing MeasureMentS ooncccnnncincccioccnocnnnconnaronnnrnnnnnrnnnnrrnanrrnnnrrnnnnrenanrenaarenas 400 C 8 Optimization of measurement Speed occconnconccccconcconccnncconcnancnnronnrnnncnnronarnanrnanncnanenas 400 D Compatibility Information ooccocnnoncccccnnocnnonanenanoncnnnnnnonarenanenanos 403 BOedeelulufTlde EE 407 e A 418 User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 5 R amp S NRP2 Putting into Operation Notes on putting into operation 1 Putting into Operation This section describes the basic steps to be taken when setting up the R amp S NRP2 for the first time It contains the following topics e unpacking e AC supply connection e switching the meter on and off e function testing and installing the meter e preset or default settings e front and rear views 1 1 Notes on putting into operation Risk of instrument damage Note that th
266. emote control command in Value short form Exclude Time Start SENS TIM EXCL STAR Exclude Time End SENS TIM EXCL STOP Timegate Offset SENS TGAT OFFS TIME User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 374 R amp S NRP2 Standard Configurations Sensor parameter Remote control command in Value short form Timegate Length SENS TGAT TIME SEA S Trace Number Of Points 261 Trace Realtime OFF RI Table 2 12 Bluetooth DH3 Sensor parameter Remote control command in Value short form Exclude Time Start SENS TIM EXCL STAR Exclude Time End SENS TIM EXCL STOP Timegate Offset SENS TGAT OFFS TIME 1 10 us 2 1 885 ms Timegate Length SENS TGAT TIME 1 1 597 ms 2 351 us User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 375 R amp S NRP2 Standard Configurations Sensor parameter Remote control command in Value short form TRIG Os TRIG Table 2 13 Bluetooth DH5 Sensor parameter Remote control command in Value short form Exclude Time Start SENS TIMS EXCL STAR Exclude Time End SENS TIM EXCL STOP Timegate Offset SENS TGAT OFFS TIME 1 10 us 2 3 135 ms Timegate Length SENS TGAT TIME 1 2 845 ms 2 351 us Trace Number Of Points OFF 261 OFF Os INT POS User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 376 R amp S NRP2 Standard Configurations Sensor parameter Remote control command in Value short form Table 2 1
267. emote control using the GPIB interface just enter its GPIB address GPIB Address Selects the address in the range 0 to 30 factory preset is 20 The set GPIB address is unchanged after a reset of the instrument settings Remote command SYSTem COMMunicate GPIB SELF ADDRess on page 318 Command Set Selects the instrument type for emulation see Command Set on page 146 4 7 1 3 USB settings Remote control of the R amp S NRP2 via the USB is performed according to the USBTMC standard For this purpose a VISA library that supports remote control via the USB is required by the remote control computer Remote Interfaces VISA Resource Identifier USB 0 04 4D 0x001B 000001 INSTR Command Set R amp SNRP2Z e Fig 4 75 Remote Interfaces USB VISA Resource Identifier Displays the VISA address string of the instrument This identifier is automatically assigned for remote control via USB therefore the address cannot be configured for remote control User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 147 R amp S NRP2 Instrument Functions BEE System settings Command Set Select the instrument type for emulation see Command Set on page 146 4 7 1 4 VXI11 settings For remote control according to the VXI 11 standard the R amp S NRP2 is equipped with an RJ45 connector at its rear panel Due to the complexity of the protocol it is recommended that you use a VISA library that supports VXI 11 Remote Interfaces ff GPIB USB EI
268. encia normalizadas en funci n de la clase de l ser del que se trate Los rayos l ser pueden provocar da os de tipo biol gico a causa de las propiedades de su radiaci n y debido a su concentraci n extrema de potencia electromagn tica En caso de que un producto Rohde amp Schwarz contenga un producto l ser p ej un lector de CD DVD no debe usarse ninguna otra configuraci n o funci n aparte de las descritas en la documentaci n del producto a fin de evitar lesiones p ej debidas a irradiaci n l ser Clases de compatibilidad electromagn tica conforme a EN 55011 CISPR 11 y en analog a con EN 55022 CISPR 22 EN 55032 CISPR 32 Aparato de clase A Aparato adecuado para su uso en todos los entornos excepto en los residenciales y en aquellos conectados directamente a una red de distribuci n de baja tensi n que suministra corriente a edificios residenciales Nota Los aparatos de clase A est n destinados al uso en entornos industriales Estos aparatos pueden causar perturbaciones radioel ctricas en entornos residenciales debido a posibles perturbaciones guiadas o radiadas En este caso se le podr solicitar al operador que tome las medidas adecuadas para eliminar estas perturbaciones Aparato de clase B Aparato adecuado para su uso en entornos residenciales asi como en aquellos conectados directamente a una red de distribuci n de baja tensi n que suministra corriente a edificios residenciales 1171 0000 42
269. ended STATe lt state gt SYST ERR EXT ON activates extended error messages SYST ERR The location of errors in the parsed command strings is also shown Parameters lt state gt ON OFF RST OFF SYSTem KEY lt key_stroke gt This command is used for testing purposes only and simulates a single stroke of an R amp S NRP2 frontpanel key The key stroke to be simulated is described either in plain text lt character value gt or by a key code lt NR1 gt see following table Table 6 34 Valid parameter values for the SYSTem KEY command ECN CN ETC EN segs es ETT CN EOS CON CN COS O oew e poo enne e CN ECN CO CS COMINO CONS CON User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 322 R amp S NRP2 Remote Control Commands E SYSTem Note The R amp S NRP2 can be switched off via remote control by means of the SYSTem KEY POWER command Parameters lt key_stroke gt lt NR1 gt lt character_value gt see table lt NR1 gt System will be switched off SYSTem KEY 17 lt character_value gt System will be switched off SYSTem KEY POWER Usage Event SYSTem LANGuage lt emulation gt Selects an emulation of a different command set The R amp S NRP2 is able to emulate different power meters by changing the remote command set As the list of supported instruments is extended continuously the emulations are documented in separate appli cation notes Parameters lt emulation gt character data NR
270. enus but it does not affect the sensor settings User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 37 Window handling E EA a BEE Se EE Sensor Windows Measurement File System mee H l H E p 1 000 GHz d Dien Fig 2 20 Result window initialized full height Display options 1 The Dig and D amp A softkeys are used to select the display mode The standard display mode is Dig ital measurement result 1 0 1 0 01 0 001 Timeslot 1 4 Fig 2 21 Windows menu digital display mode 2 Select the D amp A display mode Window 1 now shows an analog scale and a digital reading Sensor Windows Measurement File System S 4 03dBm v 70 dBm 30 dBm Fig 2 22 Result window analog meter full height The menu now includes the new item Analog Meter for setting the scale limits R amp S NRP2 Getting Started Window handling Window Resolution dB 1 0 1 0 01 0 001 Analog slot Meter Fig 2 23 Windows menu digital and analog display mode 3 Switch back to Dig display mode Auxiliary values Maximum Minimum Max Min 1 Select the Measurement menu Sensor Windows Measurement File System 2 Select Function in this menu Window Relative MA On Reset i The measurement function unit of the measurement result sensors used and the auxiliary values can be selected in the Function amp Unit di
271. er The CONDition register contains information as to whether a sensor is currently in the WAIT FOR_TRG state i e expecting a trigger event and depending on the configuration of the transition register the EVENt register indicates whether the WAIT FOR_TRG state was entered or quit by a sensor since the last readout of the register The Operation Trigger Status Register can be read by the following commands STATus OPERation TRIGger SUMMary CONDition STATus OPERation TRIGger SUMMary EVENt Table 6 25 Meaning of bits used in the Operation Status Register Sensor A waiting for trigger Sensor A is in the WAIT_FOR_TRG state and is waiting for a trigger event that will change it to the MEASURING state Sensor B waiting for trigger Sensor B is in the WAIT_FOR_TRG state and is waiting for a trigger event that will change it to the MEASURING state User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 308 R amp S NRP2 Remote Control Commands STATus Sensor C waiting for trigger Sensor C is in the WAIT_FOR_TRG state and is waiting for a trigger event that will change it to the MEASURING state Sensor D waiting for trigger Sensor D is in the WAIT_FOR_TRG state and is waiting for a trigger event that will change it to the MEASURING state ops S CS Bit 15 will never be used 6 13 14 Operation Sense Status Register The CONDition register contains information as to whether a sensor is currently being initialized and depe
272. er Firmware Update Fig 8 1 Start screen with access to Firmware Update and Bootmenu 1 To open the Bootmenu press the softkey to the right Bootmenu 4 Fig 8 2 Bootmenu button The login window opens Please enter passwordt Fig 8 3 Login 2 Enter the password The password is 7396 and cannot be changed After entering the last digit the R amp S NRP2 automatically opens the boot menu Bootmenu 8 3 1 Boot Menu system Info HRP2 Boot Menu Service Erase Honvwol Data C Sample Error Message gt Select a function by using the respective softkey Fig 8 4 Boot menu System Info Opens the system info menu This menu provides soft and hardware information to the instrument e g serial numbers firmware version or ethernet address Mare Persons Bootloader 7 62 Keybrdc trl 3 27 Serial Numbers evice 999999 ainhoard 66660604062 Ethernet AC Address 8x66 26 ES 869 88 l Fig 8 5 Boot menu System Info Service Opens the R amp S NRP2 service menu see chapter 8 3 2 Service Menu on page 347 Erase Nonvol Data Deletes the non volatile memory containing instrument settings This measure is recommended after the error message Sensor communication error appears The device displays a warning message prior to deletion and requires confirmation of the deletion Bootmenu tion aved data will he lost EMNTER MENU confirm ESC cancel Fig 8 6 Boot
273. er depends on what is to be measured For example if measurement accuracy is important filtering may also have to be activated which can reduce the measurement speed The length of the integration time also directly affects the measurement time and should therefore be kept as short as possible if a short measurement time is desired Consequently the following list can only serve as a guide line for minimizing the measurement time Example SYST SPEed FAST deactivates screen content SENS AVER STAT OFF deactivates filtering of measured value User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 400 SENS SENS SENS SENS SENS SENS SENS SENS TRIG FUNC BUFF APER RANG CORR CORR CORR SGAM DEL 0 POW AVG STAT OFF MIN AUTO OFF OFFS DCYC FDOT CORR TRIG DEL AUTO OFF CALC1 CALC2 CALC3 CALC4 CALC5 CALC6 CALC7 CALC8 MATH MATH MATH MATH MATH MATH MATH MATH LAI SENS1 SENS2 SENS2 SENS2 LAJ SENS2 SENS2 SENS2 SENS2 LAI STAT OFF STAT OFF STAT OFF STAT OFF Optimization of measurement speed ContAv mode no buffered measurements integration time as short as possible automatic range selection OFF no global offset correction no duty cycle correction no frequency dependent offset correction no measured value correction for reflection coefficient of source no delay on triggering
274. er measurement on page 72 Remote command SENSe lt 1 4 gt POWer AVG APERture on page 272 Sampling rate Sets the sampling rate With the multipath power sensors R amp S NRP Z11 21 22 23 24 28 31 32 the sampling rate can be set to two different values to prevent aliasing effects for particular types of modulation signal Aliasing can occur because the sampling frequency is located within the video bandwidth which means that spectral components near the sampling frequency can cause beating effects With changing the sampling rate the beating effects usually disappear Remote command SENSe lt 1 4 gt SAMPling on page 279 Duty Cycle Using the duty cycle correction the average power of RF bursts is calculated from the average power of the whole signal Essentially the average power of the whole signal is divided by the set duty cycle If thermal power sensors or R amp S NRP Z91 98 multipath power sensors are used this procedure is the only way to determine the power of pulsed signals If multipath power sensors R amp S NRP Z11 21 22 23 24 28 31 32 are used this method must be employed if the bursts are so short that their power cannot be measured in the Burst Av or Timegate Av modes Remote command SENSe lt 1 4 gt CORRection DCYCle STATe on page 268 SENSe lt 1 4 gt CORRection DCYCle INPut MAGNitude on page 268 Smoothing of modulated signals To reduce result fluctuations caused by mo
275. er the trigger event the power is measured in timeslots the number of which is defined with SENS TSL COUN The length of the timeslots is set with SENS TSL WIDT RST SENS FUNC POW TSL AVG SENS TSL WIDT 577 US SENS TSL COUN 8 TRIG SOUR EXT INIT FETCh BurstAv mode SENS FUNC POW BURS AVG Measurement of power pulses bursts with automatic detection of the beginning and end of pulses The trigger source setting is ignored As described above the conditions for the detection of the pulse end can be set with commands SENS BURS DTOL and TRIG HYST ROL SENS FUNC POW BURS AVG SENS BURS DTOL 100 MS TRIG HYST 3 DB INIT FETCH Trace mode SENS FUNC XTIM POW This mode is used to determine a large number of measured values in succession The number of required measured values is set with SENS SWE POl and the total mea surement time with SENS SWE TIM Note that each measurement must be triggered separately This point is a difference between the Trace mode and the Timeslot mode in which it is only necessary to start the measurement for measuring the power in all timeslots ROL SENS FUNC XTIM POW SENS SWE POIN 256 SENS SWE TIM 600 US TRIG COUN 256 change to IDLE state after the 256th measurement User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 393 R amp S NRP2 Programming Measurements EEE Measuring with low level commands INIT FETCh C 4 3 2 Averaging filters The power values to be measured are
276. er to clear a communications deadlock of link 1 If an asynchronous abort is per formed the input and output queues will be cleared User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 360 R amp S NRP2 Remote control interfaces Ethernet interface Table 1 7 Additional control sequences Control Transmitter sequences amp GTM Controller go to mixed Changes the remote local state to local amp remote amp GTR Controller go to remote Changes the remote local state to remote amp DCL Controller device clear Initiates a device clear amp ABO Controller abort Asynchronous device clear A 3 2 Architecture of the Ethernet interface A 3 2 1 The R amp S NRP2 offers a listener socket for connection queries If the listener socket accepts a connection query two related peer sockets will be created link 1 and link 2 via which communications take place The R amp S NRP2 accepts the role of the server and the remote control program is the client R amp S NRP Ethernet Controller program server TCP IP client SCPI commands SCPIl answers Service requests SRQ Link 1 is used to transmit the SCPI commands and the response data Link 2 is reserved for service request messages SRQ and for an abort of the remote control function being currently performed Since the two links share the same IP address and port number the sequence of the connection setup determines their allocation Link 1 is the first accepted link and link 2 the
277. erence value PC SC Yields the ratio of PC to SC RELative poz reference value The ratio of the PC and SC is divided by the reference value l VSC PC l vSC PC If the forward power of a wave is measured in the PC and the reflected power in the SC the measurement command yields the standing wave ratio The output unit is set to One UNIT RAT O REFLection VSC PC If the forward power of a wave is measured in the PC and the reflected transmitted power in the SC the calculate block yields the reflection coefficient transmission factor of the DUT The output unit is set to One UNIT RAT 0 RLOSS 20log VSC PC If the forward power of a wave is measured in the PC and the reflected or transmitted power in the SC the calculate block yields the return loss transmission loss of the DUT This function principally yields the same result as the RATio function The only difference is the output unit which is automatically set to dB by means of this command UNIT RAT DB User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 216 R amp S NRP2 Remote Control Commands High Level Measurement Commands CONFigure MEASure READ and FETCh 6 4 6 CONFigure commands This chapter lists all CONFigure commands For a description of the command syntax the calculation functions and the parameter list see chapter 6 4 3 Syntactical Structure of High Level Measurement Commands on page 211 chapter 6 4 5 Calculation func tions High level c
278. ero calibration of the sensors is required Follow the steps in chapter 2 3 Preset and zeroing on page 27 Brief introduction to the operation The R amp S NRP2 can be operated intuitively via the hardkeys and the interactive display with the associated softkeys All menus and dialog boxes are in the form of windows that can be operated in the same way The hardkeys and softkeys allow direct and therefore convenient access to entries and settings The clear cut display shows the power measurement results of up to 4 power measure ments simultaneously Results can be displayed digitally or graphically either by an ana log meter or depending on the measurement mode in a trace diagram This section briefly describes the concept of manual operation of the power meter in order to perform the test examples with the instrument described later on in this chapter For a detailed description on the controls the screen layout and how to operate the R amp S NRP2 refer to chapter 3 Manual Operation on page 49 Using the hardkeys e hardkeys are always available for use e according to its label a hardkey directly activates a function e if two functions are provided in one hardkey e g 4 Menu the context determines the currently active function The respective function is selected automatically by the instrument See chapter 1 5 2 2 Hardkeys on page 12 for information concerning assignment and the respective functional descr
279. es 1 decimal place 0 01 3 significant places 2 decimal places um 4 significant places 3 decimal places User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 245 R amp S NRP2 Remote Control Commands DISPlay This command corresponds to the lt resolution gt option of the high level measurement commands CONFigure FETCH READ and MEASure Note Automatic filter ranging must be switched on SENSe lt 1 4 gt AVERage COUNt AUTO ON DISP lt 1 8 gt RES has an effect on the setting SENS lt 1 4 gt AVER COUN AUTO RES of the sensors used in the mea surement function CALC lt 1 8 gt MATH However the resolution setting of the sen sors does not affect the resolution of values in the display Error messages Invalid numeric data An invalid number was specified for the resolution Parameters lt resolution gt 1 0 1 0 01 0 001 lin Linear scale of measurement result log Logarithmic scale of measurement result 1 lin 1 significant place log No decimal place 0 1 lin 2 significant places log 1 decimal place 0 01 lin 3 significant places log 2 decimal places 0 001 lin 4 significant places log 3 decimal places RST 0 01 Example DISP WIND1 RES 0 1 With a measured value of 123 456789 W the first two places are free of noise and thus 120 W is displayed DISPlay WINDow SELect lt select_window gt Selects a window Parameters lt select_window gt 11 2 34 RST 1 DISPlay WINDow SIZE
280. es front panel display windows if SYST STAN PWS ON Parameters lt string gt The available standards and the associated strings can be queried with the SYSTem STANdard CATalog command RST lt empty_string gt SYSTem STANdard PWSettings lt state gt IfSYST STAN PRES lt string gt is used SYST STAN PWS Preserve Window Settings determines whether the window system is also configured with the calculate blocks OFF or whether exclusively sensor parameters are set ON Parameters lt state gt ON OFF RST OFF SYSTem STANdard TRIGger SOURce lt source gt If SYST STAN PRES lt string gt Is used this command determines whether the sen sors are set to internal INT or external EXT triggering Parameters lt source gt INT EXT RST INT User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 325 R amp S NRP2 Remote Control Commands 6 15 TRIGger SYSTem TIME lt hour gt lt minute gt lt second gt Sets the time Since the R amp S NRP2 has no battery backed clock the time has to be reset if the clock was not set after the last power on of the R amp S NRP2 see also SYSTem DATE on page 320 The time is set in the format h h m m s s This setting is not changed by RST SYSTem VERSion Returns a string that contains the current version number of the SCPI standard Usage Query only TRIGger The trigger commands are used to configure the timing conditions for the start of a mea surement
281. eslot structure in addition to the average power Av However the time resolution is limited to the length of one point pixel of the display The measured values can either be output as additional numeric information in a graphic window or in a numeric window Dig D amp A User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 104 R amp S NRP2 Instrument Functions __ _ _ _ Configuring measurements To configure the measurement of Av Pk and Pk Av ratio 1 Select Trace amp Statistics in the Mode dialog box of the Sensor menu 2 Select T slot mode in the Display control panel of the Trace display 3 Set the timing parameters in the Config T slot control panel of the Trace display The timeslot is indicated graphically in the trace display The power values within the selected gate are indicated in the info panel 22 00 dBm 13 0 dEldiw F Vi Config T slots Posscale i e EN Trigger d H h A j ut oi L id Wi l A oon OR EN V H e JN wa L es il Slot 50 00 dem 500 0 psidiv Plot A Average d 1 f Average 8 959 dBm maaa Peak 15 998 dEm Func Peak Avg 7 039 dB Hau Fig 4 37 Measurement within a timeslot Trace Statistics mode Graph display mode To display the results numerically continue as follows 1 Select Dig or Ana amp Dig display in the Window dialog of of the Windows menu 2 Open the Function amp Unit dialog bo
282. et if a readable message is in the output queue This bit may be used to automate reading of data from the device into the controller ESB Standard Event Status Register summary bit This bit is set if one of the bits in the Standard Event Status Register is set and enabled in the Event Status Enable Register Setting this bit denotes a serious error which can be specified in greater detail by querying the Standard Event Status Register MSS Master Status summary bit This bit is set if the device triggers a service request This is the case if one of the other bits of this register is set together with its enable bit in the Service Request Enable register SRE Operation Status Register summary bit This bit is set if an EVENt bit is set in the Operation Status Register and the associated ENABLe bit is set to 1 A set bit denotes that an action is being performed by the device Information on the type of action can be obtained by querying the Operation Status Register User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 303 R amp S NRP2 Remote Control Commands STATus 6 13 6 IST Flag and Parallel Poll Enable Register PPE Similar to the SRQ the IST flag combines the complete status information in a single bit It can be queried by a parallel poll see chapter 6 13 20 3 Parallel Poll on page 315 or by the 1ST command The Parallel Poll Enable Register PPE determines which bits of the STB affect the IST flag The bits of the STB are ANDed
283. et the vertical axis in dB or skip the W with a linear scaling to interpret the vertical axis in terms of dimensionless numbers 4 5 3 2 Trace diagram settings Config Config Grid opens the subdialog to determine the position and the size of the screen n window In addition the dialog box allows to enter a power reference value gt Select Config Grid in the control panel opened via the Window gt Graph gt Dis play gt Trace control panel Trace amp Statistics sensor mode Config Grid 17 50 d m 4 15 000 d 4 S E 7 E z h e J d a E falo EL it J 7 z D TN Unit af Fig 4 47 Config Grid in Trace display mode Ref Power Sets the reference value The reference value is assigned to the top line of the grid Power div Sets the vertical scaling The combination of Ref Power and Power div defines the vertical orientation of the trace Start Time Defines the position of the left screen edge relative to the delayed trigger The value may be negative so that signal components are displayed before the trigger event Remote command SENSe lt 1 4 gt TRACe OFFSet TIME on page 291 Time div Sets the time resolution of the results window User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 117 R amp S NRP2 Instrument Functions 4 5 3 3 Displaying traces Unit Sets the result unit Filtering settings You can smooth the trace in the Average display by means o
284. eter to set the length of the unsynchronized time interval for the statistical analysis of the signal Remote command SENSe lt 1 4 gt STATistics TIME on page 283 Samples Enters the required minimum number of samples If the acquired number of samples within a gate or a time interval defined by Aperture is less than the required minimum number of samples then this gate or time interval is repeated until the minimum number of samples is attained Remote command SENSe lt 1 4 gt STATistics SAMPles MINimum on page 281 Management of settings The general settings are performed in the File menu e Default settings on page 140 e Loading user defined settings on page 141 e Saving user defined settings on page 140 e Loading settings for mobile radio standards on page 142 e Programming aids on page 143 e Assigning names to windows on page 144 Default setting The Preset softkey in the File menu and the PRE SET hardkey change the R amp S NRP2 to its default setting After Preset the sensors operate in Cont Av mode with sensor specific aperture time Storing user defined settings The R amp S NRP2 provides 19 memory spaces in which complete device settings can be stored Setup memory Settings can be stored by using the Save Setup dialog box of the File menu The memory spaces can be labeled with a name for identification User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 140 R amp SENRP2 4 6 3 Instrument
285. eters Header and parameters are separated by a white space ASCII code 0 to 9 11 to 32 decimal e g space The headers may be composed of several keywords The query is created by appending a question mark directly to the header Common Commands Device independent commands consist of a header preceded by an asterisk The header may be followed by one or several parameters Example RST RESET Resets the instrument EVENT STATUS Sets the bits of the standard event status enable register ENABLE EVENT STATUS QUERY Queries the contents of the standard event status register User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 175 R amp S NRP2 Remote Control Fundamentals EEE AAA A Structure and Syntax of device dependent Messages 5 7 2 2 Device specific Commands Hierarchy Device specific commands have a hierarchical structure see SCP command tree fig ure 5 1 The various levels are represented by compound headers Headers at the high est level root level have one keyword only This keyword describes an entire command system Example SENSe 1 4 This keyword denotes the command system SENSe lt n gt For lower level commands the full path has to be specified starting with the highest level in the left most position The individual keywords are separated by a colon Example SENSe ll 4 TRACE POINTS lt int value gt This command is at the third level of he SENSe system and sets the number of test points fo
286. eters have the following meaning lt status register_summary_command gt One of the status register queries from table 6 15 Queries for status registersis to be used here without a terminating question mark lt NR1 gt Is a decimal value between 0 and 32767 The values DEFault MINimum and MAX imun are not permissible lt non decimal numeric gt Is a non decimal value in one of the following formats where the decimal value must be between 0 and 32767 binary e g b0111010101001110 or B0111010101001110 hexadecimal e g Hh754e or H754E octal e g q72516 or Q75216 Command Parameter lt Sisc gt lt status register summary command gt lt srsc gt CONDition Query only lt srsc gt ENABle 0 32767 lt non decimal numeric gt lt srsc gt NTRansition 0 32767 lt non decimal numeric gt User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 296 R amp S NRP2 6 13 3 Remote Control Commands STATus lt srsc gt PTRansition 0 32767 lt non decimal numeric gt The status reporting system stores all information about the current operating status of the device and errors that occur The information is stored in the status registers and the error queue The contents of the status registers and error queue can be queried via the IEC IEEE bus The information is hierarchically structured The highest level is formed by the Status Byte Register STB defined by IEEE 488 2 and the associated Service Reque
287. eters transferred by the last CONFigure or MEASure command respectively Since the device settings can be changed after a CONFigure the query does not return the current device setup CONFigure is performed internally mostly by SENSe and CALCulate commands One or several measurement channels are configured as follows ContAv Timeslot Trace Statis tics EEC o o CE CEC ECO CE oom COS CE CC EE P zs EP zs p f E P sc EP SENS AVER COUN SENS AVER COUN AUTO TYPE SENS AVER COUN AUTO SLOT SENS AVER STAT SENS FUNCtion POWer AVG POWer POWer XTIMe BURSt AVG TSLot AVG POWer XPOWer CCDF XPOWer PDF The configuration of the calculation function CALCulate MATH and CALCulate REL commands depends on the given high level command FETCh The FETCh Command returns the last valid measurement result The command is only completed after a valid measurement has been performed In compliance with SCPI 1999 0 different results can be queried with FETCh without having to restart a measurement This is the case if only the keywords for the calculation function e g RATio RELative Is changed In all other cases e g changing the measurement function an SCPI error 221 Setting conflict is returned and the command aborted User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 210 R amp S NRP2 Remote Control Commands 6 4 2 6 4 3 High Level Measurement Commands CON
288. eturns the measured maximum power in the current trace Usage Query only SENSe lt 1 4 gt TRACe MEASurement POWer MIN Returns the measured minimum power in the current trace Usage Query only SENSe lt 1 4 gt TRACe MEASurement POWer PULSe BASE Returns the base power computed in the pulse level analysis histogram of the current trace data Usage Query only SENSe lt 1 4 gt TRACe MEASurement POWer PULSe TOP Returns the power of the first detected complete pulse of the current trace data including rising and falling edges Usage Query only SENSe lt 1 4 gt TRACe MEASurement PULSe DCYCle Returns the duty cycle of the current trace data Usage Query only SENSe lt 1 4 gt TRACe MEASurement PULSe DURation Returns the pulse duration pulse width of the first detected pulse in the current trace Usage Query only SENSe lt 1 4 gt TRACe MEASurement PULSe PERiod Returns the time the pulse signal needs to complete one cycle Usage Query only User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 289 R amp S NRP2 Remote Control Commands SENSe Sensor Commands SENSe lt 1 4 gt TRACe MEASurement PULSe SEParation Returns the time from Stop Time to Start Time of the first detected pulse Usage Query only SENSe lt 1 4 gt TRACe MEASurement TIME lt time gt Parameters lt time gt float_value Range depending on the sensor RST depending on the sensor Default unit
289. example the overwrite mode default mode is active e Use the LEFT RIGHT lt cursor keys to move the block cursor and overwrite the digits with new values e Use the UP DOWN 7 cursor keys to increase decrease the digit value at the cursor position e Move the insertion mark to the right onto the units Use the UP DOWN cursor keys to change the unit 7 Press the MENU hardkey twice to confirm your entry and exit the Frequency dialog box Setting the unit for the measurement result The measurement result is indicated in the result window The unit of the measurement result can be changed To set the unit of the measurement result 1 Use the topmost softkey to select the Measurement menu Sensor Windows Measurement File System The menu opens Post processing of the measurement can be set in the Measure ment menu User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 30 R amp S NRP2 Getting Started A Measuring average power Cont Av mode Fig 2 5 Measurement menu 2 Select the unit W using the associated softkey The result is displayed in W Sensor Windows Measurement File System Relative Off On Reset Aux Val Reset Fig 2 6 Result window W Setting a fixed offset correction The R amp S NRP2 provides an offset correction to the displayed measurement result To set a fixed offset correction 1 Select the Sensor menu Sensor Windows Measurement File System The Sen
290. f an averaging filter For this purpose a number of sweeps are recorded and the power of points of the same position in time is averaged Trace Averaging The averaging process substantially improves zero offset and linearity of the measurement result In the Peak display a maximum search is performed over the number of curves corre sponding to the averaging number If signals of stochastic envelope are applied filtering may increase the measurement accuracy The fluctuations of results caused by the inherent noise of the sensor will also be reduced but this is unfavorable for a higher systematic deviation measured values are too high Remedy Reduce the video band width see below The averaging filter does not affect the Random display To prevent results from being falsified due to instable trigger conditions you should always check whether the trace is stable in its time axis This should be done without averaging Trace Avg No 1 To meet the requirements for higher reproducibility and accuracy of numeric results measured power values for gates can be averaged even more by Numeric Averaging irrespective of Trace Averaging The measurement accuracy for the peak power in particular for low power levels can be increased by reducing the effect of the inherent noise You can do this by using a smaller channel bandwidth Video Bw For the R amp S NRP Z8x wideband power sen sors this can be done in several steps be
291. f commands Queries return a decimal value between 0 and 32767 2 gt Configuration commands set the ENABle PTRansition NTRansition registers of a status register and thus determine the response of the register to status changes in the R amp S NRP2 6 13 1 Queries Table 6 15 Queries for status registers Tus OPERation Operation Status STATus OPERation CALibrating SUMMary Operation Calibrating STATus OPERation LLFail SUMMary Operation Lower Limit Fail User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 295 R amp S NRP2 Remote Control Commands STATus Command Status register OPERation ULFail SUMMary Operation Upper Limit Fail OPERation MEASuring SUMMary Operation Measuring OPERation SENSe SUMMary Operation Sense OPERation TRIGger SUMMary Operation Trigger QUEStionable Questionable Status QUEStionable CALibration SUMMary Questionable Calibration QUEStionable POWer SUMMary Questionable Power QUEStionable WINDow SUMMary Questionable Window 6 13 2 Configuration Commands If the status register queries are extended by the character strings EVENt CONDition ENABle PTRansitionor NTRansition without a question mark at the end the respective subregisters can be accessed The enable and transition registers can also be set with these commands The effect of the status reporting system can thus be adapted to user requirements The param
292. fect they have on the device e Setting commands trigger device settings e g an device reset or a configuration of the trigger system e Queries cause device data to be provided in the output queue where they can be fetched via the IEC IEEE bus Queries are available for most of the setting commands They are obtained by adding a question mark to the setting command according to their definition in the IEEE 488 2 and SCPI 1999 0 standard e Common commands are precisely defined in the IEEE 488 2 standard in terms of function and notation They relate to functions such as the management of standardized status registers resetting and self test e Device specific commands relate to functions that depend on device characteristics such as the frequency set ting Many of these commands are also standardized by the SCPI Consortium chapter 5 7 1 SCPI Standard on page 175 The standard allows device specific extensions of commands Parallelism e Overlapping commands can be executed while another command is being executed e Sequential commands can only be executed when the execution of all other commands is completed In the R amp S NRP2 only the remote control commands INIT IMM and CAL ZERO AUTO ONCE can overlap with other commands User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 174 R amp S NRP2 Remote Control Fundamentals 9 6 2 2 9 7 5 7 1 5 7 2 9 7 2 1 Structure and Syntax of device dependent Messages Respon
293. fer to the data sheet A 1 GPIB Bus Interface A 1 1 Characteristics of the interface e 8 bit parallel data transmission e Bidirectional data transmission e Three wire handshake e Data transmission rate up to 350 Kbyte s e Connection of up to 15 devices e Max length of connecting cables 15 m length of single cable 2 m e Wired OR links when several devices are connected in parallel User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 351 R amp S NRP2 Remote control interfaces GPIB Bus Interface A 1 2 Pin assignment Shield ATN IFC NRFD EOI DIO3 DIO1 SRQ NDAC DAV DIO4 DIO2 GND 11 GND 9 GND 7 DIO8N DIO6N DIO5 logic GND GND 10 GND 8 GND 6 REN DIO7 Fig 1 1 Pin assignment of GPIB bus interface A 1 3 Bus lines e Data bus with 8 lines DIO1 to DIO8 The transmission is bit parallel and byte serial in the ASCII ISO code DIO1 is the least significant bit DIO8 the most significant bit e Control bus with five lines IFC Interface Clear IFC Interface Clear Active LOW resets the interfaces of the connected devices to the default state ATN Attention Active LOW indicates the transmission of interface messages non active HIGH indicates the transmission of device messages SRQ Service Request Active LOW enables a device to send a service request to the controller REN Remote Enable Active LOW permits switchover to remote control EOI End or Identify Has two functions in connection with ATN
294. ffer Command Sequence and Command Synchronization All commands are executed in the order in which they are sent There is no overlapping of command processing Exception the commands INITiate andCALibrate ZERO AUTO ONCE The user therefore can determine the sequence of execution If a long program message is terminated by OPC or OPC the end of command pro cessing is signalled to the controller provided the controller has been adequately pro grammed see following table 5 2 Synchronization with OPC OPC and WAI User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 183 R amp S NRP2 9 9 Remote Control Fundamentals Automatic Settings for Manual Selection of a Measurement Mode Table 5 2 Synchronization with OPC OPC and WAI OPC Sets the Operation Complete bit in the ESR after all commands sent prior to OPC have been processed OPC Writes 1 in the output buffer after all com mands sent prior to OPC have been pro cessed WAL Commands can be sent but they are only exe cuted after completion of all commands sent prior to WAT Dividing commands timewise before after WAI serializes the command sequence Automatic Settings for Manual Selection of a Measure ment Mode Set bit 0 in the ESE of the R amp S NRP2 Set bit 5 in the SRE of the R amp S NRP2 Wait for service request SRQ IEC IEEE bus the R amp S NRP2 is addressed as a talker WAT is sent directly after the command that should be completed befo
295. g using the signal at the sensor input s The sensor s must be discon nected from all power sources Error messages Data questionable ZERO ERROR Signal at the input considerably deviates from O W Illegal parameter value The transfer parameter is a numeric value unequal O corresponds to OFF User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 237 R amp S NRP2 Remote Control Commands CALibration The setting commands accept only the parameters ONCE LFR and UFR they start of zeroing OFF and ON are ignored The queries return the value ON if a calibration is in progress otherwise value OFF The parameters LFR lower frequency range and UFR upper frequency range limit zeroing to a lower and an upper frequency range thus reducing the required time by half These parameters are not accepted by all sensors Before using them you should consult the manual of the sensor concerned Another possibility to perform zeroing faster is to use the command CALibration lt 1 4 gt ZERO FAST AUTO in the trace mode The commands are overlapping i e other commands can be sent to the R amp S NRP2 while one or more calibrations are running Zeroing is recommended if e the temperature has varied by more than about 5 C e the sensor has been replaced e no zeroing was performed in the last 24 hours e signals of very low power are to be measured for instance if the expected measured value is less than 10 dB above the lower measureme
296. ger master TRIG SOUR INT TRIG MAST ON while all other sensors are slaves with external trigger source TRIG SOUR EXT In the following example sensor B is configured for a trace measurement as trigger mas ter Sensor A acts as trigger slave and performs a ContAv measurement Sensor A will be started first and immediately enter WAIT FOR_TRIGGER state It will remain in this state until an external trigger occurs Sensor B will start its measurement after detecting an internal trigger The internal trigger event will be duplicated to the external trigger bus with a delay of approximately 30 ns R amp S NRP Z81 85 86 es E Se confl DEF 0 01 1 configure calcblock 1 with sensor 1 in ContAv mode conf2 xtime 1024 5 ms 2 configure calcblock 2 with sensor 2 in Trace mode trig2 sour INT Internal trigger source trig2 master ON sensor 2 is trigger master trigl sour EXT sensor 1 is slave with external trigger source in1it L sima start measurement on sensor 1 init2 imm at last start trigger master sensor fetch1 get the measurement result of sensor A fetch2 get the measurement result of sensor B syst err check for errors Optimization of measurement speed The duration of a message can be reduced by making the following setting SYST SPEed FAST deactivates screen content The following settings also affect the measurement speed to a greater or lesser extent Which of these settings are possible howev
297. gnal exceeds TRIG SLOP POS or fall short of TRIG SLOP NEG the power set by TRIG LEV the mea surement is started after the time set by TRIG DEL Similar to TRIG SOUR EXT waiting for a trigger event can also be skipped by TRIG IMM RST depending on sensor TRIGger lt 1 4 gt SYNChronize STATe lt state gt If set to ON the command blocks the external trigger bus as long as the sensor is not in WAIT FOR TRIGGER state It is usually used in combination with command TRIG MAST and makes certain that a new measurement will only be started after all sensors have completed their last measurement Parameters lt state gt ON OFF RST depending on sensor 6 16 UNIT Commands of the UNIT system UNTT ll Bayer 333 AA e ie Ue o 334 UNIT lt 1 8 gt POWer lt output_unit gt Selects the output unit for the measured power values User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 333 R amp S NRP2 Remote Control Commands UNIT This setting also determines the unit for the parameters of the following commands e CALC REL e CALC LIM UPP e CALC LIM LOW e DISP MET UPP e DISP MET LOW e OUTP REC LIM LOW e OUTP REC LIM UPP Parameters lt output_unit gt DBM W DBUV RST DBM UNIT lt 1 8 gt POWer RATio lt output_unit gt Selects the output unit for the measured power ratio values This setting also determines the unit for the parameters of the following commands e CALC REL e CALC LIM UPP e CALC LIM LOW e
298. gnals The average power values of timeslots can be measured in the timeslot mode The time resolution is determined by the sampling rate of the sensor This mode is available in the multipath power sensors R amp S NRP Z11 21 22 23 24 28 31 32 and in the R amp S NRP Z8x wideband power sensors This measurement mode can be used only if all timeslots of the TDMA signal are equal in length A period to be excluded from the measurement can be defined at the beginning and end of each timeslot by using the Excluded from Start End parameters The R amp S NRP Z8x wideband power sensors can additionally define an exclusion interval in between i e a Fence A midamble of the signal can thus be excluded from the mea surement An external trigger signal or internal signal triggering is required for synchronization see chapter 4 2 6 Trigger settings on page 85 Find some background information concerning the timeslot mode in section Timing dia gram of T Slot Av signals on page 75 For the most common mobile radio standards the required settings can directly be loaded via the Recall Standard dialog box in the File menu see chapter 4 6 4 Loading set tings for mobile radio standards on page 142 In the Graph display mode the timeslot parameters can also be set interactively in the Timeslots display mode chapter 4 5 7 Timeslot display mode on page 130 Select T slot Av in the Mode dialog box opened via the Sens
299. gt lt start_exclude gt lt end_exclude gt lt expected_value gt lt resolution gt lt source_list gt CONF igure commands for measurement mode T Slot CONFigure lt 1 8 gt SCALar POWer BURSt CONFigure lt 1 8 gt SCALar POWer BURSt RELative CONFigure lt 1 8 gt SCALar POWer BURSt DIFFerence CONFigure lt 1 8 gt SCALar POWer BURSt DIFFerence RELative CONFigure lt 1 8 gt SCALar POWer BURSt SUM CONFigure lt 1 8 gt SCALar POWer BURSt SUM RELative CONFigure lt 1 8 gt SCALar POWer BURSt RATio CONFigure lt 1 8 gt SCALar POWer BURSt RATio RELative CONFigure lt 1 8 gt SCALar POWer BURSt SWR User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 217 R amp S NRP2 Remote Control Commands High Level Measurement Commands CONFigure MEASure READ and FETCh CONFigure lt 1 8 gt SCALar POWer BURSt REFLection CONFigure lt 1 8 gt SCALar POWer BURSt RLOSs lt dtolerance gt lt start_exclude gt lt end_exclude gt lt expected_value gt lt resolution gt lt source_list gt CONFigure commands for measurement mode Burst CONFigure lt 1 8 gt ARRay POWer AVG CONFigure lt 1 8 gt ARRay POWer AVG RELative CONFigure lt 1 8 gt ARRay POWer AVG DIFFerence CONFigure lt 1 8 gt ARRay POWer AVG DIFFerence RELative CONFigure lt 1 8 gt ARRay POWer AVG SUM CONFigure lt 1 8 gt ARRay POWer AVG SUM RELative CONFigure lt 1 8 gt
300. handle If the R amp S NRP2 is not installed in a rack it should be set up so that the viewing angle for the display is optimal The carrying handle can be locked in a variety of positions to act as a stand To adjust the handle pull the two side pieces of the handle outwards so that the handle can be rotated The handle locks at angles which are multiples of 60 User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 8 R amp S NRP2 Putting into Operation Front panel tour j xef pow Ley 1 4 2 Bench top operation If the R amp S NRP2 is operated on a bench top the surface should be flat The instrument can be used in horizontal position standing on its feet or with the support feet on the bottom extended 1 4 3 Mounting the instrument in a rack The R amp S NRP2 can be installed in a rack using a variety of rack adapters order numbers see data sheet The installation instructions are part of an adapter kit Risk of instrument damage For rack installation make sure that the airflow perforations are unimpeded This helps to prevent the instruments from being overheated 1 5 Front panel tour The front panel of the R amp S NRP2 consists of the VGA display with the softkey area the connectors on the left side and the hardkeys and utility keys on the right side The sub sequent sections provide brief explanations on the controls and connectors the hardkey area and the front panel User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 9 R amp S NRP
301. he potential danger D Should a fire occur the product may release hazardous substances gases fluids etc that can cause health problems Therefore suitable measures must be taken e g protective masks and protective clothing must be worn 7 Laser products are given warning labels that are standardized according to their laser class Lasers can cause biological harm due to the properties of their radiation and due to their extremely concentrated electromagnetic power If a laser product e g a CD DVD drive is integrated into a Rohde amp Schwarz product absolutely no other settings or functions may be used as described in the product documentation The objective is to prevent personal injury e g due to laser beams 8 EMC classes in line with EN 55011 CISPR 11 and analogously with EN 55022 CISPR 22 EN 55032 CISPR 32 Class A equipment Equipment suitable for use in all environments except residential environments and environments that are directly connected to a low voltage supply network that supplies residential buildings Note Class A equipment is intended for use in an industrial environment This equipment may cause radio disturbances in residential environments due to possible conducted as well as radiated disturbances In this case the operator may be required to take appropriate measures to eliminate these disturbances Class B equipment Equipment suitable for use in residential environments and environments th
302. he Negative TRansition register also acts as a transition filter Upon transition of a bit of the CONDition register from 1 to 0 the associated NTR bit determines whether the EVENt bit is set to 1 NTR bit 1 the EVENt bit is set NTR bit 0 the EVENt bit is not set This register can be written to and read Reading the register does not change its contents With the aid of these two transition filter registers the user can define the status change of the CONDition register none O to 1 1 to O or both that is to be recorded in the EVEN register EVENt register The EVENt register reports whether an event has occurred since its last read ing it is the memory of the CONDition register It only registers events that have been reported by the transition filters The EVENt register is continuously updated by the device It can only be read by the user Reading this register clears its contents This register is frequently referred to as the overall register ENABle register The ENABle register determines whether the associated EVEN bit influences the summary bit See below Each bit of the EVENt register is ANDed symbol amp with the associated ENABle bit The events of all logical operations of this register are ORed symbol t and passed on to the summary bit ENABle bit 0 the associated EVENt bit does not affect the summary bit bit 1 if the associated EVENT bit is 1 the summary bit is also set to 1 This reg
303. he R amp S NRP Z8x series For all other sensors a fence can be used in the T slots display in the Trace amp Statistics sensor mode Config Fence Opens the dialog box for setting the parameters Start and Length Fence Start of Fence Length of Fence 240 000 us 4 Fig 4 10 Fence dialog box Start Length of Fence Config Fence Within the measurement period a fence i e an exclusion interval can be set The fence is defined by its start time and length The Start of Fence refers to the start of the gate Remote command SENSe lt 1 4 gt POWer TGATe lt 1 4 gt EXCLude MID OFFSet TIME on page 274 SENSe lt 1 4 gt POWer TGATe lt 1 4 gt EXCLude MID TIME on page 275 Trace statistics measurements The Trace amp Statistics mode is used to display the time characteristic of the envelope power and its statistical distribution For further information on its configuration and oper ation refer to chapter 4 5 Displaying traces on page 113 Background information on power measurement This chapter provides some background information on power measurement in Cont Av T slot Av T gate Av and Burst Av mode smoothing or what is the point of dropout tolerance Additionally timing diagrams explain visually the relation between trigger aquisition intervals and excluded time segments in T gate or T slot measure ment mode Acquisition interval As the senso
304. he meantime the indicated value is close to O dB E as A Rel 0 02 cn Fig 2 13 Result window Reset relative If an attenuator is still connected remove it now and connect the sensor directly to the signal source The displayed value should now equal the offset that has been entered Checking the settings with full height window 1 Select and open the Windows menu Sensor Windows Measurement File System The Windows menu contains all the functions required for opening closing and configuring windows Resolution dB 1 0 1 00T 0 001 Timeslot 1 4 Fig 2 14 Window menu Digital Check if window 1 has been selected Press the Expand softkey Window 1 now expands to full size below the menu bar and displays all relevant settings measurement modes of contributing channels A ContAV Trigger mode auto averaging number and mode 32 Auto Offset 10 dB S parameter device none duty cycle correction none User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 34 R amp S NRP2 Getting Started Window handling Sensor Windows Measurement File System A Cont Av System Zeg A 2 32 Auto A 10 000 dB Woe aH I 1 000 GHz d Din Fig 2 15 Result window key measurement parameters 4 To return the window to its normal size open the Windows menu with the MENU hardkey and press the Arrange softkey 2 5 Window handling Up to four windows can be indicated simultane
305. he set time has elapsed after the power has dropped below the trigger threshold If the trigger threshold is excee ded again during the dropout time the process restarts from the beginning Timing diagram of burst signals The timing diagram below shows the relation between the following parameters e Trigger threshold and trigger event e Trigger event exclude intervals and measurement interval Although the signal frequently falls below the trigger threshold during the burst an end of the burst is not detected The reason for this is that these drops are shorter than the set dropout time The last falling edge in the burst is detected as the end of the burst since the trigger threshold is no longer exceeded during the dropout time indicated below User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 74 R amp S NRP2 Instrument Functions Data acquisition and parameters Dropout Power Last falling edge A in the burst Trigger event Trigger N H d ay iI threshold V gt ola Pl Time Excluded from Start Excluded from End Measurement interval Fig 4 11 Timing diagram of burst signals Timing diagram of T Slot Av signals The timing diagrams that differ by externally and internally triggered events show the relation between the listed parameters e Trigger event trigger delay and start of the first timeslot e Nominal width exclude intervals and measurement interval of the timeslots
306. he start of the interval to be blanked out see figure below SS SS SSS EN NIA NA Trigger level y A U d Tmo lt lt 7 Gate 1 Gate 2 Gate 4 SENS TGAT2 MID OFES TIME SENS TGAT2 MID TIME SENS TGAT2 OFFS TIME SENS TGAT2 TIME Fig 6 11 MID parameter in the Timegate mode Parameters lt time interval gt float_value Range depending on sensor RST depending on sensor Default unit S SENSe lt 1 4 gt POWer TGATe lt 1 4 gt OFFSet TIME lt time gt Is used for configuring the Timegate mode It specifies the start of one of the four gates sweeps relative to the delayed trigger point If this value is negative the gate starts before the trigger point This is possible because the sensor stores samples of the mea sured powers and can thus transfer the start of a measurement to the past In manual operation the start and duration of the gates can also be defined graphically if the sensor is operated in the Trace mode User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 275 R amp S NRP2 Remote Control Commands SENSe Sensor Commands Power Trigger event Trigger level 4 2 ceeeeeceeefeepecesereeeeeeceseseeeeeee ences loo 0020000 00 P de lt Delayed trigger point h Time Trigger Gate 1 Gate 2 Gate 3 Gate 4 SENS TGAT1 OFFS TIME SENS TGAT1 TIME SENS TGAT2 OFFS TIME SENS TGAT2 TIME Fig 6 12 Timing parameters for the Timegate mode Parameter
307. he units set with the UNIT command Example SENSe3 FREQuency Response 1 000000E06 for 1 MHz e Boolean values are returned as 0 for OFF and 1 for ON Example SYSTem BEEPer STATe Response 1 e Character data is returned in short form chapter 5 7 5 Parameters on page 179 Example UNIT2 POWer Response DBM Parameters Most commands require the specification of a parameter Parameters must be separated from the header by a white space Parameters may be specified as numeric values Boolean parameters character data strings or block data The type of parameter required for the specific command as well as the permissible value range are described together with the commands User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 179 R amp S NRP2 Remote Control Fundamentals EE SS Structure and Syntax of device dependent Messages Numeric values Numeric values may be entered in any customary form i e with sign decimal point and exponent If the values exceed the resolution of the device they will be rounded off Values between 9 9E37 and 9 9E37 can be entered The exponent is denoted by E or e The exponent alone must not be used Units Physical quantities may be stated with the unit Permissible prefixes for the unit are G Giga MA Mega MHZ is also allowed K kilo M milli U micro and N nano If no unit is specified the basic unit will be used Example SENSel FREQuency 1 5 GHZ is equivalent to SENSel
308. hese circumstances you can reduce the display update rate Normal standard display update rate Slow preferred setting rate at very low ambient temperatures Frozen for interruption free update of analog outputs see chapter 4 7 2 3 Voltage at the analog outputs on page 156 The meter indicates fro zen in the info line of the results window Remote command DISPlay UPDate on page 241 Brightness Set the display brightness Remote command DISPlay ILLumination on page 240 4 7 6 Test measurements Since the scope of testing is limited test measurements cannot replace a regular reca libration of the sensor The Test function offers tests for the internal circuitry of the sensor selftest 1 as well as simple tests with applied RF option R amp S NRP2 B1 required User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 160 R amp S NRP2 4 7 6 1 Remote I O Power Ref Off On Sensor System Info Info Misc Test 4 User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 Instrument Functions System settings Internal sensor selftest gt Open the Sensortest dialog box in the System gt Test menu Sensor Test Test internal with no signal Successful Test Report 4 Page 112 gt 4 Fig 4 92 Sensortest dialog box page 1 The first page of the Sensortest dialog box covers the settings for performing an internal selftest of the sensor without using the reference signal A B C D T
309. ia 88 Auto statistics display Masini 136 D e E 67 128 PO ONG o wae 81 Auto E 81 E Auto TM ModE ari 82 e 81 Bake wl EE 352 Analog Meter Scaling ee 96 SS A 352 Aito e calles ee eet alos eit 116 Erase NONVOI DatG ssscsnsntssiersnavsnatnnimenitennesesantnnnseneansises 346 PO e A 109 Error Average gate seats at ue pie tenes esse ates Cote tena ees ots ee 122 PEON O o II ES 166 Average time slot A IN NON 132 Overload poliest 165 Average power gate c ccccccsecceeceeeeeseeesseeeeseeeeeaees 103 KEE ura 165 MN a 81 Sample EMOT asnicar 166 WRUNG Meds scsi atea 166 B Error Sensor communication erfor c ooocccccccconcccnnnccccnnncss 346 Error Invalid SettingS ccoooonccccconinconocooncnnnnnancnnnnnnoos 337 Base Error List file Menu ooocccoonncncoccccococccoononconaconcnnanos 143 PONOT serrana 129 GE 165 51 o IP o nn o AA 160 Ethernet Configuration ccccccoonccnncccoocooncnnnnnonnconnnnnnnnoos 171 Bluetooth DIO atenas 142 Ethernet interface cccooncccococoncccncnncnconaronnonncononnncnnonanos 357 POO MODU srta aire 346 Ethernet MAC address cccocccccconcnccnncnncnconncnnnnncononncnnnnnnos 158 Ei delt 160 o A 103 106 120 E AA e e EA 68 Excluded from Start End T slot cocoonccccccconcnccno 134 Burst AY el 46 Expanding windows occoccconcccococoncnonconconcncnnncnncnnnnconaninnns 93 BUZZ Si TOS anno die 349 E COPPER POE E a En E 58 External TRAGOS ainia 142 C F Case sensitivity A
310. iagram of burst signals on page 74 For the most common mobile radio standards the required settings can directly be loaded via the Recall Standard dialog box in the File menu see chapter 4 6 4 Loading set tings for mobile radio standards on page 142 gt Select Burst Av in the Mode dialog box opened via the Sensor menu Mode 4 A Gee Cont Trace amp T slot T gate Offset Filter Ay Statistics Av AY Dropout Range 4 100 000 us Excluded from Start From End F Correction 3 0 000 us 0 000 us Trigger 4 Fig 4 6 Mode dialog box Burst Av Dropout Defines the end of the burst If power keeps low for at least this time the end of the burst is assumed Modulation specific power drops that are shorter than the set value are ignored Note The Dropout parameter must not be longer than the interval between the end of the burst and the start of the next burst Remote command SENSe lt 1 4 gt POWer BURSt DTOLerance on page 274 User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 68 R amp S NRP2 Instrument Functions aS ov TUT7TTq TVNHWW AA Data acquisition and parameters Excluded from Start End Set the time interval at the beginning or end of the burst that is excluded from the mea surement Remote command SENSe lt 1 4 gt TIMing EXCLude STOP on page 283 SENSe lt 1 4 gt TIMing EXCLude STARt on page 283 4 2 1 4 Measuring the average power of TDMA si
311. ice dependent Messages Example SENSe2 FUNCtion POWer AVG This command sets the measurement mode of sensor 2 to the ContAv mode 5 7 3 Structure of a Program Message A program message may contain one or several commands Several commands in a program message are separated by a semicolon If the next command belongs to a different command system the semicolon is followed by a colon The colon stands for the root node of the command tree Example SYSTem TIME 20 30 00 SENSe FUNCtion POWer AVG This program message contains two commands The first command belongs to the SYSTem system and is used to set the time of the system clock The second command belongs to the SENSe system and must be preceded by a colon Otherwise confusion might be caused if the SYSTem tree also had a subordinate SENSe node In this case it would be possible to omit the introductory keyword SYSTem see the following explan ation If the successive commands belong to the same system and therefore have one or sev eral common levels the program message may be abbreviated The second command following the semicolon then starts at the level that is below the common levels The colon after the semicolon must be omitted in this case Example SENSe2 TIMing STARt 10 SENSe2 TIMing STOP 10 This program message contains two commands separated by a semicolon Both com mands belong to the SENSe system and its TIMing subsystem i e they have two com mon lev
312. idad El principio del grupo de empresas Rohde amp Schwarz consiste en tener nuestros productos siempre al dia con los estandares de seguridad y de ofrecer a nuestros clientes el maximo grado de seguridad Nuestros productos y todos los equipos adicionales son siempre fabricados y examinados segun las normas de seguridad vigentes Nuestro sistema de garantia de calidad controla constantemente que sean cumplidas estas normas El presente producto ha sido fabricado y examinado seg n el certificado de conformidad de la UE y ha salido de nuestra planta en estado impecable seg n los est ndares t cnicos de seguridad Para poder preservar este estado y garantizar un funcionamiento libre de peligros el usuario deber atenerse a todas las indicaciones informaciones de seguridad y notas de alerta El grupo de empresas Rohde amp Schwarz est siempre a su disposici n en caso de que tengan preguntas referentes a estas informaciones de seguridad Adem s queda en la responsabilidad del usuario utilizar el producto en la forma debida Este producto est destinado exclusivamente al uso en la industria y el laboratorio o si ha sido expresamente autorizado para aplicaciones de campo y de ninguna manera deber ser utilizado de modo que alguna persona cosa pueda sufrir da o El uso del producto fuera de sus fines definidos o sin tener en cuenta las instrucciones del fabricante queda en la responsabilidad del usuario El fabricante no se hace en ninguna forma
313. ides with the delayed trigger see also chapter 4 2 6 Trigger settings on page 85 Remote command SYSTem STANdard TRIGger SOURce on page 325 Recall Loads the selected standard settings The same effect can be achieved by pressing the MENU key Remote command SYSTem STANdard PRESet on page 325 Programming aids If you are developing remote control programs you can display the contents of the SCPI error queue in the Error List dialog box of the File menu In addition to the error the command line that triggered the error is displayed along with a question mark highlighted in black at the point where the command interpreter detected the error Windows Measurement File System Error List O No error Fig 4 70 Error List dialog box The dialog box can be left permanently open its contents are continuously updated If the device is already in the remote state the menu bar is replaced and the error list can be opened with the topmost softkey DEL If the Error List is open the error queue of the R amp S NRP2 can be deleted by pressing the DEL 1TRIG hardkey Remote command DISPlay ERRorlist on page 240 To activate extended error messages SYSTem ERRor EXTended STATe on page 322 User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 143 R amp S NRP2 Instrument Functions SS AA system settings 4 6 6 Assigning names to windows Each display window is automatically labeled with a number 1 2 3 4 In addi
314. ifth Calculate block drops below the lower limit value The CONDition register contains information as to whether a displayed value is currently above a configured upper limit and the EVENt register indicates whether a limit value was User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 310 R amp S NRP2 Remote Control Commands 6 13 17 STATus exceeded since the last readout of the Operation Upper Limit Fail Status Register Details of the behavior are defined by the transition register The limit value can be set with the command CALC LIM UPP DATA lt float_value gt Command CALC LIM UPP STAT ON configures the PTRansition and NTRansition registers so that the corresponding bit is set in the EVENt register when the displayed value exceeds the upper limit value The Operation Upper Limit Fail Status Register can be read by the commands STATus OPERation ULIMit SUMMary CONDition STATus OPERation ULIMit SUMMary EVENt Table 6 28 Meaning of bits used in the Operation Upper Limit Fail Status Register Window 1 Upper Limit Fail The measured value returned by the first Calculate block exceeds the upper limit value Window 2 Upper Limit Fail The measured value returned by the second Calculate block exceeds the upper limit value Window 3 Upper Limit Fail The measured value returned by the third Calculate block exceeds the upper limit value Window 4 Upper Limit Fail The measured value returned by the fourth Calculate block exc
315. iled overview on the supported interfaces Table 4 11 Remote control interfaces and protocols GPIB IEC IEEE Bus Interface Local Area Network LAN Local Area Network LAN VISA address string GPIB primary address INSTR no secondary address VISA address string USB lt vendor ID gt lt product ID gt lt serial num ber gt INSTR VXI 11 VISA address string TCPIP host address LAN device name INSTR Ethernet socket com munication e g Raw Ethernet simple telnet VISA address string TCPIP host address LAN device name INSTR Protocols VISA address string The GPIB bus interface according to standard IEC 625 1 IEEE 488 1 is located at the rear panel of the instrument Define the address in the GPIB dialog box described in chap ter 4 7 1 2 GPIB settings on page 147 For a description of the interface refer to chapter A 1 GPIB Bus Interface on page 351 The instrument provides a USB connector at the rear panel Refer to chapter 4 7 1 3 USB settings on page 147 For a description of the interface refer to chapter A 4 USB inter face on page 365 A LAN connector is located at the rear panel of the instrument The interface is based on TCP IP and supports VXI 11 protocol see chapter 4 7 1 4 VXI11 settings on page 148 for setting the IP address For description of the interface refer to chapter A 2 1 VXI11 protocol on pag
316. imeslot structure see chapter 4 2 1 4 Measuring the average power of TDMA signals on page 69 In the Timegate Average mode the average power can be measured over defined time intervals of a signal with periodic envelope The timegate mode provides four user configurable gates for the mea surement see chapter 4 2 1 5 Measuring the average power in gates on page 71 65 R amp S NRP2 Instrument Functions 4 2 1 2 Mode 4 Offset Filter Range 4 F Correction 4 Trigger 4 Data acquisition and parameters Burst Av The Burst Average mode is used to measure the average burst power of pulsed signals The acquisition interval is automatically derived from the signal see chapter 4 2 1 3 Measuring the average power of burst signals on page 68 Remote command SENSe lt 1 4 gt FUNCtion ON on page 270 Continuous average power measurements The Cont Av mode is the preferred measurement method if the measurement is not to be or cannot be synchronized with a specific signal event This is the only available measurement mode for thermal power sensors because they are too slow for the other measurement modes gt Select Cont Av in the Mode dialog box opened via the Sensor menu Mode Trace T slot T gate Burst Statistics Av Av Av 4 20 000ms Sampling Rate 1 2 4 1 000 Duty Cycle DR Smoothing of Modulated Signals 4 Fig 4 5 Mode dialog box Cont Av
317. in settings FREQ PRESET ZERO page 61 for informa tion on the setup keys FREQ PRE SET and ZERO e Softkey manual operation gt Menu handling page 53 e Dialog boxes and their control elements page 53 Screen layout The R amp S NRP2 screen displays the menu bar with the menu names and at least one or more measurement result window The folded out menu and the setting dialog boxes may overlay the result windows Result window Sensor Windows Measurement File System 1 000 GHz 3 87 mn Fig 3 1 Screen layout result window User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 49 R amp S NRP2 Manual Operation III Screen layout The R amp S NRP2 displays results in windows A maximum of four windows can be dis played simultaneously on the screen They are numbered 1 to 4 Windows have a title bar which contains the number fixed and optionally the window name user definable Windows do not have any control elements Menu bar Sensor Windows Measurement File System active menu Fig 3 2 Screen layout menu bar A menu bar is always displayed at the top of the screen It contains the menu names The active menu is highlighted Selecting the active menu Sensor Windows Measurement File System Fig 3 3 Screen layout selecting the active menu Select the active menu Press the right or left side of the topmost softkey one or more times Alternatively you can also use the cursor keys gt Fold
318. indows is set with SENS POW TSL COUN The length of a time window is determined via SENS POW TSL WIDT The measurement result is represented by a vector that can contain up to 26 indices and contains the power of a time window at each index POWer TGATe AVG Timegate The Timegate mode is a pseudo mode It is used to determine accurate measured values in the gates defined with the aid of the Trace mode in manual operation If one of the four gates is selected SENS TRAC SEL the sensor is internally put into the Timeslot mode and configured such that it determines the average power in this gate with high accuracy POWer BURSt AVG Burst In remote control this measurement mode is very similar to the ContAv mode The integration time is however not predefined but determined by the sensor with the aid of a burst detector The start of a burst is detected when the measurement signal rises above the set trigger level The end is set when the signal drops below the trigger threshold SENS POW BURS DTOL defines the time interval during which a signal drop below the trigger level is not interpreted as the end of the burst In the Burst mode the set trig ger source is ignored and TRIG SOUR INT is implicitly assumed XPOWer CCDF CCDF The power in a settable time interval is measured and subse quently subjected to a statistical evaluation CCDF The mea surement time is set using the SENS STAT commands The R amp S NRP2
319. ing menus out or in Sensor Windows Measurement File System St window 30 00 can Relative Off On Reset 1 FP 59 21dBm_ RefYal Limits 3 P 2 92dBm Aus Val Reset 4 Fig 3 4 Screen layout measurement menu folded out Fold out in the active menu 1 Press the MENU hardkey to fold the menu out 2 Press the MENU hardkey again to fold the menu in The menu also folds out automatically if another menu is selected User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 50 R amp S NRP2 Manual Operation 3 3 Menu layout To quickly allocate the associated softkey to a menu item all the menus open directly next to the softkey bar i e on the right side of the display this is against usual PC con vention with menus drop down directly below the menu name sensor Windows Measurement File System A Cont Av amp Mode 4 32 Auto Offset Filter 4 Range 4 F Correction 4 4 02 cam Fig 3 5 Screen layout menus next to the rocker switches See chapter 3 4 Menu handling on page 53 for more information on operating the menu functions Dialog boxes Cont Trace amp T slot Burst Av Statistics Av Aw 4 Gate Start of Gate Length of Gate 0 000 us 100 000 us Fence Config Fence Fig 3 6 Screen layout dialog boxes Dialog boxes can be opened from the menus The dialog boxes display a group of related parameters that can be se
320. ing temperature User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 27 R amp S NRP2 Getting Started Preset and zeroing error O Turn off all test signals before zeroing An active test signal during zeroing causes an To zero the meter 1 Connect the sensor to a signal source 2 Switch off the power 3 Press the ZERO hardkey The Zero dialog box is displayed Fig 2 2 Zeroing dialog box 4 Press the ZERO hardkey again to perform zeroing of all connected sensor channels Zero All or press the appropriate softkey to select a specific sensor for zeroing Zeroing of all connected sensors is performed The correction measurement takes several seconds When completed the R amp S NRP2 displays a message indicating success or failure of zeroing ceroing E successful eroing A failed OK 4 MENU If zeroing fails the most frequent cause for this error is a signal that is applied to the sensor and prevents Zeroing User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 28 R amp S NRP2 Getting Started Measuring average power Cont Av mode 2 4 Measuring average power Cont Av mode In the following example for measuring the average power the following steps are per formed Setting up the measurement Setting the frequency Setting the unit for the measurement result Setting a fixed offset correction Performing a relative power measurement Checking the settings with full height window Selecting the display mode S
321. ings of the newly opened window are lost To prevent this we recom mend you to cancel with the ESC key and to manually configure a window User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 167 Messages and alarms R amp S NRP2 Remote Control Fundamentals Differences between Remote Control and Manual Control 5 Remote Control Fundamentals The Power Meter R amp S NRP2 is equipped with various interfaces that can be connected to a controller for remote control e lEC IEEE bus interface standard equipment in line with the standards IEC 60625 1 IEEE 488 1 and IEC 60625 2 IEEE 488 2 e Ethernet 10 100 BASE T interface e USB1 1 interface for remote control and firmware update Connectors are installed at the rear of the power meter The interfaces support the SCPI Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments standard version 1999 0 of May 1999 The SCPI standard is based on the IEEE 488 2 standard and defines a standar dized command language for controlling measuring and test instruments with functions beyond the scope of the IEEE 488 2 standard In addition to the commands error han dling and status management are also described The present chapter explains the differences between remote control and manual control familiarizes the user with fundamentals of remote control and describes the status report ing system as well as the procedure for connecting a PC for remote control 5 1 Differences between Remote Control and Manual Con
322. inks the client must determine which device has triggered the SRQ by querying the status bytes function device_readstb of all connected devices Connection setup A socket connection is set up for each channel All commands via the core or abort channel contain an ID that is used to assign the command to a link The interrupt channel which is also implemented using sockets is shared by all links Commands transmitted via this channel do not contain a link ID The setup is handled by the network instrument client which first requests the connections from the network instrument server s port mapper service at port 111 The portmapper subsequently activates the channel in the R amp S NRP2 and tells the client at which ports channel services can be addressed For this reason it is important that any firewalls or routers between the client and the R amp S NRP2 enable free access from the controller to the R amp S NRP2 core and abort channels and vice versa interrupt channel As the ports for the channels are dynami cally assigned reliable information regarding the port numbers used cannot be provided Remote control via VXI1 1 The following possibilities are suggested for remote controlling the R amp S NRP2 via VX111 e The simplest way to create remote control programs is by using a virtual instruments software architecture VISA implementation and creating the remote control pro grams under Visual Basic or C C VISA implementa
323. ion density of the envelope power The measurement result is dimensionless and in contrast to a non nor malized PDF is independent of the magnitude of the average power value Av Integrating the normalized PDF over power provides the average power value Av Remote command SENSe lt 1 4 gt FUNCtion ON on page 270 Absolute X Scaling Scales the X axis in terms of absolute power dBm if activated Normalizes the X axis with respect to average power dB if deactivated Trace 1 2 Selects tab Trace 1 or Trace 2 to configure the statistic measurement for the 1st or 2nd trace An internal AWGN source is available for the second trace thus providing a standard signal reference Channel Selects the channel for the respective trace A statistical evaluation of combined results from different channels e g power ratios is not supported Aperture Sets the length of the aquisition interval with unsynchronized acquisition Cont see Gate Cont on page 136 User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 139 R amp S NRP2 Instrument Functions 4 6 R amp S WAPS Freet Setup Recall Save Standard i Recall Error List 4 Window Name 4 4 6 1 4 6 2 Management of settings In addition to and independent of the setting of the aperture time for the measurement of an average power value Av chapter 4 2 1 2 Continuous average power measure ments on page 66 you can use this param
324. iption of the hardkeys A highlighted menu item corresponding to one of the hardkeys indicates that the function can be started either by the softkey or the associated hardkey as shown in the example with Preset at File System RAS NZ Preset y Setu P q Recall Save Standara User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 24 R amp S NRP2 Getting Started Brief introduction to the operation Using the softkeys softkey bar i e on the right side of the display To quickly allocate the softkey to a menu item all the menus open directly next to the The six softkeys perform the functions that are indicated in the active menu or dialog box Located at the right edge of the display the functions in a line are assigned to the cor responding softkey As a special feature sometimes two or more functions are assigned to one softkey In this case the softkey operated as a rocker switch see the following examples Two functions are associated with one softkey In the example the two functions are position Pos and scale Scale Scale is selected gt To select function Pos press the left hand side of the rocker switch Po n eo Sei e Now setting the position with the cursor keys is possible Several functions are associated with one softkey In the example the different sensor modes are offered T slot Av is selected Cont Trace amp T gate Burst Av Statistics Av Av 4
325. is indicated with the parameter lt NR1 gt The response is an 8 bit integer with a sign 128 to 127 Query parameters lt NR1 gt 1 4 Return values Setting 8 bit integer Usage Query only Options R amp S NRP2 B1 OUTPut ROSCillator CALibration WRlte lt NR1 gt lt NR1 gt Sets the test generator User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 258 R amp S NRP2 Remote Control Commands OUTPut Parameters lt NR1 gt lt NR1 gt 1st lt NR1 gt 01 Generator on off 2nd parameter 0 on 1 off 02 Power stage 2nd parameter 0 20 dBm 1 0 dBm 03 LED state 2nd parameter 0 off 1 on 0x02 blinking 04 Start of calibration 05 Setting of potentiometer 1 2nd parameter 128 to 127 06 Setting of potentiometer 2 2nd parameter 128 to 127 07 Setting of potentiometer 3 2nd parameter 128 to 127 08 Setting of potentiometer 4 2nd parameter 128 to 127 09 Confirm calibration 10 Abort calibration 2nd lt NR1 gt Data if 1st parameter 01 02 03 05 06 07 or 08 0 if 1st parameter 04 09 or 10 Usage Event Options R amp S NRP2 B1 OUTPut TTL ACTive lt string gt Specifies whether the value set via OUTP TTL LVOL LOW or via OUTP TTL HVOL HIGH should be applied ifthe measured value causes a limit violation atthe TTL output Parameters lt string gt LOW HIGH RST LOW OUTPut TTL FAIL lt mode gt Specifies the value which should be applied if the measured value causes a limit violation a
326. is prevents problems some controllers have with the processing of unsigned integers User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 297 R amp S NRP2 Remote Control Commands STATus States events or summary bits of other registers Ve AAA AAA Re Seege Ol kleene VK EVENT and ENABle bits of all bits Simplified diagram a A Summary bit of SCPI register SCOCOSCCOCOCOCOCGCCCO ae i written into a bit of the STB or into the CONDition bit of a Fig 6 16 Standard SCPI status register ARAADA DA ADA AAA Table 6 16 Decimal value of individual bits in the SCPI status register CO of fe CC C C Table 6 17 Standard SCPI status register CONDition register The CONDition register is directly written by the hardware or the summary bit of the next lower register Its content reflects the current device status This register can only be read it cannot be written to or cleared Reading the register does not change its contents PTRansition register The Positive TRansition register acts as a transition filter When a bit of the CONDition register changes from 0 to 1 the associated PTR bit determines whether the EVENt bit will be set to 1 PTR bit 1 the EVENt bit is set PTR bit 0 the EVENt bit is not set This register can be written to and read Reading the register does not change its contents User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 298 R amp S NRP2 Remote Control Commands STATus NTRansition register T
327. is then defined by means of the offset table If the exact frequency selected is not in the table the values in the table are interpolated If the selected frequency is outside the specified frequency range the first or last offset value of the table is selected Interpola tion is linear in the units HZ and DB Parameters lt NRf gt lt NRf gt Enters frequencies in the first column of the table selected with MEM TABL SEL RST Tables are not changed in case of a RST Default unit HZ MEMory TABLe FREQuency POINts Returns the number of entries lines in the table selected with MEM TABL SEL lt name gt Usage Query only MEMory TABLe GAIN MAGNitude lt NRf gt lt NRf gt This command enters offset values in the second column of the table selected with MEM TABL SEL Existing data for offset values will be overwritten The number of fre quencies should match with the number of offset values If the number of frequencies differs from the number of offset values the shorter column length will be used A frequency can be determined with SENS lt 1 4 gt FREQ for which a correction factor is then calculated by means of the offset table If the exact frequency selected is not in the table the values in the table are interpolated If the selected frequency is outside the specified frequency range the first or last offset value of the table is selected Interpola tion is linear in the units HZ and DB Unit D
328. isplayed together with the marker time The mark ers can be positioned automatically to measure the maximum and minimum power of the waveform s The settings for Trig gering Filt ering Function and Unit are taken from the Trace display mode and cannot be changed Markers are indicated by red arrows see figure below gt Select Marker in the control panel opened via the Window gt Graph gt Display dialog box Trace amp Statistics sensor mode Display 15 00 dBm de 150 dE di O ah JA Sc D ld E Marker PosScale vr vy ii d 60 00 dBm dB 100 0 psidiv E Average Baue Hau Y 93 239 A dem 2 645 dE A 675 615 us 43 943 dBm 12 840 dE RT 35 815 dE 15 489 dB Fig 4 52 Marker display mode 1st line measurement function display type v position of first marker and associated power power ratio A position of second marker and associated power power ratio v 4 time spacing and power ratio of the two markers Note The marker positions y and 4 relate to the delayed trigger event User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 124 R amp S NRP2 4 5 5 1 Display Config Marker User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 Instrument Functions Displaying traces Controls in Marker display mode Display Selects another view see chapter 4 5 2 Trace window on page 114 Config Marker Opens the subdialog to manually define the marker positi
329. ister can be written to and read as required Reading the register does not change its contents Summary bit As stated above the summary bit for each register is derived from the EVENt and ENABle registers The result is entered into a bit of the CONDition register of the next higher register The device automatically generates the summary bit for each register An event may thus cause a service request through all hierarchical levels The Service Request Enable register SRE defined by IEEE488 2 can be viewed as the ENABle register of the STB Accordingly the ESE can be viewed as the ENABle register of the ESR User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 299 R amp S NRP2 Remote Control Commands Fig 6 17 Overview on structure of Status Reporting System NI N O CG STATUS Output Queue output buffer CE Error Event Queue a O Ma S WO WW l 5 JS DIS al el a D lt O lt O GOOOAE Service Request to controller at transition from 0 to 1 _ User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 INRP2 STATus al al Operation Status Co Register CS EJ Ea EZ to bit 7 El of MEA status byte register STB Fig 6 18 Operation Status Register User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 301 R amp S NRP2 Remote Control Commands STATus Questionable Status Register status byt
330. it of the measured result Possible Units W DBM DBUV DPCT DB O Usage Query only User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 234 R amp S NRP2 Remote Control Commands CALCulate Configuration of Calculate Blocks CALCulate lt 1 4 gt STATistics MARKer HORIzontal POSition X POWer lt power gt Is available with statistics measurements CCDF and PDF It sets the horizontally shift able marker on the power axis The absolute position is specified The statistics measured value can then be read out with CALC STAT MARK HOR DATA if the measurement at this position has a valid value Parameters lt power gt float_value units DBM DBUV W Default unit DBM CALCulate lt 1 4 gt STATistics MARKer HORizontal DATA Is available with statistics measurements CCDF and PDF It returns the value of the Statistics function at the position of the marker if the value is valid Unit O Usage Query only CALCulate lt 1 4 gt STATistics MARKer VERTical POSition Y lt position gt Is available with statistics measurements CCDF and PDF It sets the vertically shiftable marker on the statistics axis The associated value on the power axis can then be read out with CALC STAT MARK VERT DATA if such a value is available Unit O Parameters lt position gt float_value CALCulate lt 1 4 gt STATistics MARKer VERTical DATA POWer Is available with statistics measurements CCDF and PDF It returns the
331. ito inclina 329 BR Ale Re E 330 TRIGJSr ALE DELAY AUTO mai 330 TRIOS ALED ME 330 TRIGO ALEE AROLDO ee E dois 331 TR OALE AS Tere EE 331 TRIG JST AEE LEV Beemer tte meee a E E E E T E AE 332 TRIGGER AL e 332 TRJ ALE e EE 332 TRIGg rALESYNCHronizer STA TO usuaria Aa 329 TRIGger ALL IMMediate ccoo ctra 331 TRlGoerzfl AzATRogoertSTATel 329 TRGS 1114 COUN cor EEEE E EAEE ETEEN ESEE EENEN EES ETES 329 RR See A a oO eai PP e e EE E 330 RRE e Een 12 4 gt DELAY AU T E 330 TRIGGERS 4 PP o E PE E RARE DAA ARRONA EEER SRESER RARR REER 330 TRISger 11 4 AROLDO acond ir a 331 TRIGE A elt Goo SIS ist Cen lord sto iron 331 is e A nn E E E EE EE E E 332 TRlGoerzfl AsMAGTertGfATel 332 Mc A 332 RE KN Ee 332 TRlGoerzfl AzShChronGelGtfAafel 333 TRIGger lt M 45 IMMediate sois 331 SEE aN E s AA eo E E E E E A AE 333 UNIT lt 18 gt POWerRA TO nantes 334 SEIS TA AU MM E 263 SENSe 1 45 AVERage GCOUNE E 264 IGENGe 1L ASIAVERageCOUN AUTO 264 IGENGe 1l ASIAVERageCOUN AUTTOMIlMe 265 SENSe lt 1 4 gt AVERage COUNt AUTO NSRadti0 occcccocccccoccnccoconocononoconncncnonanononanononnnnnnnnannnnnnnnnnnonananos 266 IGENZGe DL AztAVERaoeCOUNAUTORE Solution 265 IGENGe 1L ASIAVERageCOUN AUTO GOTT 266 SENSe lt 1 4 gt AVERage COUNtAUTO TYPE iisccscissccteccccsesesctssdsencceseacesssneedeescesseeesessaesdsneesisanderssseedesses i 266 SENSe lt 1 4 AVE RAGS RESE uri dido 266 SENSe lt 1 4 gt 1 AVERage TCONUON E 267 SENSe 1
332. ive OCCurrence Returns the start point of the current pulse i e the time when the signal passes through the medial reference level with rising edge The medial level can be adjusted using the command SENS TRAC MEAS DEF DUR REF Usage Query only SENSe lt 1 4 gt TRACe MEASurement TRANSition POSitive OVERshoot Returns the amount of relative undershooting of the signal at the beginning of a pulse Usage Query only SENSe lt 1 4 gt TRACe MEASurement TRANSition SPERiod Usage Query only SENSe lt 1 4 gt TRACe MEASurement STATe lt state gt Switches on off automatic pulse measurements in the Trace mode If pulse measurement is on the sensor automatically determines the pulse parameters for the currently mea sured trace For pulse measurements also set SENS TRAC MEAS AUTO ON Parameters lt state gt ON OFF RST depending on the sensor SENSe lt 1 4 gt TRACe OFFSet TIME lt time gt Determines the relative position of the trigger event in relation to the beginning of the Trace measurement sequence Parameters lt time gt float_value Range depending on sensor RST depending on sensor Default unit S SENSe lt 1 4 gt TRACe POINts lt points gt Sets the number of desired values per Trace sequence Error messages Sensor not idle The sensor is not in the IDLE state User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 291 R amp S NRP2 Remote Control Commands 6 12 S
333. kets that are dusty or dirty Insert the plug firmly and all the way into the socket provided for this purpose Otherwise sparks that result in fire and or injuries may occur Do not overload any sockets extension cords or connector strips doing so can cause fire or electric shocks For measurements in circuits with voltages Vms gt 30 V suitable measures e g appropriate measuring equipment fuse protection current limiting electrical separation insulation should be taken to avoid any hazards Ensure that the connections with information technology equipment e g PCs or other industrial computers comply with the IEC60950 1 EN60950 1 or IEC61010 1 EN 61010 1 standards that apply in each case Unless expressly permitted never remove the cover or any part of the housing while the product is in operation Doing so will expose circuits and components and can lead to injuries fire or damage to the product If a product is to be permanently installed the connection between the protective conductor terminal on site and the product s protective conductor must be made first before any other connection is made The product may be installed and connected only by a licensed electrician For permanently installed equipment without built in fuses circuit breakers or similar protective devices the supply circuit must be fuse protected in such a way that anyone who has access to the product as well as the product itself is adequately protected
334. l Selects the primary channel for single channel measurement and selects the primary and secondary channel for two channel measurements Function amp Unit Function Prim Channel Sec Channel 4 Trace Cont ow Hot connected Hot connected Unit Aux None v i Fig 4 31 Selection of the primary channel Incident Reflected Selects the channel referenced to the incident power or the reflecting power These parameters appear instead of Prim Sec channel if impedance measurement func tions such as SWR RCoeff and RLoss are selected Measuring power in gates For time gated power measurements the R amp S NRP2 power meter offers two modes e T gate Av e Trace amp Statistics T gate Av In this mode the average power Av within a user definable gate can be measured The time resolution is high and corresponds to the sampling rate of the sensor To configure the measurement 1 Select T gate Av in the Mode dialog box of the Sensor menu 2 Set the timing parameter for the gates 3 Select the gate number for the measurement in the Function amp Unit dialog box of the Measurement menu The average power within the selected gate is indicated User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 101 Instrument Functions Configuring measurements A T gate 1 System A ZA gt 64 Auto A dE E 8 98dBm Y pa a 70 dBm 230 dBm Fig 4 32 Measurement within a gate T gate A
335. l SSTSGCAL arlfbOWerlf AVGIRATohREL atve 217 CONFoure Dl SSTSGCAL art bOWerlf AVGIRtE El ectnon 217 CONFigure lt 1 8 gt SCALar POWer AVG RELative ccccooocccccoccncconncccocononoconcnnonononconononononcnnnnonininnnns 217 CONFigure lt 1 8 gt SCALar POWer l AVG RLOSS ooccccccccncccccnnccoccnnconocononocononononnonnnnnnonannnononnnncnnninnnnnns 217 COhNFoure Dl SSTSGCAL arlfbOWerlf AVGTSUM 217 COhNFoure Dl SSTSGCAL art bOWerll AVGTSUMREL atve 217 CONFigure lt 1 8 gt SCALar POWer AVG SWR ooocccconcncccccnccccccnoccoconococoncnnnnnononcnonononononnnnonnnnnnoncnnnnons 217 DIS Pla EROS E scort 240 A A e E ia moccduaorne eo eamenreeiei pendence 240 DISPlav MESSage TEXT CLEP ii E RERNA AERE ARRERA AREE ARNAR 240 RE SE MESS306 TEAT DA KE 241 hay MES S496 E d 241 DISPlay MESSadel STAT 6 ainia 240 DS Play WIAD OPE A E E o E OE PER OU ECO ATS 241 EIS ER 241 DISPlay WINDOW SELe Cl sra 246 BIER IIe RE 246 DiGblzavf WlNDowtslit AS ANA og AUTO 243 DISPlavEWINDow lt 1 4 gt ANALoG LOWEeT wis ccscecesececsancncccddiacenenencadesscess cveadsccedddacaevantaessscenedidneddidinaddetaniaads 243 DiGblzavf WINDowtslit AS ANA og LOWerbOWer 244 DiGblzavf WINDowtslit AS ANA ogoOWerhalwo 244 DiGblavf WINDowlsl1t AS ANA oo Uber 244 DISPlay WINDow lt 1 4 gt ANALog UPPer PO Wer oooccccccccccccccccccccccccncccnccnononcnnnnnncnnnnnononcnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnanennnos 244 DISPlay WINDow lt 1 4 gt ANALog UPPer
336. layed while the other windows are masked by the selected window However the masked win dows are still open and can be selected in the sequence 1 2 3 4 in the windows menu or by means of the up down cursor keys Full height windows display all relevant parameters The enhanced control functions offered by the Trace amp Statistics mode are available only if the windows are full height For a graphical representation of the various window types and a description of symbols see chapter 3 6 1 Window sizes and types on page 57 and chapter 3 6 2 Special symbols on page 58 Remote command DISPlay WINDow SIZE on page 246 Arrange Reduces the full height windows to their normal size The windows are displayed simul tanously again Remote command DISPlay WINDow SIZE on page 246 4 3 3 3 Selecting the result display mode Dig DEA FAPA Three result display modes are available in the wndows menu The result display mode determines how the measured values are presented Dig D amp A Graph Selects the display mode The parameter settings below the display mode change according to the selected mode see chapter 4 3 3 4 Configuring the result display on page 95 User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 93 Displaying measurement results Dig The digital display mode shows the measured value numerically Addi tional information on the active settings is provided e g signal fre quency sensor mode trigger mode etc
337. ld etc Trig gering and Filt ering gt Select Trace in the control panel opened via the Window gt Graph gt Display panel Trace amp Statistics sensor mode User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 115 R amp S NRP2 Gates Marker Pulse T 5lots Stats 4 5 3 1 Display Config Grid Auto D Trig dee Trig Filt User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 Instrument Functions Displaying traces 4 RUN Trace Display 40 00 dem dB 20 0 deldiv Wiel Natty pl ath l y l i OOo AoT p d Config SEA Au AAW yy dad laun h f een 60 00 dBm dB 2 0 msidio T Plot VEL Avg Trigger Of fset de 20 meye A Average 20 kHz 2 J Internal 1 000 Bay Aay Fig 4 46 Trace display mode Plot channel meas function display type VBW Avg video bandwidth averaging number Trigger trigger slope and source Offset dB level offset to take gain attenuation at the sensor input into account The following sections describe the functions of the control panel and diagram settings in detail Controls in trace display mode Display Selects another view see chapter 4 5 2 Trace window on page 114 Config Grid Opens the subdialog box for configuring the diagram see chapter 4 5 3 2 Trace diagram settings on page 117 Pos Scale Defines if the cursor keys position or scale the wavefo
338. le to set up several links to one logical device pro vided that several servers are running on the network instrument host or a network instrument client is operated by several controllers To prevent problems caused by sev eral controllers simultaneously accessing one device links can be locked In this case access via other links is not possible An exception is an abort via the abort channel which can be executed at any time and also aborts the execution of commands via other Network links Core Channel y HA SS Instrument F 3 Abort Channel R amp S NRP Network Instrument Host Network Instrument Client Controller TASA Link 2 21 Link n NA Link 1 Server Link 1 Link 2 Link n Fig 1 4 Diagram of a VXI11 connection with several links User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 355 R amp S NRP2 A 2 2 A 2 3 Remote control interfaces Ethernet Table 1 4 Communications channels of a VXI11 connection Ges Jee Core All communications between client and server are handled via this channel with the exception of abort and interrupts Abort Since the commands in the core channel are serialized and therefore cannot be interrupted asynchronous abort commands must be handled via a separate independent channel This channel has no other tasks Interrupt Service requests SRQ are signaled via this channel to the network instrument client As this channels is shared by all l
339. lemented they must be checked on a regular basis to ensure that they are safe to use 4 If there is no power switch for disconnecting the product from the AC supply network or if the power switch is not suitable for this purpose use the plug of the connecting cable to disconnect the product from the AC supply network In such cases always ensure that the power plug is easily reachable and accessible at all times For example if the power plug is the disconnecting device the length of the connecting cable must not exceed 3 m Functional or electronic switches are not suitable for providing disconnection from the AC supply network If products without power switches are integrated into racks or systems the disconnecting device must be provided at the system level 5 Never use the product if the power cable is damaged Check the power cables on a regular basis to ensure that they are in proper operating condition By taking appropriate safety measures and carefully laying the power cable ensure that the cable cannot be damaged and that no one can be hurt by for example tripping over the cable or suffering an electric shock 1171 0000 42 07 Page 3 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 Basic Safety Instructions The product may be operated only from TN TT supply networks fuse protected with max 16 A higher fuse only after consulting with the Rohde amp Schwarz group of companies Do not insert the plug into soc
340. length in trace mode Parameters lt trace_mode gt RESolution Takes command SENS lt 1 4 gt AVER COUN AUTO RES into account NSR Takes command SENS lt 1 4 gt AVER COUN AUTO NSR into account SENS lt 1 4 gt AVER COUN AUTO MTIM RST depending on sensor User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 286 R amp S NRP2 Remote Control Commands SENSe Sensor Commands SENSe lt 1 4 gt TRACe AVERage TCONtrol lt terminal_control gt As soon as a new single value is determined the filter window is advanced by one value so that the new value is taken into account by the filter and the oldest value is forgotten SENSe lt 1 4 gt AVERage TCONtrol terminal control then determines in the Trace mode whether a new result will be calculated immediately after a new measured value is available MOVing or only after an entire range of new values is available for the filter REPeat Parameters lt terminal_control gt MOVing REPeat RST REP PRES and SYST PRES MOV SENSe lt 1 4 gt TRACe MEASurement ALGorithm lt algorithm gt Selects the analysis algorithm for detecting the pulse top and the pulse base power of a pulsed signal These two power levels are fundamental for further signal analysis Parameters lt algorithm gt HISTogram Computes the pulse levels by analyzing the histogram of the trace data The pulse top level is taken on the mean value of all points representing the pulse top Similarly the pulse b
341. lifting or moving the product e g with a lift truck to avoid back or other physical injuries Handles on the products are designed exclusively to enable personnel to transport the product It is therefore not permissible to use handles to fasten the product to or on transport equipment such as cranes fork lifts wagons etc The user is responsible for securely fastening the products to or on the means of transport or lifting Observe the safety regulations of the manufacturer of the means of transport or lifting Noncompliance can result in personal injury or material damage If you use the product in a vehicle it is the sole responsibility of the driver to drive the vehicle safely and properly The manufacturer assumes no responsibility for accidents or collisions Never use the product in a moving vehicle if doing so could distract the driver of the vehicle Adequately secure the product in the vehicle to prevent injuries or other damage in the event of an accident 1171 0000 42 07 Page 6 Instrucciones de seguridad elementales Waste disposal Environmental protection 1 Specially marked equipment has a battery or accumulator that must not be disposed of with unsorted municipal waste but must be collected separately lt may only be disposed of at a suitable collection point or via a Rohde amp Schwarz customer service center 2 Waste electrical and electronic equipment must not be disposed of with unsorted municipal waste but must b
342. lly mentally and emotionally fit enough to do so otherwise injuries or material damage may occur It is the responsibility of the employer operator to select suitable personnel for operating the products 1171 0000 42 07 Page 4 Basic Safety Instructions 2 Before you move or transport the product read and observe the section titled Transport 3 As with all industrially manufactured goods the use of substances that induce an allergic reaction allergens such as nickel cannot be generally excluded If you develop an allergic reaction such as a skin rash frequent sneezing red eyes or respiratory difficulties when using a Rohde amp Schwarz product consult a physician immediately to determine the cause and to prevent health problems or stress 4 Before you start processing the product mechanically and or thermally or before you take it apart be sure to read and pay special attention to the section titled Waste disposal Environmental protection item 1 5 Depending on the function certain products such as RF radio equipment can produce an elevated level of electromagnetic radiation Considering that unborn babies require increased protection pregnant women must be protected by appropriate measures Persons with pacemakers may also be exposed to risks from electromagnetic radiation The employer operator must evaluate workplaces where there is a special risk of exposure to radiation and if necessary take measures to avert t
343. lse top and the pulse base power of a pulsed signal From these two power levels the refer ence levels are derived e Histogram Computes the pulse top base power by analyzing the histogram of the trace data The pulse top level is taken on the mean value of all points representing the pulse top Similarly the pulse base is deter mined from the points representing the pulse base Note This algorithm is recommended for analyzing most of the pulse signals e Integration Computes the pulse top power by fitting a rectangle pulse of same energy into the pulse signal as a reference Note This algorithm is recommended for pulse signals with mod ulation or when the pulse energy must be taken into account e g when comparing the measurement result with that of a thermal power sensor o Peak Assigns the pulse peak power to the pulse top level Presets all parameters in the Pulse Measurement Config tab 10 50 90 power related 4 5 7 Timeslot display mode The timeslot structure can be defined and displayed in this mode You can additionally select one timeslot and measure the most important power parameters of the displayed waveform within this timeslot The settings for Trig gering Filt ering Function and Unit are taken from the Trace display mode and cannot be changed User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 130 R amp S NRP2 Instrument Functions Stat s a Displaying traces
344. lt 1 8 gt ARRay POWer AVG RATio RELative FETCh lt 1 8 gt ARRay POWer AVG SWR FETCh lt 1 8 gt ARRay POWer AVG REFLection FETCh lt 1 8 gt ARRay POWer AVG RLOSs lt buffered_size gt lt expected_value gt lt resolution gt lt source_list gt FETCh commands for measurement mode ContAv with buffering FETCh lt 1 8 gt XTIMe POWer FETCh lt 1 8 gt XTIMe POWer RATio lt scope_size gt lt capture_time gt lt source_list gt FETCh commands for measurement mode Trace FETCh lt 1 8 gt STATistics CCDF FETCh lt 1 8 gt STATistics PDF lt statistics size gt lt capture_time gt lt source_list gt FETCh commands for measurement mode Statistics 6 4 8 READ commands This chapter lists all READ commands For a description of the command syntax the calculation functions and the parameter list see chapter 6 4 3 Syntactical Structure of High Level Measurement Commands on page 211 chapter 6 4 5 Calculation func tions High level commands on page 215 and chapter 6 4 4 Parameter list descrip tion on page 212 READ lt 1 8 gt SCALar POWer AVG READ lt 1 8 gt SCALar POWer AVG RELative READ lt 1 8 gt SCALar POWer AVG DIFFerence READ lt 1 8 gt SCALar POWer AVG DIFFerence RELative READ lt 1 8 gt SCALar POWer AVG SUM READ lt 1 8 gt SCALar POWer AVG SUM RELative READ lt 1 8 gt SCALar POWer AVG RATio RE
345. lt window_size gt Sets the window size User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 246 R amp S NRP2 Remote Control Commands DISPlay Parameters lt window_size gt NORMal ZOOMed NORMal The window size is determined automatically and depends on the total number of open windows ZOOMed The selected window DISP WIND SEL is set to maximum size regardless of the the number of visible windows All other open windows are covered RST NORMal DISPlay WINDow lt 1 4 gt STATe lt state gt Opens or closes a window When a window is closed the other windows are automatically expanded so that the free space is utilized Likewise open windows become smaller when a new one Is opened Parameters lt state gt ON OFF RST ON Window 1 OFF Window 2 3 4 DISPlay WINDow lt 1 4 gt TRACe LOWer lt lower_limit gt Sets the lower limit for the power axis in the Trace mode The value range depends on the unit Table 6 13 The value range depends on the unit Unit of measured value Value range 999 999E3 13 010 999 999E3 136 990 Unit DBM W DBUV Parameters lt lower_limit gt float_value RST 120 DB Default unit DBM DISPlay WINDow lt 1 4 gt TRACe UPPer lt upper_limit gt Sets the upper limit for the power axis in the Trace mode Value range See table 6 13 The value range depends on the unit Unit DBM W DBUV User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 247 R amp S NRP2 Remo
346. lues set with SENSe lt 1 4 gt AVERage COUNt are aver aged This reduces the impact of noise and helps to achieve measured values that are more stable Parameters lt state gt ON OFF RST depending on sensor SENSe lt 1 4 gt AVERage TCONtrol lt mode gt As soon as a new single value is determined the filter window is advanced by one value so that the new value is taken into account by the filter and the oldest value is forgotten SENSe lt 1 4 gt AVERage TCONtro1 terminal control then determines whether a new result is calculated immediately after a new measured value is available MOVing or only after an entire range of new values is available for the filter REPeat Note In the MOVi ng mode data from a point of time before the start of the current measurement can influence the measurement result if the data is still in the filter Parameters lt mode gt MOVing REPeat RST REPeat PRES and SYST PRES MOVing SENSe lt 1 4 gt BANDwidth VIDeo lt bandwidth gt SENSe lt 1 4 gt BWIDth VIDeo lt bandwidth gt Sets the video bandwidth for the Trace mode Parameters lt bandwidth gt string Range FULL 5 MHz 1 5 MHz 300 kHz RST depending on sensor SENSe lt 1 4 gt BANDwidth ViDeo LIST SENSe lt 1 4 gt BWIDth ViDeo LIST Provides a list of strings with permissible settings for the SENSe lt 1 4 gt BWIDth VIDeo command Lists are not affected by the
347. lways indicates the logarithmic values independent of the settings for the graph Configuring the statistics display gt Select Stat s Config in the control panel opened via the Window gt Graph gt Dis play gt Stat s gt control panel Trace amp Statistics sensor mode Stat s Config Scale Stat s Config 50 00 dB Power Div 7 000 dB TStart Fig 4 64 Stat s Config Scale tab The Scale tab contains the parameters for setting the axes of the display Max Power Stat s Config Scale Enters the maximum value of the power scale as reference Power div Stat s Config Scale Defines the scaling of the power axis User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 137 R amp S NRP2 Instrument Functions AAA Displaying traces Y Start Stat s Config Scale Enters the start value of the Y axis Depending on the distribution function only a restricted range of value or no entry at all is allowed Y Division Stat s Config Scale Defines the scaling of the Y axis Note Start and division values of the Y axis probability are fixed in logarithmic displays and can not be modified relating to CDF or CCDF functions You can modify the y axis in linear displays CDF CCDF PDF Unit of the CCDF CDF is while the PDF function is dimensionless Stat s Config Marker Stat s Config Scale Marker 4 A Marker 20 000 dEm 4 YT Harker 100 000 2 4 Fig 4 65 Stat s Config Marker tab
348. ly imple mented when a key is pressed Remote command SENSe lt 1 4 gt AVERage COUNt on page 264 Reset Initializes the currently measured averaging filter power value Thus the display can be updated quickly after a change in level particularly in the case of a large averaging num ber Remote command SENSe lt 1 4 gt AVERage RESet on page 266 Auto Once Determines a one off optimal averaging number based on the instantaneously mea sured power value and enter this value in the Avg No field This function is available when autofilter is off Remote command SENSe lt 1 4 gt AVERage COUNt AUTO on page 264 Auto Config Opens the Auto Filter dialog box Auto Filter 0 0001 dB 4 Max Setti Time 4 Fig 4 17 Auto filter dialog box User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 81 R amp S NRP2 Instrument Functions ES Data acquisition and parameters A B C D Auto Config Tabs for selecting the sensor Note In remote control commands select the sensor with the suffix in command SENSe lt 1 4 gt 1e choose suffix 1 for channel A channel 2 for B and so on Mode Auto Config Selects the auto filter mode Normal Selects the Normal autofilter mode Fixed Noise Selects the Fixed Noise autofilter mode Remote command SENSe lt 1 4 gt AVERage COUNt AUTO TYPE on page 266 Ref Timeslot Auto Config Specifies the timeslot from which the
349. male connector is located on the instrument rear The interface enables a controller to operate the R amp S NRP2 by remote control using the SCPI commands of the R amp S NRP2 The commands of the IEC IEEE 488 1 and IEC IEEE 488 2 User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 357 R amp S NRP2 Remote control interfaces A 3 1 A 3 1 1 A 3 1 2 Ethernet interface standards are partly emulated via special software commands The remote control pro tocol for this interface is based on an IEC IEEE draft protocol described below IEC IEEE 1174 draft The IEC IEEE 1174 draft in the current version D2 defines communications via a serial RS 232 C interface which is based on the existing IEC IEEE 488 1 and IEC IEEE 488 2 standards for the IEC IEEE bus interface Additional control sequences initiated by an amp character emulate the IEC IEEE bus functionality Example The special control sequence amp GTL emulates the IEC IEEE bus command GoTo Local All control characters defined in the IEC IEEE 1174 draft are listed in table 1 6 This chapter describes how the control sequences can be used for remote control via RS 232 C or Ethernet The IEC IEEE 1174 draft provides three different operating modes for transmitting the special control sequences These modes can be set via remote control using the following command SYSTem COMMunicate INET MODE 0 1 2 The parameter has the following meanings e 0 no control sequences abbr 1174 0
350. mands STATus Table 6 21 Meaning of bits used in the Standard Event Status Register Operation Complete When the OPC command is received this bit is set if all previous commands have been executed This bit is set in either of the two following cases the controller wants to read data from the device but has not sent a query or it sends new commands to the device before it retrieves existing requested data A frequent cause is a faulty query which cannot be executed Device dependent Error This bit is set if a device dependent error occurs An error message with a number between 300 and 399 or a positive error number denoting the error in greater detail will be entered in the error queue Execution Error This bit is set if the syntax of a received command is correct but the command cannot be executed due to various marginal conditions An error message with a number between 200 and 300 denoting the error in greater detail will be entered in the error queue Command Error This bit is set if an undefined command or a command with incorrect syntax is received An error message with a number between 100 and 200 denoting the error in greater detail will be entered in the error queue User Request This bit is set upon pressing the LOCAL key i e when the device is switched to manual control Power On This bit is set when the device is switched on 6 13 10 Operation Status Register The CONDition register contain
351. manejo de dispositivos e Distintivo de la UE para la eliminaci n por sensibles a la electrost tica ESD separado de dispositivos el ctricos y electr nicos M s informaci n en la secci n Eliminaci n protecci n del medio ambiente punto 2 Advertencia rayo l ser M s informaci n en la secci n Funcionamiento punto 7 Palabras de se al y su significado En la documentaci n del producto se utilizan las siguientes palabras de se al con el fin de advertir contra riesgos y peligros A PELIGRO Indica una situacion de peligro que si no se evita causa lesiones graves o incluso la muerte Indica una situacion de peligro que si no se evita puede causar lesiones graves o incluso la muerte lesiones leves o moderadas Indica informaci n que se considera importante pero no en relaci n con situaciones de peligro p ej avisos sobre posibles da os materiales En la documentaci n del producto se emplea de forma sin nima el t rmino CUIDADO A ATENCI N Indica una situaci n de peligro que si no se evita puede causar Las palabras de se al corresponden a la definici n habitual para aplicaciones civiles en el rea econ mica europea Pueden existir definiciones diferentes a esta definici n en otras reas econ micas o en aplicaciones militares Por eso se deber tener en cuenta que las palabras de se al aqu descritas sean utilizadas siempre solamente en combinaci n con la correspondiente docume
352. me effect as SENSe TGATe OFFSet TIME SENSe SWEep TIME Is implemented in the R amp S NRP2 and has the same effect as SENSe TGATe TIME system Is not implemented in the R amp S NRP2 COMMunicate SERial HELP HEADers LOCal REMOTE RINTerface RWLock Is not implemented in the R amp S NRP2 TRACE DATA Is not implemented in the R amp S NRP2 in this form Data of the trace mode can only be queried via the high level commands FETCh READ MEAS and CALC DATA TRACe UNIT The UNIT node is only globally available in the R amp S NRP2 and affects all measurement results including trace data and the unitless com mand parameters of the commands CALC LIM LOW CALC LIM UPP DISP MET ANAL LOW DISP MET ANAL UPP OUTP REC LIM LOW and OUTP REC LIM UPP TRIGger SEQUence 1 2 The R amp S NRP2 does not recognize the SEQUence header and uses no TRIGger command globally but only on a sensor by sensor basis If TRIGger or SENSe commands are to have a global effect the ALL header must be used instead of the numeric suffix The R amp S NRP2 recognizes the units W DBM and DBUV User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 404 E4418B E4419B command Compatibility information The R amp S NRP2 recognizes the units DB DPCT and O AC Agilent recognizes the keyword AC of some high level commands and SENSe commands CONFigure READ MEASure FETCh SCALar POWer AC RELative DIFFeren
353. measurement EXCL MID OFFS and EXCL MID TIME Example GSM measurement The average power in the fifth GSM slot is to be measured The burst power fails by 50 us and this range is to be excluded from the measurement Sol ution A 50 us Fence is defined The sample values in this interval are not included in the measurement RSI SENS FUNC POW TGAT AVG SENS TGAT SEL 2 select second gate SENS TGAT2Z OFFS 2 328 MS GSM measurement in the fifth GSM slot SENS TGAT2 TIME 527 US length of a GSM burst SENS TGAT2 MID ON activate Fence SENS TGATZ MID OFFS 2 528 MS exclude interval starts 200 us after slot start SENS TGAT2 MID TIME 50 US exclude interval starts 200 us after slot start INIT FETCh User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 391 R amp S NRP2 Programming Measurements Measuring with low level commands Power Trigger event Trigger level S E f y Time i SENS TRAC2 MID TIME SENS TRAC2 MID OFFS TIME SENS TRAC2 OFFS TIME SENS TRAC2 TIME Fig 3 5 Measurement of a GSM slot with Fence Mid Exclude domain C 4 2 4 Level hysteresis and dropout time With internal and external triggering TRIG SOUR INT EXT a trigger event is rec ognized when the level of a trigger signal exceeds a specific value This value is the trigger level and can be set with TRIG LEV With internal triggering the end of the mea surement is recognized when the
354. med in the Window gt Graph gt Dis play gt Trace gt Trace Function dialog box Trace amp Statistics sensor mode Trace Function Trace 1 Trace2 Function Ratio A B ei Prim Channel Sec Channel B_y 4 Eval Average el Eval Average 4 Max Hold Off On Reset Fig 4 49 Trace function User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 119 R amp S NRP2 Instrument Functions AAA SSE Displaying traces Trace 1 2 Selects the trace waveform to be configured Up to two traces can be selected This is also true if only one measurement channel sensor is present In this case one trace for example can represent the average enve lope power and the other trace the peak or random power available for the R amp S NRP Z8x wideband sensors only Function Selects the measurement function for the Trace mode Only Single and Ratio func tions are available for trace measurements Refer to Function on page 100 for descrip tion Note It is essential that the sensors of both channels support trace measurement if the Ratio function is selected Prim Sec Channel Selects the primary and secondary channel Eval Select the type of display Since each display point pixel represents a time interval and thus usually many samples the R amp S NRP Z8x wideband power sensors allow you to select what is to be displayed Average Average power value resulting in a flicker free display and smooth trace Note Average i
355. menu Re initializing non volatile memory By confirmation the non volatile memory is re initialized completely Sample error message Activates that an error message is displayed if a sample error occurs 8 3 2 Service Menu The R amp S NRP2 offer various service functions to perform system tests that are not part of the selftest to install deinstall options or to configure the reference signal Options HRP2 Boot Menu Service Menu Display Test Key Test Buzzer Test Power Ref Calibration Fig 8 7 Service menu Options Displays all options the instrument is equipped with Bootmenu Aetion 1146 98808 BA deinstall Check Source HRP BEZ 1146 8801 4008 Sensor Input BM 1146 2 6088 408 3rd and 4th Sensor Input RP B64 HGGG BEBE OG Lab Device Fig 8 8 Service menu Installed options In this window you can activate install or deactivate options uninstall In addition the network connection can be established Display Test Checks whether inputs via the softkeys are correctly indicated A O WC EA ECH Hhen finished Press ESC Fig 8 9 Service menu Display test Press some of the numbers shown on the right to check the correct display To exit press the Exit softkey or the ESC key Key Test Tests all hardkeys of the R amp S NRP2 located at its front panel gt ky1L 2 kyzL 5ky3L 5ky4L 5kuy gt 3L Skyub6 L Ke terminates Skylk A H 5ky3KR 5ky4R
356. mits see data sheet documentation the following safety instructions Using the product requires technical skills and in some cases a basic knowledge of English It is therefore essential that only skilled and specialized staff or thoroughly trained personnel with the required skills be allowed to use the product If personal safety gear is required for using Rohde amp Schwarz products this will be indicated at the appropriate place in the product documentation Keep the basic safety instructions and the product documentation in a safe place and pass them on to the subsequent users Observing the safety instructions will help prevent personal injury or damage of any kind caused by dangerous situations Therefore carefully read through and adhere to the following safety instructions before and when using the product It is also absolutely essential to observe the additional safety instructions on personal safety for example that appear in relevant parts of the product documentation In these safety instructions the word product refers to all merchandise sold and distributed by the Rohde amp Schwarz group of companies including instruments systems and all accessories For product specific information see the data sheet and the product documentation Safety labels on products The following safety labels are used on products to warn against risks and dangers Direct current DC 1171 0000 42 07 Page 1 Basic Safety Instructions
357. mmand contains invalid string data 158 String data not allowed The command contains a valid string data element at a position where it is not allowed 161 Invalid block data The command contains invalid block data User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 339 R amp S NRP2 Error Messages and Troubleshooting Error code Error text returned upon queue query Explanations 168 Block data not allowed The command contains a legal block data element at a point where it is not allowed SCPI Specific Error Messages 171 Invalid expression The command contains an invalid mathematical expression data element 178 Expression data not allowed The command contains mathematical expression data at a point where they are not allowed 8 2 3 Execution Error Execution errors cause bit 4 in the ESR register to be set Error code Error text returned upon queue query Explanations 200 Execution error An error occurred upon command execution 203 Command protected An attempt was made to execute a protected command 210 Trigger error Error on triggering the device 211 Trigger ignored A TRG or a triggering signal was ignored 213 Init ignored A request for a measurement initialization was ignored as another measurement was already in progress 2 FETCh was called but no valid result was available and the trigger system of the sensor is IDLE FETCh blocks the entry so that a measurement cannot be started with INI
358. mode offers a double amp mechanism An amp character that does not initiate any control sequence is transmitted twice The direction of the transmission device gt controller controller gt device is irrelevant When received double amp amp characters have to be split in half to yield single amp characters The state changes local remote are achieved by receiving characters and by means of the special control sequences Summary The state change from local gt remote is achieved by receiving data and through special control characters The state change from remote gt local is achieved by clearing down the connection peer sockets and through special control characters Simultaneous operation of the measuring instrument via local in the remote state can be achieved by using newly defined control characters amp GTM GoTo Mixed A 3 1 3 The IEC IEEE 1174 2 mode The IEC IEEE 1174 2 mode differs from the 1174 1 mode depending on where the special control sequences are permitted in the data stream The special control sequences are only permitted outside block data and string data The remote gt local state changes are controlled by means of control sequences as set forth in the IEC IEEE 1174 1 mode The state changes are triggered by the reception of characters and by special control sequences Summary The state change from local gt remote is achieved by receiving data and through special control cha
359. mote Control Commands STATus SERVice lt 1 4 gt RCOunt lt nr1 gt SERVice lt 1 4 gt RESult lt nr1 gt Allows simulated measured values to be specified for test purposes SERV RCO specifies the number of SERV RES pairs to follow The first SERV RES command specifies the measured value in watts the second SERV RES command determines how often the measured value should be obtained The measurement sequences defined in this way are repeated until the sensor is disconnected from the R amp S NRP2 and reconnected Parameters lt nr1 gt int_value RST none The simulation mode is not exited in the case of RST To again obtain real measured values SERV RCO 0 must be set Example The command sequence SERV2 RCO 2 SERV2 RES 3 SERV2 RES 2 SERV2 RES 4 SERV2 RES 1 makes sensor 2 return the measured values 3 W 3W 4 W 3 W 3W 4W from now on SERVice lt 1 4 gt SERRors lt state gt The sensors signal an error to the R amp S NRP2 if samples are lost while a signal is sampled sampling as may be the case with high sampling rates In such a case the measure ment is less accurate Since this error is signaled as an SCPI error smooth operation of a remote control program may be disrupted For this reason sampling errors can be suppressed by means of SERVice lt 1 4 gt SERRors OFF Parameters lt state gt ON OFF RST The R amp S NRP2 BIOS setting is adopted SERVice lt 1 4 gt UNLock lt p
360. mp S NRP Z8x series Instead all power sensors are supported that can be operated in Trace mode Start Length of Fence Sets the start time and length of the fence The start time refers to the start of the timeslot Remote command SENSe lt 1 4 gt POWer TSLot BXCLude MID OFFSet TIME on page 277 SENSe lt 1 4 gt POWer TSLot EXCLude MID TIME on page 277 4 5 8 Statistics display mode The R amp S NRP Z8x wideband power sensors allow you to statistically analyze the enve lope power as CCDF CDF or PDF The measurement either covers one of the four gates or if not synchronized with the signal a user selectable time interval The measurement is repeated until the desired number of samples is attained You can set the video band width in the Trace display mode to reduce noise Two traces can be indicated in the same measurement window The second trace either from a second sensor or from an internal AWGN Additional White Gaussian Noise source can be used as reference trace For CCDF and CDF the graphical display can be supplemented by a tabular indication of the statistic values User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 134 R amp S NRP2 Instrument Functions Trace Gates Marker Pulse T Slots 4 5 8 1 Display Displaying traces gt Select Stat s in the control panel opened via the Window gt Graph gt Display dialog box Trace amp Statistics sensor mode Af RU s
361. n Dig or D amp A window mode are available for selec tion See chapter 4 3 3 3 Selecting the result display mode on page 93 for the setting the display mode Remote command OUTPut RECorder lt 1 2 gt FEED on page 255 User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 155 R amp S NRP2 Instrument Functions 4 7 2 3 system settings 0 V Equivalent Analog Analog Out Mode Entry of the measurement value that corresponds to the output voltage of 0 V Remote command OUTPut RECorder lt 1 2 gt LIMit LOWer on page 256 OUTPut RECorder lt 1 2 gt LIMit LOWer POWer on page 256 OUTPut RECorder lt 1 2 gt LIMit LOWer RATio on page 256 3 V Equivalent Analog Analog Out Mode Entry of the measurement value that corresponds to the output voltage of 3 V Remote command OUTPut RECorder lt 1 2 gt LIMit UPPer on page 257 OUTPut RECorder lt 1 2 gt LIMit UPPer POWer on page 257 OUTPut RECorder lt 1 2 gt LIMit UPPer RATio on page 257 Trigger In Mode The connector is used as input An external trigger signal can be applied Node Analog Out Fig 4 88 I O 2 mode Trigger In Use the external trigger signal e g to start the measurement in all sensors simultane ously Provided the R amp S NRP2 is configured accordingly it passes the signal directly through to the sensors Refer to chapter 4 2 6 Trigger settings on page 85 for infor mation on the respective settings Remote command The
362. n is con text sensitive and is indicated by screen labeling For more information on the softkeys see also chapter 2 2 Brief introduction to the operation on page 24 chapter 3 5 Dialog boxes and their controls on page 53 and chapter 3 4 Menu handling on page 53 Hardkeys Hardkeys cause the R amp S NRP2 to return to a definite instrument state provide access to the main settings and activate functions Hardkeys are always available for use For further information on using the hardkeys see also chapter 2 2 Brief introduction to the operation on page 24 and especially on the setup keys PRE SET FREQ and ZERO see chapter 4 1 Main Settings on page 61 al MENU e as the lt key i e Enter key it is used to confirm entries in text fields and dialog boxes and to confirm selections in the drop down lists e asthe MENU key it is used to fold out and fold back the menus next to the softkeys User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 12 R amp S NRP2 DEL 1TRIG ESC LOCAL H 1 5 2 3 Putting into Operation Front panel tour The function of the key is determined according to context in other words the ENTER or MENU function is always selected automatically for the operator by the instru ment DEL 1 TRIG e the DEL key is used to delete numbers or text in a field so that a completely new entry can be made e asthe 1 TRIG key it enables and triggers single shot measurements in the trace mode The
363. n remote control commands select the sensor with the suffix in command SENSe lt 1 4 gt Le choose suffix 1 for channel A channel 2 for B and so on Sensor info The sensor info dialog shows the information on the selected sensor Remote command SYSTem SENSor lt 1 4 gt INFO on page 324 4 7 4 2 Information on the R amp S NRP2 Select System Info in the System menu System Info Firmware Main Program 07 00 042 Bootloader 07 02 Keybd Ctrl 03 27 Options B1 62 65 Remote I O Power Ref Off On Sensor System Info Info Hardware Serial Na 9299999 Stock No 1144 1374 02 MAC Address 00 90 b8 09 00 01 RAM 64 MB Misc Test 4 Fig 4 90 System info dialog System info The system info dialog displays information concerning hardware and firmware of your R amp S NRP2 Main program Firmware version Bootloader Version of the bootloader User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 158 R amp S NRP2 Instrument Functions 4 7 5 Remote I O Power Ref Off On Sensor System Info Info Misc Test 4 System settings Keybd Ctrl Version of the keyboard controller software Short name of the installed options AI O Stock No R amp S material number MAC Address Ethernet hardware address stored data non volatile O Remote command SYSTem INFO on page 320 Miscellaneous The Misc dialog box covers useful parameters f
364. n t affect the measurement itself but tailors the mea surement result in such a way that it is convenient for the user Trace amp Statistics mode and Graph results window If the primary channel is operating in the Trace amp Statistics mode and the results window is set to Graph the envelope power of this channel is automatically shown as a function of time or in its distribution and distribution density function CCDF CDF PDF In this case it is not possible to select another measurement function Function The list of functions itemizes all the measurement functions provided by the R amp S NRP2 Any of the four channels can be assigned primary or secondary channel The available units depend on the selected function see tables 4 3 4 4 4 5 108 For example in trace mode only Single A and Ratio A B are available and in Statistics mode only one channel is available which corresponds to Single A Single A Power in the primary channel Ratio A B Ratio of the power in the primary channel to the power in the secondary channel SWR A B Standing wave ratio RCoeff A B Reflection coefficient RLoss A B Return loss Diff A B Power difference between the primary and secondary channel Sum A B Sum of power in primary and secondary channel User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 100 R amp S NRP2 4 4 3 2 Instrument Functions Configuring measurements Prim Sec Channe
365. n this interval the data for the statistics is collected SENS STAT MID TIME determines the length of the interval to be blanked out see also SENSe lt 1 4 gt POWer TGATe lt 1 4 gt EXCLude MID TIME on page 275 User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 280 R amp S NRP2 Remote Control Commands SENSe Sensor Commands Parameters lt time_interval gt float_value Range depending on sensor RST depending on sensor Default unit S SENSe lt 1 4 gt STATistics PEAK Returns the peak power value calculated during a statistics measurement CCDF PDF Usage Query only SENSe lt 1 4 gt STATistics OFFSet TIME lt time_interval gt Determines together with the SENS STAT TIME command the time interval in which the power for the statistical evaluation is measured SENS STAT OFFS determines the start of the interval relative to the possibly delayed trigger time see also SENSe lt 1 4 gt POWer TGATe lt 1 4 gt OFFSet TIME on page 275 Parameters lt time_interval gt float_value Range depending on sensor RST depending on sensor Default unit S SENSe lt 1 4 gt STATistics SAMPles MINimum lt minimum gt Determines the minimum number of samples to be included in the statistics For this purpose the filter length which can only be set in powers of 2 is set such that the fol lowing inequality applies gt N MinSamples mpw N dt In this inequality Ng is
366. nal bursts e g NADC With unmodulated pulses as in this case it should be set to 0 Windows Measurement File System Fig 2 39 Burst av result window For a detailed description of burst av power measurement see chapter 4 2 1 3 Meas uring the average power of burst signals on page 68 The power of burst can be measured also by means of timegates see chapter 4 2 1 5 Measuring the average power in gates on page 71 and chapter 4 5 4 Gates display mode on page 120 In contrast to the burst mode which automatically detects the burst end the length and position of the gate over time must be exactly defined Measuring average burst power Burst Av mode R amp S NRP2 3 3 1 O 3 2 Manual Operation Keys Manual Operation This chapter describes the controls displays etc the screen layout and how to operate the R amp S NRP2 Keys Keys on the front panel of the meter are used to manually operate the instrument There are several groups of keys each group having a different function For more information on keys According to their functionality keys are described in several sections of the R amp S NRP2 documentation See e Front panel keys hard soft and cursor page 12 for information on the keys located at the front panel e Brief introduction to the operation key handling page 24 providing a brief introduc tion on how to operate e Instrument functions Ma
367. nd should be repeated Sensor C please zero The zero correction for sensor C is no longer correct and should be repeated Sensor D please zero The zero correction for sensor D is no longer correct and should be repeated Bit 15 will never be used The sensor power bit is set when error 230 Data corrupt or stale or 231 Data ques tionable occurs in the respective sensor 6 13 18 Questionable Window Status Register The CONDition register contains information as to whether the displayed data or the power calculated by the calculate blocks is questionable The Questionable Window Status Register can be read by the following commands STATus QUEStionable WINDow SUMMary CONDition STATus QUEStionable WINDow SUMMary EVENt Table 6 30 Meaning of bits used in the Questionable Window Status Register Window 1 Power The measured values returned by Calculate block 1 are corrupt Window 2 Power The measured values returned by Calculate block 2 are corrupt User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 312 R amp S NRP2 Remote Control Commands STATus Window 3 Power The measured values returned by Calculate block 3 are corrupt Window 4 Power The measured values returned by Calculate block 4 are corrupt Window 5 Power The measured values returned by Calculate block 5 are corrupt Window 6 Power The measured values returned by Calculate block 6 are corrupt Window 7 Power The measured value
368. nd system administrative device settings can be made and queried This includes e list of error messages 316 R amp S NRP2 Remote Control Commands FAA AAA AAA SYSTem e JEC IEEE bus address e resetting the R amp S NRP2 e setting the date and time e audible signals e version numbers of hardware and software e setting the system speed SY PSHE BEE Per TE EE 317 SYSTem BEEPer Leg ue a saccadic ees dcc craze easeatinecedensdet span iatleaadeuuandeadeptelewediacdaacuds 318 A TAT KEY ee at EE 318 Aci E LEE 318 SY STem BEEPer TIME ii ais 318 SYSTem COMMunicate GPIBSELF ADDRESS cocino a 318 Sy o Tem COMMUNICATE INE T E 319 SYSTem COMMunicate INET SELF ADDRESS occococcoconcocononconenconencononconencononennenonancanos 319 GvGfem COMMuntcateINETTSELEtGATEwav ADDheses 319 GvGfem COMMuntcatelNETTSELFtSUDhNetmoask ADDess 320 EAR Rn RE 320 o ne 320 AE A AAA 320 e A e PE GE E 320 NH e e O O eee eee 321 SS TemERRorExTended STATS ocn id 322 A EEN 322 A gas otsacs eros bce einna cies EE Eei ETARE AEE LEENE 323 AE E WEE 323 AE ee 323 EA R A een ecient trates e e AN aS 323 A Se ENEE 324 SYSTem SENSor lt 1 4 gt INFO ccccecceccesecesceccesccacceccesecaecacceceeaecarsarceaeseeseeesestesereereesess 324 SS Ti Ee 1 et Oe dia 324 ovo raw e RE Ol oa ot 324 Sw tem SENSorchil As TEST 324 Be e OE A 324 YS PSII PANGS ICA ee NEE 325 YO Si TANdard PRESO 325 57 TENES LAN RTE 325 Gv Gfem GTANdard TbRlGoer GOUbce 325 A E
369. ndamentals Switchover to Remote Control REMOTE GPIB IEC IEEE bus In order to remote control the R amp S NRP2 via the GPIB bus a controller with the respective bus interface and the bus cable is required USB The R amp S NRP2 automatically recognizes a controller connected to the USB1 1 interface Ethernet VXI11 Controlling the R amp S NRP2 via the Ethernet interface requires a computer with network card and LAN cables to connect the computer and the R amp S NRP2 controller with the Ethernet 5 3 Switchover to Remote Control REMOTE It is assumed that a link has been established between the controller and the R amp S NRP2 has been correctly configured After power up the R amp S NRP2 is always in manual control mode LOCAL The R amp S NRP2 switches to remote control irrespective of the selected interface as soon as it receives a SCPI command All settings are maintained when the device switches to remote mode except for the setting listed in table 5 1 5 4 Return to Manual Operation LOCAL In the remote mode all front panel controls are disabled except for the ESC LOCAL key and the topmost softkey The softkey used to open the window with the SCPI error queue The device remains in remote mode until it is switched back to manual control either by using the front panel ESC LOCAL or with the remote control command GTL case return to manual operation is only possible by remote control or by switching the R amp S NRP
370. ndard IEEE 488 2 which stipulates that TRG or GET can also be used to perform complete measurements This includes the generation of an answer the measurement result In the R amp S NRP2 TRG does not have this meaning TRG only executes a trigger event and thus only causes the status transitions from WAIT FOR TRG to MEASURING TRG delivers no measurement result and has no effect if TRIG SOUR is not set to BUS or if the instrument is not in the state WAIT FOR TRG The latter situation applies for example if the R amp S NRP2 is IDLE i e INIT CONT ON is not set nor was INIT executed Delay Holdoff Normally the measurement immediately starts after the trigger event has been executed This may not be desirable if the measurement is to be started before or after the trigger point The start of the measurement with reference to the trigger point can be offset using the TRIG DEL command A negative sign means that the measurement begins before the trigger point This is possible because the sensors store sampling values for a while and can use past values when the measurement is started The command is also used when overshoots are to be ignored at the beginning of a power pulse Example Rol TRIG SOUR INT triggering in response to a Signal edge User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 389 R amp S NRP2 Programming Measurements C 4 2 3 Measuring with low level commands TRIG DEL 50 US starts measurement 50 us after the trigger eve
371. nding on sensor RST depending on sensor SENSe lt 1 4 gt AVERage COUNt AUTO SLOT lt slot gt Sets a timeslot whose measured value is used to automatically determine the filter length Parameters lt slot gt int_value Range depending on sensor RST depending on sensor SENSe lt 1 4 gt AVERage COUNt AUTO NSRatio lt nsratio gt Indicates the maximum noise ratio in the measurement result Achieving the same result by filter length setting is attempted only if SENS lt 1 4 gt AVER COUN AUTO ON and SENS lt 1 4 gt AVER COUN AUTO TYPE NSR are set Unit DB PCT Parameters lt nsratio gt float_value Range depending on sensor RST depending on sensor Default unit DB SENSe lt 1 4 gt AVERage COUNt AUTO TYPE lt mode gt Selects a method by which the automatic filter length switchover can operate Parameters lt mode gt RESolution takes setting SENS lt 1 4 gt AVER COUN AUTO RES into account NSR takes setting SENS lt 1 4 gt AVER COUN AUTO NSR into account RST depending on sensor SENSe lt 1 4 gt AVERage RESet Initializes the digital filter by deleting the stored measured values Usage Event User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 266 R amp S NRP2 Remote Control Commands SENSe Sensor Commands SENSe lt 1 4 gt AVERage STATe lt state gt Activates or deactivates the filter function of a sensor If the filter is switched on the individual measured va
372. nding on the configuration of the transition register the EVENt reg ister indicates whether a sensor initialization was started or completed since the last readout of this register This status is assumed by a sensor if one of the following conditions is met e the supply voltage is switched on power up e the sensor was just connected e areset was performed RST or SYSTem PRESet The Operation Sense Status Register can be read by the following commands STATus OPERation SENSe SUMMary CONDition STATus OPERation SENSe SUMMary EVENt Table 6 26 Meaning of bits used in the Operation Sense Status Register Sensor A initializing Sensor A is being initialized Sensor B initializing Sensor B is being initialized Sensor C initializing Sensor C is being initialized Sensor D initializing Sensor D is being initialized Not used Bit 15 will never be used User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 309 R amp S NRP2 Remote Control Commands STATus 6 13 15 Operation Lower Limit Fail Status Register The CONDition register contains information as to whether a displayed value is currently below a configured lower limit and the EVENt register indicates whether a measured value dropped below a limit value since the last readout of the Operation Lower Limit Fail Status Register Details of the behavior are defined by the transition register The limit value can be set with the command CALC LIM LOW DATA lt float
373. ne trigger event at a time is executed To enable trig gering again press the DEL 1TRIG key The symbol RG appears in the display see chapter 4 2 7 Trigger sequence control on page 89 Normal Continuous triggering with regular trigger events Auto Trace amp Statistics mode only This setting automatically starts a mea surement if no trigger event has occurred after 300 ms Remote command INITiate ALL CONTinuous on page 327 TRIGger ALL ATRigger STATe on page 329 Source Selects the trigger source for the selected sensor The measured internal signal Inter nal or an external signal is available for triggering The external trigger signal is either input at the TRIG IN OUT2 connector at the rear of the instrument External or it is supplied by another power sensor which must be configured as a trigger master Int Master Note In addition to using an internal or external trigger source a trigger event can be forced using the DEL 1TRIG hardkey see chapter 4 2 7 Trigger sequence control on page 89 Internal The trigger event for the selected sensor is derived from the measured signal User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 86 R amp S NRP2 Instrument Functions EE Data acquisition and parameters External The trigger event for the selected sensor is derived from the trigger bus The trigger signal on the trigger bus is either input at the TRIG IN OUT2 connector at the rear of the instrument or it i
374. neTbRAhsituon H terence 288 IGENZGe TtL AslTRACeMEAGurenment DE EineTbRAhsituon LR terence 288 SENSe lt 1 4 gt TRACe MEASurement OFFSet TIME ccceccececsecececeeseeeseeaesesaeeusesenes 288 SENSe lt 1 4 gt TRACe MEASurement POWer AVG cccccececcecececeueecesaueuseeaeeueeeuuaveeeuees 289 SENSe lt 1 4 gt TRACe MEASurement POWer MAX cccceceececeeseeceseeceentceteeteceusaeeesanes 289 SENSe lt 1 4 gt TRACe MEASurement POWer MIN ccccccsceccececeseusecesaueeeeseveuseeeveueuees 289 IGENZGe TtL AslTRACeMEAGurementPOWer PU GeBAGE 289 SENSe lt 1 4 gt TRACe MEASurement POWer PULSe TOP PR oooniccoconcncnnnnonononencninnononanon 289 SENSe lt 1 4 gt TRACe MEASurement PULSe DCOY lei 289 IGENZGe TtL AslTRACeMEAGurement PU Ge DUbRaton 289 SENSe lt 1 4 gt TRACe MEASurement PULSe PERIi0d cccccceceseeceseeceeeuseeceueuseueusauees 289 IGENZGe TtL AslTRACeMEAGurement PU Ge GEbaratond 290 SENSe lt 1 4 gt TRACe MEASurement TIME 290 SENSe lt 1 4 gt TRACe MEASurement TRANSition ESAMpling AUTO STATe 05 290 IGENZGe TtL AslTRACeMEAGurement TRANZGmtonNEGattve DURatton 290 SENSe lt 1 4 gt TRACe MEASurement TRANSition NEGative OCCurrence ccccseeees 290 SENSe lt 1 4 gt TRACe MEASurement TRANSition NEGative OVERShoot cceesseeees 290 SENSe lt 1 4 gt TRACe MEASurement TRANSition POSitive DURation cccccces scenes 290
375. ng a Controller to the Base Unit on page 170 If the R amp S NRP2 is to be integrated into a larger network contact your network admin istrator regarding the data to be set User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 149 R amp S NRP2 Instrument Functions 4 7 2 system settings Remote Interfaces USB IEEE Mode IP Address Manual 0 0 0 0 IP Config PortNo Command Set R amp SNRP2 ei Fig 4 79 Remote Interface dialog box Ethernet IEEE Mode Selects the level of standardization of the IEEE bus interface The R amp S NRP2 supports all versions of IEEE 488 0 1 and 2 IP Address Manual DHCP Shows the IP address and indicates whether it is assigned manually or automatically Set the address in the IP Config dialog box IP Config Opens the subdialog for configuring the IP address see IP Address Manual DHCP on page 148 PortNo Inserts the port number configured for remote control Command Set Selects the instrument type for emulation see Command Set on page 146 Setting the analog outputs and the trigger input There are two multifunction BNC connectors at the rear of the R amp S NRP2 TRIG IN OUT2 and OUT1 TRIG OUT They can be used as either trigger input or trigger output or as analog output If used as analog output they either output a signal that is proportional to the measured value or a TTL signal for threshold monioring The functions of these connectors are specified in
376. ng on sensor RST depending on sensor Default unit DB SENSe lt 1 4 gt POWer AVG SMOothing STATe lt state gt Activates deactivates digital lowpass filtering of the sampled video signal The problem of instable display values due to a modulation of a test signal described under SENS lt 1 4 gt SAMP can also be eliminated by lowpass filtering of the video signal The lowpass filter eliminates the variations of the display even in case of unperi odic modulation and does not require any other setting If modulation is periodic setting the aperture time is the better method since it allows shorter measurement times Parameters lt state gt ON OFF RST depending on sensor User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 273 R amp S NRP2 Remote Control Commands SENSe Sensor Commands SENSe lt 1 4 gt POWer BURSt DTOLerance lt tolerance gt The end of a burst power pulse is recognized when the signal level drops below the trigger level Especially with modulated signals this may also happen for a short time within a burst To prevent the supposed end of the burst from being recognized too early or incorrectly at these positions a time interval can be defined via SENS lt 1 4 gt BURS DTOL drop out tolerance in which the pulse end is only recog nized if the signal level no longer exceeds the trigger level This is shown in the figure below The drop out time i e the time in which the signal remains below the t
377. ng the output unit for measured values on page 383 Selecting a measurement mode Other MEAS commands are available for measurements to be performed in a mode other than the ContAv mode The short form of these commands is obtained by adding a keyword for the measurement mode to keyword MEAS Timeslot measurement MEAS TSLot lt tslot width gt lt no slots gt lt start exclude gt lt stop exclude gt BurstAv measurement MEAS BURSL lt atol erance start exclude gt stop exelude gt User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 381 R8SO NRP2 Programming Measurements Ee EE Measuring with high level commands Trace measurement MEAStXTIMe Ssc pe Size Capture Cime gt Measurement in the ContAv mode with data buffering MEAS ARRay lt UsSlou WLALA gt lt n Slots r Stare exclude gt lt stop exclude gt In the Timeslot mode the trigger source is set to EXTernal In the BurstAv mode it is not modified but ignored Triggering in response to the signal is performed as if TRIGger SOURce INTernal were set These commands have the specified parameters whose meanings are explained in the operating manual In addition parameters DEF lt resolution gt lt source list gt can be optionally specified as for the MEAS command Example MEAS TSLo ot 577 48 8 18 us 18 us A timeslot measurement of a GSM signal is performed 8 timeslots with a length of 577 us each 18 us at the beginning and the end
378. nncnononncnnnnnnnnnnccnnnos 275 SENSe lt 1 4 gt POWer TGATe EXCLude MIDESTAT oooccccoccnccccccnccccncccccnoconcnonononoconcncnonnnonanononononnns 275 SENSe lt 1 4 gt POWer TSLOt COUNTL ooocccccoccncccoconcccccnncconcnnnonoconononconononnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnoncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonaneninos 277 IGENGe DL AzUPOWert TS orlAVGrWIDTb 278 SENSe lt 1 4 gt POWer TSLot EXCLude MID OFFSet TIME o oooccccoccnconccnncccncconcconoconononnnnnoconcnncnnnos 277 IGENGe DL AzUbPOWert So EsvCLuderMlD TIME 277 IGENGe DL AzUbPOWert So EsvCLuderMiDtGSTATel 277 IGENGe DL A UrPOWerlt AVGIAbtHture 272 IGENGe DL AzUbPOWerltAVGIRBUFterGLZt 272 SENSe lt 1 4 gt POWer AVG BUFFernSTA Te cocooooccccoconccccocococoncncoccncncnonocnnonnncnnnccnonncncnonnnocnnnncnconanenenas 272 SENSe lt 1 4 gt POWer AVG RANGE cccccceccccssececcceseecsseeeesseeeeccaecessceeeeessaeeccaseescoseessaseessaseessees 273 SENSe lt 1 4 gt JEPOWer FAV G RANGE AU TO E 273 IGENGe DL AS UPOWerlf AVGIhRANGeCEVel 273 IGENGe DL A UPOWerlt AVGlGMOotbungGiAale 273 User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 417 R amp S NRP2 Index A e ee o E En 84 CONTO Sd suse pda 116 O V Equivalent Analog ooccooccocccnnconcccnconononcnnos 152 156 Config PUSO ici acicate clear ian nE cir ena 127 T TOS EE 58 o 164 3 V Equivalent Analog ooccooccoccoccconcccnconanonconos 152 156 Cont inuous statistics display oooo
379. nnnnonnnnronnnnrnnnnrrnnnnrrnnnnrrnnnrrnnnnrrnanrnnnans 140 ET System En de S assise E aa ei ae aTe 144 4 8 Messages and alar MSc 164 5 Remote Control FundamentalS ooncconncccnnncccncncocnconancnnnnnnenanrnnaaronnns 169 5 1 Differences between Remote Control and Manual Contro l cccomoocrcoonoconnno 169 5 2 Connecting a Controller to the Base UNit occoonncccnnniccnncicocncoccnnononnnnonnnronannnnnannnnas 170 5 3 Switchover to Remote Control REMOTE occcocncccncccconccccncocononoconnnrnonnnronannrnnaanonas 172 5 4 Return to Manual Operation LOCAD ooncconnnconnnccccncicccnccocoroccnnonnanconanronnnnrnnanrenaaronas 172 5 5 Automatic Settings when Switching between Local and Remote o comoo 172 5 6 Communication on Data LiN S ccoonccconnncconnncononnnenenarenonancnnannronanarenanarennnarennanannnas 173 5 7 Structure and Syntax of device dependent Messages ccooccccoccccocncoonnnconanronanronas 175 5 8 Device Model and Command ProcesSinNQ ooccconcnccccnnncncncnoncnonnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnronannrnnnanenas 182 5 9 Automatic Settings for Manual Selection of a Measurement Mode 184 5 10 Correspondence between Remote Control and Manual Control 186 6 Remote Control COMMANdOS occonncccnconccnccnconaconancnnncnnnnrennaronarennanonas 193 0 1 o A AP P P 5 Eae 193 6 2 Common Commands to IEEE 488 2 ooonncconnccconnciconccenonocenonnrononarennnnnnnnannren
380. non nn nono cnn nn nn nn nr rnr nr 128 off ime 128 SS 4 910 E AE 128 EE EE 129 rise time oo e ee ceececececeececececeeeeeeeeeeesevaeeeeeeeeevaeaeneeeeenes 128 start time si n din EAR snteisonceecsneedanadenanbeness 128 SO o e AE Ee 128 width 128 Pulse display mode cc ccccccseeceececsseeesseseeesseaseeesanes 126 Putting into operation le T unpacking the meter NENNEN 8 Q EE ee 179 R Ratio of peak power to average power gate 103 Raw socket COMMUNICATION o oococcccccncnccncnnnnonononaninann 358 Rear panel Agen 15 Recall standard 143 A 111 Ref Ee irse 117 Reference power pulse cocccccooonnccnccccccnooncnnnnnnnnnnoos 129 Reference Value oococccccccnconcnconcncnnnconononconcnconannoninnnnnnns 111 Reflection Coefficient 84 Ref Timeslot cc ccceeccececceceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeaeeaeeneaeeeeeneaes 82 Related to pulse oooccccconccccconcnoccnonacononnncnnnonrononnnons 129 Relative eebe Eeer 111 Remote control ococcncncnconcncoconcncononccnnnnnnnncnrnnonnnnnnona ns 193 sundamentals 169 Remote control interfaces ooooccccccccccccnccnnccnananinaninos 351 Remote Enable o cocos trees 352 REN EE 352 Report sensor Selftest ooocccccnccnccconnnnconcnncnonnncnnnos 161 O eee ne nee Seen ene aan reese ere eee ere ete 163 Requirements cccccecccesecceeeceee cceueeceeeseueesaeecseesaeeesaes 23 Reset EE 81 Reset values cc
381. nsmitted Parameters lt table_name gt string RST Settings are not changed in case of RST SENSe lt 1 4 gt CORRection FDOTable STATe lt state gt Activates and deactivates the current frequency dependent offset table The current table is selected with the SENSe lt 1 4 gt CORRection FDOTable SELect com mand Only one table can be active at a time Parameters lt state gt ON OFF RST OFF SENSe lt 1 4 gt CORRection SPDevice SELect lt NR1 gt Several S parameter tables can be stored in a sensor User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 269 R amp S NRP2 Remote Control Commands SENSe Sensor Commands SENSe lt 1 4 gt CORRection SPDevice SELect selects one of these tables The SENSe lt 1 4 gt CORRection SPDevice STATe ON command activates measured value correction Parameters lt NR1 gt int_value RST depending on sensor SENSe lt 1 4 gt CORRection SPDevice STATe lt state gt Instructs the sensor to perform a measured value correction by means of one of the stored S parameter tables S parameter device Parameters lt state gt ON OFF RST depending on sensor SENSe lt 1 4 gt FREQuency CW lt frequency gt SENSe lt 1 4 gt FREQuency FlXed lt frequency gt Informs the R amp S NRP2 about the frequency of the power to be measured since this frequency is not automatically determined The frequency is used to determine a fre quency dependent co
382. nt TRIG HOLD 800 US starts next trigger event 800 us after the trigger event at the earliest INIT FETCh Another way to modify the trigger system timing is to set a holdoff time TRIG HOLD After a trigger event all following trigger events are ignored if they occur within the holdoff time This is to prevent signal components that have not yet decayed from causin trig gering by mistake after the measurement has been completed This makes sense espe cially with internal triggering BurstAv mode Power Trigger Ignored event trigger event Trigger level A Time TRIG DELay ab Measurement TRIG HOLDO E Fig 3 3 Meaning of settings for TRIG HOLD and TRIG DEL Exclude and Fence Mid In the measurement modes Burst Timeslot and Timegate it is also possible to exclude time domains from the integration of the measured value at the beginning and the end of the measurement SENS TIM EXCL STARt and SENS TIM EXCL STOP Example SRST SENS FUNC POW BURS AVG SENS TIM EXCL STAR 10 US ignores 10 us at the beginning of the measurement SENS TIM EXCL STOP 10 US ignores 10 us at the end of the measurement INIT FETCh User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 390 R amp S NRP2 Programming Measurements ee Measuring with low level commands EXCLude STARt EXCLude STOP Integration interval Fig 3 4 Exclude parameter Moreover in Timeslot and Timegate it is possible to exclude time domains also during
383. nt range limit Parameters lt state gt ON OFF ONCE LFR UFR RST OFF CALibration lt 1 4 gt ECONtrol STATe lt state gt CALibration lt 1 4 gt RCALibration STATe lt state gt CALibration lt 1 4 gt RCFactor CALibration lt 1 4 gt TEST Usage Query only CALibration lt 1 4 gt TEST DEViation Usage Query only CALibration lt 1 4 gt TEST REVerence Usage Query only User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 238 R amp S NRP2 Remote Control Commands 6 7 DISPlay CALibration lt 1 4 gt ZERO FAST AUTO lt state gt CALibration ALL ZERO FAST AUTO lt state gt Perform fast zeroing However the commands cannot be called unless the sensor s is are in the Trace mode Since the commands are processed very quickly they are not overlapping The queries therefore always return OFF Error messages 224 Illegal parameter value The transfer parameter is a numeric value unequal O corresponds to OFF Parameters lt state gt OFF ONCE RST OFF DISPlay The DISPlay command system is mainly used to configure the display of windows on the R amp S NRP2 The WINDow commands are assigned to the calculate blocks 1 to 4 The values calculated from the sensor values by the respective calculate block with the aid of the measurement function are displayed Suffix 1 4 denotes the number of the calculate block An OA 240 A 240 DISPIS MESSI LS TA TEL ia 240 OP MES Sage TEX Ee TE 2
384. ntaci n del producto y solamente en combinaci n con el producto correspondiente La utilizaci n de las palabras de se al en combinaci n con productos o documentaciones que no les correspondan puede llevar a interpretaciones equivocadas y tener por consecuencia da os en personas u objetos Estados operativos y posiciones de funcionamiento El producto solamente debe ser utilizado seg n lo indicado por el fabricante respecto a los estados operativos y posiciones de funcionamiento sin que se obstruya la ventilaci n Si no se siguen las indicaciones del fabricante pueden producirse choques el ctricos incendios y o lesiones graves con posible consecuencia de muerte En todos los trabajos deber n ser tenidas en cuenta las normas nacionales y locales de seguridad del trabajo y de prevenci n de accidentes 1171 0000 42 07 Page 9 Instrucciones de seguridad elementales Si no se convino de otra manera es para los productos Rohde amp Schwarz v lido lo que sigue como posici n de funcionamiento se define por principio la posici n con el suelo de la caja para abajo modo de protecci n IP 2X uso solamente en estancias interiores utilizaci n hasta 2000 m sobre el nivel del mar transporte hasta 4500 m sobre el nivel del mar Se aplicar una tolerancia de 10 sobre el voltaje nominal y de 5 sobre la frecuencia nominal Categor a de sobrecarga el ctrica 2 indice de suciedad 2 No sit e el producto encima de superficies veh culos
385. oca 318 Sn A 318 So Tem BEE Sr Re E EE 317 GvGTemCGOMMuntcate GPDIDIGELEIAUDUDhess 318 SYS rem COMMunicate INET MODE 00d LaO REREN AeA iai 319 SYSTem COMMunicate INET SELF ADDReESG cccccssccceceeseeeceeseeeeceaneeecsauseeecsaeeessaueeessaaeesseasenessens 319 GvGTemCGOMMuntcateNETISELEtGATEwav AlDbess 319 GvGTemCGOMMuntcate NEE IIGELEtGSUDBhNetmnaek AlDess 320 ETA NEE 320 SYSTem ERRor EXTended STAT ccc ccccccccseececcsseeeecceseeeccasseeecsasseecsaaseeecsaseessaasseessauseessacsseessousesessaes 322 PP o 321 a A e o A e y e e E RSE re ee ee eee 320 SE A e PE PEO 0 a SARPER RAAR EAN EARR d gak 320 SA A e 320 A o ee er cry eae E eee ee eee ee 322 SS Tem LANUS daa e lios 323 DNA O E 323 socedi pme A EN te EE 323 Ss A ene fr ee ee nee ee ee eer ver eee 323 FS ee aorta enter E E A E 324 SY Sem SENSO 14 gt TE 324 SYSTem SENSor lt 1 4 gt REBOOS ccccccccecsseeeecesseececeseececescecsceeeesssaeecsseeecsseneeccousesscoeeeesseseessseneensaeees 324 SYS Fem SENSO 1 4RESOL o dae 324 SYS Tem SENSoOr lt 1 4 TESTR carmela 324 Se od Fela ee o COP o E a E o A 324 User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 414 R amp S NRP2 List of Commands SY so KENE TANdard CA e Te KE 325 Eh HIR RE E 325 SYS ITEMS TANTA PV SS UG Sr ios 325 GvGlemGTAhdard TRlGoerSCOUce NEEN ENNEN ENNEN 325 Sr E RT 326 Sl A e e ME E CUE O o E AA OERA AEAEE RAANEI brdin Onni 326 TRIGger ALL ATRigger STA Tucci diia 329 TRIGO ALE GOO Nesec
386. ode Trace SScope Size gt y Caprure time gt y Source list e measurement mode Statistics statistics Size gt Capuure time lt source list gt The elements of the parameter lists have the following meaning Table 6 6 Description of the parameters in the parameter list in alphabetical order lt buffered_size gt Value range depending on sensor Default value depending on sensor Unit Number of requested measured values Corresponds to command SENSe lt 1 4 gt POWer AVG BUFFer SIZE on page 272 lt capture time gt Value range depending on sensor Unit S Default value depending on sensor Period within which measured data are captured in the Trace mode Corresponds to command SENSe lt 1 4 gt TRACe TIME on page 292 Period within which measured data are captured in the STATistics mode Corre sponds to command SENSe lt 1 4 gt STATistics TIME on page 283 lt dtolerance gt Value range depending on sensor Unit S Default value depending on sensor The length of a time interval in which the power level may drop below the trigger level without the end of a power pulse being detected Corresponds to command SENSe lt 1 4 gt POWer BURSt DTOLerance on page 274 ena exclude gt Value range depending on sensor Default value depending on sensor Unit S Amount of time at the end of a timeslot or integration period that should not be taken into account Corre
387. off Off Deactivates all remote control interfaces GPIB Activates the GPIB interface for remote control via the IEC 625 IEEE 488 bus See chapter 4 7 1 2 GPIB settings on page 147 for the addressing USB Activates the USB interface for remote control see chapter 4 7 1 3 USB settings on page 147 VXI11 Activates remote control via Ethernet using VXI 11 protocol see chap ter 4 7 1 4 VXI11 settings on page 148 for information in detail Ethernet Activates remote control via Ethernet using socket communication see chapter 4 7 1 5 Raw Ethernet socket communication settings on page 149 Command Set Selects the instrument type whose remote command set is emulated by the R amp S NRP2 Note The number of supported emulations is limited with the current firmware version VO7 01 Fig 4 73 List of instruments emulated by the R amp S NRP2 The available instrument types are listed This feature allows to replace a power meter by an R amp S NRP2 in existing test setups Refer to Application Note 1G83 at the download area of the product site on the Internet for details and up to date information http www rohde schwarz com product nrp2 html User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 146 R amp S NRP2 Instrument Functions system settings 4 7 1 2 GPIB settings Remote Interfaces GPIB Address Command Set R amp SNRP2Z e Fig 4 74 Remote Interfaces GPIB For configuring the R amp S NRP2 for r
388. og Meter gt Left User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 SENS 1 DISP FORM DIS 4 AVER COUN AUTO RES METIAUTO ONCE ANAL AUTO ONCE MET LOW ANAL LOW 188 R amp S NRP2 Remote Control Fundamentals Correspondence between Remote Control and Manual Control Menu item in manual control SCPI command in short form Windows gt Analog Meter gt Right Measurement gt Function gt Primary Channel Measurement gt Function gt Secondary Chan nel Measurement gt Function gt Function 4 MET UPP 4 ANAL UPP 8 MATH EXPR Measurement gt Function gt Unit UNIT POW and UNIT POW RAT Measurement gt Function gt Auxiliary Value Max Min Max Min AVAL MAX DATA MIN DATA PTP DATA Measurement Rel On Off REL STAT Measurement gt Rel Reset Measurement gt Ref Val gt Ref Value Measurement gt Ref Val 1 8 REL AUTO ONCE CALC El REL Ref Value gt Reset 1 8 REL AUTO ONCE Result gt Ref Measurement gt Limits gt Warning Sound CALC 1 8 LIM BEEP LIM UPP STAT File gt Standard Recall SYST STAN PWS IM UPP DATA LIM LOW STAT Preserve Window Settings Tem INFO DISP NA User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 189 R amp S NRP2 Remote Control Fundamentals i A gt _ ____ _ _ _ _ _ _ ___ __ 2 _ _ _ _ _ _ gt _ ____ _____
389. ogs Pressing the associated key right next to the display executes the function or opens the dialog box e the info panel underneath the graph shows auxiliary information Numerical display Sensor Windows Measurement File System 1 aA 9 99dBm A0 R 13 22dBm C 50 000MHz al P 9 1 9 dBm D 50 000MHz Fig 1 3 Digital and analog display User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 11 R amp S NRP2 Putting into Operation 1 5 2 1 5 2 1 1 5 2 2 Front panel tour Numerical measuring windows indicate the readings digitally or provide the values in form of an analog meter A maximum of four windows can be displayed on the screen while their size is determined by the number of windows The R amp S NRP2 indicates either all windows simultaneously or individually expanded For detailed information concerning the screen layout see chapter 3 2 Screen layout on page 49 Keys The keys on the front panel of the meter are used to manually operate the instrument Grouped by soft and hardkeys each group represents specific functions Softkeys Hardkeys Cursor keys and On Standby key O ES Softkeys The six softkeys are rocker switches in other words they can be rocked backwards and forwards by pressing on the right or left side of the key The softkey functio
390. om sticos sin clasificar sino que debe ser recogido por separado La eliminaci n se debe efectuar exclusivamente a trav s de un punto de recogida apropiado o del servicio de atenci n al cliente de Rohde amp Schwarz Los dispositivos el ctricos usados no se deben desechar con los residuos dom sticos sin clasificar sino que deben ser recogidos por separado Rohde amp Schwarz GmbH amp Co KG ha elaborado un concepto de eliminaci n de residuos y asume plenamente los deberes de recogida y eliminaci n para los fabricantes dentro de la UE Para desechar el producto de manera respetuosa con el medio ambiente dir jase a su servicio de atenci n al cliente de Rohde amp Schwarz Si se trabaja de manera mec nica y o t rmica cualquier producto o componente mas alla del funcionamiento previsto pueden liberarse sustancias peligrosas polvos con contenido de metales pesados como p ej plomo berilio o niquel Por eso el producto solo debe ser desmontado por personal especializado con formacion adecuada Un desmontaje inadecuado puede ocasionar danos para la salud Se deben tener en cuenta las directivas nacionales referentes a la eliminacion de residuos En caso de que durante el trato del producto se formen sustancias peligrosas o combustibles que deban tratarse como residuos especiales p ej refrigerantes o aceites de motor con intervalos de cambio definidos deben tenerse en cuenta las indicaciones de seguridad del fabricante de dichas s
391. om of the screen info panels indicate measurement results or instrument settings Display 25 00 dBm dE 20 0 dEl din we Passcale gt r d NW dl f fai N A A d W D H A i WH y Mi ll A di D H y P i E 75 00 dBm dB 2 0 msidiw Trig Filt Plot A Average Ee W VEL Avg 20 kHz Z Trace Trigger J Internal Func Offset dB 10 000 Aav OFF Fig 4 45 Trace window full height window with control elements The trace control panel covers various functions and parameters to configure the trace measurement result lt changes according to the specific display mode By default the meter displays the Trace display mode with the corresponding control panel Further display modes are set via the Display softkey Display E Opens the control panel for selecting the measurement mode for trace display fates See the following sections for more information Marker Trace shows the trace display mode and the corresponding control panel on page 115 Bes Gates Gates display mode on page 120 Tsotsi Marken Marker display mode on page124 stats Pulse Pulse display mode on page 126 T Slots T Slots display mode on page 130 Stats Stat s display mode on page 134 4 5 3 Trace display mode In the Trace mode you can make all the settings that determine the position and the size of the screen window the type of display Peak Max Ho
392. ommand cannot be executed because of missing device hardware 8 2 4 Device Specific Errors Device specific error causes bit 5 to be set in the ESR register Error text returned upon queue query Explanations Device specific error Generic device dependent error that cannot be defined more precisely System error Indicates that some system error has occurred Please contact the R amp S service center Memory error An error was detected in the device s memory Save recall memory lost Indicates that the nonvolatile data saved by the SAV command has been lost Configuration memory lost Indicates that nonvolatile configuration data saved by the device has been lost Self test failed The self test could not be executed Zeroing failed The zeroing of a sensor CALibration ZERO AUTO ONCE has failed The most frequent cause for this error is a signal that is applied to the sensor input and prevents Zeroing User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 341 R amp S NRP2 Error Messages and Troubleshooting SCPI Specific Error Messages Error code Error text returned upon queue query Explanations 350 Queue overflow This code is entered into the queue in lieu of the code that caused the error It indicates that an error occurred but was not recorded Five entries are accepted in the queue 363 Input buffer overrun More commands were sent to the device than can be simultaneously executed or stored
393. ommands on page 215 and chapter 6 4 4 Parameter list descrip tion on page 212 CONFigure lt 1 8 gt SCALar POWer AVG CONFigure lt 1 8 gt SCALar POWer AVG RELative CONFigure lt 1 8 gt SCALar POWer AVG DIFFerence CONFigure lt 1 8 gt SCALar POWer AVG DIFFerence RELative CONFigure lt 1 8 gt SCALar POWer AVG SUM CONFigure lt 1 8 gt SCALar POWer AVG SUM RELative CONFigure lt 1 8 gt SCALar POWer AVG RATio CONFigure lt 1 8 gt SCALar POWer AVG RATio RELative CONFigure lt 1 8 gt SCALar POWer AVG SWR CONFigure lt 1 8 gt SCALar POWer AVG REFLection CONFigure lt 1 8 gt SCALar POWer AVG RLOSs lt expected_value gt lt resolution gt lt source_list gt CONFigure commands for measurement mode ContAv CONFigure lt 1 8 gt SCALar POWer TSLot CONFigure lt 1 8 gt SCALar POWer TSLot RELative CONFigure lt 1 8 gt SCALar POWer TSLot DiFFerence CONFigure lt 1 8 gt SCALar POWer TSLot DIFFerence RELative CONFigure lt 1 8 gt SCALar POWer TSLot SUM CONFigure lt 1 8 gt SCALar POWer TSLot SUM RELative CONFigure lt 1 8 gt SCALar POWer TSLot RATio CONFigure lt 1 8 gt SCALar POWer TSLot RATio RELative CONFigure lt 1 8 gt SCALar POWer TSLot SWR CONFigure lt 1 8 gt SCALar POWer TSLot REFLection CONFigure lt 1 8 gt SCALar POWer TSLot RLOSs lt tslot_width gt lt no_slots
394. on arranges all opened windows Window 6 Press the Arrange softkey Window 1 returns to its previous size The following steps show the difference between the Open and Init functions You first have to change two settings of window 1 User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 36 R amp S NRP2 Getting Started Window handling Opening creating and closing windows 1 Activate the analog display of results D amp A Dig D amp A Craph Switch to the Measurement menu and select Relative On Relative Off On Reset Return to the Windows menu Window 1 now displays the A Rel function on an analog scale Sensor Windows Measurement File System ERT A Cont Av System e Ze 2 32 Auto A Fig 2 19 Result window DEA full height Now close window 1 with the Close softkey Window The Window menu shows that window 1 is still selected The labeling next to the third softkey is now Open Init Window Open Init d Press the Open softkey The appearance of the window has not changed and all window specific settings have been maintained Close window 1 again with Close Open it this time with Init The window again displays the measurement function A in digital format In contrast to Open where the settings remain unchanged Init sets all the param eters to their default values Init only resets the window settings made in the Win dows and Measurement m
395. on the R amp S NRP2 in other words you do not need to close the dialog box to activate the settings in the box Dialog boxes with tabs EN Channel specific settings are made in a special page in a super ordinate dialog box In the top row of the dialog box there are tabs which you can use to switch between pages Channels which do not have a sensor connected and channels that have not been instal led are shown in gray and cannot be selected Check boxes Global Check boxes are used to activate and deactivate functions You can toggle between the two states by pressing the appropriate softkey Option fields Cont Trace amp T gate Burst Ay Statistics Au AN Option fields contain groups of mutually exclusive operating modes When you press the left hand side of the rocker switch the next option on the left is selected When you press the right hand side of the rocker switch the next option on the right is selected In the System I O dialog box option fields are assigned to only one side of a rocker switch It is therefore only possible to scroll through in one direction Editing fields Editing fields are used to enter or modify numbers and text Nominal Width not active User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 54 R amp S NRP2 Manual Operation 3 5 6 3 5 7 Dialog boxes and their controls The editor is activated by pressing the appropriate rocker switch Nominal Width X ms Entry active Editing can
396. onfigured individually Window Window Window esa Eee Pea cee geiert Close Arrange Close Arrange D amp A Gr Dia BERG rap Dig DEA Graphi Resolution dB Resolution dB i 1 0 1 00T 0 001 1 0 1 6 010 001 Analog T slot Timeslot 1 4 Meter i 1 4 Fig 4 26 Display mode specific settings The available configuration parameters depend on the selected display mode O Dig In the digital display the resolution is adjustable see Setting the resolution For TimeSlot AV measurements the timeslot to be displayed can be chosen O D amp A User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 95 R amp S NRP2 Instrument Functions RR Displaying measurement results In the hybrid digital amp analog mode the resolution of the digital display Setting the resolution on page 96 and the scaling for the analog meter are adjustable Setting the Analog Meter on page 96 e Graph In the graphical representation all further settings are provided in the corresponding diagrams Once the window has been expanded as described in Expand on page 93 additional submenus provide trigger marker or scale setting parameters Setting the resolution Resolution dB The resolution of a digital measurement result display can be set in 4 stages designated 1019010001 55 1 dB 0 1 dB 0 01 dB and 0 001 dB If dB dBm or
397. onnnrennnnnnanens 24 2 3 Preset ANG ZOTOING DEE 27 2 4 Measuring average power Cont Av MOde ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeseeneeseneesaneseenessenensanees 29 2 5 Window MANGIA Ocio ii iii 35 2 6 Setting measurement fUNC IONS ooccocncccnccconcnrcncnnoncnronanrnnnnnonnnrrnnnrrnnarernanrranrrranrrenanes 40 2 7 Graphically representing power versus tiM cooncconccocncocccocnconcconnnnnnnonancnnncnnncnnannns 42 2 8 Measuring average burst power Burst AV MOde c ccceseeseeeeeeeeseeeseeeeeenenaneees 46 3 Manual OperatiON oocooccccccoccconconcconconccnncnnncnnnnnncnancnnrnnnrnnrnanenarennrnanennes 49 A cia ee etree cee cinerea ee tee erento eee ewer tise ate eatin cease 49 EE erer 49 39 Menu la OU tasa a a 51 34 MER handliNhg E 53 3 5 Dialog boxes and their CONtrOlS ocooncconnconncocnncccnnocorenarennrnnnnronarenaronarrnnrennrrnanrnanrnnnos 53 36 DISpla WIN WS imac 57 4 Instrument FUNCION Susini 61 A AS A AAA 61 4 2 Data acquisition and paraMeterS ooccconccconnccocnccnccconccccnaronnarrnnarrrnarrrnarrrnnreranrrranrrnannnns 64 4 3 Displaying measurement reSultS oooondconnnconncicnnconcnrencnnennronanronnnrenarnnnaronanronanrenarrrnannns 91 4 4 Configuring MeasureMentS coonccccccccnccccncnccnnnrcnnnnonnrnnnnrrnnnrrnnnnrrnnnrrnnnrrnnrrnanrrnanrrnnanes 97 User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 3 R amp S NRP2 Contents 45 Displaying MACES cms 113 4 6 Management of SettidgS cocnccconncconncccocanccnnnre
398. onomic areas or military applications It is therefore essential to make sure that the signal words described here are always used only in connection with the related product documentation and the related product The use of signal words in connection with unrelated products or documentation can result in misinterpretation and in personal injury or material damage 1171 0000 42 07 Page 2 Basic Safety Instructions Operating states and operating positions The product may be operated only under the operating conditions and in the positions specified by the manufacturer without the product s ventilation being obstructed If the manufacturer s specifications are not observed this can result in electric shock fire and or serious personal injury or death Applicable local or national safety regulations and rules for the prevention of accidents must be observed in all work performed 1 Unless otherwise specified the following requirements apply to Rohde amp Schwarz products predefined operating position is always with the housing floor facing down IP protection 2X use only indoors max operating altitude 2000 m above sea level max transport altitude 4500 m above sea level A tolerance of 10 shall apply to the nominal voltage and 5 to the nominal frequency overvoltage category 2 pollution severity 2 2 Donot place the product on surfaces vehicles cabinets or tables that for reasons of weight or stability are unsuitable for this
399. ons see chapter 4 5 5 2 Marker diagram settings on page 125 Pos Scale Defines if the cursor keys position or scale the waveform Pos Scale The cursor keys shift the waveform in horizontal and vertical direction The cursor keys expand and compress the waveform When the hori zontal scaling is modified the points pixels at the left of the screen remain unchanged When the vertical scaling is modified the neutral zone depends on the unit selected the points in the center of the screen remain unchanged when dBm dB and dBuV are used The points at the bottom of the screen remain unchanged in all other displays via Defines the active marker which can be positioned by means of the cursor keys Max Min marker position Sets the two markers to the extreme values of the selected trace each time the key is pressed If two traces are active pressing the left side of the softkey selects trace 1 and pressing the right side selcets trace 2 Trace Func Opens the Trace Function dialog box see chapter 4 5 3 4 Trace function settings on page 119 Marker diagram settings gt Open the Marker Config dialog box open via the Window gt Graph gt Dis play gt Marker control panel Trace amp Statistics sensor mode Marker Config Markerd Pos F Marker Pos A gt i Fig 4 53 Marker Config dialog box 125 R amp S NRP2 Instrument Functions EE Displaying traces Marker1 Pos v M
400. ontrol Commands SYSTem SYSTem COMMunicate INET MODE lt mode gt Selects the mode for transmitting the special control sequences via ethernet according to draft IEEE 1174 zem fee no control sequences abbr 1174 0 mode nu the IEC IEEE 488 1 mode abbr 1174 1 mode a the IEC IEEE 488 2 mode abbr 1174 2 mode Parameters lt state gt 0 1 2 RST This setting is not changed by RST SYSTem COMMunicate INET SELF ADDRess lt ip1 gt lt ip2 gt lt ip3 gt lt ip4 gt Sets the IP address of the R amp S NRP2 Note This command cannot be used while VXI11 or Ethernet is in use Note Choosing an invalid IP Address may disturb the traffic on your LAN If you are not sure how to configure these settings please ask your network administrator Parameters lt ip1 gt lt ip2 gt lt ip3 gt lt ip4at_values The four parameter form the IP address lt ip1 gt lt ip2 gt lt ip3 gt lt ip4 gt For example IP address 104 0 0 255 is entered as SYSTem COMMunicate INET ADDRess 108 0 0 255 Range 0 255 for each part of the IP address RST This setting is not changed by RST Usage Event SYSTem COMMunicate INET SELF GATEway ADDRess lt gwip1 gt lt gwip2 gt lt gwip3 gt lt gwip4 gt Sets the gateway address of your local subnet Note This command cannot be used while VXI11 or Ethernet is in use Note Choosing an invalid Gateway Address may disturb the traffic on your LAN If you are not sure how
401. or menu Mode 4 Kee ae Cont Trace amp eng T gate Burst Offset Filter Ay Statistics Av AY No of Timeslots Nominal Width Range 4 Excluded from Start from End F Correction 4 0 000 us 0 000 us Fence Trigger 4 Config Fence Fig 4 7 Mode dialog box T slot Av User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 69 R amp S NRP2 Instrument Functions EE Data acquisition and parameters No of Timeslots Sets the number of subsequent timeslots within a frame e a period of the signal Remote command SENSe lt 1 4 gt POWer TSLot COUNt on page 277 Nominal Width Defines the timeslot length Example When measurements are performed on TDMA signals GSM EDGE PDC NADC PHS etc the nominal timeslot length must be entered here i e the frame length divided by the number of timeslots Table 4 1 GSM signal Frame length 4 615 ms gt Nominal width 4 615 8 ms 576 875 us Remote command SENSe lt 1 4 gt POWer TSLot AVG WIDTh on page 278 Excluded from Start End Defines the intervals at the start end of the timeslot which are excluded from the mea surement The timesslot length is set with Nominal Width Measurement can thus be restricted to the relevant part of a timeslot Remote command SENSe lt 1 4 gt TIMing EXCLude STARt on page 283 SENSe lt 1 4 gt TIMing EXCLude STOP on page 283 Fence Activates the Fence function In numeric T slotAv mode the
402. or directly changes from the WAIT _FOR_TRG state to the MEASURING state irrespective of the selected trigger source TRIG SOUR A trigger delay set with TRIG DEL is ignored but not the automatic delay determined when TRIG DEL AUTO ON is set When the trigger source is HOLD a measurement can only be started with TRIG Error messages Trigger ignored The sensor is not in the WAIT _FOR_TRG state Usage Event User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 331 R amp S NRP2 Remote Control Commands TRIGger TRIGger lt 1 4 gt LEVel lt level gt TRIGger ALL LEVel lt level gt Determines the power a trigger signal must exceed TRIG SLOP POS or fall short of TRIG SLOP NEG before a trigger event is detected This setting is only used for the trigger signal source TRIG SOUR INTernal Unit DBM W Parameters lt level gt float_value Range depending on sensor RST depending on sensor Default unit DBM TRIGger lt 1 4 gt MASTer STATe lt state gt Sets the selected sensor in trigger master state If the trigger master detects an internal trigger event it generates an external hardware trigger signal which allows the syn chronous triggering of other sensors The trigger master must be not be set to external triggering however all other sensors have too be set to external triggering TRIG SOUR EXT The trigger signal generated by the trigger master is routed via the connecting cable to the R amp S NRP2 and f
403. or manual measurements such as the display update rate or acoustic alarms gt Select Misc in the System menu Sensor Windows Measurement File P5ystem 1 Misc Overload 4 Key Click 4 Limit Warning 4 i Hormal Display Update Slow Freeze Brightness In Fig 4 91 Miscellaneous dialog box Limit warnings may be configured separately for each window Therefore the checkbox Limit Warning may show a grayed checkmark if the settings differ for different windows User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 159 R amp S NRP2 Instrument Functions TAFT system settings Beep Overload Activates an acoustic feedback when the sensor is overloaded overload condition see chapter 4 8 Messages and alarms on page 164 Remote command SYSTem BEEPer NOTify OVERload on page 318 Beep Key Click Activates an acoustic alarm to indicate when a key is pressed Remote command SYSTem BEEPer NOTify KEY on page 318 Beep Limit Warning Activates an acoustic alarm when there is a violation of user defined limits Activation applies to all windows If a warning beep in conjunction with a violation of user defined limits is not desired it can explicitly and exclusively for any window be switched off in the limits dialog see chapter 4 4 5 Limit Monitoring on page 111 Display Update Selects the display refresh rate At very low ambient temperatures the display becomes sluggish To improve readability under t
404. ource identifier appears on the R amp S NRP2 display if the USB remote interface is selected User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 365 USB interface R amp S NRP2 Standard Configurations B Standard Configurations The following tables list the settings that can be made when configuring the R amp S NRP2 with the SYST STAN PRES lt string gt remote control command The following values are provided for the lt string gt parameter e GSM EDGE e NADC UPLINK e NADC DOWNLINK e PDC UPLINK e PDC DOWNLINK e DECT e WCDMA 3GPP FDD e WCDMA 3GPP TDD DL e WCDMA 3GPP TDD UL e TD SCDMA e Bluetooth DH1 e Bluetooth DH3 e Bluetooth DH5 e CDMA2000 The tables list only the sensor parameters If SYSTem STANdard PWSettings OFF IS set the calculate blocks CALCulate the window system DISPlay and the output unit UNIT are also configured Table 2 1 GSM EDGE Sensor parameter Remote control command in Value short form Duty Cycle Correction ON Dropout Tolerance SE Exclude Time End Number Of Timeslots S Timeslot Width SENS TSL WIDT Timeslot Fence SENS TSL MID OFF Exclude Time Start SENS TIM EXCL STAR User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 367 R amp S NRP2 Standard Configurations AAA Sensor parameter Remote control command in Value short form Timegate Offset SENS TGAT OFFS TIME 1 20 us 2 2 328 ms Timegate Length SENS TGAT TIME 2 Trace Number Of Point
405. ously on the R amp S NRP2 s display Each window can be configured for a separate measurement The following examples show how to handle windows Opening expanding and closing windows 1 Press the PRE SET hardkey twice Sensor Windows Measurement File System 1 000 GHz 403 08m Fig 2 16 Result window A display window indicating the result in dBm from sensor A appears 2 Selectthe Windows menu with the topmost softkey or the cursor keys Sensor Windows Measurement File System The Window softkey selects the window The settings in the Windows menu and in the Measurement menu are valid for the selected window User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 35 R amp S NRP2 Getting Started _ o ee Window handling Window Resolution dB 1 0 1 00T 0 001 i Timeslot 1 4 Fig 2 17 Windows menu The cursor keys can in most cases be used to select windows instead of the soft keys This also applies to opened dialog boxes 3 Select window 1 The third softkey is now labeled Close Expand 4 Press the right side of the softkey to expand the window The window expands to occupy the full display height and indicates all parameters relevant to the measurement Sensor Windows Measurement File System A Cont Av System Zeg EX gt 32 Auto A 10 000 dB dE I 1 000 GHz d Din Fig 2 18 Result window Dig 5 Open the menu again Arrange now replaces Expand This functi
406. ow Measure ments number 5 to 8 can only be evaluated via remote control The Measurement menu The Measurement menu contains the functions required to configure measurements User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 97 R amp S NRP2 Instrument Functions 4 4 2 Window 2 3 4 4 4 3 Configuring measurements Fig 4 28 Measurement menu e Selecting a window on page 92 e Selecting a measurement function on page 98 e Selecting a unit on page 106 e Auxiliaries on page 109 e Relative measurement on page 110 e Limit monitoring on page 111 e Resetting auxiliary information on page 112 Selecting a window The window to be configured is selected by the tab Window dialog box tabs Each window is assigned a tab All the parameters settings in the Window dialog box act on the selected window Remote command DISPlay WINDow SELect on page 246 With remote command there is a distinction between selecting the active window and selecting the window to be configured The active window is selected using command DISPlay WINDows SELect The window to be configured is selected with the suffix of the WINDows keyword For example DISPLay WINDow3 NAME defines the label of win dow 3 Selecting a measurement function In this chapter measurement function are discussed that can be displayed in numeric windows Dig D A The functionality of the graphic windows is described in chap ter 4 5 Displaying traces on pag
407. ow level commands see below If a list of parameters is indicated for the READ command it must correspond to the list for the preceding CONF command After a measurement has been completed i e the data from the sensors is available it is sometimes interesting to evaluate this data several times without starting a new mea surement each time Since this is not possible with the above commands the READ command can be replaced by the INIT and FETCh commands INIT FETCh lt list of parameters gt FETCh evaluates existing data if the data is valid FETCh may select another calcula tion function if the measurement can be evaluated with the available measured data User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 384 R amp S NRP2 Programming Measurements ElI AAAA4A _ _ _ ___ _ _ ___ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _______________________________ __ ___ _ _ Trigger state system Example The following sequence of commands provides the difference between measured values from sensors 1 and 2 by means of FETCh DIFF which measure in the ContAv mode as the default setting CONF DIFF INIT ALL FETCh DIFF Response valid result FETCh RAT Response valid result FETCh BURst Response 221 Settings conflict The FETCh RAT command then delivers the ratios of the two measured values This is possible without a new measurement since the required data is available The last FETCh command require
408. ows or in the header User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 164 R amp S NRP2 Instrument Functions BEE Messages and alarms 4 8 1 Errors and warnings Overload OVERLOAD Sensor s D Fig 4 100 Error message Overload One or more sensors are subjected to overload NOTICE Overload can destroy the sensor depending on the amount of power and the duration of the overload condition The upper measurement limit is specified in the data sheet for the sensor and can be displayed in the Sensor Info dialog box see chapter 4 7 4 System information on page 157 An alarm sounds when the message is displayed The alarm can be disabled in the Misc dialog box see chapter 4 7 5 Miscellaneous on page 159 Overrange Sensor Windows Measurement File System Overrange System D Cont Av E 256 Auto mi 50 000 MHz 1114m Fig 4 101 Error message Overrange This message is displayed only if the Auto range function is off and the operating range of the set path has been exceeded only with R amp S NRP Zxx multi path sensors see chapter 4 2 4 Measurement ranges on page 82 User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 165 Instrument Functions R amp S NRP2 EEE Messages and alarms Sample Error Sensor Windows Measurement File System D Cont Av System i amp 2 4 Auto A JI Fu D 50 000 MHz 16 38 cm Fig 4 102 Error message Sample Error The message indicates that sam
409. ox of the of the Measurement menu 3 Select the gate the main value Eval and Aux Normal The main value together with the auxilliary values is indicated numerically User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 102 R amp S NRP2 Instrument Functions Configuring measurements AE A Trace System FA gt 1 Man 1 000 GHz A 8 9 Pk 16 013dBm e dBm Pk 7 039dB Fig 4 34 Measurement within a gate Trace amp Statistics mode Dig display mode In Dig D amp A display modes the results can be correlated to any other measured value Function If you want to combine the measurement results of different channels by using functions not all combinations are supported The Ratio function calls for measurands of the same dimension e g two power levels or two Pk Av ratios The impedance measurement functions even require identical measurands e g two average power values but not one average power value and one peak power value Function amp Unit Function Ratio A B el Prim Channel Sec Channel 4 Gate 1 Gate ER Eval EvalPeak Unit Aux None v Fig 4 35 Function amp Unit dialog box sensors are operated in time gate mode Refer to chapter 4 4 3 1 Functions and their use on page 99 for description on the functions and the channel selection Gate Determines which gate is to be evaluated for the function Eval Selects the measurand Avg Average power in the gate Pk Peak po
410. p the safety standards of our products up to date and to offer our customers the highest possible degree of safety Our products and the auxiliary equipment they require are designed built and tested in accordance with the safety standards that apply in each case Compliance with these standards is continuously monitored by our quality assurance system The product described here has been designed built and tested in accordance with the EC Certificate of Conformity and has left the manufacturer s plant in a condition fully complying with safety standards To maintain this condition and to ensure safe operation you must observe all instructions and warnings provided in this manual If you have any questions regarding these safety instructions the Rohde amp Schwarz group of companies will be happy to answer them Furthermore it is your responsibility to use the product in an appropriate manner This product is designed for use solely in industrial and laboratory environments or if expressly permitted also in the field and must not be used in any way that may cause personal injury or property damage You are responsible if the product is used for any purpose other than its designated purpose or in disregard of the manufacturer s instructions The manufacturer shall assume no responsibility for such use of the product The product is used for its designated purpose if it is used in accordance with its product documentation and within its performance li
411. per case for the next letter above To edit the Trigger Delay you must select the unit by means of the cursor keys see R amp S NRP2 Manual Operation Display windows 3 6 Display windows 3 6 1 Window sizes and types Results are displayed in the main section of the screen in windows Windows come in three sizes half height quarter height and full height In windows measurement results are displayed digitally in a combined digital and analog mode and graphically See chapter 4 3 Displaying measurement results on page 91 for instructions on selecting these modes Dig window full height Dig window half height A T slot 1 System A al A HN A 1 000GHz 4 Auto A 0 000 dB dBm db E ki A 50 000 MHz 29 21 cam Graph trace window full height Graph trace window half height 15 00 dBm 7 00 div 10 0 dem Config 30 0 de Wu SS 50 051 et y F Lp alu e i o di jut 270 015 qe mi An M iN d d i D 300 A ee VBL Avg Full z Trigger J Internal Offset dE User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 57 R amp S NRP2 Manual Operation euH Display windows D amp A window full height D amp A window half height A slot 1 System za 1 a MN a 4 Auto A 0 000 dB 102 Tu 29 21dBm 70 dBm 30 dBm Dig window quarter height D amp A window quarter height AAA EA E 41 14dBm PANA You can expand all opened windows to full height by ac
412. ples were lost while sampling the signal The measured value can thus be incorrect Trunc Meas Sensor Windows Measurement File System Al Truna Mea D Burst System Z D gt 4 Auto A d Tu 50 000 MHz D I aem Fig 4 103 Error message Trunc Meas Trunc Meas is displayed in Burst Av mode when there is an overflow of the sensor internal buffer for samples Overflow occurs if a burst is too long The measurement is aborted HW Error Sensor Windows Measurement File System AA HWE D Cont Av System Zeg gt 4 Auto A JE 50 000 MHz 23 6248m Fig 4 104 Error message HW Error A sensor has detected a hardware error User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 166 R amp S NRP2 Instrument Functions Messages and alarms 4 8 2 Interactive messages The R amp S NRP2 provides a lot of interactive messages as shown in the following exam ple Since the information is self explanatory these messages are not explicitly listed in this manual Automatic window initialization Open new window for attached sensor C7 OK H MENU Cancel ESC Fig 4 105 Information New Window If an additional sensor is connected to the R amp S NRP2 during operation and if no currently open window displays the values measured in the channel concerned the R amp S NRP2 automatically offers to open a window and to configure it for measurements with the additional sensor connected The previous sett
413. power level falls below the trigger level This is not desirable with modulated signals or short interruptions and also when the level just falls slightly below the trigger level e SENS BURS DTOL is used to define a time span during which the power to be mea sured in the BurstAv mode must remain below the trigger level so that the end of the burst can be detected e TRIG HYST is used to specify a value in dB by which the signal must fall below the trigger level so that the end of a burst can be detected C 4 3 Configuration of sensor settings The sensor settings are controlled by the SENSe command system The sensors tell the basic unit which commands they understand and which parameters are allowed As a result the commands described below cannot be used for some sensors C 4 3 1 Selecting a measurement mode The most important sensor dependent setting is the selection of a measurement mode User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 392 R amp S NRP2 Programming Measurements VW _ __ QE__ __ _ _ _ _ _ _ __ __ _ _ _ ___ _ _ _ ____ ____ _ __ _ ____ QQ Q gt gt z __ ______ Measuring with low level commands ContAv mode SENS FUNC POW AVG Continuous measurement with only one integration time specified SENS APER within which the power is integrated as a measurement result RST SENS FUNC POW AVG SENS APER 10 MS INIT FETCh Timeslot mode SENS FUNC POW TSL AVG Aft
414. purpose Always follow the manufacturer s installation instructions when installing the product and fastening it to objects or structures e g walls and shelves An installation that is not carried out as described in the product documentation could result in personal injury or even death 3 Do not place the product on heat generating devices such as radiators or fan heaters The ambient temperature must not exceed the maximum temperature specified in the product documentation or in the data sheet Product overheating can cause electric shock fire and or serious personal injury or even death Electrical safety If the information on electrical safety is not observed either at all or to the extent necessary electric shock fire and or serious personal injury or death may occur 1 Prior to switching on the product always ensure that the nominal voltage setting on the product matches the nominal voltage of the AC supply network If a different voltage is to be set the power fuse of the product may have to be changed accordingly 2 Inthe case of products of safety class with movable power cord and connector operation is permitted only on sockets with a protective conductor contact and protective conductor 3 Intentionally breaking the protective conductor either in the feed line or in the product itself is not permitted Doing so can result in the danger of an electric shock from the product If extension cords or connector strips are imp
415. r BURSt SUM READ lt 1 8 gt SCALar POWer BURSt SUM RELative READ lt 1 8 gt SCALar POWer BURSt RATio READ lt 1 8 gt SCALar POWer BURSt RATio RELative READ lt 1 8 gt SCALar POWer BURSt SWR READ lt 1 8 gt SCALar POWer BURSt REFLection READ lt 1 8 gt SCALar POWer BURSt RLOSs lt dtolerance gt lt start_exclude gt lt end_exclude gt lt expected_value gt lt resolution gt lt source_list gt READ commands for measurement mode Burst READ lt 1 8 gt ARRay POWer AVG READ lt 1 8 gt ARRay POWer AVG RELative READ lt 1 8 gt ARRay POWer AVG DIFFerence READ lt 1 8 gt ARRay POWer AVG DIFFerence RELative READ lt 1 8 gt ARRay POWer AVG SUM READ lt 1 8 gt ARRay POWer AVG SUM RELative READ lt 1 8 gt ARRay POWer AVG RATio READ lt 1 8 gt ARRay POWer AVG RATio RELative READ lt 1 8 gt ARRay POWer AVG SWR READ lt 1 8 gt ARRay POWer AVG REFLection READ lt 1 8 gt ARRay POWer AVG RLOSs lt buffered_size gt lt expected_value gt lt resolution gt lt source_list gt READ commands for measurement mode ContAv with buffering User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 221 R amp S NRP2 Remote Control Commands High Level Measurement Commands CONFigure MEASure READ and FETCh READ lt 1 8 gt XTIMe POWer READ lt 1 8 gt XTIMe POWer RATio lt scope_size gt lt capture_time gt lt source_list gt
416. r amplifiers use chopping a measurement always contains an integer mul tiple of a pair of acquisitions which are taken with opposite polarity of the detector output User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 72 R amp S NRP2 Instrument Functions OSS EEE Data acquisition and parameters signal Samples at equal time intervals over each acquisition interval are taken From the sum of the samples partial measurement results are formed By forming the difference from adjacent acquisitions an improved result is achieved that is the DC offset voltage and 1 f noise of the sensor amplifiers are significantly reduced Depending on the selected averaging number a multiple of these results is averaged to further reduce noise see chapter 4 2 3 Filter averaging on page 79 The length of the acquisition interval depends on the set measurement mode Table 4 2 Acquisition interval of the respective measurement modes Mode Acquisition interval identical to Cont Av aperture time default or user specific T slot Av nominal width x number of slots T gate Av gate length Burst Av burst length After one acquisition has been completed the output polarity of the detector output signal is inverted The next acquisition does not start until a sensor specific settling time has been passed With the T slot Av T gate Av and Burst Av modes where the start of an acquisition must additionally be synchronized with the signal the trigger period or a mul
417. r the Trace mode SENSe Fig 5 1 SCPI command tree Some keywords are used at several levels within a command system Their effect depends on the command structure Le on their position in the command header Example SENSel TRACe POINES lt int value gt This command contains the POINts keyword in the third level SENGE TRACes OFF Geti POINTS lt 1nt value This command contains the POINts keyword in the fourth level It defines the time offset for the display of points in the Trace mode Optional keywords In some command systems certain keywords can be inserted into or removed from the header These keywords are shown in the manual in square brackets For reasons of User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 176 R amp S NRP2 Remote Control Fundamentals EE SS Structure and Syntax of device dependent Messages compatibility with the SCPI standard the device must be able to recognize the full length of the command Some of the commands become considerably shorter when the optional keywords are omitted Example SENSe POWer TSLot COUNt 6 This command sets for sensor 1 the number of timeslots in the Timeslot mode to 6 The following command has the same effect POWer TSLot COUNt 6 An optional keyword cannot be omitted if its effect is specified in more detail by a numeric suffix Example SENSe2 POWer TSLot COUNt 6 This command sets for sensor 2 the number of timeslots in the Timeslot mode to 6 Keyword SENSe
418. r un peso elevado Por eso es necesario desplazarlo o transportarlo con precauci n y si es necesario usando un sistema de elevaci n adecuado p ej una carretilla elevadora a fin de evitar lesiones en la espalda u otros da os personales 1171 0000 42 07 Page 13 Instrucciones de seguridad elementales Las asas instaladas en los productos sirven solamente de ayuda para el transporte del producto por personas Por eso no est permitido utilizar las asas para la sujeci n en o sobre medios de transporte como p ej gr as carretillas elevadoras de horquilla carros etc Es responsabilidad suya fijar los productos de manera segura a los medios de transporte o elevaci n Para evitar da os personales o da os en el producto siga las instrucciones de seguridad del fabricante del medio de transporte o elevaci n utilizado Si se utiliza el producto dentro de un veh culo recae de manera exclusiva en el conductor la responsabilidad de conducir el veh culo de manera segura y adecuada El fabricante no asumir ninguna responsabilidad por accidentes o colisiones No utilice nunca el producto dentro de un veh culo en movimiento si esto pudiera distraer al conductor Asegure el producto dentro del veh culo debidamente para evitar en caso de un accidente lesiones u otra clase de da os Eliminaci n protecci n del medio ambiente 1 Los dispositivos marcados contienen una bater a o un acumulador que no se debe desechar con los residuos d
419. racters The state change from remote gt local is achieved by clearing down the connection peer sockets and by special control characters Simultaneous operation of the measuring instrument via local in the remote mode can be achieved by using newly defined control characters amp GTM There are no amp characters outside of block data within SCPI commands Doubling of the amp characters is therefore not necessary in this mode In the 1174 1 and 1174 2 modes the special control sequences have a different device internal behavior In the 1174 2 mode they are not filtered out by the driver but are recognized by the parser like normal SCPI commands In this mode the control sequences are to be terminated by lt CR gt lt LF gt like SCPI com O mands User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 359 R amp S NRP2 Remote control interfaces Ethernet interface Table 1 6 Control sequences of the IEC IEEE 1174 draft amp ddd lt CR gt lt LF gt Sends STB and RQS as a three digit decimal value ddd response to amp POL amp DCL lt CR gt lt LF gt Device clear acknowledge amp LLO Controller Changes the remote local state to local lockout amp POL Controller Conducts a serial poll measuring instrument responds with amp ddd CR LF A 3 1 4 Additional Rohde amp Schwarz control sequences table 1 7 lists additional Rohde amp Schwarz control sequences not defined in the IEC IEEE 1174 draft The definition of these new con
420. rates an SRQ when the measurement is completed The SRQ is the only way for the device to become active of its own Each controller program should set the device such that a service request is triggered in case of mal functions The program should respond accordingly to the service request User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 314 R amp S NRP2 Remote Control Commands 6 13 20 2 6 13 20 3 6 13 20 4 6 13 20 5 STATus Serial Poll Like the STB command the serial poll is used to query the status byte of a device Querying is implemented by interface messages however and is therefore much quicker The serial poll method has already been defined in the IEEE 488 1 standard and used to be the only standard method of querying the Status Byte Register This method also works with devices that conform neither to SCPI nor to IEEE 488 2 Serial poll is mainly used to obtain a quick overview of the device status of several devices connected to the IEC IEEE bus Parallel Poll In case of a parallel poll up to eight devices are simultaneously requested by the con troller to transmit one bit of information on the data line i e to set the data line assigned to each device to logical O or 1 Analogously to the SRE register which determines the conditions for generating an SRQ a Parallel Poll Enable Register PPE is available which is ANDed bit by bit with the STB taking into account bit 6 The results are ORed and the result is then
421. rator on off and calibrates it User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 206 R amp S NRP2 Remote Control Commands Overview of SCPI Command Systems READ Starts measurement and retrieves measurement results high level commands SENSe Configures sensors and determines the processing of the measured data in the sensors STATus Configures and queries the chapter 5 8 4 Status Reporting System on page 183 Performs different system settings that affect the operation of the R amp S NRP2 Configures timing conditions for start of measurement Sets output unit of the measured values 6 3 1 SENSe System Command system DENG e incl CALibration FUNC hon Eont ow TA CORR ection BurstAw CALibration FRE Quency Tae lol AYER age BUFF er Trace Statistics Measured values to CALC ulate blocks Fig 6 2 SENSe system This command system is used for configuring the sensors and determines the processing of measured data in the sensors The blocks have the following functions RANGe Shifts the range boundaries to increase the measurement accuracy CALibration Is acommand system of its own and responsible for sensor calibration CORRection Corrects measured values in three steps fixed offset value frequency FREQuency dependent offset value and duty cycle APERture Determines the timeslot in which power values are averaged TIMing FUNCtion Determines a measurement mode AVERage Filters
422. re other com mands can be executed When the measurement mode of a sensor is manually selected Sensor gt Mode automatic settings are made for the trigger system and timing which cannot be changed by manual control This considerably simplifies operation These settings are not changed when the measurement mode is selected by remote control SENSe FUNCtion and have to be set to the desired value by appropriate SCPI commands The following table lists the respective setting capabilities and the values that are auto matically set in manual control Table 5 3 Automatic settings for manual selection of a measurement mode Mode Cont Avg TR Lest SENSe 1 4 TIMing EXCLude STOP INITiate 1 4 CONTinuous ON IGger SOURce TMMediate E Z LO HOLDoff TIMing EXCLude Unchanged is irrelevant Unchanged is irrelevant Cannot be modified in manual mode Mode Burst Av TRIGger 1 4 SOURce User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 BR Unchanged is irrelevant 184 R amp S NRP2 Remote Control Fundamentals Automatic Settings for Manual Selection of a Measurement Mode E Cannot be modified in manual mode NEE E ald Unchanged is irrelevant TRIGger LEVel Depends on sensor User selectable SENSE Ls START SENSe 1 4 TIMing EXCLude STOP Depends on sensor User selectable INTTiate l 4 sCONTinucus Cannot be modified in manual mode Mode Timegate Av TR
423. red ContAv mode Parameters lt number gt int_value Range 1 400000 RST depending on sensor SENSe lt 1 4 gt POWer AVG BUFFer STATe lt state gt Switches on the buffered ContAv mode after which data blocks rather than single mea sured values are then returned In this mode a higher data rate is achieved than in the non buffered ContAv mode The number of desired measured values is set with the SENSe lt 1 4 gt POWer ARR SIZE command Parameters lt state gt ON OFF RST depending on sensor User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 272 R amp S NRP2 Remote Control Commands SENSe Sensor Commands SENSe lt 1 4 gt POWer AVG RANGe lt range gt Selects a measurement range in which the corresponding sensor is to perform a mea surement This setting will only become effective if SENS lt 1 4 gt RANG AUTO OFF is set Parameters lt range gt O 1 2 RST depending on sensor SENSe lt 1 4 gt POWer AVG RANGe AUTO lt state gt Activates deactivates the automatic selection of a measurement range Parameters lt state gt ON OFF RST depending on sensor SENSe lt 1 4 gt POWer AVG RANGe CLEVel lt level gt Sets the cross over level Shifts the transition ranges between the measurement ranges This may improve the measurement accuracy for special signals i e signals with a high crest factor Unit DB PCT Parameters lt clevel gt float_value Range dependi
424. ribution SENS STAT SCAL X RLEV m Power SENS STAT SCAT X RANG Fig 6 14 Setting the power axis for statistics measurements Unit DBM W DBUV User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 282 R amp S NRP2 Remote Control Commands SENSe Sensor Commands Parameters lt rlevel gt float_value Range depending on sensor RST depending on sensor Default unit DBM SENSe lt 1 4 gt STATistics TIME lt time_interval gt Determines together with the SENS STAT OFFS command the time interval in which the power for the statistical evaluation is measured SENS STAT TIME determines the length of the interval see also SENSe lt 1 4 gt POWer TGATe lt 1 4 gt TIME On page 276 Parameters lt time_interval gt float_value Range depending on sensor RST depending on sensor Default unit S SENSe lt 1 4 gt TIMing EXCLude STARt lt exclude_start gt Sets a time that is to be excluded at the beginning of the integration period Power Time EXCLude STARt EXCLude STOP Integration period Fig 6 15 Effect of commands SENS lt 1 4 gt TIM EXCL STAR and STOP Parameters lt exclude_start gt float_value Range depending on sensor RST depending on sensor Default unit S SENSe lt 1 4 gt TIMing EXCLude STOP lt exclude_stop gt Sets a time that is to be excluded at the end of the integration period See figure 6 15 Effect of commands SENS lt 1 4 gt TIM EXCL STAR
425. rigger level is shorter than the drop out tolerance The burst end is thus recognized correctly Power Trigger level J d Beie Drop out time BURSt DTOLerance BURSt DTOLerance Pulse interval Fig 6 10 Meaning of drop out TOLerance Parameters lt tolerance gt float_value Range depending on sensor RST depending on sensor Default unit S SENSe lt 1 4 gt POWer TGATe lt 1 4 gt EXCLude MID OFFSet TIME lt time interval gt Together with SENS TGAT MID TIME allows a time interval in a timegate to be blanked out SENS TGAT MID OFFS TIME determines the distance from the start of the mea surement to the start of the interval to be blanked out see figure 6 11MID parameter in the Timegate mode Parameters lt time interval gt float_value Range depending on sensor RST depending on sensor Default unit S User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 274 R amp S NRP2 Remote Control Commands SENSe Sensor Commands SENSe lt 1 4 gt POWer TGATe EXCLude MID STATe lt state gt Activates deactivates the blanking out of time intervals in the timegates affects all gates Parameters lt state gt ON OFF RST OFF SENSe lt 1 4 gt POWer TGATe lt 1 4 gt EXCLude MID TIME lt time_interval gt Together with SENS TGAT MID OFFS allows a time interval in a timegate to be blanked out SENS TGAT MID TIME determines the distance from the start of the measurement to t
426. rm Pos Scale The cursor keys shift the waveform in horizontal and vertical direction The cursor keys expand and compress the waveform When the hori zontal scaling is modified the points pixels at the left of the screen remain unchanged When the vertical scaling is modified the neutral zone depends on the unit selected the points in the center ofthe screen remain unchanged when dBm dB and dBuV are used The points at the bottom of the screen remain unchanged in all other displays Auto Selects a vertical scaling that suits the waveform Trig Opens the Trigger dialog box For description refer to chapter 4 2 6 Trigger settings on page 85 Filt Opens the Filter dialog box see chapter 4 5 3 3 Filtering settings on page 118 116 R amp S NRP2 Instrument Functions Displaying traces SE Trace Func Dep es Opens the Trace Function subdialog see chapter 4 5 3 4 Trace function settings on page 119 One or two waveforms can be selected for display Each waveform rep resents either the absolute envelope power of one measurement channel over time or it represents the ratio of the envelope power of two channels over time The selected func tion and display type is indicated below If a dimensionless power ratio is selected for graphic display in Trace mode the same vertical scaling as with an absolute power display is shown Simply skip the m of dBm with a log scaling to interpr
427. rmed about new application notes related to your instrument please send an e mail to the Customer Support Center stating your instrument and your wish We will take care that you will get the right information Europe Africa Middle East Phone 49 89 4129 12345 customersupport rohde schwarz com North America Phone 1 888 TEST RSA 1 888 837 8772 customer support rsa rohde schwarz com Latin America Phone 1 410 910 7988 customersupport la rohde schwarz com Asia Pacific Phone 6565 13 04 88 customersupport asia rohde schwarz com China Phone 86 800 810 8228 86 400 650 5896 customersupport china rohde schwarz com ROHDE amp SCHWARZ 1171 0200 22 06 00 R amp S NRP2 Contents Contents 1 Putting into OperatiON occocccoccconncnnnecnconconacenanonanonnonanenaronnrnanenanenncnnanos 7 1 1 Notes on putting Into OperatiON oocconnconncocncicnnicoriccnoncnnonanenanenancnnnnnnnnnnnnenarenarenarenannos 7 PA PPP _ A E 8 1 3 Unpacking the Mete csiiecsiscccicsinsnedscndveessnstnsrenesteusbinensseetiesneansdunedvensescnsbanctaceksswensneckssmecenes 8 14 Seting up the mete rason estaria dan lr 8 o Front DANCE TO Uan aa ips elias 9 AAPP A 15 1 7 Connecting the instrument to the AC SUpplY occonnncccnniconcncconccconnaroconanonnnncnnanrrnanannns 17 1 8 Starting the R amp S INRP2 unen eee eee 18 A A a 23 Se WR e GOIN E 23 2 2 Brief introduction to the OperatiON cooccconcconnncccnccccnconnnnonnconannonnnnonnrnnnnr
428. rom there distributed to the other sensors and the trigger output Only one sensor can be trigger master at a time See also TRIG SYNC Parameters lt state gt ON OFF RST depending on sensor TRIGger lt 1 4 gt SLOPe lt state gt TRIGger ALL SLOPe lt state gt This command determines whether the rising POSitive or the falling NEGat ive edge of the signal is used for triggering Parameters lt state gt POSitive NEGative RST depending on sensor TRIGger lt 1 4 gt SOURce lt state gt TRIGger ALL SOURce lt state gt Sets the trigger signal source for the WAIT FOR_TRG state User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 332 R amp S NRP2 Remote Control Commands UNIT Parameters lt state gt BUS EXTernal HOLD IMMediate INTernal BUS The trigger event is initiated by TRIG IMM or TRG In this case the other trigger setting are meaningless EXTernal Triggering is performed with an external signal applied to the trig ger connector The TRIG SLOP command determines whether the rising or the falling edge of the signal is to be used for trigger ing Waiting for a trigger event can be skipped by TRIG IMM HOLD A measurement can only be triggered when the command TRIG IMM is executed IMMediate The sensor does not remain in the WAIT _FOR_TRG state but immediately changes to the MEASURING state INTernal The sensor determines the trigger time by means of the signal to be measured When this si
429. rovided to configure an entire section of the device at once The high level commands CONFigure FETCh READ and MEASure are therefore an exception to this rule Device Model and Command Processing The device model shown in figure 5 2 was prepared from the point of view of the pro cessing of remote control commands The individual components operate independently of each other and simultaneously They communicate with each other by means of mes sages ethernet 3 pata Fig 5 2 Device model for remote control Input Unit The input unit receives the commands in the form of characters from the remote control interface and collects them in the input buffer The input unit sends a message to the command identification as soon as the input buffer is full or as soon as it receives a delimiter The received data is processed in the parser command identification Command Identification Parser The parser analyzes the data received from the input unit Data is processed in the sequence in which it was received Syntax errors in the command are recognized and passed on to the status reporting system Following the syntax test the value range of the data is verified and the setting is adapted Only after the command has been com pletely executed will the next command be processed User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 182 R amp S NRP2 Remote Control Fundamentals 9 8 3 9 8 4 9 8 9 9 8 6 Device Model and Command Processing
430. rrection factor for the measurement results Parameters lt frequency gt float_value Range depending on sensor RST depending on sensor Default unit HZ SENSe lt 1 4 gt FUNCtion ON lt mode gt Sets the sensor to the selected measurement mode In remote control the timing SENS TIM EXCL STAR and STOP and the trigger sys tem of all measurement modes except the Burst mode are user selectable Note To increase measurement accuracy the sensors measure each signal twice in the Burst Timeslot and Trace measurement modes exception in the Trace mode with SENS TRAC REAL ON As long as the trigger system is set to internal or external trig gering this is usually of no importance to the user If TRIG SOUR HOLD or BUS is used however then each measurement must be triggered twice with TRG or TRIG IMM Error messages Sensor mode not supported A sensor does not support a measurement mode Sensor not idle The sensor is not in the IDLE state Invalid string data An invalid parameter was transmitted for lt string gt User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 270 R amp S NRP2 Remote Control Commands SENSe Sensor Commands Parameters lt mode gt string POWer AVG ContAv After a trigger event the power is integrated over a time interval averaging set with SENS POW APER POWer TSLot AVG Timeslot The power is simultaneously measured in up to 26 time windows The number of time w
431. rs Scalar values at the marker positions are cal culated Either the power or the density distribution value can be specified C 5 1 Measurement of a density distribution curve The sensor measures the power in a time interval that is determined by theSENS STAT OFFS and SENS STAT TIME commands Triggering functions in a per fectly normal way as with other measurements In principle the number of power sam ples considered could be set by means of filtering The higher the filter value the more samples are included in the statistics and the greater the measurement accuracy How ever the filter commands should not be used here since the minimum number of samples can be set much more conveniently using the SENS STAT SAMP command By means of the measured powers the statistics function determined with SENS FUNC is now calculated The power range is limited using the SENS STAT SCAL X RLEV and User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 397 R amp S NRP2 Programming Measurements C 5 2 Statistics measurements SENS STAT SCAL X RANG commands The RANGe is divided into measurement inter vals by specifying SENS STAT SCAL X POIN You are therefore retrieve the measure ment values in response to FETCh SENS STAT SCAL X POIN x RST UNIT POWER RATIO O output unit 1 TRIG SOUR INT trigger to a signal edge TRIG SLOP POS trigger to rising signal edge SENS FUNC XPOW CCDF set CCDF statistics function SENS STAT
432. rsus time 3 Press the PRE SET hardkey twice A measurement window appears 4 Change to the Sensor menu and select Mode Mode 4 Offset Filter 4 Range 4 F Correction 4 Trigger 4 Fig 2 31 Sensor menu 5 Switch to the Trace Statistics mode Mode poon Cont ee T slot T gate Burst AY Au Ay Av 4 F 5 Equivalent Time Sampling gee Fig 2 32 Trace amp Statistics measurement mode 6 Close the Mode dialog box 7 Close the Sensor menu The window is now in the Trace amp Statistics display mode and shows the Trace page 25 00 dBm dB 20 0 dBidiv l l i ch S pi WW Dm mmm O y 75 00 dEm dE 2 0 msidiw Plot A Average VEL Duo 20 kHz Z Trigger J Internal OfFfset dE 10 000 Fig 2 33 Trace representation of a pulsed signal The info panel at the bottom of the window shows all parameters relevant for the display User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 43 R amp S NRP2 Getting Started Graphically representing power versus time Note If you do not see a trace the trigger threshold probably does not match the signal In this case a highlighted e appears in the info panel of the trace window Continue with the next step to set the trigger threshold Further measurement modes can be selected via the Display softkey Based upon the trace display g
433. s lt time gt float_value Range depending on sensor RST depending on sensor Default unit S SENSe lt 1 4 gt POWer TGATe SELect lt time_gate gt Selects one of the four gates in which the average power is measured if the Timegate mode is selected Parameters lt tgate gt 1 2 3 4 RST 1 SENSe lt 1 4 gt POWer TGATe lt 1 4 gt TIME lt time gt Is used for configuring the Timegate mode lt specifies the duration of one of the four gates sweeps relative to the delayed trigger point In manual operation the start and duration of the gates can also be defined graphically if the sensor is operated in the Trace mode Parameters lt time gt User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 float_value Range depending on sensor RST depending on sensor Default unit S 276 R amp S NRP2 Remote Control Commands SENSe Sensor Commands SENSe lt 1 4 gt POWer TSLot COUNt lt number gt Sets the number of simultaneously measured timeslots in the Timeslot mode see fig ure 6 13 Timeslot parameters Parameters lt number gt int_value Range depending on sensor RST depending on sensor SENSe lt 1 4 gt POWer TSLot EXCLude MID OFFSet TIME lt time_interval gt Together with SENS TSL MID TIME allows a time interval in the timeslots to be blanked out SENS TSL MID OFFS TIME determines the distance from the start of the timeslots to the start of the interval to be blank
434. s Measurement File System 28 00dBm 3 E 28 00dBm 4 j 20 92 dBm Fig 4 23 Arranging windows Labeling windows The windows are numbered from 1 to 4 and are therefore clearly identifiable By default they are labeled by the window s number 1 to 4 The label is displayed in the top left of the title bar Windows can also be assigned a name see Window Name in the File menu The name is displayed in the window s title bar Assigning meaningful names to the windows makes it much easier to recognize the associated measurement A name like Amplifier output is more informative than Channel A or Window 2 The names of the windows are also stored in the setups User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 91 R amp S NRP2 Instrument Functions Displaying measurement results With remote control the window is selected with suffix lt 1 4 gt in the WINDow key word For example command SENSe WINDow2 STAT ON activates window 2 4 3 3 The Windows menu The Windows menu is context sensitive and displays only those menu items that are relevant to the current measurement scenario The menu includes all window functions the instrument provides Open Init 4 Dig DRA Graph4 Resolution dB i 10 1 0 01 0 001 Timeslot 1 4 Fig 4 24 Windows menu 4 3 3 1 Selecting a window The window to be configured is selected by the tab Window Window dialog box tabs 11213 41 Each window is assigned a
435. s SENS TRAC POIN EN ee OFF IS T 5 ms S 61 Trace Realtime OFF Os INT POS S dB TRIG Table 2 2 NADC DOWNLINK Sensor parameter Remote control command in Value short form Trigger Source TRIG SOUR Table 2 3 NADC UPLINK Sensor parameter Remote control command in Value short form Duty Cycle Correction SENS DCYC STAT Dropout Tolerance SENS BURST DTOL User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 368 R amp S NRP2 Standard Configurations Sensor parameter Remote control command in Value short form ow orien en Timegate Offset SENS TGAT OFFS TIME 1 130 us 2 20 130 ms Di y Timegate Length SENS TGAT TIME 1 6 390 ms 2 6 390 ms Table 2 4 PDC DOWNLINK Sensor parameter Remote control command in Value short form User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 369 R amp S NRP2 Standard Configurations Table 2 5 PDC UPLINK Sensor parameter Sensor Mode Aperture Time Duty Cycle Duty Cycle Correction Smoothing Dropout Tolerance Exclude Time Start Exclude Time End Number Of Timeslots Timeslot Width Timeslot Fence Timegate Offset Timegate Length Timegate Fence Trace Offset Time Trace Capture Time Trace Number Of Points Trace Realtime Trigger Delay Trigger Level Trigger Source Trigger Slope Trigger Holdoff Trigger Dropout Time Trigger Hysteresis Table 2 6 DECT Sensor parameter Sensor Mode Aperture Time Duty Cycle U
436. s a result that was measured in the BurstAv mode Such a measured value is not available and thus this command will generate a SCPI error 221 Settings conflict FETCh immediately delivers a measured value if a valid result is available If no mea sured value is available the R amp S NRP2 waits for such a value and then answers the query During this time no other command should be sent to the R amp S NRP2 since the query has to be answered first If a command is sent to the R amp S NRP2 the SCPI error 410 Query interrupted is output However FETCh should wait only if a measurement result is expected since command processing is blocked if a command is not answered If FETCh is executed although no measured values are expected the SCPI error 214 Trigger deadlock is output This may occur if the trigger source is setto BUS or HOLD with low level TRIG SOUR and FETCh immediately follows INIT Example CONF TRIG SOUR BUS INIT FETCh Response 214 Trigger deadlock TRG Or GET Is not possible if FETCh Is waiting C 2 Trigger state system The accuracy of a result largely depends on how accurately the sequence of a measure ment can be determined TheR amp S NRP2 manages a trigger state system to SCPI 1999 0 for each sensor to define the exact start and stop time of a measurement This system defines the sequence of a measurement cycle 4 different device states are defined in the trigger state system implemen
437. s always set if a key on the front panel is pressed CONDition or was pressed EVEN as Bit 15 will never be used Questionable Status Register This register contains information on questionable device states Such states may occur when the device is not operated in compliance with its specifications The register can be read by the queries STATus QUEStionable CONDition or STATus QUEStionable EVENt Table 6 20 Meaning of bits used in the Questionable Status Register owg Notessa Questionable Power Status Register summary bit Corresponds to the summary bit of the Questionable Power Status Register Questionable Window Status Register summary bit Corresponds to the summary bit of the Questionable Windows Status Register Questionable Calibration Status Register summary bit Corresponds to the summary bit of the Questionable Calibration Status Register Bit 15 will never be used POST Failure The built in test of the R amp S NRP2 carried out automatically upon power up has generated an error Standard Event Status and Enable Register ESR ESE The ESR is already defined in the IEEE 488 2 standard It is comparable to the EVENt register of an SCPI register The Standard Event Status Register can be read out by the query ESR The ESE forms the associated ENABle register It can be set by the command ESE and read out by the query ESE User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 305 R amp S NRP2 Remote Control Com
438. s an analog signal with a voltage between O V and 3 3 V It can be used to output a voltage that is proportional to the measured value e g for level regulation or a digital signal for threshold monitoring If configured as trigger output the trigger signal of a power sensor can be supplied In this case the power sensor must be set as trigger master The BNC connector TRIG IN OUT2 can be used either as an external trigger input or as a second analog output The inputs outputs are configured in the System menu see chapter 4 7 2 Setting the analog outputs and the trigger input on page 150 SAA ETHERNET The Ethernet connector is an RJ45 socket for remote controlling the R amp S NRP2 via a network USB USB Universal Serial Bus interface of type B This connector is used for remote control of the instrument see chapter 5 2 Connecting a Controller to the Base Unit on page 170 and to update the firmware of the instrument by means of PC downloads for more information see the service manual chapter 4 IEC 625 IEEE 488 EX The IEC IEEE bus connector to IEEE488 is used to remote control the R amp S NRP2 AC supply and power switch For detailed information on the AC supply see chapter 1 7 Connecting the instrument to the AC supply on page 17 User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 16 R amp S NRP2 1 7 Putting into Operation Connecting the instrument to the AC supply Sensor connectors SENSO
439. s fixed for all multipath power sensors Random Power of a randomly selected sample e a realistic display with signal details Peak Highest power measured peak power Max Hold Displays the highest value measured for each point pixel of the selected display type Average Random Peak On Off Starts stops Max Hold Reset Resets the display and restarts recording 4 5 4 Gates display mode Inthe Gate mode four separately configurable gates for signal evaluation are available The active gate is indicated in the window the info panel shows the measurement results and borders for this gate and the selected trace waveform The settings for Trig gering Filt ering Function and Unit are taken from the Trace display mode and cannot be changed gt Select Gates in the control panel opened via the Window gt Graph gt Display dialog box Trace amp Statistics sensor mode User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 120 R amp S NRP2 Instrument Functions Displaying traces A RUN Gates Display 15 00 dBm dB 15 0 dBidiv 60 00 dem de 100 0 ET Gate 1 E Average Average EE TEE UC IEN Select Peak A ESTE Trace Peak Rug A REZA TES Bav OFF Fig 4 50 Gates display mode Gate channel measurement function display type Average average power within gate Peak peak power within gate Peak Avg peak power average power ratio within gate 1 2 limits of
440. s information on the operations currently being performed by the device while the EVENt register contains information on the operations performed by the device since the last readout of the register These two registers can be read by the queries STATus OPERation CONDition or STATus OPERation EVENt Table 6 22 Meaning of bits used in the Operation Status Register Operation Calibrating Status Register summary bit This bit is set if one of the sensors is being calibrated A Jee Operation Measuring Status Register summary bit This bit is set if one of the sensors is performing a measurement User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 306 R amp S NRP2 6 13 11 6 13 12 Remote Control Commands STATus Operation Trigger Status Register summary bit This bit is set if a sensor is in the WAIT_FOR_TRG state i e waiting for a trigger event Operation Sense Status Register summary bit This bit is set if a sensor is initialized Operation Lower Limit Fail Status Register This bit is set if a displayed value has dropped below a lower limit value Operation Upper Limit Fail Status Register This bit is set if a displayed value has exceeded an upper limit value Not used Bit 15 will never be used Operation Calibrating Status Register The CONDition register contains information as to whether a sensor is currently being calibrated and depending on the configuration of the transition register the EVENt reg
441. s of messages The messages sent on the data lines chapter A Remote control interfaces on page 351 can be divided into two groups e Interface messages e Device dependent messages 5 6 1 Interface Messages Interface messages are transmitted on the data lines of the IEC IEEE bus when the ATN control line is active Interface messages allow the controller and the instrument to com municate and can only be sent by a controller which serves as the IEC IEEE bus con troller Interface commands can be further classified as e common commands User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 173 R amp S NRP2 Remote Control Fundamentals ET Communication on Data Lines e addressed commands Common commands affect all devices connected to the IEC IEEE bus without requiring an address whereas addressed commands only affect devices addressed as a listener The interface messages relevant for the instrument are described in chapter A 1 5 Interface messages on page 353 5 6 2 Device Dependent Messages Commands and Responses Device dependent messages are transmitted on the data lines of the IEC IEEE bus when the ATN control line is not active The ASCII code is used Device dependent messages are Classified according to the direction in which they are sent 5 6 2 1 Commands Commands are messages sent by the controller to the R amp S NRP2 They control the device functions and request information The commands are classified according to the ef
442. s provided by another sensor If the trigger signal is input at the TRIG IN OUT2 connector the con nector must be configured for Trigger In in the System menu see chapter 4 7 2 2 I O 2 interface on page 154 If the trigger signal is provided by another sensor this sensor must be configured as trigger master see below Int Master Int Master The selected power sensor is automatically configured as trigger mas ter and set to internal triggering Any previously defined trigger master is disabled and an external trigger signal at the TRIG IN OUT2 con nector is ignored The trigger master is used as the external trigger source for all other sensors Remote command TRIGger ALL SOURce on page 332 Slope Sets the polarity of the active slope of the externally or internally applied trigger signal see Source E Positive The rising edge of the trigger signal is active N Negative The falling edge of the trigger signal is active Remote command TRIGger lt 1 4 gt SLOPe on page 332 Level Sets the trigger threshold for internal triggering Depending on the slope polarity a rising or a falling edge will execute a trigger event when crossing the threshold Modifications of the level are immediately effective see chapter 3 5 Dialog boxes and their con trols on page 53 Remote command TRIGger ALL LEVel on page 332 Page Switches to the next page of the dialog box Trigger dialog box 2 The second
443. s returned by Calculate block 7 are corrupt Window 8 Power The measured values returned by Calculate block 8 are corrupt Bit 15 will never be used A bit is set if the error 231 Data questionable occurs in the respective calculate block 6 13 19 Questionable Calibration Status Register The EVENt register and the CONDition register contain information as to whether the zero Offset of a sensor is still valid The Questionable Calibration Status Register can be read by the following commands STATus QUEStionable CALibration SUMMary CONDition STATus QUEStionable CALibration SUMMary EVENt Table 6 31 Meaning of bits used in the Questionable Calibration Status Register Sensor A Calibration Zeroing of sensor A was not successful Sensor B Calibration Zeroing of sensor B was not successful Sensor C Calibration Zeroing of sensor C was not successful Sensor D Calibration Zeroing of sensor D was not successful User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 313 R amp S NRP2 6 13 20 6 13 20 1 Remote Control Commands STATus Not used Bit 15 will never be used Use of Status Reporting System For an efficient use of the status reporting system the information it contains has to be transferred to the controller and further processed There are various methods which are described in the following Service Request Use of the Hierarchical Structure Under certain conditions the device m
444. s that may occur in the instrument Negative error numbers are defined in the SCPI standard positive error numbers identify device specific errors The left column of the following table gives the error code In the right column the text of the error message displayed or entered in the error event queue is printed in bold An additional explanation is given below this text 8 2 1 No error Error code Error text returned upon queue query Explanations No error This message is displayed if the error queue is empty 8 2 2 Command Error Command errors causes bit 5 in the ESR to be set Error code Error text returned upon queue query Explanations 100 Command error Command faulty or invalid 101 Invalid character The command contains a character which is invalid for that type 102 Syntax error The command is invalid 103 Invalid separator Command contains an illegal character where a separator is expected 104 Data type error Command contains an invalid data element 108 Parameter not allowed The command contains too many parameters 109 Missing parameter The command contains fewer parameters than required 111 Header separator error The header contains an illegal delimiter 112 Program mnemonic too long The header contains more than 12 characters User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 338 R amp S NRP2 Error Messages and Troubleshooting SCPI Specific Error Messages Error code Error
445. sensor RST depending on sensor Default unit degree User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 279 R amp S NRP2 Remote Control Commands SENSe Sensor Commands SENSe lt 1 4 gt SGAMma CORRection STATe lt state gt Activates deactivates the measured value correction of the reflection coefficient effect of the source gamma Parameters lt state gt ON OFF RST depending on sensor Usage Setting only SENSe lt 1 4 gt STATistics AVERage lt power_value gt Returns the average power value calculated during a statistics measurement CCDF PDF Unit DBM W DBUV Parameters lt power_value gt float_value Default unit DBM Usage Query only SENSe lt 1 4 gt STATistics EXCLude MID OFFSet TIME lt time_interval gt Together with SENS STAT MID TIME allows a time interval within the time window to be blanked out in this interval the data for the statistics is collected SENS STAT MID OFF S determines the distance from the start of the measurement to the start of the interval to be blanked out see also SENSe lt 1 4 gt POWer TGATe lt 1 4 gt EXCLude MID OFFSet TIME on page 274 Parameters lt time_interval gt float_value Range depending on sensor RST depending on sensor Default unit S SENSe lt 1 4 gt STATistics EXCLude MID TIME lt time_interval gt Together with SENS STAT MID OFFS allows a time interval within the time window to be blanked out i
446. sensors to connectors A and B on the R amp S NRP2 and apply an unmodulated signal with a level between 10 dBm and 10 dBm to each of the sen sors Press the PRE SET key twice A window for each sensor is opened with PRE SET The windows indicate the results in dBm from sensors A and B User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 40 R amp S NRP2 Getting Started setting measurement functions Sensor Windows Measurement File System 1 000 GHz 4 03 08m 1 000 GHz 215 cam Fig 2 27 Result windows sensor A and B Select the Measurement menu and then select Function for window 1 of this menu Func tion dbp i Relative Off On Reset Open the Function amp Unit dialog box Function amp Unit Function Fig 2 28 Function Unit dialog box ratio In this dialog box you can select the function used to calculate the result in the selected window For example Ratio A B yields the quotient from the measured power values in channels A and B Select Ratio A B from the drop down list for the measurement function and close the drop down list with MENU 6 Now press the Unit softkey User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 41 R amp S NRP2 d Aux Getting Started Graphically representing power versus time Function amp Unit Function Ratio A B ei Prim Channel Sec Channel 4 Unit Fig 2 29 Function amp Unit dialog box
447. sent possibly in inverted format to the controller as a response to a parallel poll The result can also be read without a parallel poll by the query IST The parallel poll mode is mainly used to quickly find out which of the many devices con nected to the IEC IEEE bus caused an SRQ For this purpose SRE and PPE must be set to the same value Queries Each part of a status register can be read out by queries The queries are specified in the description of the SCPI commands command system STATus The queries always yield a number representing the bit pattern of the queried register This number is eval uated by the controller program Queries are mainly used after an SRQ to obtain detailed information about the cause of the SRQ Error Queue Query Each error in the device causes an entry in the error queue The entries in the error queue are error messages in plain text If a sensor is connected sensor specific errors can be seen via manual control in the menu File Error List or in remote control via Error List Usually the error queue is read with the SCPI query SYSTem ERRor Each SYSTem ERRor query is answered by an entry from the error queue If there are no more error messages in the error queue 0 No error is returned by the device The error queue should be queried in the controller program after each SRQ since the queue entries provide a more precise description of the error cause than the status reg isters In p
448. ser Manual 1173 9140 02 04 short form S3 SENS TSL WIDT SENS TSL MID S SENS TGAT OFFS TIME SENS TGAT TIME TRI Remote control command in short form SENS FUNC SENS APER SENS DEYC Value 16 25 ON O 125 us 135 us 6 667 ms OFF 1 125 us 2 20 125 ms 1 6 406 ms 2 6 406 ms Value 370 R amp S NRP2 Standard Configurations Sensor parameter Duty Cycle Correction Smoothing Dropout Tolerance Exclude Time Start Exclude Time End Number Of Timeslots Timeslot Width Timeslot Fence Timegate Offset Timegate Length Timegate Fence Trace Offset Time Trace Capture Time Trace Number Of Points Trace Realtime Trigger Delay Trigger Level Trigger Source Trigger Slope Trigger Holdoff Trigger Dropout Time Trigger Hysteresis Table 2 7 WCDMA 3GPP FDD Sensor parameter Sensor Mode Aperture Time Duty Cycle Correction Smoothing Filter User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 short form SENS TSL MiD Sl S SENS TGAT OFFS TIME SENS TGAT TIME Remote control command in short form SENS FUNC SENS APER SENS DCYC STAT SENS SMO SENS AVER COUN AUTO 416 7 us 416 667 us 1 15 us 2 5 015 ms 1 348 055 ms 2 348 000 ms 200 us 10 250 ms 30 dBm 61 OFF Os Value POW AVG 371 R amp S NRP2 Standard Configurations Sensor parameter Remote control command in
449. ser normally does not need to alter this setting Corresponds to commands SENSe lt 1 4 gt AVERage COUNt AUTO RESolution on page 265 DISPlay WINDow lt 1 4 gt RESolution on page 245 Example If lt resolution gt is set to 3 or 0 01 three significant points are assigned to the value when it is displayed on a linear scale When a log scale is used 2 places are displayed after the decimal point lt scope size gt Value range depending on sensor Default value depending on sensor Unit The number of test points on the time axis Corresponds to command SENSe lt 1 4 gt TRACe POINts on page 291 lt source_list gt Value range On n m Default value 1 or 1 2 n and m may assume the values 1 2 3 or 4 With this list sensors are assigned to the primary and possibly to the secondary channel of a calculate block The number for each sensor is preceded by the character and the entire expression is enclosed in parentheses Examples 1 is used for sensor A The values 3 2 are set for lt source_list gt Sensor C is assigned to the pri mary channel and sensor B to the secondary channel The calculate blocks proc ess the primary channel together with the secondary depending on the desired function If RATio is selected as the calculation function the result from the calculate block is the ratio of the values measured by sensor C and sensor B User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 214 R amp
450. ses Responses are messages sent by the device to the controller after a query This may be measurement results for instance or device status information Structure and Syntax of device dependent Messages SCPI Standard SCPI Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments describes a standardized command set for the programming of instruments regardless of the type of instrument or manufacturer The objective of the SCPI Consortium is to standardize device specific commands as far as possible For this purpose a device model has been developed which defines identical functions within a device or between different devices Command systems have been created and assigned to these functions so that it is possible to address identical functions with the same commands The command systems have an hierarchical structure The SCP command tree figure 5 1 shows this tree structure using details from the SENSe command system which selects the measurement to be per formed by the device Most of the other examples of command syntax and structure are taken from this command system SCPI is based on the IEEE 488 2 standard i e it uses the same syntax elements and the common commands defined in IEEE 488 2 The syn tax of the responses is subjected to somewhat stricter rules than those specified by the IEEE 488 2 standard chapter 5 7 4 Responses to Queries on page 179 Command Structure Commands consist of a header and usually one or several param
451. sition interval the samples are individually weighted prior to taking the mean Samples at the beginning and at the end of the acquisition interval are downscaled whereas the size of samples in the center of the acquisition interval is increased von Hann window This way fluctuations of the measurement result are reduced almost independently from the degree of the aperture time being matched to the modulation period The only aspect that must be considered is that the aperture time has to be set to at least two or three modulation pulse periods in order to reach an efficient operation Set aperture time accordingly particularly if you are using R amp S NRP Z81 85 86 wideband power sensors which feature very low default aperture times The noise content of the measurement result is enlarged by approximately 30 when smoothing is activated To compensate for this the averaging number should be doubled compared to non active smoothing Therefore smoothing may be not sufficient when measuring very low powers Dropout tolerance The Dropout parameter facilitates the identification of the burst end of modulated signals e g NADC Without this parameter the end of the burst might erroneously be detected within the burst owing to the considerable modulation specific power drops of such sig nals Dropout is set at least for the duration of modulation dependent power drops within the burst thus the end of the burst cannot be detected until t
452. sor menu opens Mode 4 Offset Filter Trigger Fig 2 7 Sensor menu User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 31 R amp S NRP2 Getting Started SS AA Measuring average power Cont Av mode All sensor related settings are made in the Sensor menu It determines type and details of data acquisition 2 Press the left side of the Offset softkey The Offset dialog box opens Offsets in dB for compensating external signal losses or gains for example by attenuator or amplifiers can be set in this dialog box Offset 0 000 dB Global Table 1 Table Edit Table 5 Parameter Device Fig 2 8 Offset dialog box 3 Activate the entry for the global offset Positive values are for correcting losses and negative values for gains 4 Ifyou have an attenuator at hand enter its value and connect the attenuator between the sensor and the signal source otherwise just enter 10 dB 5 Confirm the entry with MENU 6 Activate the global offset correction by pressing the right side of the associated soft key Offset 10 000 dB Global Table 1 Table Edit Table S Parameter Device Fig 2 9 Offset dialog box Global activated Tip Factors which are not or only minimally depending on frequency can be cor rected in this way 7 Press the MENU hardkey twice to exit the dialog box and the menu If you have connected an attenuator and entered its attenuation the R amp S NRP2 will
453. sponds to command SENSe lt 1 4 gt TIMing EXCLude STOP on page 283 User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 213 R amp S NRP2 Remote Control Commands High Level Measurement Commands CONFigure MEASure READ and FETCh expected value gt Value range float_value DEF According to the SCPI 1999 0 standard a value in the order of the expected measured value can be specified This allows the device to set an adequate mea surement range This is not required in the R amp S NRP2 because the measurement is performed simultaneously in all measurement ranges Any value can therefore be specified for the expected_value parameter especially the DEFault value The value is always ignored lt no_slots gt Value range depending on sensor Default value depending on sensor Unit Number of timeslots to be measured in the Timeslot mode Corresponds to com mand SENSe lt 1 4 gt POWer TSLot COUNt on page 277 lt resolution gt Value range 1 0 1 0 01 0 001 1 2 3 4 Default value 3 0 01 Specifies the limit up to which the measurement result should be free of noise The R amp S NRP2 tries to set an adequate window for the averaging filter This does not affect the accuracy of the measured data The window can only be set if auto matic setting of the filter window has not been disabled by the user SENSe AVERage COUNt AUTO OFF Since the automatic setting is activated by CONFigure and MEASure as a default the u
454. st Enable SRE register The STB receives its information from the Standard Event Status Register ESR also defined by IEEE 488 2 and the associated Standard Event Status Enable ESE Register as well as from the SCPI defined Operation Status Register and the Questionable Status Register which contain detailed information on the device and from the Device Status Register The status reporting system also includes the IST flag Individual STatus and the Parallel Poll Enable Register PPE assigned to it The IST flag like the SRQ combines the complete device status in a single bit The PPE has the same function for the IST flag as the SRE has for the service request The output buffer output queue contains the messages the device returns to the con troller It is not part of the status reporting system but since it determines the value of the MAV bit in the STB it is also shown in figure 6 17 Overview on structure of Status Report ing System Structure of SCPI Status Register Each SCPI register consists of five 16 bit registers which have different functions see figure 6 16 Standard SCPI status register The individual bits are independent of each other i e each hardware status is assigned a bit number which is the same for all five registers For instance bit 4 of the operation status register is assigned to the hardware status Measurement in all five registers Bit 15 the most significant bit is set to zero in all registers Th
455. starts a measurement and always outputs a result that is stored in the output queue The following settings are performed e INIT CONT OFF e TRIG SOUR IMM e TRIG COUN 1 eo TRIG DEL AUTO ON e SENS AVER STAT ON e SENS AVER COUN AUTO ON e SENS AVER COUN AUTO TYPE RES e SENS AVER COUN AUTO RES 3 e CALC MATH SENS1 e CALC REL STAT OFF The command can also be used with a list of parameters which are separated by a comma and allow the measurement accuracy and the addressed sensor to be selected MEAS DEF resolution gt source lior The first parameter should always assume the DEF value it is ignored and is available only for reasons of compatibility User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 379 R amp S NRP2 Programming Measurements C 1 2 C 1 3 Measuring with high level commands The second parameter may assume the values 1 2 3 and 4 It specifies the number of places up to which the measurement result should be noise free With linear units the setting corresponds to the number of significant places that are noise free with logarith mic units 1 2 3 and 4 correspond to a resolution of 1 0 1 0 01 and 0 001 number of decimal places With a lt resolution gt of 3 two decimal places are thus noise free with logarithmic display The default setting is 3 The third parameter selects a sensor It has the syntax n where n can assume the values 1 to 4 The default setting is 1 Relative measurements
456. state must be set to OFF OUTPut RECorder lt 1 2 gt STATe on page 258 Voltage at the analog outputs The voltage at the analog outputs does not track the power fed to the sensor continuously but rather at discrete points of time Every time the sensor has transmitted a new mea sured value to the base unit i e after an aquisition has been completed chapter 4 2 3 Filter averaging on page 79 the analog output voltage is adjusted to the new value In the ContAv mode you can influence the rate at which the voltage is updated by setting the aperture time to a convenient value see chapter 4 2 1 2 Continuous average power measurements on page 66 The time between two updates of the output voltage is approximately twice the length of the aperture time The lower limit of this length of time during which the R amp S NRP2 can still regularly update the output voltage depends on the User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 156 R amp S NRP2 Instrument Functions 4 7 3 4 7 4 4 7 4 1 system settings number of sensors connected and their measurement modes With one sensor connec ted operated in the ContAv mode it is about 1 ms Switching on the averaging filter does not affect the refresh rate but the speed at which the output voltage changes can be expected to slow down as a result of the filter effect For applications having high requirements on the dynamic behavior of the analog outputs for example leveling loops it
457. sult processing All important parameters for configuring data acquisition are therefore entered in the Sensor menu The sensor menu provides access to all parameters concerning sensor settings like measuring mode filter offset gamma correction level range and trigger settings The Sensor menu contains the following items e Setting the measurement mode on page 64 e Offset correction on page 76 and Filter averaging on page 79 e Measurement ranges on page 82 e Effect of the RF source on page 84 e Trigger settings on page 85 e Trigger sequence control on page 89 some of the parameters listed above are not available for certain types of sensor Setting the measurement mode The measurement mode is selected and configured in the Mode dialog box Regarding power measurement modes find some background information to the follow ing topics at the end of this section see chapter 4 2 1 7 Background information on power measurement on page 72 e Acquisition interval on page 72 e Dropout tolerance on page 74 e Smoothing modulated signals on page 74 e Timing diagram of burst signals on page 74 e Timing diagram of T Slot Av signals on page 75 Mode dialog box gt Select Mode in the Sensor menu User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 64 R amp S NRP2 1 1 Mode T Correction 4 Trigger 4 Instrument Functions Data acquisition and parameters Sensor Windows Measurement File System
458. t See chapter 3 5 Dialog boxes and their controls on page 53 for more information on operating the dialog box functions Menu layout This section describes the menu provided by the R amp S NRP2 The meter displays the menu names in the menu bar at the top of the screen The menus are selected by the top most rocker switch The following figure shows the main menus of the R amp S NRP2 which are then briefly summarized The menu functions are described in the operating manual chapter 4 Instrument Func tions on page 61 User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 51 R amp S NRP2 Manual Operation Menu layout Sensor menu Windows menu Measurement File menu System menu menu R amp S MAF Z Mode 4 Preset Remote Func Y Setu Geet Dr tion duu Recall Save WE Relative Standard Power Ref PM E i OFF On Reset Recall Off On Resolution dB S e Sensor System F Correction RefVal Limits Error List ion eem 0 001 b Info Info Trigger du Timeslot BR Aux Val Reset 4 Window Name 3 Misc Test 4 Sensor menu All sensor settings can be made using the Sensor menu The type and details of data acquisition can be specified with this menu See chapter 4 2 Data acquisition and parameters on page 64 for a detailed descrip tion of the Sensor menu Windows menu The Windows menu is used to configure windows and the result display in the windo
459. t Table 1 2 Common commands Command Effect on device DCL Device Clear Aborts all commands and messages in progress The TRIGger sys tem goes to the IDLE state input and output queues are cleared and the parser is reset and waits for the beginning of a new command When INITiate CONT ON Is set anew measurement is started This command makes the device ready to receive commands IFC Interface Clear Resets the interfaces to their initial condition LLO Local Lockout Manual switchover to LOCAL is disabled Local LockOut deactivates the front panel keypad with the exception of the power key Co In the LLO state it is possible to return to the LOCAL mode only by remote control GTL command or switching the R amp S NRP2 off and on again SPE Serial Poll Enable Ready for serial poll SPD Serial Poll Disable End of serial poll PPU Parallel Poll Unconfigure End of parallel poll query status Addressed commands Addressed commands are in the code range 0x00 to OxOF hex They only affect devices addressed as a listener Table 1 3 Addressed commands Command Effect on device SDC Selected DeviceClear Interrupts processing of received commands and sets the command pro cessing software to a defined initial state This command does not change the device setting GTL Go to Local Change to local mode manual control PPC Parallel Poll Configure Configures device for parallel poll Ethernet For remo
460. t TG orRtE Late 221 HREAUD I1L SSTSGCAL arltbOWert TGlorhl Oe 221 HREAUD I1L SSTSGCAL arlfbOWert TG orGUM 221 HREAID I1lL SSTSGCAL arlfbOWert TG orGUMREL atve 221 User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 413 R amp S NRP2 List of Commands EE READ lt 1 8 gt SCALar POWer TG orGuWWn 221 READ lt 1 8 gt ESCALar POWer AVG Loci n 220 HREAUD I1L SSTSGCAL art bOWerlf AVGlDiltterence 220 HREAUD I1lL SSTSGCAL art bOWerlf AvVGlDitterenceHEl atve 220 HREAUD I1L SSTSGCAL art bOWerlf AVGIhRATo 220 HREAUD I1lL SSTSGCAL art bOWerlf AVGIRATohREL atve 220 HREAID I1lL SSTSGCAL art bOWerlf AVGIRE El echon 220 HREAID I1lL SSTSGCAL art bOWerlf AVGIREL atve 220 READ lt 1 8 gt SCALar POWer l AVG RLOSS occcccocccccocccccococonoconononononononcnnononcnnnnononononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnncnnnnnanos 220 HREAUD IlL SSTSGCAL arlfbOWerlf AVGISUM 220 HREAUD I1lL SSTSGCAL art bOWerlf AVGISUMREL atve 220 READ lt M1 8 gt ESCALA GAR UR ER UE 220 READ anio EE 211 SERVICE DISPla OVER OA E 293 E Ae RE e ele e ba TE 293 SERVice lt 1 4 gt CALIbration TEMP DAU A orita id 293 SERVice lt 1 4 gt CALibration TEST 293 VICES Teal FC OUN seirian iaaa aE E EEE EE aa AEA TERE ERAEN 294 ll le HE e EE 294 SERVICS lt 1 4 SERRO S cui as 294 OER VIC ST A e UR e 294 SY gt lem BEEP NOTV EE 318 SYSTem BEEPer NOTify OVERloaod ccccccooococccoccconcocconcccconononnncnnononnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnananennnns 318 So tem DER POROTOS t
461. t Smoothing of Modu IS 1 4 SMO STAT lated Signals IS 1 4 TSL EXCL MID OFFS User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 186 R amp S NRP2 Remote Control Fundamentals i A gt _ ____ _ _ _ _ _ _ ___ __ 2 _ _ _ _ _ _ gt _ ____ _____ _ l Correspondence between Remote Control and Manual Control Menu item in manual control SCPI command in short form OFFS TIME EXCL MID O0OFFS EXCL MID TIME Sensor gt Offset Global SENS 1 4 CORR OFFS Sensor gt Offset Global State CORRSOFFS STAT Sensor Offset Table SENS TL 2 2CORR FDOT Sensor Offset Table State SENS CORRIFDOT lt STAT Sensor gt Filter gt Auto Sensor gt Filter gt Avg No Sensor gt Filter gt Reset Sensor gt Filter gt Auto Once Sensor gt Filter gt Auto Config gt Normal Sensor gt Filter gt VideoBW Sensor gt Filter gt Auto Contfig gt Fixed Noise Sensor gt Filter gt Auto Config Fixed Noise gt Ref Timeslot User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 SENS AVER COUN AUTO In Trace mode SENS 1 4 TRAC COUN AUTO SENS 1 4 AVER In Trace mode SENS ls 4 5TRACS SENS 1 4 AVER In Trace mode SENS 1 4 TRAC SENS 1 4 AVER In Trace mode SENS 1 4 TRAC SENS 1 4 AVER In Trace mode SENS L 4 2 TRAC TYPE RES SENS BWID VID SENS BWID VID LIST SENS 1 4 AVER
462. t of the first power pulse within the Time analysis window i e the time when the signal passes through the medial reference power level with rising or falling edge referenced to the delayed trigger event User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 128 R amp S NRP2 Instrument Functions Displaying traces Pulse Measurements Power Pulse Measurements 5 Minimum Average 1Period Fig 4 57 Pulse Measurements Power tab The pulse power parameters to be displayed in the info panel are selected on the Power tab Top Base Indication of the power of the pulse top base defined in the Pulse Power Measurements Config tab Average 1 Indication of the average power of the signal The visible trace length period must exceed one cycle of the waveform The gate length is arbitrary Max Peak Indication of the maximum power measured within the analysis window Minimum Indication of the minimum power measured within the analysis window Pos Neg Indicates the relative amount of positive negative overshoot The indi Overshoot cates value depends on the Related to Power Voltage setting in the pulse measurement Config menu Pulse Measurements Config Pulse Measurements 5 Config Ref s related to HighRef 90 4 Algorithm Reference Low Ref 10 4 Set to Defaults Fig 4 58 Pulse Measurements Config tab The Config tab contains the threshold parameters to define the high mid an
463. t the TTL output Note The OUTP TTL ACT and OUTP TTL FAIL commands are identical except for the opposite meaning of the parameters Parameters lt mode gt HIGH The value set via OUTP TTL LVOL is applied if the measured value causes a limit violation at the TTL output LOW The value set via OUTP TTL HVOL is applied if the measured value causes a limit violation at the TTL output RST HIGH User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 259 R amp S NRP2 Remote Control Commands OUTPut OUTPut TTL FEED lt calculate_block gt Sets the calculate block whose limit handling controls the TTL voltage If the measured value of this calculate block violates a limit and limit monitoring is active the voltage specified in table 6 14 Voltage at TTL output first line is output Parameters lt calculate_block gt string Range CALC1 LIM CALC2 LIM CALC3 LIM CALC4 L IM RST CALC1 LIM OUTPut TTL HVOLtage lt high_voltage gt Sets the high voltage for the TTL output Parameters lt high_voltage gt float_value Range OVto3 3 V RST 3 3 V Default unit V OUTPut TTL LVOLtage lt low_voltage gt Sets the low voltage for the TTL output Note The value for the lower TTL level may be greater than the value for the upper TTL level Parameters lt low_voltage gt float_value Range OV to 3 3 V RST OV Default unit V OUTPut TTL STATe lt state gt Activates deactivates the TTL operating mode of the OUT1
464. t_value Range depending on sensor RST depending on sensor Default unit only the unit degree is accepted SENSe lt 1 4 gt SAMPling lt sampling_rate gt If the signal to be measured has modulation sections just above the video bandwidth of the sensor used measurement errors might be caused due to aliasing effects In this case the sampling rate of the sensor can be set to a safe lower value FREQ2 However the measurement time required to obtain noise free results is extended compared to the normal sampling rate FREQ1 Parameters lt sampling_rate gt FREQ1 FREQ2 RST depending on sensor SENSe lt 1 4 gt SGAMma MAGNitude lt magnitude gt The R amp S NRP2 can perform a measured value correction taking the complex reflection coefficient source gamma of the signal source into account SENS lt 1 4 gt SGAM CORR STAT ON must be set The magnitude of the reflection coefficient is set with SENS lt 1 4 gt SGAM MAGN Parameters lt magnitude gt float_value Range depending on sensor RST depending on sensor SENSe lt 1 4 gt SGAMma PHASe lt phase gt The R amp S NRP2 can perform a measured value correction taking the complex reflection coefficient source gamma of the signal source into account SENS lt 1 4 gt SGAM CORR STAT ON must be set The phase angle of the reflection coefficient is set with SENS lt 1 4 gt SGAM PHAS Parameters lt phase gt float_value Range depending on
465. tab All the parameters settings in the Window dialog box act on the selected window Remote command DISPlay WINDow SELect on page 246 With remote command there is a distinction between selecting the active window and selecting the window to be configured The active window is selected using command DISPlay WINDows SELect The window to be configured is selected with the suffix of the WINDows keyword For example DISPLay WINDow3 NAME defines the label of win dow 3 4 3 3 2 Using and arranging windows The labeling of the second softkey in the Windows menu is context sensitive and changes according to the status of the active window Window Window Window Fig 4 25 Windows menu softkeys for controlling the windows User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 92 R amp S NRP2 Instrument Functions Displaying measurement results Open Opens the selected window with its previous settings i e Open restores a measure ment that has been removed from the display Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt 1 4 gt STATe on page 247 Init Initializes the selected window i e Init configures a completely new measurement with preset values Close Closes the selected window The sizes of the remaining windows are adjusted accord ingly Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt 1 4 gt STATe on page 247 Expand Expands all open windows to the full display height Only the selected window is disp
466. tarted ESOS A Rel fF 0 484dB a 4 2 458dB 1 460 35 Statistics E A Rel S 1 424 dB bw m dB E 1553 Displays the longterm mean the standard deviation and the total num ber of measurement results which have been evaluated since the search for statistic values has been started Remote command CALCulate lt 1 8 gt DATA on page 225 CALCulate lt 1 8 gt MAXimum DATA on page 232 CALCulate lt 1 8 gt MINimum DATA on page 232 CALCulate lt 1 8 gt PTPeak DATA on page 232 CALCulate lt 1 8 gt MEAN DATA on page 232 CALCulate lt 1 8 gt SDEViation DATA on page 234 CALCulate lt 1 8 gt COUNt DATA on page 225 DISPlay WINDow lt 1 4 gt AVALue on page 242 4 4 4 Relative measurement The Relative function allows you to relate a power or a power ratio to a reference value The reference value can be a previously stored reading or an entered value The R amp S NRP2 calcu lates the ratio of measurement result and reference value and the rel ative deviation of the measured value from the reference value and indicates the result User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 110 R amp S NRP2 Instrument Functions nee EE _ Configuring measurements 4 4 4 1 Relative The Relative settings activate or deactivate relative power measurement or assign a measurement result as reference Off On Reset Relates a power or a power ratio to a reference value Off Absolute power measurement
467. taste oo tado amo Dan 204 MEMO TABES MOVE cers cee a beeen opticas 254 MEMON TABLE RE SO uraren E A accidents 254 MEMON TABLE SE Leo aaa anne ae ene en eon ene Se re ee eee eee eon eer 254 OUTPUERE e Ee 2 EE 255 OUTPutRECorder lt 1 22 gt ld re be UN 256 OU TburRtCGorder z 1 2 UM LOWerbOWer 256 OU TburRtE CG order 2 UMrLOWerchAaiwo 256 OU TburRtCGorder z 1 2 UM Uber 257 OU TburRt CG order 2 UM Uber ber 257 User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 412 R amp S NRP2 List of Commands EE OU TburRtCGorder z 1 2 UM Ubberhato 257 SUR ie Ee A KC E KE 258 OUTPULROSC illator CALibration READ ii 258 OU TburROSChlator CA braton We 258 OU T PUCROSCGIllator RH PATO levantan 258 QUTPUETRIGOSIES VA Te les tcciccnierssonitotic ropa ricos oienrto sctscccntesencmecamnecocauenanecoessaaszeeieeese 261 CUTRUETTLACTW nta 259 A PA A e eo o A 259 A A tne ek nc ee ee eee eee ee eee ee 260 CUTPUETTEAMO PO E 260 OT PU eh VOLS aia 260 PUTRU TTE E o sesos 260 READS 1 0 AR Ray POWEentAVE Losantos dada 221 HREAID I1lL Ss ARavl POWerll AvVGlDiltterence 221 HREAUD I1lL Ss ARavl POWWerll AvGlDiltterencehREl atve 221 READ lt 1 83 gt ARRayPOWenTAVGTRA Tiida 221 HREAID I1lL Ss ARavl POWerll AVGIRATohREL atve 221 HREAID I1lL Ss ARavl POWerll AVGIREFlLecnon 221 HREAID I1lL Ss ARavl POWerll AVGIREL atve 221 READ lt 1 8 gt ARRay POWer l AVG RLOSS occcccoocccccocccnccccnnccoconcoocnnononcnononnnnnnnnnnnnnnonononnnonnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnns 221 HREAI
468. tatistics display oooooccccooononnocoooo 137 Max Settling Time ooonnnncconncnnccccononcncnonancncnonancnnnonanenos 82 Measurement men NEE 97 Measuring av burst power Burst Av mode 46 Measuring average power Cont Av mode 29 Memory EXPANSIONS ENEE 158 E e E 164 Meter Scaling EN 96 Miscellaneous parameters for manual measurements 159 Mobile radio Standards oocccoocccoccccocccnconoconnncnoncnnoncnnnnns 142 Mode Sensor Trigger cecccccocacicnniconccrinacicr ninia 86 N e E ee eee 352 Negative overshoot occcccoccccoccconoconocononncnnonarnccnononnonons 129 Noise Content cccccccccsssseeeeceeceeseecseeseeeeseeseeeesanageeess 82 Nominal Width E 70 Nominal Width T slot coocoooonccnncccocooccnnonncnnncnnnnnnnnnos 133 Nonvolatile RAM is empty or failure of EEPROM occurred PP E EE PEE PE ee ee eee 21 No Of Timeslots oocccccconoconccononcoconcncnnarenononnnccnnnnnnanenos 70 No of Timeslots T SlOt oococccconcnnoccccnoconononanononnnanos 133 Not Data Accepted occccccocccononoconoccononanonanonononcnonanonos 352 Not Ready For Data a 352 es Seen ne o S 352 O Offset Eege EE 84 Offset el EE 78 0 StS A on 21 Opening windows onccccooccnccnnconcconcnnnnnconcnnononcnnnnnncnnnnonannnns 93 Operation Complete cooocccoccccccnccoconococnnoncnonnnnnncononons 196 Option ee 157 Options installed E 158
469. tats Display D I ech 100 000 Zei 0 00 Ze 25 00 dBm 5 000 dGldiu 5 00 dBm Peak 0 377 dEm Average 398 dEm Y 20 000 d m 90 9557 Y 100 000 Fig 4 61 Statistics display mode with one trace 1 RUN Stat s Display 1 000 0 00 di El Conf E Grid A d N E 50 00 dEm 5 000 dEldiw 0 0 Peak 2 2 404 dBm ALIGH Average Z8 Z270 dBm Stat s Y 20 000 dm 0 000 0 001 Func 38 996 dBm A POF Fig 4 62 Statistics display mode with two traces AWGN From the gathered samples four parameters for each trace are indicated in the info panel e the peak power e the average power e the measurement result at the position of the power x marker e the power value related to the result y marker In case of AWGN only the measurement result at the position of the power x marker is indicated Only in the case of a non synchronized aquisition interval Cont mode the indicated average power value relates to the complete signal Otherwise the average power within the selected gate is indicated Controls in statistics display mode Display Selects another view see chapter 4 5 2 Trace window on page 114 User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 135 R amp S NRP2 Instrument Functions Displaying traces Config Grid Activates the additional tabular display of values or opens the subdialog to configure the diagram and to n
470. te block 1 User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 200 R amp S NRP2 Remote Control Commands Common Commands to IEEE 488 2 SENS ENS S SENS SENS SENS lt 1 S S ommand SENS 4 gt AC RANG 4 gt AC RANG CLEV ST 4 gt CORR DCYC STAT 4 gt CORR FDOT 4 gt CORR FDOT STAT 4 gt CORR OFFS STAT 4 gt CORR SPD SEL User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 OFF Depending on sensor lt NR gt Depending on sensor SENS 4 gt SENS AVER ON OFF Depending on sensor lt NR1 gt Depending on sensor ON OFF Depending on sensor R gt Depending on sensor A Z lt NR gt Depending on sensor lt NR1 gt Depending on sensor lt NR gt Depending on sensor RES NSR Depending on sensor MOV PRES and SYSTem PRESet REP RST lt string gt Depending on sensor Depending on sensor ON OFF Depending on sensor ENS T ON OFF Depending on sensor ENS lt I SENS 4 gt CORR OFFS lt NR gt Depending on sensor SENS lt 1 ON OFF Depending on sensor IR1 gt Depending on sensor AN Z ENS lt 1 SERV lt 4 gt DISP OVER OFF Display overload warnings SENS lt 1 4 gt FREQ 201 R amp S NRP2 Remote Control Commands Commo n Commands to IEEE 488 2 1 SENS lt SENS lt OFFS 1 4 gt FUNC 4 gt TGAT lt
471. te Control Commands 6 8 FORMat Parameters lt upper_limit gt float_value RST 30 DBM Default unit DBM DISPlay WINDow lt 1 4 gt TSLot lt timeslot gt Sets the displayed timeslot if the primary or secondary channel is operated in the Time slot mode Parameters lt timeslot gt int_value Range depending on sensor RST 1 FORMat The FORMat command system sets the format of numeric data measured values that is exchanged beween the remote control computer and the R amp S NRP2 if high level mea surement commands are used POR Vat READINGS BORDE ocn ii iia a 248 FORMat READings DATA c cecceccescescecceccecceccersecceccecsaccaesaesaecaesaesarsacsaceatsaseateaeeseeseees 248 SS EE 249 FORMat READings BORDer lt mode gt Influences the order of bytes in 64 bit binary data Parameters lt mode gt NORMal SWAPped NORMal The 1st byte is the MSB most significant byte the 8th byte the LSB least significant byte This fulfills the Big Endian convention Big Endian the big end comes first SWAPped The 1st byte is the LSB least significant byte the 8th byte the MSB most significant byte This fulfills the Little Endian convention RST NORMal FORMat READings DATA lt type gt Specifies whether numeric data is sent as block data in binary form REAL or as character strings in plain text ASCIT User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 248 R amp S NRP2 Remote Control Commands
472. te control via a TCP IP based LAN the R amp S NRP2 can be fitted with an optional 10 100BaseT Ethernet interface option R amp S NRP2 B4 The female connector is located on the rear panel of the R amp S NRP2 Via this interface a controller can remote control the R amp S NRP2 by means of the power meter s SCPI commands using the VXI11 protocol TCP IP instrument protocol specification version 1 0 released on July 17 1995 by the VXIbus Consortium ETHERNET Fig 1 2 Ethernet connector User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 354 R amp S NRP2 Remote control interfaces Ethernet A 2 1 VXI11 protocol The VXI11 protocol uses ONC RPC open network computing remote procedure calls making it possible to call R amp S NRP2 functions at the source code level as if they were running locally on the controller The table below shows the relationships of the relevant protocol layers in the OSI reference model Application VXI11 Network Instrument Data Link Ethernet 802 3 Physical 10 100BASE T Fig 1 3 The VXI11 protocol stack in the OSI reference model A VXI11 remote control connection consists of three channels core abort and interrupt which can be used to set up as many links as desired The concept of links makes it possible to connect a network instrument client in a controller with several logical devices in a host computer via a single VXI11 remote control connection A link is then set up to each logical device It is also possib
473. ted in the R amp S NRP2 User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 385 R amp S NRP2 Programming Measurements Trigger state system IDLE The R amp S NRP2 is in the idle state and performs no measurement On power up of the R amp S NRP2 it is in the LOCAL mode and in the IDLE state All connected sensors are set to INIT CONT ON to allow measurements to be continuously dis played Thus the IDLE state is exited and the instrument is again in this state if INIT CONT OFF is sent via the remote control INITIATED This state is a transition state which is exited immediately after it has been entered It has been defined so as to allow the user to decide whether the next measurement cycle is to be immediately started INIT CONT ON or all cycles defined via TRIG COUNT have not yet been processed or the R amp S NRP2 returns to the IDLE state The state is only entered internally and is not noticed by the user WAIT_FOR_TRG The R amp S NRP2 waits for a trigger event The source for this event is set via TRIG SOUR When the event defined in this way occurs the enters the MEASURING state As long as the R amp S NRP2 measures data it remains in this state and exits it immediately after completion of the measurement or TRIG IMM TRIG IMM or Trigger signal TRIG IMM ABORT RST PowerOn Fig 3 1 Overview of basic relationships in the trigger state system The figure above shows the basic structure of the trigger system It is possibl
474. tering settings on page 118 All average power values are obtained from a three stage averaging process First a mean value is formed for the acquisition interval given in table 4 2 either by weighted or unweighted summation of samples A second measurement with reversed polarity of the detector output signal is then per formed to suppress offset voltages and 1 f noise of the amplifier A first result is formed by subtracting the second measured value from the first measured value The sequence of two consecutive measurements is repeated N times The average value which is obtained from the individual measurement results is output The number N is the aver aging number AvgNo To obtain a high output data rate averaging in manual mode is performed continuously i e a new result is fed into the averaging filter after two acquisitions have been evaluated The oldest result is taken out of the averaging filter and a new average value is calculated The averaging number can be selected automatically or it can be manually set to a fixed value As a starting point automatic filtering should always be used If the automatically selected filter setting proves to be not adequate the averaging number can be in de creased manually Two autofilter operating modes are provided e Normal The Normal mode finds a balance between measurement time and display noise As an additional parameter display resolution can be used to adjust the filter
475. the I O dialog box gt To open the I O dialog box select I O in the System menu User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 150 R amp S NRP2 Instrument Functions system settings Pass Fail Mode Trigdut OFF Window i O Y Equivalent 20 000 dBm 4 3 Y Equivalent 20 000 dBm Fig 4 80 I O dialog box For background information on the analog outputs see chapter 4 7 2 3 Voltage at the analog outputs on page 156 4 7 2 1 Outil interface This section describes the functions of the analog signal output at the OUT1 TRIG OUT connector and their settings IFO 2 Analog Pass Fail Mode tTrigdut OFF Window O Y Equivalent 20 000 dBm 3 Y Equivalent 20 000 dBm Fig 4 81 I O dialog box Out1 tab Mode Selects the function of the OUT1 TRIG OUT connector Analog Pass Fail Trig Out and Off are available Note For remote control only suffix 1 or no suffix is allowed in the command header for the setting the OUT 1 TRIG OUT connector functions Analog Mode The output provides an analog voltage which is proportional to the value displayed in the selected window e g Window 1 User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 151 R amp S NRP2 Instrument Functions system settings Pass Fail Trig Out OFF Window O Y Equivalent 20 000 dBm 3 Y Equivalent 20 000 dBm Fig 4 82 Out1 mode Analog Remote command OUTPut RECorder lt 1 2 gt ST
476. the Cont Av mode continuous average power User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 61 R amp S NRP2 Instrument Functions 4 1 2 4 1 2 1 Main Settings e absolute power measurement in dBm e one window per channel opened e offset O dB e automatic filtering normal mode PRE SET does not reset the following settings e offset tables e address of the remote interface e SCPI error queue e selection of the beeper e brightness setting of the display e test limits for sensor test SCPI command RST RST On page 198 Default state for remote control operation or SYSTem PRESet on page 323 Default state for manual operation Frequency hardkey FREQ is used to set the carrier frequency of the applied signal This corrects any fre quency dependent effects introduced by the sensor If the sensor is to reach the specified measurement accuracy the signal frequency must be entered Frequency dialog box Frequency Fig 4 1 Frequency dialog box A B C D Tabs for selecting the sensor Note In remote control commands select the sensor with the suffix in command SENSe lt 1 4 gt le choose suffix 1 for channel A channel 2 for B and so on Frequency Field for frequency entries with the units KHz MHz or GHz Remote command SENSe lt 1 4 gt FREQuency CW on page 270 User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 62 R amp S NRP2 Instrument Functions Main Settings 4 1 3 Zero hardkey ZERO starts the
477. the active gate start and stop time At length of the active gate The currently active gate is indicated in the info panel and marked by colored lines as shown in the graph above Select Trace defines for which trace the parameters are indicated in the info panel see graph below Table 4 8 Gates display mode with two traces a ates ona A Lamm Gates splay 15 00 dBm dB 15 0 dBidiv 15 00 dBm dB 15 0 dBidiv we AETI RE re d j f di d Wir Ll h d ck di d Config ES RE PosScale q i 8 L vn y A a O El AAA Ct II Ml i i ji tir ve 4 hp i gi j m 6000 dEm dB 100 0 psp 6000 dEm dB 100 0 psp Dara Gate i B Average Gate EBay 7 Hay 4 1 Average 7 758dBm 4 33 64005 Select Bavl TAaw 2 634 dB fj 33 6400 Select Peak 7 047 dBm 7 309 967 ps Trace ERES Trace Peak Avg 0 711 dB A ao Bau BA H 2 456 3277 ps Bav BA Gate measurement is performed for trace B Select Gate measurement is performed for both traces Trace Bav Select Trace B A the ratio is indicated Note that the power of each trace is averaged over the gate length before the power ratio of the two traces is calculated OC The start of the gate 1 2 relates to the delayed trigger event Os white line The four available gates are common for all diplayed waveforms Individual gates for specific channels Sensors can only be configured in numeric T gateAV mode
478. the filter settings Suffix 1 4 denotes the sensor channel When the sensors are connected to the R amp S NRP2 they inform the device about the SENSe and TRIGger commands supported and about the value ranges for parameters This applies to both numeric and text parameters For this reason no fixed ranges are specified with these commands the ranges can be obtained from the respective sensor manual SENSe lt 1 4 gt AUXiliary c cccccccceccecceccocecceceecesseccecseceecesescesccsccsesaccaesausceeesceassarsaeeacees 263 ISENSecHl AstAVERage COUN 264 ISENSecHil AstAVERage COUNGAUTO 264 ISENSecil AstAVERage COUNAUTOMTlMe 265 ISENSecil AstAVERage COUNAUTO RESoluton 265 ISENSecHl AstAVERage COUNGAUTO SLOT 266 ISENSecil AstAVERage COUNAUTONSRato 266 ISENSecHl AstAVERage COUNAUTOCTWEPE 266 ISENSecHlL AstAvERage HtEset 266 User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 261 SENSe Sensor Commands ISENSecHlL Ast AvERaget STATel 267 SENSe lt 1 4 gt AVERage TCONtrol ii aaa 267 ISENSecil AsTBANDwidtb Vifeo 267 SENSe lt 1 4 gt BWIDth VID O cecceccecceccescesceccecceceecsacsaceaesaesacacsccecceceeceaceasessreereareas 267 SENSe lt 1 4 gt BANDwidth VID O LIST c ceccecsecsecsesceccescercerceececseccarsacsaesaecaesaueareareareas 267 ISENSecil AstBWIDtb MlDeollgT 267 IGENZGe DlL ASlCObbechonOEtFGet 268 IGENZGe DlL ASlCObbeconOFtzerGTATe 268 ISENSecil AslCObRRechon DCeCIet INPuttMAGNtudel 268 SENSe
479. the status registers ESE and SRE are suitably configured 1 Resets the registers RCL lt value gt ReCaLl calls the device state which has been stored with the SAV command under the specified number The effect of RCL O to 19 is the same as if one of the setups O to 19 had been selected in manual control RCL O resets the device to the default state Parameters lt Value gt 1 to 19 Available recall numbers for device setups Usage Event RST ReSeT sets the instrument to a defined default status The command essentially corre sponds to command SYSTem PRESet and to pressing PRE SET The following table documents the difference SYSTem PRESet acts like the frontpanel key PRE SET Table 6 1 Difference between commands RST und SYSTem PRESet awrriate continuous SENSe AVERage TCONtrol The following table lists all preset values Table 6 2 Preset values Command Command Presetand RST value and Preset and RST value value CALC lt 8 gt FEED POW AVER The calculate block processes average power values Average CALC lt 8 gt LIM BEEP No audible signal in case of limit violations CALC lt 8 gt LIM CLE AUTO No automatic reset of the limit mon itoring function when a measure ment is started User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 198 R amp S NRP2 UPP DATA PUPP solar LOW DATA gt LIM LOW STAT Remote Control Commands Common Commands to IEEE 4
480. this limit see other CALCulate lt 1 8 gt LIMit commands Parameters lt lower_limit gt float_value The value range depends on the current output unit of the calcu late block s measured value see table below The parameter unit is determined according to table 6 11 Output unit of measured value of calculate block RST O DBM or 0 DB Default unit Default unit see table referred to above Table 6 10 Value ranges depending on the unit Unit of mea DBUV DPCT sured value Value range 9 99999E5 13 0103 1E20 9 99999E5 196 897 1E20 CALCulate lt 1 8 gt LIMit LOWer DATA POWer lt lower_limit gt Sets a lower limit for the measured power The R amp S NRP2 can respond when the values drop below this limit see other CALCulate lt 1 8 gt LIMit commands Parameters lt lower_limit gt float_value units W DBM DBUV Range 120 DBM to 90 DBM RST 0 DBM Default unit DBM CALCulate lt 1 8 gt LIMit LOWer DATA RATio lt ratio gt Sets a lower limit for the measured power ratios The R amp S NRP2 can respond when the ratios drop below this limit see other CALCulate lt 1 8 gt LIMit commands User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 228 R amp S NRP2 Remote Control Commands CALCulate Configuration of Calculate Blocks Parameters lt ratio gt float_value units DB DBCT O Range 200 DB to 200 DB RST 0 DB Default unit DB CALCulate lt 1 8 gt LIMit LOWer STATe lt state
481. ting a measurement function on page 98 The R amp S NRP Z8x wideband power sensors can additionally define an exclusion interval within the gate Fence A midamble of the signal can thus be excluded from the mea surement An external trigger signal or internal signal triggering is required for synchronization see also chapter 4 2 6 Trigger settings on page 85 gt Select T gate Av in the Mode dialog box opened via the Sensor menu Cont Trace T slot Burst Av Statistics Av Av 4 Gate Start of Gate Length of Gate 0 000 us 100 000 us Fence Config Fence Fig 4 9 Mode dialog box T gate Av Gate Sets the number of the gate to be configured Note In remote control the gate to be configured is determined by the TGATe suffix see commands for the following settings Start Length of Gate Start of the gate is referenced to the delayed trigger time see Trigger settings gt Delay on page 88 User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 71 R amp S NRP2 Instrument Functions 4 2 1 6 4 2 1 7 Data acquisition and parameters The end of the gate is determined by the start time and the length of the gate Remote command SENSe lt 1 4 gt POWer TGATe lt 1 4 gt 0FFSet TIME on page 275 SENSe lt 1 4 gt POWer TGATe lt 1 4 gt TIME on page 2 6 Fence Activates the Fence function In numeric T slotAv mode the Fence function is only available for the wideband power sensors of t
482. tion you can enter a name for each window to indicate the type of measurement result This is particularly recommended for settings to be stored in a setup memory The Window Name dialog box in the File menu is used to assign names to windows sor Windows Measurement File System Window Name Fig 4 71 Window Name dialog box Window 1 4 Assigns an individual name to each window Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt 1 4 gt NAME on page 245 4 7 System settings System settings are configured in the System menu The menu provides access to the following settings Remote e Configuring the remote control interfaces on page 144 vo e Setting analog outputs on page 150 Powerref Power Reference on page 157 Off On e System information on page 157 Sensor System Info Info e Miscellaneous on page 159 Misc Test gg Test measurement on page 160 4 7 1 Configuring the remote control interfaces The R amp S NRP2 provides different interfaces for remote control The settings are config ured in the Remote Interfaces dialog box In addition the R amp S NRP2 supports command sets of power meters from other manu facturers Thus it is possible for example to conveniently replace a power meter by the R amp S NRP2 User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 144 R amp S NRP2 Instrument Functions system settings Overview of the remote control interfaces The following table gives a deta
483. tion of power drops that are supposed to execute triggering In contrast to the Holdoff parameter which is referenced to the active slope trigger event the dropout time takes effect if the passive slope of the trigger signal crosses the trigger threshold Remote command TRIGger ALL DTIMe on page 330 Page lt Trigger dialog box 2 Switches to the next page of the dialog box Trigger dialog box 3 The third page of the trigger dialog box covers the hysteresis and holdoff parameters User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 88 R amp S NRP2 Instrument Functions Data acquisition and parameters Page 3 3 F Fig 4 22 Trigger dialog box page 3 A B C D Trigger dialog box 3 Tabs for selecting the sensor Note In remote control commands select the sensor with the suffix in command SENSe lt 1 4 gt le choose suffix 1 for channel A channel 2 for B and so on Hysteresis Trigger dialog box 3 Sets the trigger hysteresis The trigger hysteresis prevents the trigger system from being activated too early if the trigger threshold is slightly underranged or exceeded Before triggering can occur again the signal level must be lower higher than the trigger level minus plus hysteresis Modifications of the trigger hysteresis are effective immediately see chapter 3 5 Dialog boxes and their controls on page 53 Remote command TRIGger ALL HYSTeresis on page 331 Holdoff Trigger dialog box 3
484. tions EE ee Messages and alarms With multipath power sensors R amp S NRP Z11 R amp S NRP Z21 22 23 24 28 R amp S NRP Z31 and R amp S NRP Z91 92 98 the R amp S NRP2 displays the test result of each individual path separately Config Open the dialog box for entering tolerance limits Config Test Tal c D NRP Z81 SN 56789013 Test Limits 0 100 B Sensor 0 1008 Sensor Settings locked LI Set to defaults Fig 4 99 Config Test dialog box Exceeding the tolerance limits will result in a test failure The factory set default settings depend on the sensor and are in line with the data sheet values They are applicable in the entire ambient temperature range If the base unit and the sensors are not used at temperature extremes the tolerance limits can be restricted so that any damage to the sensor can be detected even more quickly Test Limits Config Defines the test limit range Sensor Tolerance limits for the sensor section only Sensor amp Pad Tolerance limits for the combination of the sensor section with attached attenuator Set to defaults Config Resets the factory set default settings Settings locked Config Protects the settings against being changed by mistake 4 8 Messages and alarms The R amp S NRP2 displays a variety of different messages such as status messages error messages warnings or information on the screen some in separate wind
485. tions provide an application programming interface API that offers all necessary functions Knowledge about VXI11 is helpful but not required The VISA resource identifier used to identify a VXI11 device has the following format TCPIP lt IP address gt INSTRThe IP address is specified using the familiar dot notation e g 89 10 65 59 TCPIP lt IP address gt INSTR The IP address is specified using the familiar dot notation e g 89 10 65 59 e Annex C of the TCP IP Instrument Protocol Specification VXI11 contains an RPCL description of the protocol The program rpcgen which is included in any ONC RPC distribution is used to generate stubs Stubs can be inserted into separate C pro grams where the functions from the table below can be called like ordinary library functions This procedure requires RPC programming skills User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 356 R amp S NRP2 Remote control interfaces Ethernet interface Table 1 5 VXI11 protocol functions create link core Opens a link to a network instrument device Socket connections are set up for the core and abort channels but no interrupt chan nel Destroys a link to a network instrument device device Write core Transmits an IEEE488 2 or SCPI command as a string to a net work instrument device Reads responses from the network instrument device Reads the status byte of the network instrument device device trigger core Initiates triggering in a network ins
486. tiple of it mainly determines the acquisition rate In ContAv mode the acquisition interval can arbitrarily be set by defining the aperture time In most cases the sensor specific default value is sufficient for optimum perform ance It is defined by the manufacturer as to effectively suppress 1 f noise This means that for a given integration time averaging number x 2 x aperture time the noise content of the measurement result is minimal with the default setting Depending on the sensor the default aperture time widely varies between 20 ms for R amp S NRP Z11 21 22 23 24 31 32 28 98 multipath power sensors and 10 us for R amp S NRP Z81 85 86 wideband power sensors Thermal power sensor normally use a 5 ms default aperture time 20 ms in the past Vastly differing averaging numbers when using different sensor types are thus quite normal There are two cases where the default aperture time may not be the best selection e if measuring signals with low frequency modulation e ifvery short measurement times are needed e g with remote controlled applications With low frequency modulation the aperture time should match the modulation period to optimally suppress modulation induced variations of the measurement result see chap ter 4 2 1 2 Continuous average power measurements on page 66 Since this may lead to acquisitions that vastly exceed the 10 us default aperture time of wideband power sensors a noticeable increase of fl
487. tivating the Expand function from the Windows menu In this state the full height windows can be displayed con secutively using the window 1 2 3 4 menu item The opened windows can be reduced to their previous sizes with the Arrange menu item Otherwise it is not possible to change the size of the windows the window size is determined by the number of win dows 3 6 2 Special symbols Table 3 1 Special symbols Auxiliary values Window number i 20 872 dB Auxiliary value here max min Window name Confirm with the MEN key Max Min Display values Max A 1 000GHz Frequency in the primary and Min BE 1 000GHz Secondary channel No of measurement values Measurement function Standard deviation AJB Measurement function ei Mean value A iB Rel Relative measurement active Timeslot or gate measurement Correction functions Trigger User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 58 R amp S NRP2 Filter 4 Auto 4 Man 0 9000 dB S N S N Duty cycle correction ON Offset correction ON Twoport correction ON S param eter Averaging filter Filter size with auto filter normal mode or for manual mode Noise component with auto filter in Fixed Noise mode Noise ratio exceeded Over limit Table 3 2 Symbols for pulse parameters Pulse Time Parameter CAE User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 Pulse Width Duty Cycle Rise Time Start Time Pulse Period Pulse Off Time Fall Time Stop Time
488. to configure these settings please ask your network administrator Parameters lt gwip1 4 gt int_value Range 0 255 RST This setting is not changed by RST Usage Event User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 319 R amp S NRP2 Remote Control Commands SYSTem SYSTem COMMunicate INET SELF SUBNetmask ADDRess lt sm1 gt lt sm2 gt lt sm3 gt lt sm4 gt Sets the subnet mask of your local subnet Note This command cannot be used while VX1I11 or Ethernet is in use Note Choosing an invalid subnet mask address may disturb the traffic on your LAN If you are not sure how to configure these settings please ask your network administrator Parameters lt sm1 4 gt int_value Range 0 255 RST This setting is not changed by RST Usage Event SYSTem DATE lt year gt lt month gt lt day gt Sets the date Since the R amp S NRP2 has no battery backed clock the date has to be reset if the clock was not set after the last power on of the R amp S NRP2 The date is set in the format yyyy m m d d This setting is not changed by RST Table 6 33 Parameter range lt year gt 2000 2100 lt month gt 1 January 12 December lt day gt ere SYSTem IDN lt string gt Determines the user defined return value for the IDN query The maximum string length is 128 characters SYSTem IDN AUTO lt state gt Activates deactivates return of the user defined string for the IDN query SYSTem INFO
489. tour The cursor key functions are context sensitive They are used to e selecta menu e select the active window e move the cursor in text boxes e change the value of an entry in a text box e select an element from a drop down list Except of moving the cursor the above mentioned functions can also be activated using softkeys On Standby key and standby LEDs The standby LEDS and the ON STANDBY key are located in the bottom right corner of the front panel The ON STANDBY key toggles the R amp S NRP2 between standby and ready state indicated by the standby LEDs The standby LEDs indicate the current instrument state e Yellow LED AC supply The yellow LED indicates that the R amp S NRP2 is power supplied and in standby mode e Green LED ON The green LED indicates when the meter is on i e ready for operation The possible operating states are The meter is off and disconnected from the AC supply The meter is on standby The AC supply is connected and the power supply is operating correctly The meter is on and is being powered from the AC supply Connectors To the left of the display the R amp S NRP2 provides a power reference signal connector and two sensor connectors If option R amp S NRP B5 is installed the R amp S NRP2 offers two sensor ports at the rear Thus you can perform measurements with a maximum of 4 connected sensors simul taneously POWER REF The POWER REF connector option NRP B1 sensor che
490. trar n en el cap tulo correspondiente de la documentaci n del producto y que tambi n son de obligado cumplimiento En las presentes informaciones de seguridad se recogen todos los objetos que distribuye el grupo de empresas Rohde amp Schwarz bajo la denominaci n de producto entre ellos tambi n aparatos instalaciones asi como toda clase de accesorios Los datos espec ficos del producto figuran en la hoja de datos y en la documentaci n del producto Se alizaci n de seguridad de los productos Las siguientes se ales de seguridad se utilizan en los productos para advertir sobre riesgos y peligros Significado Significado Aviso punto de peligro general Tensi n de alimentaci n de PUESTA EN 7 MARCHA PARADA Observar la documentacion del producto Atencion en el manejo de dispositivos de peso Indicaci n de estado de espera standby elevado Peligro de choque el ctrico Corriente continua DC A Advertencia superficie caliente Corriente alterna AC Conexi n a conductor de protecci n Corriente continua Corriente alterna DC AC Conexi n a tierra El aparato est protegido en su totalidad por un aislamiento doble reforzado Conexi n a masa o Distintivo de la UE para bater as y acumuladores M s informaci n en la secci n Eliminaci n protecci n del medio ambiente punto 1 1171 0000 42 07 Page 8 Instrucciones de seguridad elementales Significado S mbolo Significado Aviso Cuidado en el
491. trol sequences is necessary in order to make remote control operation via Ethernet conform to the functionality of the IEC IEEE 488 1 standard e amp GTM go to mixed This control character changes the remote local state to remote in the local state This enables the instrument to be operated simultaneously via the front panel and via RS 232 C and Ethernet The IEC IEEE 1174 draft does not provide this simulta neous operation because the remote control state is automatically assumed when data is received e amp GTR go to remote This control character changes the remote local state to remote The amp GTR com mand allows a change to the remote state even before data is received The com bination of the special control sequences amp GTM and GTR allows switching over between the remote and local states e amp DCL device clear The IEC IEEE 1174 draft defines that a measuring instrument must emulate the IEC IEEE 488 1 device clear function In the case of RS 232 C the device clear active state DCAS is achieved when a break signal is received In the case of RS 232 C a break is triggered by means of a hardware link When remote control is available by TCP IP via Ethernet there is no break signal To nevertheless permit the IEC IEEE 488 1 device clear function the two synonymous commands amp DCL and amp BRK are newly defined e amp ABO abort An abort corresponds to an asynchronous device clear This becomes necessary in ord
492. trument device equivalent to TRG Initiates a device clear DCL in network instrument device In the R amp S NRP2 DCL and abort cause the same actions Since device_abort unlike device_clear runs via the abort channel it is not serialized together with other commands but directly accesses the device and is therefore preferable Puts the network instrument device in the remote mode Puts the network instrument device in the local mode device lock core Local lockout LLO The keyboard of the network instrument device is locked device unlock Undoes the LLO status device docmd The network instrument device executes a command device abort abort The network instrument device aborts a running command see device_clear eredte intr chan core An interrupt channel to the network instrument device is set up destroy _intr_chan core An existing interrupt channel to the network instrument device is destroyed device enable srq core Activates deactivates the transmission of service requests from the network instrument device to the network instrument control device clear ler device intr srq interrupt This is the only function the network instrument device calls from the network instrument device This function signals a service request SRQ A 3 Ethernet interface The R amp S NRP2 has a 10 100BaseT Ethernet female connector for remote control via a LAN based on TCP IP The fe
493. ts of two paths within certain power ranges Transition regions can be offset from the default set tings to meet the demands of signals with high peak to average ratio User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 82 R amp S NRP2 Instrument Functions 4 2 4 1 Data acquisition and parameters Sensor range dialog box Automatic or manual path selection can be chosen in the Range dialog box accessed via the Sensor menu No function is available for power sensors that use only one measurement range The Auto range function always selects the most suitable paths With User def d tran sition deactivated the default overlap regions between adjacent paths are considered The offset value can be modified at any time during Auto range operation but it is only considered with an activated User def d transition checkbox Only offsets with a negative sign are allowed This means that transition regions can only be shifted to lower power levels Thus paths can be excluded from evaluation well before they exhibit noticeable linearity errors with critical signals Only the most insensitive path cannot be protected by this measure The performance of the sensors can effectively be improved by this measure with respect to linearity errors when applying signals with high peak to average ratios However there is a certain downside regarding speed and noise If an offset value of e g 10 dB is entered this means that paths can be underdriven by an
494. tudel 234 GREEN ECH HCH E WC EEN 234 CAL CulatecJl GRELL ativeMAcchNtudel 232 CAL CulatecJl GRELL ativeMAchNtudel AUTO 233 CALCulate lt 1 8 gt SDEViation DATAP oooooncccncoconococonccononocnonononononononnnnnnnnnnonnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnancnnnnons 234 CAL CulatecJl Gs RACeMAker DEL ta 236 CAL Culate lt 1 8 gt TRACe MARKer YDELta oonccccconcccccooccnocococcnocconononnonnnnnnnnannnonnnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannninnnos 236 CALCulate lt 1 8 gt TRACe MARKer lt 1 2 gt XPOSI ION ooccccoocccccoccccccoccnnccoconocononononcnononnnnnnnnnnonnncnnnoncnnnnnns 236 CALCulate lt 1 8 gt TRACe MARKer lt 1 2 gt YPOSItION ocoooncnccccnccccccccnccocnnocononononnnnnnncnnonnnnononnnnnnonenonono 237 Te RTE e GER TO D 237 CALIbraton ALLIZ ERO FAS TAUT cra tia eds 239 CALI FANON UE DA Fina dao aaa llei 237 CALibration lt 1 4 gt ECONtrol STAT ccccccccccceccecesececaeeeeeseeeeeceeeeeeaeeeeesaueeessaeeesseeeeeseeeeessaesessaueessaeeessness 238 CAL brapnon 1lL ARCA bratnonGiAale 238 GALIDration lt 1 4 gt ROFACIO E 238 CALibration 1 4 gt TEST DEV Aton cuna 238 CA brapnon 1l A TESiTREVerencei 238 CALIDrations 14 gt TEST tiren 238 CALibravion 1 4 gt Z ERO AUTO costs bleach beaauseaminossmmaesedoechssuseeninesie 237 ST Te KENE ZERO RA AT E 239 CONFPigure lt 5 9 XTIMe POWern NONE cuicos ii 218 CONPigure lt 1 3 gt ARRay POWenN CAVE Lic ti di 218 CONFigure lt 1 8 gt ARRay POWer A
495. tween 300 kHz and 30 MHz FULL Reducing the video bandwidth also increases the trigger sensitivity As a rule of thumb the trigger threshold Level can be reduced by 3 dB if the video bandwidth is reduced by a factor of 4 The video bandwidth must never be smaller than the RF bandwidth of the signal gt Select Filt in the trace control panel opened via the Window gt Graph gt Display dialog box Trace amp Statistics sensor mode User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 118 R amp S NRP2 4 5 3 4 Trace Func A7 B Hau Instrument Functions Displaying traces Gate Avg Ho Trace Avg No Fig 4 48 Filter dialog box in Trace display mode A B C D Tabs for selecting the sensor Note In remote control commands select the sensor with the suffix in command SENSe lt 1 4 gt Le choose suffix 1 for channel A channel 2 for B and so on Gate Avg No Selects the averaging number for averaging the gated measurement results Trace Avg No Selects the averaging number for averaging the traces Remote command SENSe lt 1 4 gt TRACe AVERage COUNt on page 284 Video BW Selects the video filter bandwidth This setting is available in the R amp S NRP Z8x wideband power sensors otherwise it is fixed Available values are Full 5 MHz 1 5 MHz and 300 kHz Remote command SENSe lt 1 4 gt BANDwidth VIDeo on page 267 Trace function settings The trace function settings are perfor
496. uctuations in the measurement result due to noise must be considered with these sensors Eventually the sensor specific lower measurement limit cannot be reached The same applies for T slot Av T gate Av and Burst Av power measurements when the acquisition rate drops down below 10 kHz for these sensors For details refer to the data sheet With R amp S NRP Z11 21 22 23 24 31 32 28 98 multipath power sensors a reduction of the default aperture time may be essential when fast measurements without averaging User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 73 R amp S NRP2 Instrument Functions EES Data acquisition and parameters are needed Taking a 100 us idle time of these sensors into consideration a reduction of the aperture time even below 500 us will merely soeed up measurements but significantly increase noise Smoothing modulated signals Continuous average power measurements on signals with low frequency modulation or on pulsed signals with low repetition rates may suffer from fluctuations in the measure ment result which are due to the acquisition time not being matched to the modulation pulse period Although it is possible with R amp S NRP Zxx Power Sensors to set the aper ture time identical to a multiple integer of the period of the power envelope of the signal this approach fails with a varying or unknown period In these cases it is recommended to activate smoothing Instead of simply summing up the samples within the acqui
497. ue el cable de conexi n a red no pueda ser da ado o de que nadie pueda ser da ado por l p ej al tropezar o por un choque el ctrico 1171 0000 42 07 Page 10 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 Instrucciones de seguridad elementales solamente esta permitido el funcionamiento en redes de alimentacion TN TT aseguradas con fusibles de 16 Acomo maximo utilizacion de fusibles de mayor amperaje solo previa consulta con el grupo de empresas Rohde amp Schwarz Nunca conecte el enchufe en tomas de corriente sucias o llenas de polvo Introduzca el enchufe por completo y fuertemente en la toma de corriente La no observaci n de estas medidas puede provocar chispas fuego y o lesiones No sobrecargue las tomas de corriente los cables alargadores o las regletas de enchufe ya que esto podr a causar fuego o choques el ctricos En las mediciones en circuitos de corriente con una tensi n U gt 30 V se deber n tomar las medidas apropiadas para impedir cualquier peligro p ej medios de medici n adecuados seguros limitaci n de tensi n corte protector aislamiento etc Para la conexi n con dispositivos inform ticos como un PC o un ordenador industrial debe comprobarse que stos cumplan los est ndares IEC60950 1 EN60950 1 o IEC61010 1 EN 61010 1 v lidos en cada caso A menos que est permitido expresamente no retire nunca la tapa ni componentes de la carcasa mientras el producto est en servicio
498. umerically set the marker positions see chapter 4 5 8 2 Statistics dia gram settings on page 136 Pos Scale Defines if the the cursor keys position or scale the displayed curve s Note There are restrictions on the use of these controls The vertical scale ranges from 0 to 100 maximum for all statistic functions except for PDF Similar restrictions apply to the horizontal axis depending on the power range of the sensors Pos The cursor keys shift the curve s in horizontal and vertical direction Scale The cursor keys expand and compress the curve s marker Y B Selects a marker for positioning by means of the cursor keys il the power x marker is positioned to a power value the associated value of the distribution distribution density function is measured a the result y marker is positioned to a measured value of the distribution distribution density function the associated power value is indicated If there are several power values that coincide with the set value of the distribution distribution density function the result marker can be posi tioned to the wanted value using the left right cursor keys Gate Cont Defines the acquisition interval Four gates and an unsynchronized time interval Cont can be selected The selected acquisition interval is highlighted in the softkey display Moreover if a gate is selected its number is enlarged 1 2 3 4 Select one of four provided g
499. us allow the user to make specific modifications between the individual steps Fig 6 4 Relationship between the commands CONFigure READ FETCh and MEASure User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 208 R amp S NRP2 Remote Control Commands High Level Measurement Commands CONFigure MEASure READ and FETCh Strictly speaking the CONFigure command is not a measurement command because it does not yield data and only configures a measurement It differs from the other three high level measurement commands as follows a question mark at the end of the com mand provides information on current settings With other commands the question mark is compulsory and shows that the measured data is queried In general the low level commands which are determining qualitative parameters such as measurement mode and calculation function are replaced by keywords in the com mand header Example Selection of measurement mode T slot is performed by low level command SENSe FUNCtion POWer TSLot AVG or by all high level commands which contain TSLot in the header e g MEASure TSLot With high level command in addition to selecting the measurement mode several presettings for this mode are performed Selection of the calculation function Sum is performed with low level command CALCulate MATH SENS1 SENS2 or by all high level commands which contain SUM in the header e g MEASure TSLot SUM Quantative parameters such as number of slots
500. ustancias y las normas regionales de eliminaci n de residuos Tenga en cuenta tambi n en caso necesario las indicaciones de seguridad especiales contenidas en la documentaci n del producto La eliminaci n incorrecta de sustancias peligrosas o combustibles puede causar da os a la salud o da os al medio ambiente Se puede encontrar m s informaci n sobre la protecci n del medio ambiente en la p gina web de Rohde amp Schwarz 1171 0000 42 07 Page 14 Quality management and environmental management Sehr geehrter Kunde Sie haben sich fur den Kauf eines Rohde amp Schwarz Produk tes entschieden Sie erhalten damit ein nach modernsten Fer tigungsmethoden hergestelltes Produkt Es wurde nach den Regeln unserer Qualitats und Umweltmanagementsysteme entwickelt gefertigt und gepruft Rohde Schwarz ist unter ande rem nach den Managementsys temen ISO 9001 und ISO 14001 zertifiziert Der Umwelt verpflichtet 1 Energie effiziente ROHS konforme Produkte Kontinuierliche Weiterentwicklung nachhaltiger Umweltkonzepte 1 150 14001 zertifiziertes Umweltmanagementsystem Dear customer You have decided to buy a Rohde Schwarz product This product has been manufactured using the most advanced meth ods It was developed manufac tured and tested in compliance with our quality management and environmental manage ment systems Rohde amp Schwarz has been certified for exam ple according to the ISO9001 and ISO
501. v mode Trace amp Statistics In this mode the peak power Pk or the Pk Av ratio can be measured within a user definable gate in addition to the average power Av However the time resolution is limited to the length of one point pixel of the display The measured values can either be output as additional numeric information in a graphic window or in a numeric window Dig D amp A To configure the measurement of Av Pk and Pk Av ratio 1 Select Trace amp Statistics in the Mode dialog box of the Sensor menu 2 Select Gate mode in the Display control panel of the Trace display 3 Set the timing parameters in the Config Gate control panel of the Trace display The gate is indicated graphically in the trace display The power values within the selected gate are indicated in the info panel 25 00 dEm 15 0 dEidiv E Config Gates PosSeale A 5 as E i ET EN D WI Wi d df i Fay 4 i A d H e he E d o l F i J pl I yl d bh T Ss i e di 1 A Gate 50 00 dEm 00 0 paidin heen Gate A Average 4 1 f Average 8 952 dBm 4 977 011 s Ieee Peak 15 992 dEm 1 973 ms Trace Peak Avg 7 040 dB ft 996 219 ps Aaw Fig 4 33 Measurement within a gate Trace amp Statistics mode Graph display mode To display the results numerically continue as follows 1 Select Dig or Ana amp Dig display in the Window dialog of of the Windows menu 2 Open the Function amp Unit dialog b
502. value gt Command CALC LIM LOW STAT ON configures the PTRansition and NTRansition registers so that the corresponding bit is set in the EVENt register when the displayed value drops below the limit The Operation Lower Limit Fail Status Register can be read by the following commands STAT us 0PERation LLIMIC 5UMMary CONDI tion STATus OPERation LLIMit SUMMary EVENt Table 6 27 Meaning of bits used in the Operation Lower Limit Fail Status Register Window 1 Lower Limit Fail The measured value returned by the first Calculate block drops below the lower limit value Window 2 Lower Limit Fail The measured value returned by the second Calculate block drops below the lower limit value Window 3 Lower Limit Fail The measured value returned by the third Calculate block drops below the lower limit value Window 4 Lower Limit Fail The measured value returned by the fourth Calculate block drops below the lower limit value Window 6 Lower Limit Fail The measured value returned by the sixth Calculate block drops below the lower limit value Window 7 Lower Limit Fail The measured value returned by the seventh Calculate block drops below the lower limit value Window 8 Lower Limit Fail The measured value returned by the eighth Calculate block drops below the lower limit value Bit 15 will never be used 6 13 16 Operation Upper Limit Fail Status Register Window 5 Lower Limit Fail The measured value returned by the f
503. ve measurement The calculation functions mentioned in connection with high level commands are inter nally implemented via commands CALC MATH and CALC REL STAT User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 396 R amp S NRP2 Programming Measurements Statistics measurements Keyword for selecting a calculation Corresponding low level commands n m 1 2 3 4 function with high level commands Difference CALC MATH SENSn SENSm REL STAT OFF DIFF REL Difference with refer CALC MATH SENSn SENSm REL STAT ON ence value Ratio CALC MATH SENSn SENSm REL STAT OFF i SENSn SENSm REL STAT ON RAT REL Ratio with reference CALC MATH value AT SWR Standing wave ratio CALC MATH SWR SENSn REL STAT OFF RLOS Return loss CALC MATH RLOS SENSn REL STAT OFF REPL Reflection coefficient CALC MATH REFL SENSn REL STAT OFF Example RSI CALC MATH SENS1 SENS2 processes sensors 1 and 2 CALC REL STAT ON relative measurement CALC REL 23 dB sets reference value INIT ALL starts measurements on all sensors FETCh C 5 Statistics measurements There are no high level commands available for statistics measurements The measure ments must therefore be performed with the aid of the low level commands Two basic types of measurements are conceivable e Measurement of a density distribution curve versus power An array of statistic values is returned e Measurement with the aid of marke
504. wer in the gate only in the Trace amp Statistics mode User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 103 R amp S NRP2 Instrument Functions 4 4 3 3 Configuring measurements Pk Avg Ratio of peak power to average power in the gate only in the Trace amp Statistics mode Remote command Selection of display DISPlay WINDow lt 1 4 gt AVALue on page 242 Reading out values CALCulate lt 1 8 gt DATA on page 225 Measuring power in timeslots As with time gated power measurements the R amp S NRP2 power meter also offers two measurement modes for measurements within timeslots e T Slot Av e Trace amp Statistics T Slot Av In this mode the average power Av within any timeslot of a user definable timeslot structure can be measured The time resolution is high and corresponds to the sampling rate of the sensor To configure the measurement 1 Select T Slot Av in the Mode dialog box of the Sensor menu 2 Set the timing parameter for the timeslots 3 Select the timeslot number for the measurement in the Function amp Unit dialog box of the Measurement menu The average power within the selected timeslot is indicated a A T slot 1 System ze ZA EE 128 Auto A 102 ki 1 000 GHz An A 8 9811 den Fig 4 36 Measurement within a timeslot T Slot Av mode Trace amp Statistics In this mode the peak power Pk or the Pk Av ratio can be measured within any timeslot of a user definable tim
505. ws See chapter 4 3 Displaying measurement results on page 91 for a detailed descrip tion of the Windows menu Measurement menu The details of postprocessing are summarized in the Measurement menu See chapter 4 4 Configuring measurements on page 97 for a detailed description of the Measurement menu File menu The File menu is used to handle the setup memories window names and display infor mation about errors See chapter 4 6 Management of settings on page 140 for a detailed description of the File menu System menu The System menu is used to handle general functions that are not specifically used to perform measurements i e to configure the remote interfaces and I O sockets to provide information about the meter and the connected sensors and to trigger test measure ments See chapter 4 7 System settings on page 144 for a detailed description User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 52 R amp S NRP2 3 4 3 5 Manual Operation Menu handling Menu handling The menus can contain up to eight menu items which are used to perform an action open a dialog box or set a parameter Perform an action Close If the menu contains only one or two descriptive terms an action is performed directly Use a hardkey to perform an action If the name of the action to be performed is shown in a wide orange field you can start the action by pressing the hardkey of the same name e g PRE SET in this
506. x of the of the Measurement menu 3 Select the timeslot the main value Eval and Aux Normal The main value together with the auxilliary values is indicated numerically SSS ae sss A Trace System E ZA gt 1 Man A 102 IU Ay 8 978 dBm Fig 4 38 Measurement within a timeslot Trace amp Statistics mode Dig display mode In Dig D amp A display modes the results can be correlated to any other measured value Function If you want to combine the measurement results of different channels by using functions not all combinations are supported The Ratio function calls for measurands of the same dimension e g two power levels or two Pk Av ratios The impedance measurement functions even require identical measurands e g two average power values but not one average power value and one peak power value If both channels are set to timeslot measurements only identical timeslot numbers are supported User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 105 R amp S NRP2 Instrument Functions Configuring measurements Function amp Unit Function Ratio A B 4 Prim Channel Sec Channel 4 Timesiot 4 4 Unit Aux Normal gt Fig 4 39 Function amp Unit dialog box sensors are operated in timeslot mode Timeslot Determines which timeslot is to be evaluated Only one value for both channels can be selected Eval This selection is only available in the Trace amp Statistics mode In the
507. y WINDow lt 1 4 gt METer UPPer RATio lt upper_limit gt DISPlay WINDow lt 1 4 gt ANALog UPPer RATio lt upper_limit gt Sets the upper limit value of the analog scale This value is used if the unit of the mea surement result is dB percent or the number 1 i e the measurement result is a power ratio Value range See table 6 10 Value ranges depending on the unit Unit DB DPCT O Parameters lt upper_limit gt float_value RST 60 DB Default unit DB DISPlay WINDow lt 1 4 gt NAME lt string gt Determines the string to be displayed in the titlebar of the respective window The reset values depend on the window lt n gt 1 2 3 or 4 Parameters lt string gt string RST o Example DISP1 NAME Power In DISP2 NAME Power Out The measured values in the display are now visually assigned to the different test points in the test setup Input power in wndow 1 output power in window 2 DISPlay WINDow lt 1 4 gt RESolution lt resolution gt Specifies the number of significant places of the mantissa when the measurement result is displayed on a linear scale The R amp S NRP2 tries to adjust the averaging filter range so that the display noise decreases with increasing resolution The values of the transfer parameter have the following meaning Parameter Linear scale of measurement result Logarithmic scale of measurement result 1 significant place No decimal place 0 2 significant plac
508. y has not yet been obtained Example Rol SENS AVER STAT ON activates filtering SENS AVER COUN AUTO ON switches on filter length automatic mode SENS AVER COUN AUTO TYPE RES sets automatic mode to RESolution SENS AVER COUN AUTO RES 3 maintains 3 places noise free in the result INIT FETCh Example RST SENS AVER STAT ON activates filtering SENS AVER COUN AUTO ON switches on filter length automatic mode User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 394 R amp S NRP2 Programming Measurements Measuring with low level commands SENS AVER COUN AUTO TYPE NSR sets automatic mode to NSRatio SENS AVER COUN AUTO NSR 0 01 DB maximum noise component in the result SENS AVER COUN AUTO MTIM 10 S but does not measure more than 10 s INIT FETCh All intermediate pushed values delivered by the first filter stage are stored in the filter The earliest measured value is ousted out of the filter since the filter has only a limited length SENS AVER TCON MOV REP is used to set when the filter algorithm is to be applied to the filter With the setting MOVing a new measure value is calculated for each new intermediate measured value This is the default setting in the LOCAL mode SENS AVER TCON REPeat is set in the REMOTE mode In this particular case new measured values are calculated when all intermediate measured values have been replaced by new ones Changing from SENS AVER TCON MOV to REP in the LOCAL REMOTE
509. you set a positive value the trigger event will become effective only after the selected period of time The displayed trace will be shifted to the left Inthe Trace Statistics display the physical and the delayed trigger time has been made visible in the form of small triangles thus allowing an interactive adaptation of the Delay parameter to the signal see chapter 3 6 2 Special symbols on page 59 Enter a Dropout value The dropout time prevents the trigger system from being activated by signal excur sions prior to the trigger event targeted Scroll to the third page of the Trigger dialog box Trigger 0 0 dB Holdoff 0 000 us Page 3 3 F Fig 2 37 Trigger dialog box page 3 10 Set a Hysteresis value Setting the trigger hysteresis to a value other than 0 dB will prevent triggering from occurring again until the measurement level has fallen below the trigger threshold by at least this value 11 Define a Holdoff time This parameter allows you to set the period of time during which further trigger events measured from the last successful triggering should be ignored User Manual 1173 9140 02 04 45 R amp S NRP2 Getting Started Measuring average burst power Burst Av mode For a detailed description of these parameters refer to chapter 4 2 6 Trigger settings on page 85 2 8 Measuring average burst power Burst Av mode An R amp S NRP Z1x R amp S NRP Z2x x

R&S NRP2 User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

R&amp;S NRP2 User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

R&S NRP2 User Manual